UM10114 LPC21xx And LPC22xx User Manual LPC 21xx
User Manual:
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 385
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
UM10114
LPC21xx and LPC22xx User manual
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
Document information
Info
Content
Keywords
LPC2109/00, LPC2109/01, LPC2119, LPC2119/01, LPC2129,
LPC2129/01, LPC2114, LPC2114/01, LPC2124, LPC2124/01, LPC2194,
LPC2194/01, LPC2210, LPC2220, LPC2210/01, LPC2212, LPC2212/01,
LPC2214, LPC2214/01, LPC2290, LPC2290/01, LPC2292, LPC2292/01,
LPC2294, LPC2294/01, ARM, ARM7, 32-bit, Microcontroller
Abstract
User manual for LPC2109/19/29/14/24/94 and
LPC2210/20/12/14/90/92/94 including /01 parts
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
LPC21xx and LPC22xx User manual
Revision history
Rev
Date
Description
4.0
20120502
Modifications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.0
2.0
UM10114
User manual
20080402
20080104
Device revision register added (see Section 21.9.11).
Max voltage on pin AINx limited to 3.3 V (see Table 292).
Lower limit for DLL = 3 (see Section 10.4.4 and Section 11.4.4).
Table 191 updated.
AFMR register description updated (see Table 278).
Full-CAN registers added for /01 parts (see Section 19.10).
VIC full-CAN interrupt added for /01 parts.
Length of write access updated in Section 4.5.
Bootloader version 1.7 added in Table 304.
Table 300 updated and reset memory map corrected for /01 devices (see
Section 21.5.1).
SPI interrupt register bit description corrected (Table 199).
Location of the PCSSP bit in the PCONP register corrected (Table 74).
Modifications:
•
•
Flash chapter updated with correct boot process flowchart.
•
Description of CRP levels has been corrected, and CRP description for different
bootloader code versions has been added.
•
Numbering of CAN controllers in the global CAN filter look-up table has been corrected
for /01 devices.
•
Part ID’s have been updated for LPC2210/20 parts.
The Reinvoke ISP command has been removed from the ISP command description
because it is not implemented in the LPC21xx/LPC22xx.
Integrated related parts into this manual and made numerous editorial and content updates
throughout the document:
•
The format of this data sheet has been redesigned to comply with the new identity
guidelines of NXP Semiconductors.
•
•
Legal texts have been adapted to the new company name where appropriate.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PWM mode description updated.
Parts LPC2109, LPC2119, LPC2129, LPC2114, LPC2124, LPC2194, LPC2212,
LPC2214, LPC2290, LPC2292, LPC2294 and /01 parts added.
Fractional baud rate generator updated.
CTCR register updated.
ADC pin description updated.
SPI clock conditions updated.
JTAG pin description updated.
Startup sequence diagram added.
SPI master mode: SPI SSEL line conditioning for LPC2210/20 added in SPI pin
description table.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
2 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
LPC21xx and LPC22xx User manual
Revision history …continued
Rev
Date
Description
1.0
20051012
Moved the UM document into the new structured FrameMaker template. Many changes
were made to the format throughout the document. Here are the most important:
•
UART0 and UART1 description updated (fractional baudrate generator and hardware
handshake features added - auto-CTS/RTS)
•
•
ADC chapter updated with the dedicated result registers
GPIO chapter updated with the description of the Fast IOs
Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
3 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
1.1 Introduction
The LPC21xx and LPC22xx are based on a 16/32 bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time
emulation and embedded trace support, together with 64/128/256 kilobytes (kB) of
embedded high speed flash memory. A 128-bit wide internal memory interface and a
unique accelerator architecture enable 32-bit code execution at maximum clock rate. For
critical code size applications, the alternative 16-bit Thumb Mode reduces code by more
than 30% with minimal performance penalty.
With their compact 64 and 144 pin packages, low power consumption, various 32-bit
timers, up to 12 external interrupt pins, and four channel 10-bit ADC and 46 GPIOs (64 pin
packages), or 8-channel 10-bit ADC and 112 GPIOs (144 pin package), these
microcontrollers are particularly targeted for industrial control, medical systems, access
control, and point-of-sale. With a wide range of serial communications interfaces, they are
also very well suited for communication gateways, protocol converters, and embedded soft
modems as well as many other general-purpose applications.
1.2 How to read this manual
The LPC21xx and LPC22xx user manual covers the following parts and versions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LPC2109, LPC2119, LPC2129, /00 and /01 versions
LPC2114, LPC2124, /00 and /01 versions
LPC2194 and LPC2194/01
LPC2210, LPC2210/01, and LPC2220
LPC2212, LPC2214, /00 and /01 versions
LPC2290 and LPC2290/01
LPC2292, LPC2294, /00 and /01 versions
All parts exist in legacy versions and enhanced versions. Enhanced parts are equipped
with enhanced GPIO, SSP, ADC, UART, and timer peripherals. They are also backward
compatible to the “legacy” parts containing legacy versions of the same peripherals.
Therefore, enhanced parts contain all features of legacy parts as well. See Table 16 for an
overview.
To denote different versions the following suffixes are used (see Section 1.4 “Ordering
options”); no suffix, /00, /01, and /G. All /01 versions and the LPC2220 (no suffix) contain
enhanced features.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
4 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Table 1.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx legacy/enhanced parts overview
Legacy parts
Enhanced parts
LPC2109/00
LPC2119, LPC2119/00
LPC2129, LPC2129/00
LPC2109/01
LPC2119/01
LPC2129/01
LPC2114, LPC2114/00
LPC2124, LPC2124/00
LPC2114/01
LPC2124/01
LPC2194, LPC2194/00
LPC2194/01
LPC2210
LPC2210/01
LPC2220, LPC2220/G
LPC2212, LPC2212/00
LPC2214, LPC2214/00
LPC2212/01
LPC2214/01
LPC2290
LPC2290/01
LPC2292, LPC2292/00
LPC2294, LPC2294/00
LPC2292/01
LPC2294/01
This user manual describes enhanced features together with legacy features for all
LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts. Part specific and legacy/enhanced specific pinning,
registers, and configurations are listed in a table at the beginning of each chapter (see for
example Table 52 “LPC21xx/22xx part-specific register bits” ). Use this table to determine
which parts of the user manual apply.
1.3 Features
1.3.1 Legacy features common to all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts
• 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S microcontroller in a 64 or 144 pin package.
• 8/16/64 kB of on-chip static RAM and 64/128/256 kB of on-chip flash program
memory (except for flashless LPC2210/20/90). 128-bit wide interface/accelerator
enables high-speed 60 MHz operation.
• In-System/In-Application Programming (ISP/IAP) via on-chip boot loader software.
Single flash sector or full chip erase in 100 ms and programming of 256 bytes in 1 ms.
• Diversified Code Read Protection (CRP) enables different security levels to be
implemented.
• External 8, 16, or 32-bit bus (144 pin package).
• EmbeddedICE RT and Embedded Trace offer real-time debugging with the on-chip
RealMonitor software and high speed tracing of instruction execution.
• Up to four interconnected CAN interfaces with advanced acceptance filters.
• 10-bit A/D converter providing four/eight analog inputs with conversion times as low
as 2.44 ms per channel and dedicated result registers to minimize interrupt overhead.
• Two 32-bit timers/external event counters with four capture and four compare
channels each, PWM unit (6 outputs), Real Time Clock (RTC), and watchdog.
• Multiple serial interfaces including two UARTs (16C550), a fast I2C-bus (400 kbit/s),
and two SPI interfaces.
• Vectored interrupt controller with configurable priorities and vector addresses.
• Up to forty-eight 5 V tolerant fast general purpose I/O pins.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
5 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
• Up to 12 edge or level sensitive external interrupt pins available.
• 60 MHz maximum CPU clock available from programmable on-chip PLL with a
possible input frequency of 10 MHz to 25 MHz and a settling time of 100 ms.
• For flashless LPC2210/20/90 only: 60 MHz (LPC2210/90), 72 MHz (LPC2290/01), or
75 MHz (LPC2210/01 and LPC2220) maximum CPU clock available from
programmable on-chip Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) with settling time of 100 s.
• On-chip integrated oscillator operates with an external crystal in the range from
1 MHz to 25 MHz.
• Two power saving modes, Idle mode and Power-down mode.
• Peripheral clock scaling and individual enable/disable of peripheral functions for
additional power optimization.
• Processor wake-up from Power-down mode via external interrupt or CAN controllers.
• Dual power supply:
– CPU operating voltage range of 1.65 V to 1.95 V (1.8 V ± 8.3 %).
– I/O power supply range of 3.0 V to 3.6 V (3.3 V ± 10 %) with 5 V tolerant I/O pads.
1.3.2 Enhanced features
• Fast GPIO ports enable port pin toggling up to 3.5 times faster than the original
device. They also allow for a port pin to be read at any time regardless of its function.
• Dedicated result registers for ADC reduce interrupt overhead. The ADC pads are 5 V
tolerant when configured for digital I/O functions.
• UART0/1 include fractional baud rate generator, auto-bauding capabilities, and
handshake flow-control fully implemented in hardware.
• Buffered SSP serial controller supporting SPI, 4-wire SSI, and Microwire formats.
• SPI programmable data length and master mode enhancement.
• General purpose timers can operate as external event counters.
1.4 Ordering options
1.4.1 LPC2109/2119/2129
Table 2.
LPC2109/2119/2129 Ordering information
Type number
UM10114
User manual
Package
Name
Description
Version
LPC2109FBD64/00
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2109FBD64/01
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2119FBD64
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2119FBD64/00
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2119FBD64/01
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
6 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Table 2.
LPC2109/2119/2129 Ordering information …continued
Type number
Package
Name
Description
Version
LPC2129FBD64
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2129FBD64/00
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2129FBD64/01
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
Table 3.
LPC2109/2119/2129 Ordering options
Type number
Flash
memory
RAM
CAN
Fast GPIO/ Temperature range
SSP/
Enhanced
UART, ADC,
Timer
LPC2109FBD64/00 64 kB
8 kB
1 channel
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2109FBD64/01 64 kB
8 kB
1 channel
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2119FBD64
128 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2119FBD64/00
128 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2119FBD64/01
128 kB
16 kB
2 channels
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2129FBD64
256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2129FBD64/00 256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2129FBD64/01 256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
yes
40 C to +85 C
1.4.2 LPC2114/2124
Table 4.
LPC 2114/2124 Ordering information
Type number
UM10114
User manual
Package
Name
Description
Version
LPC2114FBD64
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2114FBD64/00
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2114FBD64/01
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2124FBD64
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2124FBD64/00
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2124FBD64/01
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
7 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Table 5.
LPC2114/2124 Ordering options
Type number
Flash
memory
RAM
Fast GPIO/SSP/
Enhanced
UART, ADC,
Timer
Temperature range
LPC2114FBD64
128 kB
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2114FBD64/00
128 kB
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2114FBD64/01
128 kB
16 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2124FBD64
256 kB
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2124FBD64/00
256 kB
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2124FBD64/01
256 kB
16 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
1.4.3 LPC2194
Table 6.
LPC2194 Ordering information
Type number
Package
Name
Description
Version
LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2194HBD64/00 LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2194HBD64/01 LQFP64
plastic low profile quad flat package; 64 leads;
body 10 10 1.4 mm
SOT314-2
LPC2194HBD64
Table 7.
LPC2194 Ordering options
Type number
Flash
memory
RAM
CAN
Fast GPIO/
SSP/
Enhanced
UART, ADC,
Timer
Temperature range
LPC2194HBD64
256 kB
16 kB
4 channels
no
40 C to +125 C
LPC2194HBD64/00
256 kB
16 kB
4 channels
no
40 C to +125 C
LPC2194HBD64/01
256 kB
16 kB
4 channels
yes
40 C to +125 C
1.4.4 LPC2210/2220
Table 8.
LPC2210/2220 Ordering information
Type number
Package
Name
Description
Version
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144
leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2210FBD144/01 LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144
leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2210FBD144
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
8 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Table 8.
LPC2210/2220 Ordering information …continued
Type number
Package
Name
Description
Version
LPC2220FBD144
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144
leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2220FET144
TFBGA144
plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package;
144 balls; body 12 12 0.8 mm
SOT569-1
LPC2220FET144/G
TFBGA144
plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package;
144 balls; body 12 12 0.8 mm
SOT569-1
Table 9.
LPC2210/2220 Ordering options
Type number
RAM
Fast GPIO/ Temperature range
SSP/
Enhanced
UART, ADC,
Timer
LPC2210FBD144
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2210FBD144/01
16 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2220FBD144
64 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2220FET144
64 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2220FET144/G
64 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
1.4.5 LPC2212/2214
Table 10.
LPC2212/2214 Ordering information
Type number
UM10114
User manual
Package
Name
Description
LPC2212FBD144
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; SOT486-1
body 20 20 1.4 mm
LPC2212FBD144/00
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; SOT486-1
body 20 20 1.4 mm
LPC2212FBD144/01
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; SOT486-1
body 20 20 1.4 mm
LPC2214FBD144
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; SOT486-1
body 20 20 1.4 mm
LPC2214FBD144/00
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; SOT486-1
body 20 20 1.4 mm
LPC2214FBD144/01
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; SOT486-1
body 20 20 1.4 mm
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Version
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
9 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Table 11.
LPC2212/2214 Ordering options
Type number
Flash memory
LPC2212FBD144
128 kB
LPC2212FBD144/00
128 kB
LPC2212FBD144/01
128 kB
LPC2214FBD144
RAM
Fast GPIO/
SSP/
Enhanced
UART, ADC,
Timer
Temperature range
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
16 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
256 kB
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2214FBD144/00
256 kB
16 kB
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2214FBD144/01
256 kB
16 kB
yes
40 C to +85 C
1.4.6 LPC2290
Table 12.
LPC2290 Ordering information
Type number
Package
Name
Description
Version
LPC2290FBD144
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2290FBD144/01
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
Table 13.
LPC2290 Ordering options
Type number
RAM
CAN
LPC2290FBD144
16 kB
2 channels None
40 C to +85 C
2 channels Higher CPU clock, more
on-chip SRAM, Fast I/Os,
improved UARTs, added SSP,
upgraded ADC
40 C to +85 C
LPC2290FBD144/01 64 kB
Enhancements
Temperature range
1.4.7 LPC2292/2294
Table 14.
LPC2292/2294 Ordering information
Type number
UM10114
User manual
Package
Name
Description
Version
LPC2292FBD144
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2292FBD144/00
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2292FBD144/01
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2292FET144/00
TFBGA144
plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package;
144 balls; body 12 12 0.8 mm
SOT569-1
LPC2292FET144/01
TFBGA144
plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package;
144 balls; body 12 12 0.8 mm
SOT569-1
LPC2292FET144/G
TFBGA144
plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package;
144 balls; body 12 12 0.8 mm
SOT569-1
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
10 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Table 14.
LPC2292/2294 Ordering information …continued
Type number
Name
Description
Version
LPC2294HBD144
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2294HBD144/00
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
LPC2294HBD144/01
LQFP144
plastic low profile quad flat package;
144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm
SOT486-1
Table 15.
UM10114
User manual
Package
LPC2292/2294 Ordering options
Type number
Flash
memory
RAM
CAN
Fast GPIO/
SSP/
Enhanced
UART, ADC,
Timer
Temperature range
LPC2292FBD144
256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2292FBD144/00 256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2292FBD144/01 256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2292FET144/00
256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2292FET144/01
256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
yes
40 C to +85 C
LPC2292FET144/G
256 kB
16 kB
2 channels
no
40 C to +85 C
LPC2294HBD144
256 kB
16 kB
4 channels
no
40 C to +125 C
LPC2294HBD144/00 256 kB
16 kB
4 channels
no
40 C to +125 C
LPC2294HBD144/01 256 kB
16 kB
4 channels
yes
40 C to +125 C
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
11 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
1.5 Block diagram
TMS(1) TDI(1)
TRST(1) TCK(1) TDO(1)
TEST/DEBUG
INTERFACE
ARM7TDMI-S
P0, P1
HIGH-SPEED
GPI/O
AHB BRIDGE
4 × CAP0
4 × CAP1
4 × MAT0
4 × MAT1
INTERNAL
SRAM
CONTROLLER
INTERNAL
FLASH
CONTROLLER
8/16 kB
SRAM
64/128/256 kB
FLASH
EXTERNAL
INTERRUPTS
SYSTEM
FUNCTIONS
PLL
system
clock
VECTORED
INTERRUPT
CONTROLLER
AMBA AHB
(Advanced High-performance Bus)
ARM7 local bus
EINT3 to EINT0
EMULATION
TRACE MODULE
LPC21xx
LPC22xx
XTAL2
RST
XTAL1
AHB
DECODER
AHB TO APB
BRIDGE
APB
DIVIDER
CS3 to CS0
A23 to A0
BLS3 to BLS0
OE, WE
D31 to D0
EXTERNAL MEMORY
CONTROLLER
APB (advanced
peripheral bus)
SCL
I2C-BUS SERIAL
INTERFACE
SDA
CAPTURE/
COMPARE
TIMER 0/TIMER 1
SCK1
MOSI1
SPI1/SSP
SERIAL INTERFACE
MISO1
SSEL1
n × AIN
A/D CONVERTER
SCK0
P0[30:27], P[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
MISO0
SSEL0
GENERAL
PURPOSE I/O
TXD0, TXD1
P3[31:0]
PWM6 to PWM1
MOSI0
SPI0
SERIAL INTERFACE
UART0/UART1
RXD0, RXD1
DSR1, CTS1,
DCD1, RI1
PWM0
n × TD
n × RD
CAN
REAL-TIME CLOCK
WATCHDOG
TIMER
SYSTEM CONTROL
Grey-shaded blocks indicate configuration or pinout dependent on part and version number, see Table 16.
Fig 1.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
12 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Table 16.
LPC21xx/22xx part-specific configuration
Part
EMC
SRAM
Flash
Legacy
GPIO
Fast
GPIO
SSP
CAN
ADC
channels
channels/
enhanced
ADC
Enhanced Enhanced
UART
timers
No-suffix and /00 parts
LPC2109
-
8 kB
64 kB
P0/1
-
-
1
4/-
-
-
LPC2119
-
16 kB
128 kB
P0/1
-
-
2
4/-
-
-
LPC2129
-
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1
-
-
2
4/-
-
-
LPC2114
-
16 kB
128 kB
P0/1
-
-
-
4/-
-
-
LPC2124
-
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1
-
-
-
4/-
-
-
LPC2194
-
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1
-
-
4
4/-
-
-
LPC2210
yes
16 kB
-
P0/1/2/3
-
-
-
4/-
-
-
LPC2220
yes
64 kB
-
P0/1/2/3
P0/1
yes
-
8/yes
yes
yes
LPC2212
yes
16 kB
128 kB
P0/1/2/3
-
-
-
8/-
-
-
LPC2214
yes
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1/2/3
-
-
-
8/-
-
-
LPC2290
yes
16 kB
-
P0/1/2/3
-
-
2
8/-
-
-
LPC2292
yes
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1/2/3
-
-
2
8/-
-
-
LPC2294
yes
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1/2/3
-
-
4
8/-
-
-
LPC2109
-
8 kB
64 kB
P0/1
P0/1
yes
1
4/yes
yes
yes
LPC2119
-
16 kB
128 kB
P0/1
P0/1
yes
2
4/yes
yes
yes
LPC2129
-
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1
P0/1
yes
2
4/yes
yes
yes
LPC2114
-
16 kB
128 kB
P0/1
P0/1
yes
-
4/yes
yes
yes
LPC2124
-
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1
P0/1
yes
-
4/yes
yes
yes
LPC2194
-
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1
P0/1
yes
4
4/yes
yes
yes
LPC2210
yes
16 kB
-
P0/1/2/3
P0/1
yes
-
8/yes
yes
yes
LPC2212
yes
16 kB
128 kB
P0/1/2/3
P0/1
yes
-
8/yes
yes
yes
/01 parts
LPC2214
yes
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1/2/3
P0/1
yes
-
8/yes
yes
yes
LPC2290
yes
64 kB
-
P0/1/2/3
P0/1
yes
2
8/yes
yes
yes
LPC2292
yes
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1/2/3
P0/1
yes
2
8/yes
yes
yes
LPC2294
yes
16 kB
256 kB
P0/1/2/3
P0/1
yes
4
8/yes
yes
yes
1.6 Architectural overview
The LPC21xx/LPC22xx consist of an ARM7TDMI-S CPU with emulation support, the
ARM7 Local Bus for interface to on-chip memory controllers, the AMBA Advanced
High-performance Bus (AHB) for interface to the interrupt controller, and the ARM
Peripheral Bus (APB, a compatible superset of ARM’s AMBA Advanced Peripheral Bus)
for connection to on-chip peripheral functions. The LPC21xx/LPC22xx configures the
ARM7TDMI-S processor in little-endian byte order.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
13 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
AHB peripherals are allocated a 2 megabyte range of addresses at the very top of the
4 gigabyte ARM memory space. Each AHB peripheral is allocated a 16 kB address space
within the AHB address space. LPC21xx/LPC22xx peripheral functions (other than the
interrupt controller) are connected to the APB bus. The AHB to APB bridge interfaces the
APB bus to the AHB bus. APB peripherals are also allocated a 2 megabyte range of
addresses, beginning at the 3.5 gigabyte address point. Each APB peripheral is allocated
a 16 kB address space within the APB address space.
The connection of on-chip peripherals to device pins is controlled by a Pin Connect Block
(see Section 8.6). This must be configured by software to fit specific application
requirements for the use of peripheral functions and pins.
1.7 ARM7TDMI-S processor
The ARM7TDMI-S is a general purpose 32-bit microprocessor, which offers high
performance and very low power consumption. The ARM architecture is based on
Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) principles, and the instruction set and related
decode mechanism are much simpler than those of microprogrammed Complex
Instruction Set Computers. This simplicity results in a high instruction throughput and
impressive real-time interrupt response from a small and cost-effective processor core.
Pipeline techniques are employed so that all parts of the processing and memory systems
can operate continuously. Typically, while one instruction is being executed, its successor
is being decoded, and a third instruction is being fetched from memory.
The ARM7TDMI-S processor also employs a unique architectural strategy known as
THUMB, which makes it ideally suited to high-volume applications with memory
restrictions, or applications where code density is an issue.
The key idea behind THUMB is that of a super-reduced instruction set. Essentially, the
ARM7TDMI-S processor has two instruction sets:
• The standard 32-bit ARM instruction set.
• A 16-bit THUMB instruction set.
The THUMB set’s 16-bit instruction length allows it to approach twice the density of
standard ARM code while retaining most of the ARM’s performance advantage over a
traditional 16-bit processor using 16-bit registers. This is possible because THUMB code
operates on the same 32-bit register set as ARM code.
THUMB code is able to provide up to 65% of the code size of ARM, and 160% of the
performance of an equivalent ARM processor connected to a 16-bit memory system.
The ARM7TDMI-S processor is described in detail in the ARM7TDMI-S data sheet that
can be found on official ARM website.
1.8 On-chip flash memory system
The LPC21xx/LPC22xx incorporate a 64 kB to 256 kB flash memory. This memory may
be used for both code and data storage. Programming of the flash memory may be
accomplished in several ways:
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
14 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 1: Introductory information
• using the serial built-in JTAG interface
• using In System Programming (ISP) and UART
• using In Application Programming (IAP) capabilities
The application program, using the IAP functions, may also erase and/or program the
flash while the application is running, allowing a great degree of flexibility for data storage
field firmware upgrades, etc. The entire flash memory is available for user code because
the boot loader resides in a separate memory location.
The LPC21xx/LPC22xx flash memory provides minimum of 100,000 erase/write cycles
and 20 years of data-retention.
1.9 On-chip Static RAM (SRAM)
On-chip Static RAM (SRAM) may be used for code and/or data storage. The on-chip
SRAM may be accessed as 8-bits, 16-bits, and 32-bits.
The LPC21xx/LPC22xx SRAM is designed to be accessed as a byte-addressed memory.
Word and halfword accesses to the memory ignore the alignment of the address and
access the naturally-aligned value that is addressed (so a memory access ignores
address bits 0 and 1 for word accesses, and ignores bit 0 for halfword accesses).
Therefore valid reads and writes require data accessed as halfwords to originate from
addresses with address line 0 being 0 (addresses ending with 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C, and E in
hexadecimal notation) and data accessed as words to originate from addresses with
address lines 0 and 1 being 0 (addresses ending with 0, 4, 8, and C in hexadecimal
notation).
The SRAM controller incorporates a write-back buffer in order to prevent CPU stalls
during back-to-back writes. The write-back buffer always holds the last data sent by
software to the SRAM. This data is only written to the SRAM when another write is
requested by software (the data is only written to the SRAM when software does another
write). If a chip reset occurs, actual SRAM contents will not reflect the most recent write
request (i.e. after a "warm" chip reset, the SRAM does not reflect the last write operation).
Any software that checks SRAM contents after reset must take this into account. Two
identical writes to a location guarantee that the data will be present after a Reset.
Alternatively, a dummy write operation before entering idle or power-down mode will
similarly guarantee that the last data written will be present in SRAM after a subsequent
Reset.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
15 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
2.1 How to read this chapter
Remark: The LPC21xx and LPC22xx contain different memory configurations and
APB/AHB peripherals. See Table 17 for part-specific memory and peripherals.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
Table 17.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory and peripheral configuration
Part
EMC Figure 2
SRAM Figure 2 Flash Figure 2
Fast GPIO
Figure 2
SSP Table 18 CAN Table 18
addresses
size/ addresses size/
addresses
addresses
APB base addresses
No suffix and /01 parts
LPC2109
-
8 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 1FFF
64 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0000 FFFF
-
-
0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
LPC2119
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
128 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0001 FFFF
-
-
0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1:0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2129
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
-
-
0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2114
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
128 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0001 FFFF
-
-
-
LPC2124
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
-
-
-
LPC2194
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
-
-
0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
CAN3: 0xE004 C000
CAN4: 0xE005 0000
LPC2210
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
-
-
-
-
LPC2220
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
64 kB/
0x4001 0000 0x4000 FFFF
-
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 -
LPC2212
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
128 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0001 FFFF
-
-
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
-
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
16 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
Table 17.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory and peripheral configuration
Part
EMC Figure 2
SRAM Figure 2 Flash Figure 2
Fast GPIO
Figure 2
SSP Table 18 CAN Table 18
addresses
size/ addresses size/
addresses
addresses
APB base addresses
LPC2214
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
-
-
-
LPC2290
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
-
-
-
0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2292
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
-
-
0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2294
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
-
-
0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
CAN3: 0xE004 C000
CAN4: 0xE005 0000
LPC2109
-
8 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 1FFF
64 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0000 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
LPC2119
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
128 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0001 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2129
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x003 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2114
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
128 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0001 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 -
LPC2124
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x003 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 -
LPC2194
-
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
CAN3: 0xE004 C000
/01 parts
CAN4: 0xE005 0000
LPC2210
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
-
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 -
LPC2212
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
128 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0001 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 -
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
17 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
Table 17.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory and peripheral configuration
Part
EMC Figure 2
SRAM Figure 2 Flash Figure 2
Fast GPIO
Figure 2
SSP Table 18 CAN Table 18
addresses
size/ addresses size/
addresses
addresses
APB base addresses
LPC2214
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 -
LPC2290
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
64 kB/
0x4001 0000 0x4000 FFFF
-
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2292
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
LPC2294
0x8000 0000 0x83FF FFFF
16 kB/
0x4000 0000 0x4000 2FFF
256 kB/
0x0000 0000 0x0003 FFFF
0x3FFF C000 0x3FFF FFFF
0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE004 0000
CAN1: 0xE004 4000
CAN2: 0xE004 8000
CAN3: 0xE004 C000
CAN4: 0xE005 0000
2.2 Memory maps
The LPC21xx and LPC22xx incorporate several distinct memory regions, shown in the
following figures. Figure 2 shows the overall map of the entire address space from the
user program viewpoint following reset. The interrupt vector area supports address
remapping, which is described later in this section.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
18 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
4.0 GB
0xFFFF FFFF
AHB PERIPHERALS
3.75 GB
APB PERIPHERALS
0xF000 0000
0xEFFF FFFF
3.5 GB
0xE000 0000
0xDFFF FFFF
3.0 GB
0xC000 0000
RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
0x8400 0000
0x83FF FFFF
EXTERNAL MEMORY BANKS 0 TO 4
2.0 GB
BOOT BLOCK (RE-MAPPED FROM
ON-CHIP FLASH MEMORY)
0x8000 0000
0x7FFF FFFF
0x7FFF E000
0x7FFF DFFF
RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
0x4001 0000
0x4000 FFFF
UP TO 64 kB ON-CHIP STATIC RAM
1.0 GB
FAST GPIO REGISTERS
0x4000 0000
0x3FFF FFFF
0x3FFF C000
RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
0x0004 0000
0x0003 FFFF
UP TO 256 kB ON-CHIP FLASH MEMORY
0x0000 0000
0.0 GB
Fig 2.
UM10114
User manual
LPC21xx and LPC22xx system memory map
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
19 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
4.0 GB
0xFFFF FFFF
AHB PERIPHERALS
0xFFE0 0000
0xFFDF FFFF
4.0 GB - 2 MB
RESERVED
0xF000 0000
0xEFFF FFFF
3.75 GB
RESERVED
0xE020 0000
0xE01F FFFF
3.5 GB + 2 MB
APB PERIPHERALS
0xE000 0000
3.5 GB
AHB section is 128 x 16 kB blocks (totaling 2 MB).
APB section is 128 x 16 kB blocks (totaling 2MB).
Fig 3. Peripheral memory map
Figures 3 through 4 and Table 18 show different views of the peripheral address space.
Both the AHB and APB peripheral areas are 2 megabyte spaces which are divided up into
128 peripherals. Each peripheral space is 16 kilobytes in size. This allows simplifying the
address decoding for each peripheral. All peripheral register addresses are word aligned
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
20 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
(to 32-bit boundaries) regardless of their size. This eliminates the need for byte lane
mapping hardware that would be required to allow byte (8-bit) or half-word (16-bit)
accesses to occur at smaller boundaries. An implication of this is that word and half-word
registers must be accessed all at once. For example, it is not possible to read or write the
upper byte of a word register separately.
VECTORED INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
0xFFFF F000 (4G - 4K)
0xFFFF C000
NOT USED
(AHB PERIPHERAL #126)
0xFFFF 8000
NOT USED
(AHB PERIPHERAL #125)
0xFFFF 4000
(AHB PERIPHERAL #124)
0xFFFF 0000
0xFFE1 0000
NOT USED
(AHB PERIPHERAL #3)
0xFFE0 C000
NOT USED
(AHB PERIPHERAL #2)
0xFFE0 8000
NOT USED
(AHB PERIPHERAL #1)
0xFFE0 4000
EXTERNAL MEMORY CONTROLLER
(AHB PERIPHERAL #0)
0xFFE0 0000
Fig 4.
UM10114
User manual
AHB peripheral map
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
21 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
Table 18.
APB peripheries and base addresses
APB peripheral
Base address
Peripheral name
0
0xE000 0000
Watchdog timer
1
0xE000 4000
Timer 0
2
0xE000 8000
Timer 1
3
0xE000 C000
UART0
4
0xE001 0000
UART1
5
0xE001 4000
PWM
6
0xE001 8000
Not used
7
0xE001 C000
I2C
8
0xE002 0000
SPI0
9
0xE002 4000
RTC
10
0xE002 8000
GPIO
11
0xE002 C000
Pin connect block
12
0xE003 0000
SPI1
13
0xE003 4000
10 bit ADC
14
0xE003 8000
CAN Acceptance Filter RAM
15
0xE003 C000
CAN Acceptance Filter Registers
16
0xE004 0000
CAN Common Registers
17
0xE004 4000
CAN Controller 1
18
0xE004 8000
CAN Controller 2
19
0xE004 C000
CAN Controller 3
20
0xE005 0000
CAN Controller 4
21 - 22
0xE005 4000
0xE005 8000
Not used
23
0xE005 C000
SSP
24 - 126
0xE006 0000 0xE01F 8000
Not used
127
0xE01F C000
System Control Block
2.3 LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory re-mapping and boot block
2.3.1 Memory map concepts and operating modes
The basic concept on the LPC21xx and LPC22xx is that each memory area has a
"natural" location in the memory map. This is the address range for which code residing in
that area is written. The bulk of each memory space remains permanently fixed in the
same location, eliminating the need to have portions of the code designed to run in
different address ranges.
Because of the location of the interrupt vectors on the ARM7 processor (at addresses
0x0000 0000 through 0x0000 001C, as shown in Table 19 below), a small portion of the
Boot Block and SRAM spaces need to be re-mapped in order to allow alternative uses of
interrupts in the different operating modes described in Table 20. Re-mapping of the
interrupts is accomplished via the Memory Mapping Control features. To select a specific
memory mapping mode, see Table 62.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
22 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
Table 19.
ARM exception vector locations
Address
Exception
0x0000 0000
Reset
0x0000 0004
Undefined Instruction
0x0000 0008
Software Interrupt
0x0000 000C
Prefetch Abort (instruction fetch memory fault)
0x0000 0010
Data Abort (data access memory fault)
0x0000 0014
Reserved
Note: Identified as reserved in ARM documentation.
0x0000 0018
IRQ
0x0000 001C
FIQ
Table 20.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory mapping modes
Mode
Activation
Usage
Boot
Loader
mode
Hardware
activation by
any Reset
The boot loader always executes after any reset. The boot block
interrupt vectors are mapped to the bottom of memory to allow
handling exceptions and using interrupts during the boot loading
process.
User
Flash
mode
Software
activation by
Boot code
Activated by boot loader when a valid user program signature is
recognized in memory and boot loader operation is not forced.
Interrupt vectors are not re-mapped and are found in the bottom of the
flash memory.
Remark: This mode is not available on flashless parts (see Table 17).
User RAM Software
Activated by a user program as desired. Interrupt vectors are
mode
activation by re-mapped to the bottom of the Static RAM.
User program
User
External
mode
Activated by
BOOT1:0
pins
Activated by the boot loader when one or both BOOT pins are LOW at
the end of RESET LOW. Interrupt vectors are re-mapped from the
bottom of the external memory map (see Section 8.6.5).
Remark: This mode is available for parts with external memory
controller only (see Table 17).
2.3.2 Memory re-mapping
In order to allow for compatibility with future derivatives, the entire boot block is mapped to
the top of the on-chip memory space. Memory spaces other than the interrupt vectors
remain in fixed locations. Figure 5 shows the on-chip memory mapping in the modes
defined above.
The portion of memory that is re-mapped to allow interrupt processing in different modes
includes the interrupt vector area (32 bytes) and an additional 32 bytes, for a total of
64 bytes. The re-mapped code locations overlay addresses 0x0000 0000 through
0x0000 003F. The vector contained in the SRAM, external memory, and boot block must
contain branches to the actual interrupt handlers or to other instructions that accomplish
the branch to the interrupt handlers.
There are two reasons this configuration was chosen:
1. Minimize the need for the SRAM and Boot Block vectors to deal with arbitrary
boundaries in the middle of code space.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
23 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
2. To provide space to store constants for jumping beyond the range of single word
branch instructions.
Re-mapped memory areas, including the boot block and interrupt vectors, continue to
appear in their original location in addition to the re-mapped address.
Details on re-mapping and examples can be found in Section 6.8.1 “Memory Mapping
control register (MEMMAP - 0xE01F C040)” on page 69.
0x7FFF FFFF
2.0 GB
8 kB BOOT BLOCK
2.0 GB - 8 kB
(BOOT BLOCK INTERRUPT VECTORS)
0x7FFF E000
RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
ON-CHIP SRAM
1.0 GB
(SRAM INTERRUPT VECTORS)
0x4000 4000
0x4003 FFFF
0x4000 0000
RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
ON-CHIP FLASH MEMORY
0.0 GB
Fig 5.
ACTIVE INTERRUPT VECTORS
FROM BOOT BLOCK
0x0000 0000
Map of lower memory is showing re-mapped and re-mappable areas for a part
with on-chip flash memory
2.4 Prefetch Abort and Data Abort Exceptions
The LPC21xx and LPC22xx generate the appropriate bus cycle abort exception if an
access is attempted for an address that is in a reserved or unassigned address region.
The regions are:
• Areas of the memory map that are not implemented for a specific ARM derivative. For
the LPC21xx and LPC22xx, those areas are:
– Address space between the on-chip non-volatile memory and On-Chip SRAM,
labelled "Reserved Address Space" in Figure 2 , and Figure 5. This is an address
range from 0x0002 0000 to 0x3FFF FFFF for the 128 kB flash device and 0x0004
0000 to 0x3FFF FFFF for the 256 kB flash device.
– Address space between on-chip SRAM and the boot block. This is the address
range from 0x4000 4000 to 0x7FFF DFFF, labelled "Reserved Address Space" in
Figure 2, and Figure 5.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
24 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
– Address space between the top of the boot block and the APB peripheral space,
except space used for external memory (LPC2292/2294 only). This is the address
range from 0x8000 0000 to 0xDFFF FFFF, labelled "Reserved Address Space" in
Figure 2, and Figure 5.
– Reserved regions of the AHB and APB spaces. See Figure 3 and Table 18.
• Unassigned AHB peripheral spaces. See Figure 4.
• Unassigned APB peripheral spaces. See Table 18.
For these areas, both attempted data access and instruction fetch generate an exception.
In addition, a Prefetch Abort exception is generated for any instruction fetch that maps to
an AHB or APB peripheral address.
Within the address space of an existing APB peripheral, a data abort exception is not
generated in response to an access to an undefined address. Address decoding within
each peripheral is limited to that needed to distinguish defined registers within the
peripheral itself. For example, an access to address 0xE000 D000 (an undefined address
within the UART0 space) may result in an access to the register defined at address
0xE000 C000. Details of such address aliasing within a peripheral space are not defined
in the LPC21xx and LPC22xx documentation and are not a supported feature.
Note: The ARM core stores the Prefetch Abort flag along with the associated instruction
(which will be meaningless) in the pipeline and processes the abort only if an attempt is
made to execute the instruction fetched from the illegal address. This prevents accidental
aborts that could be caused by prefetches that occur when code is executed very near a
memory boundary.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
25 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 3: LPC21xx/22xx Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
3.1 How to read this chapter
The MAM is identical for all parts with flash memory. It is available in the following parts:
•
•
•
•
•
LPC2109, LPC2119, LPC2129, and /01 versions
LPC2114, LPC2124, and /01 versions
LPC2194 and LPC2194/01
LPC2212, LPC2214, and /01 versions
LPC2292, LPC2294, and /01 versions
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
3.2 Introduction
The MAM block in the LPC21xx and LPC22xx maximizes the performance of the ARM
processor when it is running code in flash memory using a dual flash bank.
3.3 Operation
Simply put, the Memory Accelerator Module (MAM) attempts to have the next ARM
instruction that will be needed in its latches in time to prevent CPU fetch stalls. The
method used is to split the flash memory into two banks, each capable of independent
accesses. Each of the two flash banks has its own prefetch buffer and branch trail buffer.
The branch trail buffers for the two banks capture two 128-bit lines of flash data when an
instruction fetch is not satisfied by either the prefetch buffer or branch trail buffer for its
bank, and for which a prefetch has not been initiated. Each prefetch buffer captures one
128-bit line of instructions from its flash bank at the conclusion of a prefetch cycle initiated
speculatively by the MAM.
Each 128 bit value includes four 32-bit ARM instructions or eight 16-bit Thumb
instructions. During sequential code execution, typically one flash bank contains or is
fetching the current instruction and the entire flash line that contains it. The other bank
contains or is prefetching the next sequential code line. After a code line delivers its last
instruction, the bank that contained it begins to fetch the next line in that bank.
Timing of flash read operations is programmable and is described in Section 3.9.
Branches and other program flow changes cause a break in the sequential flow of
instruction fetches described above. When a backward branch occurs, there is a distinct
possibility that a loop is being executed. In this case the branch trail buffers may already
contain the target instruction. If so, execution continues without the need for a flash read
cycle. For a forward branch, there is also a chance that the new address is already
contained in one of the prefetch buffers. If it is, the branch is again taken with no delay.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
26 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 3: LPC21xx/22xx Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
When a branch outside the contents of the branch trail and prefetch buffers is taken, one
flash access cycle is needed to load the branch trail buffers. Subsequently, there will
typically be no further fetch delays until another such “Instruction Miss” occurs.
The flash memory controller detects data accesses to the flash memory and uses a
separate buffer to store the results in a manner similar to that used during code fetches.
This allows faster access to data if it is accessed sequentially. A single line buffer is
provided for data accesses, as opposed to the two buffers per flash bank that are provided
for code accesses. There is no prefetch function for data accesses.
3.4 MAM blocks
The Memory Accelerator Module is divided into several functional blocks:
• A flash address latch for each bank: An incrementor function is associated with the
bank 0 flash address latch.
• Two flash memory banks
• Instruction latches, data latches, address comparison latches
• Control and wait logic
Figure 6 shows a simplified block diagram of the Memory Accelerator Module data paths.
In the following descriptions, the term “fetch” applies to an explicit flash read request from
the ARM. “Pre-fetch” is used to denote a flash read of instructions beyond the current
processor fetch address.
3.4.1 Flash memory bank
There are two banks of flash memory in order to allow parallel access and eliminate
delays for sequential access.
Flash programming operations are not controlled by the MAM but are handled as a
separate function. A “boot block” sector contains flash programming algorithms that may
be called as part of the application program and a loader that may be run to allow serial
programming of the flash memory.
The flash memories are wired so that each sector exists in both banks and that a sector
erase operation acts on part of both banks simultaneously. In effect, the existence of two
banks is transparent to the programming functions.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
27 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 3: LPC21xx/22xx Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
FLASH
MEMORY
BANK 0
ARM LOCAL BUS
FLASH
MEMORY
BANK 1
BUS
INTERFACE
BANK SELECTION
MEMORY DATA
Fig 6.
Simplified block diagram of the Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
3.4.2 Instruction latches and data latches
Code and data accesses are treated separately by the Memory Accelerator Module.There
are two sets of 128-bit instruction latches and 12-bit comparison address latches
associated with each flash bank. One of the two sets, called the branch trail buffer, holds
the data and comparison address for that bank from the last instruction miss. The other
set, called the prefetch buffer, holds the data and comparison address from prefetches
undertaken speculatively by the MAM. Each instruction latch holds 4 words of code (4
ARM instructions, or 8 Thumb instructions).
Similarly, there is a 128-bit data latch and 13-bit data address latch, that are used during
data cycles. This single set of latches is shared by both flash banks. Each data access
that is not in the data latch causes a flash fetch of 4 words of data, which are captured in
the data latch. This speeds up sequential data operations, but has little or no effect on
random accesses.
3.4.3 Flash programming Issues
Since the flash memory does not allow access during programming and erase operations,
it is necessary for the MAM to force the CPU to wait if a memory access to a flash address
is requested while the flash module is busy. Under some conditions, this delay could result
in a Watchdog time-out. The user will need to be aware of this possibility and take steps to
insure that an unwanted Watchdog reset does not cause a system failure while
programming or erasing the flash memory.
In order to preclude the possibility of stale data being read from the flash memory, the
LPC21xx and LPC22xx MAM holding latches are automatically invalidated at the
beginning of any flash programming or erase operation. Any subsequent read from a flash
address will cause a new fetch to be initiated after the flash operation has completed.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
28 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 3: LPC21xx/22xx Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
3.5 MAM operating modes
Three modes of operation are defined for the MAM, trading off performance for ease of
predictability:
Mode 0: MAM off. All memory requests result in a flash read operation (see Table
note 2). There are no instruction prefetches.
Mode 1: MAM partially enabled. Sequential instruction accesses are fulfilled from the
holding latches if the data is present. Instruction prefetch is enabled. Non-sequential
instruction accesses initiate flash read operations (see Table note 2). This means that
all branches cause memory fetches. All data operations cause a flash read because
buffered data access timing is hard to predict and is very situation dependent.
Mode 2: MAM fully enabled. Any memory request (code or data) for a value that is
contained in one of the corresponding holding latches is fulfilled from the latch.
Instruction prefetch is enabled. Flash read operations are initiated for instruction
prefetch and code or data values not available in the corresponding holding latches.
Table 21.
MAM responses to program accesses of various types
Program Memory Request Type
MAM Mode
0
1
2
Sequential access, data in latches
Initiate Fetch[2]
Use Latched
Data[1]
Use Latched
Data[1]
Sequential access, data not in latches
Initiate Fetch
Initiate Fetch[1]
Initiate Fetch[1]
Non-sequential access, data in latches
Initiate Fetch[2]
Initiate Fetch[1][2] Use Latched
Data[1]
Non-sequential access, data not in latches Initiate Fetch
Instruction prefetch is enabled in modes 1 and 2.
[2]
The MAM actually uses latched data if it is available, but mimics the timing of a flash read operation. This
saves power while resulting in the same execution timing. The MAM can truly be turned off by setting the
fetch timing value in MAMTIM to one clock.
MAM responses to data accesses of various types
Data Memory Request Type
MAM Mode
0
1
Fetch[1]
Sequential access, data in latches
Initiate
Sequential access, data not in latches
Initiate Fetch
Non-sequential access, data in latches
Initiate
Fetch[1]
Non-sequential access, data not in latches Initiate Fetch
[1]
User manual
Initiate Fetch[1]
[1]
Table 22.
UM10114
Initiate Fetch[1]
Initiate
2
Fetch[1]
Initiate Fetch
Initiate
Fetch[1]
Initiate Fetch
Use Latched
Data
Initiate Fetch
Use Latched
Data
Initiate Fetch
The MAM actually uses latched data if it is available, but mimics the timing of a flash read operation. This
saves power while resulting in the same execution timing. The MAM can truly be turned off by setting the
fetch timing value in MAMTIM to one clock.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
29 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 3: LPC21xx/22xx Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
3.6 MAM configuration
After reset the MAM defaults to the disabled state. Software can turn memory access
acceleration on or off at any time. This allows most of an application to be run at the
highest possible performance, while certain functions can be run at a somewhat slower
but more predictable rate if more precise timing is required.
3.7 Register description
All registers, regardless of size, are on word address boundaries. Details of the registers
appear in the description of each function.
Table 23.
Name
Summary of MAM registers
Description
Access Reset
Address
value[1]
MAMCR Memory Accelerator Module Control Register.
Determines the MAM functional mode, that is, to
what extent the MAM performance enhancements
are enabled. See Table 24.
R/W
0x0
0xE01F C000
MAMTIM Memory Accelerator Module Timing control.
Determines the number of clocks used for flash
memory fetches (1 to 7 processor clocks).
R/W
0x07
0xE01F C004
[1]
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
3.8 MAM Control Register (MAMCR - 0xE01F C000)
Two configuration bits select the three MAM operating modes, as shown in Table 24.
Following Reset, MAM functions are disabled. Changing the MAM operating mode causes
the MAM to invalidate all of the holding latches, resulting in new reads of flash information
as required.
Table 24.
MAM Control Register (MAMCR - address 0xE01F C000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
1:0
MAM_mode 00
_control
01
7:2
-
Value
Description
Reset
value
MAM functions disabled
0
MAM functions partially enabled
10
MAM functions fully enabled
11
Reserved. Not to be used in the application.
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved NA
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
3.9 MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - 0xE01F C004)
The MAM Timing register determines how many CCLK cycles are used to access the
flash memory. This allows tuning MAM timing to match the processor operating frequency.
flash access times from 1 clock to 7 clocks are possible. Single clock flash accesses
would essentially remove the MAM from timing calculations. In this case the MAM mode
may be selected to optimize power usage.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
30 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 3: LPC21xx/22xx Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
Table 25.
MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - address 0xE01F C004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Description
Reset
value
2:0
MAM_fetch_
cycle_timing
000
0 - Reserved.
07
001
1 - MAM fetch cycles are 1 processor clock (CCLK) in
duration
010
2 - MAM fetch cycles are 2 CCLKs in duration
011
3 - MAM fetch cycles are 3 CCLKs in duration
100
4 - MAM fetch cycles are 4 CCLKs in duration
101
5 - MAM fetch cycles are 5 CCLKs in duration
110
6 - MAM fetch cycles are 6 CCLKs in duration
111
7 - MAM fetch cycles are 7 CCLKs in duration
Warning: These bits set the duration of MAM flash fetch operations
as listed here. Improper setting of this value may result in incorrect
operation of the device.
7:3
-
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
3.10 MAM usage notes
When changing MAM timing, the MAM must first be turned off by writing a zero to
MAMCR. A new value may then be written to MAMTIM. Finally, the MAM may be turned
on again by writing a value (1 or 2) corresponding to the desired operating mode to
MAMCR.
For system clock slower than 20 MHz, MAMTIM can be 001. For system clock between
20 MHz and 40 MHz, flash access time is suggested to be 2 CCLKs, while in systems with
system clock faster than 40 MHz, 3 CCLKs are proposed. For system clocks of 60 MHz
and above, 4CCLK’s are needed.
Table 26.
UM10114
User manual
Suggestions for MAM timing selection
system clock
Number of MAM fetch cycles in MAMTIM
< 20 MHz
1 CCLK
20 MHz to 40 MHz
2 CCLK
40 MHz to 60 MHz
3 CCLK
> 60 MHz
4 CCLK
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
31 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
4.1 How to read this chapter
This chapter applies to all parts with external memory controller. The EMC is identical for
all these parts. It is available in the following parts (in all 144 pin packages):
•
•
•
•
LPC2210, LPC2210/01, and LPC2220
LPC2212, LPC2214, and /01 versions
LPC2290 and LPC2290/01
LPC2292, LPC2294, and /01 versions
The LPC21xx parts do not have an EMC controller.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
4.2 Features
• Support for various static memory-mapped devices including RAM, ROM, flash, burst
ROM, and some external I/O devices
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Asynchronous page mode read operation in non-clocked memory subsystems
Asynchronous burst mode read access to burst mode ROM devices
Independent configuration for up to four banks, each up to 16 MB
Programmable bus turnaround (idle) cycles (1 to 16)
Programmable read and write WAIT states (up to 32) for static RAM devices
Programmable initial and subsequent burst read WAIT state, for burst ROM devices
Programmable write protection
Programmable burst mode operation
Programmable read byte lane enable control
4.3 Description
The external Static Memory Controller is an AMBA AHB slave module which provides an
interface between an AMBA AHB system bus and external (off-chip) memory devices. It
provides support for up to four independently configurable memory banks simultaneously.
Each memory bank is capable of supporting SRAM, ROM, Flash EPROM, Burst ROM
memory, or some external I/O devices.
Each memory bank may be 8, 16, or 32 bits wide.
Since the LPC22xx 144 pin packages pin out address lines A[23:0] only, the decoding
among the four banks uses address bits A[25:24]. The native location of the four banks is
at the start of the External Memory area identified in Figure 2, but Bank 0 can be used for
initial booting under control of the state of the BOOT[1:0] pins.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
32 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
Table 27.
Address ranges of the external memory banks
Bank
Address range
Configuration register
0
0x8000 0000 - 0x80FF FFFF
BCFG0
1
0x8100 0000 - 0x81FF FFFF
BCFG1
2
0x8200 0000 - 0x82FF FFFF
BCFG2
3
0x8300 0000 - 0x83FF FFFF
BCFG3
4.4 Pin description
Table 28.
External Memory Controller pin description
Pin name
Type
Pin description
D[31:0]
Input/Output
External memory Data lines
A[23:0]
Output
External memory Address lines
OE
Output
Low-active Output Enable signal
BLS[3:0]
Output
Low-active Byte Lane Select signals
WE
Output
Low-active Write Enable signal
CS[3:0]
Output
Low-active Chip-Select signals
4.5 Register description
The external memory controller contains 4 registers as shown in Table 29.
Table 29.
Name
External Memory Controller register map
Description
Access Reset value,
see Table 30
Address
BCFG0 Configuration register for memory bank 0
R/W
0x0000 FBEF
0xFFE0 0000
BCFG1 Configuration register for memory bank 1
R/W
0x2000 FBEF
0xFFE0 0004
BCFG2 Configuration register for memory bank 2
R/W
0x1000 FBEF
0xFFE0 0008
BCFG3 Configuration register for memory bank 3
R/W
0x0000 FBEF
0xFFE0 000C
Each register selects the following options for its memory bank:
• The number of idle clock cycles inserted between read and write accesses in this
bank, and between an access in another bank and an access in this bank, to avoid
bus contention between devices (1 to 17 clocks)
• The length of read accesses, except for subsequent reads from a burst ROM (3 to 35
clocks)
• The length of write accesses (3 to 34 clocks)
• Whether the bank is write-protected or not
• Whether the bank is 8, 16, or 32 bits wide
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
33 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
4.5.1 Bank Configuration Registers 0-3 (BCFG0-3 - 0xFFE0 0000 to
0xFFE0 000C)
Table 30.
Bank Configuration Registers 0-3 (BCFG0-3 - 0xFFE0 0000 to 0xFFE0 000C)
address description
BCFG0-3 Name
Function
Reset
value
3:0
IDCY
This field controls the minimum number of “idle” CCLK cycles
1111
that the EMC maintains between read and write accesses in this
bank, and between an access in another bank and an access in
this bank, to avoid bus contention between devices. The number
of idle CCLK cycles between such accesses is the value in this
field plus 1.
4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
9:5
WST1
This field controls the length of read accesses (except for
subsequent reads from a burst ROM). The length of read
accesses, in CCLK cycles, is this field value plus 3.
11111
10
RBLE
This bit should be 0 for banks composed of byte-wide or
0
non-byte-partitioned devices, so that the EMC drives the BLS3:0
lines High during read accesses. This bit should be 1 for banks
composed of 16-bit and 32-bit wide devices that include byte
select inputs, so that the EMC drives the BLS3:0 lines Low
during read accesses.
15:11
WST2
For SRAM banks, this field controls the length of write accesses, 11111
which consist of:
One CCLK cycle of address setup with CS, BLS, and WE high
This value plus 1, CCLK cycles with address valid and CS, BLS,
and WE low
AND
One CCLK cycle with address valid, CS low, BLS and WE high.
For burst ROM banks, this field controls the length of subsequent
accesses, which are (this value plus 1) CCLK cycles long.
23:16
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
24
BUSERR The only known case in which this bit is set is if the EMC detects 0
an AMBA request for more than 32 bits of data. The
ARM7TDMI-S will not make such a request.
25
WPERR
This bit is set if software attempts to write to a bank that has the
WP bit 1. Write a 1 to this bit to clear it.
0
26
WP
A 1 in this bit write-protects the bank.
0
27
BM
A 1 in this bit identifies a burst-ROM bank.
0
29:28
MW
This field controls the width of the data bus for this bank:
00=8 bit, 01=16 bit, 10=32 bit, 11=reserved
See
Table 31
31:30
AT
Always write 00 to this field.
00
The table below shows the state of BCFG0[29:28] after the Boot Loader has run. The
hardware reset state of these bits is 10.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
34 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
Table 31.
Default memory widths at reset
Bank
BOOT[1:0] during Reset
BCFG[29:28] Reset value
Memory width
0
LL
00
8 bits
0
LH
01
16 bits
0
HL
10
32 bits
0
HH
01
16 bits
1
XX
10
32 bits
2
XX
01
16 bits
3
XX
00
8 bits
4.5.2 Read Byte Lane Control (RBLE)
The External Memory Controller (EMC) generates byte lane control signals BLS[3:0]
according to:
• External memory bank data bus width, defined within each configuration register (see
MW field in BCFG register)
• External memory bank type, being either byte (8 bits), halfword (16 bits) or word (32
bits) (see RBLE field in BCFG register)
Each memory bank can either be 8, 16 or 32 bits wide. The type of memory used to
configure a particular memory bank determines how the WE and BLS signals are
connected to provide byte, halfword and word access. For read accesses, it is necessary
to control the BLS signals by driving them either all HIGH, or all LOW.
This control is achieved by programming the Read Byte Lane Enable (RBLE) bit within
each configuration register. The following two sections explain why different connections
in respect of WE and BLS[3:0] are needed for different memory configurations.
4.5.3 Accesses to memory banks constructed from 8-bit or non
byte-partitioned memory devices
For memory banks constructed from 8-bit or non byte-partitioned memory devices, it is
important that the RBLE bit is cleared to zero within the respective memory bank
configuration register. This forces all BLS[3:0] lines HIGH during a read access to that
particular bank.
Figure 7 (a), Figure 8 (a) and Figure 9 show 8-bit memory being used to configure
memory banks that are 8, 16 and 32 bits wide. In each of these configurations, the
BLS[3:0] signals are connected to write enable (WE) inputs of each 8-bit memory.
Note: The WE signal from the EMC is not used. For write transfers, the relevant BLS[3:0]
byte lane signals are asserted LOW and steer the data to the addressed bytes.
For read transfers, all of the BLS[3:0] lines are deasserted HIGH, which allows the
external bus to be defined for at least the width of the accessed memory.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
35 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
4.5.4 Accesses to memory banks constructed from 16 or 32 bit memory
devices
For memory banks constructed from 16 bit or 32-bit memory devices, it is important that
the RBLE bit is set to one within the respective memory bank configuration register. This
asserts all BLS[3:0] lines LOW during a read access to that particular bank. For 16 and
32-bit wide memory devices, byte select signals exist and must be appropriately
controlled as shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8.
4.6 External memory interface
External memory interfacing depends on the bank width (32, 16 or 8 bit selected via MW
bits in corresponding BCFG register). Furthermore, the memory chips require an
adequate setup of RBLE bit in BCFG register. Memory accessed with an 8-bit wide data
bus require RBLE = 0, while memory banks capable of accepting 16 or 32 bit wide data
require RBLE = 1.
If a memory bank is configured to be 32 bits wide, address lines A0 and A1 can be used
as non-address lines. If a memory bank is configured to 16 bits wide, A0 is not required.
However, 8 bit wide memory banks do require all address lines down to A0. Configuring
A1 and/or A0 lines to provide address or non-address function is accomplished using bits
23 and 24 in Pin Function Select Register 2 (PINSEL2 register, see Table 88).
Symbol "a_b" in the following figures refers to the highest order address line in the data
bus. Symbol "a_m" refers to the highest order address line of the memory chip used in the
external memory interface.
See Section 8.6.5 “Boot control for LPC22xx parts” for how to boot from external memory.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
36 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
CS
OE
BLS[3]
D[31:24]
CE
OE
WE
BLS[2]
IO[7:0]
A[a_m:0]
D[23:16]
CE
OE
WE
BLS[1]
IO[7:0]
A[a_m:0]
D[15:8]
CE
OE
WE
IO[7:0]
A[a_m:0]
BLS[0]
D[7:0]
CE
OE
WE
IO[7:0]
A[a_m:0]
A[a_b:2]
a. 32 bit wide memory bank interfaced to 8 bit memory chips (RBLE = 0)
CS
OE
WE
BLS[3]
BLS[2]
D[31:16]
CE
OE
WE
UB
LB
BLS[1]
BLS[0]
IO[15:0]
A[a_m:0]
D[15:0]
CE
OE
WE
UB
LB
IO[15:0]
A[a_m:0]
A[a_b:2]
b. 32 bit wide memory bank interfaced to 16 bit memory chips (RBLE = 1)
CS
OE
WE
BLS[3]
BLS[2]
BLS[1]
BLS[0]
D[31:0]
CE
OE
WE
B3
B2
B1
B0
IO[31:0]
A[a_m:0]
A[a_b:2]
c. 32 bit wide memory bank interfaced to 32 bit memory chips (RBLE = 1)
Fig 7.
32 bit bank external memory interfaces (BGFGx Bits MW = 10)
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
37 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
CS
OE
BLS[1]
D[15:8]
CE
OE
WE
BLS[0]
IO[7:0]
A[a_m:0]
D[7:0]
CE
OE
WE
IO[7:0]
A[a_m:0]
A[a_b:1]
a. 16 bit wide memory bank interfaced to 8 bit memory chips (RBLE = 0)
CS
OE
WE
BLS[1]
BLS[0]
D[15:0]
CE
OE
WE
UB
LB
IO[15:0]
A[a_m:0]
A[a_b:1]
b. 16 bit wide memory bank interfaced to 16 bit memory chips (RBLE = 1)
Fig 8.
16 bit bank external memory interfaces (BCFGx bits MW = 01)
CS
OE
BLS[0]
D[7:0]
CE
OE
WE
IO[7:0]
A[a_m:0]
A[a_b:0]
Fig 9.
8 bit bank external memory interface (BCFGx bits MW = 00 and RBLE = 0)
4.7 Typical bus sequences
The following figures show typical external read and write access cycles. XCLK is the
clock signal available on P3.23. While not necessarily used by external memory, in these
examples it is used to provide time reference (XCLK and CCLK are set to have the same
frequency).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
38 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
1 wait state
(WST1=0)
XCLK
CS
OE
WE/BLS
addr
data
change
valid data
valid address
2 wait states
(WST1=1)
XCLK
CS
OE
WE/BLS
addr
data
change
valid data
valid address
Fig 10. External memory read access (WST1 = 0 and WST1 = 1 examples)
WST2 = 0
XCLK
CS
OE
WE/BLS
addr
data
valid data
valid address
WST2 = 1
XCLK
CS
OE
WE/BLS
addr
data
valid data
valid address
Fig 11. External memory write access (WST2 = 0 and WST2 = 1 examples)
Figure 10 and Figure 11 show typical read and write accesses to external memory.
Dashed lines on Figure 10 correspond to memory banks using 16/32 bit memory chips
having BLS lines connected to UB/LB or B[3:0] (see Section 4.5.4 and Figure 7 ,
Figure 8).
It is important to notice that some variations from Figure 10 and Figure 11 do exist in some
particular cases.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
39 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
For example, when the first read access to the memory bank that has just been selected
is performed, CS and OE lines may become low one XCLK cycle earlier than it is shown in
Figure 11.
Likewise, in a sequence of several consecutive write accesses to SRAM, the last write
access will look like those shown in Figure 11. On the other hand, leading write cycles in
that case will have data valid one cycle longer. Also, isolated write access will be identical
to the one in Figure 11.
The EMC supports sequential access burst reads of up to four consecutive locations in 8,
16 or 32-bit memories. This feature supports burst mode ROM devices and increases the
bandwidth by using reduced (configurable) access time for three sequential reads
following a quad-location boundary read. Figure 12 shows an external memory burst read
transfer. The first burst read access has two wait states and subsequent accesses have
zero wait states.
2 wait states
0 wait states
XCLK
CS
OE
Address A
addr
Ad.A+1
D(A)
data
D(A+1)
Ad.A+2
D(A+2)
Address A+3
Data(A+3)
Fig 12. External burst memory read access (WST1 = 0 and WST1 = 1 examples)
4.8 External memory selection
Based on the description of the EMC operation and external memory in general
(appropriate read and write access times tAA and tWRITE respectively), the following
table can be constructed and used for external memory selection. tCYC is the period of a
single CCLK cycle (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 where one XCLK cycle equals one CCLK
cycle). fmax is the maximum CCLK frequency achievable in the system with selected
external memory.
Table 32.
External memory and system requirements
Access
cycle
Maximum frequency WST setting
(WST>=0; round up to
integer)
Standard
Read
UM10114
User manual
2 + WST1
f MAX -----------------------------t RAM + 20ns
t RAM + 20ns
WST1 ------------------------------ – 2
t CYC
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Required memory access
time
t RAM t CYC 2 + WST1 – 20ns
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
40 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
UM10114
User manual
Table 32.
External memory and system requirements
Access
cycle
Maximum frequency WST setting
(WST>=0; round up to
integer)
Standard
Write
1 + WST2
f MAX -------------------------------t WRITE + 5ns
t WRITE – t CYC + 5
WST2 ------------------------------------------t CYC
t WRITE t CYC 1 + WST2 – 5ns
Burst read
(initial)
2 + WST1
f MAX -----------------------------t INIT + 20ns
t INIT + 20ns
WST1 ------------------------------ – 2
t CYC
t INIT t CYC 2 + WST1 – 20ns
Burst read
subseque
nt 3x
1
f MAX ------------------------------t ROM + 20ns
N/A
t ROM t CYC – 20ns
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Required memory access
time
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
41 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
5.1 How to read this chapter
The VIC is identical for all parts. However, the interrupts routed to the VIC depend on the
peripherals implemented on a specific part. See Table 33 for part specific interrupt
sources. All other interrupt sources in Table 33 are common to all parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
Table 33.
LPC21xx/22xx part-specific interrupts
Part
SSP
CAN
UART
Registers: Table 51, Table 35
no suffix and /00 parts
LPC2109
-
CAN common, CAN1 TX, CAN1
RX
-
LPC2119
-
CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX
-
LPC2129
-
CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX
-
LPC2114
-
-
-
LPC2124
-
-
-
LPC2194
-
CAN common, CAN1/2/3/4 TX,
CAN1/2/3/4 RX
-
LPC2210
-
-
-
LPC2220
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS -
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2212
-
-
-
LPC2214
-
-
-
LPC2290
-
CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX
-
LPC2292
-
CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX
-
LPC2294
-
CAN common, CAN1/2/3/4 TX,
CAN1/2/3/4 RX
-
/01 parts
LPC2109
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS CAN common, CAN1 TX, CAN1
RX, FULLCAN
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2119
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX, FULLCAN
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2129
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX, FULLCAN
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2114
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS -
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2124
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS -
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2194
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS CAN common, CAN1/2/3/4 TX,
CAN1/2/3/4 RX, FULLCAN
ABTO, ABEO
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
42 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Table 33.
LPC21xx/22xx part-specific interrupts
Part
SSP
CAN
UART
Registers: Table 51, Table 35
LPC2210
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS -
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2212
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS -
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2214
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS -
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2290
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX, FULLCAN
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2292
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS CAN common, CAN1/2 TX,
CAN1/2 RX, FULLCAN
ABTO, ABEO
LPC2294
TXRIS, RXRIS, RTRIS, RORRIS CAN common, CAN1/2/3/4 TX,
CAN1/2/3/4 RX, FULLCAN
ABTO, ABEO
5.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
ARM PrimeCell Vectored Interrupt Controller
32 interrupt request inputs
16 vectored IRQ interrupts
16 priority levels dynamically assigned to interrupt requests
Software interrupt generation
5.3 Description
The Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC) takes 32 interrupt request inputs and
programmably assigns them into 3 categories, FIQ, vectored IRQ, and non-vectored IRQ.
The programmable assignment scheme means that priorities of interrupts from the
various peripherals can be dynamically assigned and adjusted.
Fast Interrupt reQuest (FIQ) requests have the highest priority. If more than one request is
assigned to FIQ, the VIC ORs the requests to produce the FIQ signal to the ARM
processor. The fastest possible FIQ latency is achieved when only one request is
classified as FIQ because then the FIQ service routine can simply start dealing with that
device. But if more than one request is assigned to the FIQ class, the FIQ service routine
can read a word from the VIC that identifies which FIQ sources is are requesting an
interrupt.
Vectored IRQs have the middle priority, but only 16 of the 32 requests can be assigned to
this category. Any of the 32 requests can be assigned to any of the 16 vectored IRQ slots,
among which slot 0 has the highest priority and slot 15 has the lowest.
Non-vectored IRQs have the lowest priority.
The VIC ORs the requests from all the vectored and non-vectored IRQs to produce the
IRQ signal to the ARM processor. The IRQ service routine can start by reading a register
from the VIC and jumping there. If any of the vectored IRQs are requesting, the VIC
provides the address of the highest-priority requesting IRQs service routine, otherwise it
provides the address of a default routine that is shared by all the non-vectored IRQs. The
default routine can read another VIC register to see what IRQs are active.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
43 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
All registers in the VIC are word registers. Byte and halfword reads and write are not
supported.
Additional information on the Vectored Interrupt Controller is available in the
ARMPrimeCell Vectored Interrupt Controller (PL190) documentation.
5.4 Register description
The VIC implements the registers shown in Table 34. More detailed descriptions follow.
Table 34.
UM10114
User manual
VIC register map
Name
Description
Access Reset Address
value[1]
VICIRQStatus
IRQ Status Register. This register reads out
the state of those interrupt requests that are
enabled and classified as IRQ.
RO
0
0xFFFF F000
VICFIQStatus
FIQ Status Requests. This register reads out RO
the state of those interrupt requests that are
enabled and classified as FIQ.
0
0xFFFF F004
VICRawIntr
Raw Interrupt Status Register. This register
reads out the state of the 32 interrupt
requests / software interrupts, regardless of
enabling or classification.
0
0xFFFF F008
VICIntSelect
Interrupt Select Register. This register
R/W
classifies each of the 32 interrupt requests as
contributing to FIQ or IRQ.
0
0xFFFF F00C
VICIntEnable
Interrupt Enable Register. This register
controls which of the 32 interrupt requests
and software interrupts are enabled to
contribute to FIQ or IRQ.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F010
VICIntEnClr
Interrupt Enable Clear Register. This register WO
allows software to clear one or more bits in
the Interrupt Enable register.
0
0xFFFF F014
VICSoftInt
Software Interrupt Register. The contents of
this register are ORed with the 32 interrupt
requests from various peripheral functions.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F018
VICSoftIntClear
Software Interrupt Clear Register. This
WO
register allows software to clear one or more
bits in the Software Interrupt register.
0
0xFFFF F01C
VICProtection
R/W
Protection enable register. This register
allows limiting access to the VIC registers by
software running in privileged mode.
0
0xFFFF F020
VICVectAddr
Vector Address Register. When an IRQ
R/W
interrupt occurs, the IRQ service routine can
read this register and jump to the value read.
0
0xFFFF F030
R/W
VICDefVectAddr Default Vector Address Register. This
register holds the address of the Interrupt
Service routine (ISR) for non-vectored IRQs.
0
0xFFFF F034
VICVectAddr0
0
0xFFFF F100
Vector address 0 register. Vector Address
Registers 0-15 hold the addresses of the
Interrupt Service routines (ISRs) for the 16
vectored IRQ slots.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
RO
R/W
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
44 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Table 34.
Description
Access Reset Address
value[1]
VICVectAddr1
Vector address 1 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F104
VICVectAddr2
Vector address 2 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F108
VICVectAddr3
Vector address 3 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F10C
VICVectAddr4
Vector address 4 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F110
VICVectAddr5
Vector address 5 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F114
VICVectAddr6
Vector address 6 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F118
VICVectAddr7
Vector address 7 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F11C
VICVectAddr8
Vector address 8 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F120
VICVectAddr9
Vector address 9 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F124
VICVectAddr10
Vector address 10 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F128
VICVectAddr11
Vector address 11 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F12C
VICVectAddr12
Vector address 12 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F130
VICVectAddr13
Vector address 13 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F134
VICVectAddr14
Vector address 14 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F138
VICVectAddr15
Vector address 15 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F13C
VICVectCntl0
Vector control 0 register. Vector Control
Registers 0-15 each control one of the 16
vectored IRQ slots. Slot 0 has the highest
priority and slot 15 the lowest.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F200
VICVectCntl1
Vector control 1 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F204
VICVectCntl2
Vector control 2 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F208
VICVectCntl3
Vector control 3 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F20C
VICVectCntl4
Vector control 4 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F210
VICVectCntl5
Vector control 5 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F214
VICVectCntl6
Vector control 6 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F218
VICVectCntl7
Vector control 7 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F21C
VICVectCntl8
Vector control 8 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F220
VICVectCntl9
Vector control 9 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F224
VICVectCntl10
Vector control 10 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F228
VICVectCntl11
Vector control 11 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F22C
VICVectCntl12
Vector control 12 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F230
VICVectCntl13
Vector control 13 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F234
VICVectCntl14
Vector control 14 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F238
VICVectCntl15
Vector control 15 register.
R/W
0
0xFFFF F23C
[1]
UM10114
User manual
VIC register map
Name
Reset Value refers to the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
45 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
5.5 VIC registers
The following section describes the VIC registers in the order in which they are used in the
VIC logic, from those closest to the interrupt request inputs to those most abstracted for
use by software. For most people, this is also the best order to read about the registers
when learning the VIC.
5.5.1 Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt - 0xFFFF F018)
The contents of this register are ORed with the 32 interrupt requests from the various
peripherals, before any other logic is applied.
Table 35. Software Interrupt Register (VICSoftInt - address 0xFFFF F018) bit allocation
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Symbol
-
-
CAN4 RX
CAN3 RX
CAN2 RX
CAN1 RX
FULLCAN
-
Access
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Symbol
CAN4 TX
CAN3 TX
CAN2 TX
CAN1 TX
CAN
Common
ADC
EINT3
EINT2
Access
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Symbol
EINT1
EINT0
RTC
PLL
SPI1/SSP
SPI0
I2C
PW\M0
Access
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
UART1
UART0
TIMER1
TIMER0
ARMCore1
ARMCore0
-
WDT
Access
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit
Bit
Table 36.
Software Interrupt Register (VICSoftInt - address 0xFFFF F018) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Reset Value Description
value
31-0
See
0
VICSoftInt
bit allocation
table.
0
Do not force the interrupt request with this bit number. Writing
zeroes to bits in VICSoftInt has no effect, see VICSoftIntClear
(Section 5.5.2).
1
Force the interrupt request with this bit number.
5.5.2 Software Interrupt Clear Register (VICSoftIntClear - 0xFFFF F01C)
This register allows software to clear one or more bits in the Software Interrupt register,
without having to first read it.
Table 37.
Software Interrupt Clear Register (VICSoftIntClear - 0xFFFF F01C)
VICSoftIntClear Description
Reset
Value
31:0
0
1: writing a 1 clears the corresponding bit in the Software Interrupt
register, thus releasing the forcing of this request.
0: writing a 0 leaves the corresponding bit in VICSoftInt unchanged.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
46 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Table 38. Software Interrupt Clear Register (VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit allocation
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Symbol
Bit
-
-
CAN4 RX
CAN3 RX
CAN2 RX
CAN1 RX
FULLCAN
-
Access
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Symbol
CAN4 TX
CAN3 TX
CAN2 TX
CAN1 TX
CAN
Common
ADC
EINT3
EINT2
Access
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Symbol
EINT1
EINT0
RTC
PLL
SPI1/SSP
SPI0
I2C
PWM
Access
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
UART1
UART0
TIMER1
TIMER0
ARMCore1
ARMCore0
-
WDT
Access
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
WO
Bit
Bit
Bit
Table 39.
Bit
Software Interrupt Clear Register (VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit
description
Symbol
Reset Value Description
value
31-0 See
0
VICSoftIntClear
bit allocation
table.
0
Writing a 0 leaves the corresponding bit in VICSoftInt
unchanged.
1
Writing a 1 clears the corresponding bit in the Software
Interrupt register, thus releasing the forcing of this request.
5.5.3 Raw Interrupt Status Register (VICRawIntr - 0xFFFF F008)
This is a read only register. This register reads out the state of the 32 interrupt requests
and software interrupts, regardless of enabling or classification.
Table 40.
Raw Interrupt Status Register (VICRawIntr - address 0xFFFF F008) bit description
VICRawIntr Description
Reset
value
31:0
0
1:The hardware or software interrupt request with this bit number is
asserted.
0: Neither the hardware nor software interrupt request with this bit number
is asserted.
5.5.4 Interrupt Enable Register (VICIntEnable - 0xFFFF F010)
This is a read/write accessible register. This register controls which of the 32 interrupt
requests and software interrupts contribute to FIQ or IRQ.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
47 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Table 41.
Interrupt Enable Register (VICINtEnable - address 0xFFFF F010) bit description
VICIntEnable Description
Reset
value
31:0
0
When this register is read, 1s indicate interrupt requests or software
interrupts that are enabled to contribute to FIQ or IRQ.
When this register is written, ones enable interrupt requests or software
interrupts to contribute to FIQ or IRQ, zeroes have no effect. See
Section 5.5.5 “Interrupt Enable Clear Register (VICIntEnClear 0xFFFF F014)” on page 48 and Table 42 below for how to disable
interrupts.
5.5.5 Interrupt Enable Clear Register (VICIntEnClear - 0xFFFF F014)
This is a write only register. This register allows software to clear one or more bits in the
Interrupt Enable register (Section 5.5.4), without having to first read it.
Table 42.
Software Interrupt Clear Register (VICIntEnClear - address 0xFFFF F014) bit
description
VICIntEnClear Description
Reset
value
31:0
0
1: writing a 1 clears the corresponding bit in the Interrupt Enable
register, thus disabling interrupts for this request.
0: writing a 0 leaves the corresponding bit in VICIntEnable unchanged.
5.5.6 Interrupt Select Register (VICIntSelect - 0xFFFF F00C)
This is a read/write accessible register. This register classifies each of the 32 interrupt
requests as contributing to FIQ or IRQ.
Table 43.
Interrupt Select Register (VICIntSelect - address 0xFFFF F00C) bit description
VICIntSelect
Description
Reset
value
31:0
1: the interrupt request with this bit number is assigned to the FIQ
category.
0
0: the interrupt request with this bit number is assigned to the IRQ
category.
5.5.7 IRQ Status Register (VICIRQStatus - 0xFFFF F000)
This is a read only register. This register reads out the state of those interrupt requests
that are enabled and classified as IRQ. It does not differentiate between vectored and
non-vectored IRQs.
Table 44.
UM10114
User manual
IRQ Status Register (VICIRQStatus - address 0xFFFF F000) bit description
VICIRQStatus Description
Reset
value
31:0
0
1: the interrupt request with this bit number is enabled, classified as
IRQ, and asserted.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
48 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
5.5.8 FIQ Status Register (VICFIQStatus - 0xFFFF F004)
This is a read only register. This register reads out the state of those interrupt requests
that are enabled and classified as FIQ. If more than one request is classified as FIQ, the
FIQ service routine can read this register to see which requests are active.
Table 45.
FIQ Status Register (VICFIQStatus - address 0xFFFF F004) bit description
VICFIQStatus
Description
Reset
value
31:0
1: the interrupt request with this bit number is enabled, classified as
FIQ, and asserted.
0
5.5.9 Vector Control registers 0-15 (VICvectCntl0-15 - 0xFFFF F200-23C)
These are a read/write accessible registers. Each of these registers controls one of the 16
vectored IRQ slots. Slot 0 has the highest priority and slot 15 the lowest. Note that
disabling a vectored IRQ slot in one of the VICVectCntl registers does not disable the
interrupt itself, the interrupt is simply changed to the non-vectored form.
Table 46.
Vector Control registers (VICVectCntl0-15 - addresses 0xFFFF F200-23C) bit
description
VICVectCntl0-15 Description
Reset
value
4:0
The number of the interrupt request or software interrupt assigned to 0
this vectored IRQ slot. As a matter of good programming practice,
software should not assign the same interrupt number to more than
one enabled vectored IRQ slot. But if this does occur, the lower
numbered slot will be used when the interrupt request or software
interrupt is enabled, classified as IRQ, and asserted.
5
1: this vectored IRQ slot is enabled, and can produce a unique ISR
address when its assigned interrupt request or software interrupt is
enabled, classified as IRQ, and asserted.
31:6
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
0
5.5.10 Vector Address registers 0-15 (VICVectAddr0-15 - 0xFFFF F100-13C)
These are a read/write accessible registers. These registers hold the addresses of the
Interrupt Service routines (ISRs) for the 16 vectored IRQ slots.
Table 47.
Vector Address registers (VICVectAddr0-15 - addresses 0xFFFF F100-13C) bit
description
VICVectAddr0-15 Description
31:0
Reset
value
When one or more interrupt request or software interrupt is (are)
0
enabled, classified as IRQ, asserted, and assigned to an enabled
vectored IRQ slot, the value from this register for the highest-priority
such slot will be provided when the IRQ service routine reads the
Vector Address register -VICVectAddr (Section 5.5.10).
5.5.11 Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr - 0xFFFF F034)
This is a read/write accessible register. This register holds the address of the Interrupt
Service routine (ISR) for non-vectored IRQs.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
49 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Table 48.
Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr - address 0xFFFF F034) bit
description
VICDefVectAddr
Description
Reset
value
31:0
When an IRQ service routine reads the Vector Address register
(VICVectAddr), and no IRQ slot responds as described above, this
address is returned.
0
5.5.12 Vector Address register (VICVectAddr - 0xFFFF F030)
This is a read/write accessible register. When an IRQ interrupt occurs, the IRQ service
routine can read this register and jump to the value read.
Table 49.
Vector Address register (VICVectAddr - address 0xFFFF F030) bit description
VICVectAddr
Description
Reset
value
31:0
If any of the interrupt requests or software interrupts that are assigned 0
to a vectored IRQ slot is (are) enabled, classified as IRQ, and
asserted, reading from this register returns the address in the Vector
Address Register for the highest-priority such slot (lowest-numbered)
such slot. Otherwise it returns the address in the Default Vector
Address Register.
Writing to this register does not set the value for future reads from it.
Rather, this register should be written near the end of an ISR, to
update the priority hardware.
5.5.13 Protection Enable register (VICProtection - 0xFFFF F020)
This is a read/write accessible register. This one-bit register controls access to the VIC
registers by software running in User mode.
Table 50.
Protection Enable register (VICProtection - address 0xFFFF F020) bit description
VICProtection
Description
Reset
value
0
1: the VIC registers can only be accessed in privileged mode.
0
0: VIC registers can be accessed in User or privileged mode.
31:1
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
5.6 Interrupt sources
Table 51 lists the interrupt sources for each peripheral function. Each peripheral device
has one interrupt line connected to the Vectored Interrupt Controller, but may have several
internal interrupt flags. Individual interrupt flags may also represent more than one
interrupt source. See Table 33 for which flags are implemented for which parts.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
50 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Table 51.
Connection of interrupt sources to the Vectored Interrupt Controller
Block
Flag(s)
VIC VIC Channel #
Hex and Mask
WDT
Watchdog Interrupt (WDINT)
0
0x0000 0001
-
Reserved for software interrupts only
1
0x0000 0002
ARM Core
Embedded ICE, DbgCommRx
2
0x0000 0004
ARM Core
Embedded ICE, DbgCommTX
3
0x0000 0008
TIMER0
Match 0 - 3 (MR0, MR1, MR2, MR3)
4
0x0000 0010
5
0x0000 0020
6
0x0000 0040
7
0x0000 0080
Capture 0 - 3 (CR0, CR1, CR2, CR3)
TIMER1
Match 0 - 3 (MR0, MR1, MR2, MR3)
Capture 0 - 3 (CR0, CR1, CR2, CR3)
UART0
Rx Line Status (RLS)
Transmit Holding Register Empty (THRE)
Rx Data Available (RDA)
Character Time-out Indicator (CTI)
Auto-Baud Time-Out (ABTO)
End of Auto-Baud (ABEO)
UART1
Rx Line Status (RLS)
Transmit Holding Register Empty (THRE)
Rx Data Available (RDA)
Character Time-out Indicator (CTI)
Modem Status Interrupt (MSI)
Auto-Baud Time-Out (ABTO)
End of Auto-Baud (ABEO)
PWM
Match 0 - 6 (MR0, MR1, MR2, MR3, MR4, MR5, MR6)
8
0x0000 0100
I2C
SI (state change)
9
0x0000 0200
SPI0
SPI Interrupt Flag (SPIF)
10
0x0000 0400
11
0x0000 0800
Mode Fault (MODF)
SPI1 (SSP)
Source: SPI1
SPI Interrupt Flag (SPIF)
Mode Fault (MODF)
Source: SSP
TX FIFO at least half empty (TXRIS)
Rx FIFO at least half full (RXRIS)
Receive Timeout condition (RTRIS)
Receive overrun (RORRIS)
PLL
PLL Lock (PLOCK)
12
0x0000 1000
RTC
Counter Increment (RTCCIF)
13
0x0000 2000
External Interrupt 0 (EINT0)
14
0x0000 4000
External Interrupt 1 (EINT1)
15
0x0000 8000
External Interrupt 2 (EINT2)
16
0x0001 0000
External Interrupt 3 (EINT3)
17
0x0002 0000
A/D Converter end of conversion
18
0x0004 0000
Alarm (RTCALF)
System Control
ADC
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
51 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Table 51.
Connection of interrupt sources to the Vectored Interrupt Controller
Block
Flag(s)
VIC VIC Channel #
Hex and Mask
CAN
CAN common and acceptance filter (1 ORed CAN,
LUTerr)
19
0x0008 0000
CAN
CAN1 TX
20
0x0010 0000
CAN
CAN2 TX
21
0x0020 0000
CAN
CAN3 TX
22
0x0040 0000
CAN
CAN4 TX
Reserved
UM10114
User manual
23
0x0080 0000
24
0x0100 0000
CAN
FULLCAN
25
0x0200 0000
CAN
CAN1 RX
26
0x0400 0000
CAN
CAN2 RX
27
0x0800 0000
CAN
CAN3 RX
28
0x1000 0000
CAN
CAN4 RX
29
0x2000 0000
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
52 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
interrupt request, masking and selection
nVICFIQIN
SOFTINTCLEAR
[31:0]
INTENABLECLEAR
[31:0]
SOFTINT
[31:0]
INTENABLE
[31:0]
VICINT
SOURCE
[31:0]
FIQSTATUS[31:0]
non-vectored FIQ interrupt logic
FIQSTATUS
[31:0]
nVICFIQ
non-vectored IRQ interrupt logic
IRQSTATUS[31:0]
RAWINTERRUPT
[31:0]
vector interrupt 0
IRQSTATUS
[31:0]
INTSELECT
[31:0]
NonVectIRQ
IRQ
priority 0
interrupt priority logic
HARDWARE
PRIORITY
LOGIC
VECTIRQ0
SOURCE ENABLE
VECTCNTL[5:0]
vector interrupt 1
VECTADDR
[31:0]
priority1
IRQ
nVICIRQ
address select
for
highest priority
interrupt
VECTADDR0[31:0]
VECTADDR
[31:0]
VECTIRQ1
VECTADDR1[31:0]
VICVECT
ADDROUT
[31:0]
priority2
vector interrupt 15
priority15
VECTIRQ15
VECTADDR15[31:0]
DEFAULT
VECTADDR
[31:0]
nVICIRQIN VICVECTADDRIN[31:0]
Fig 13. Block diagram of the Vectored Interrupt Controller
5.7 Spurious interrupts
Spurious interrupts are possible in the ARM7TDMI based microcontrollers such as the
LPC21xx and LPC22xx due to asynchronous interrupt handling. The asynchronous
character of the interrupt processing has its roots in the interaction of the core and the
VIC. If the VIC state is changed between the moments when the core detects an interrupt,
and the core actually processes an interrupt, problems may be generated.
Real-life applications may experience the following scenarios:
1. VIC decides there is an IRQ interrupt and sends the IRQ signal to the core.
2. Core latches the IRQ state.
3. Processing continues for a few cycles due to pipelining.
4. Core loads IRQ address from VIC.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
53 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Furthermore, It is possible that the VIC state has changed during step 3. For example,
VIC was modified so that the interrupt that triggered the sequence starting with step 1) is
no longer pending -interrupt got disabled in the executed code. In this case, the VIC will
not be able to clearly identify the interrupt that generated the interrupt request, and as a
result the VIC will return the default interrupt VicDefVectAddr (0xFFFF F034).
This potentially disastrous chain of events can be prevented in two ways:
1. Application code should be set up in a way to prevent the spurious interrupts from
occurring. Simple guarding of changes to the VIC may not be enough since, for
example, glitches on level sensitive interrupts can also cause spurious interrupts.
2. VIC default handler should be set up and tested properly.
5.7.1 Details and case studies on spurious interrupts
This chapter contains details that can be obtained from the official ARM website , FAQ
section under the "Technical Support":
What happens if an interrupt occurs as it is being disabled?
Applies to: ARM7TDMI
If an interrupt is received by the core during execution of an instruction that disables
interrupts, the ARM7 family will still take the interrupt. This occurs for both IRQ and FIQ
interrupts.
For example, consider the following instruction sequence:
MRS r0, cpsr
ORR r0, r0, #I_Bit:OR:F_Bit
MSR cpsr_c, r0
;disable IRQ and FIQ interrupts
If an IRQ interrupt is received during execution of the MSR instruction, then the behavior
will be as follows:
• The IRQ interrupt is latched.
• The MSR cpsr, r0 executes to completion setting both the I bit and the F bit in the
CPSR.
• The IRQ interrupt is taken because the core was committed to taking the interrupt
exception before the I bit was set in the CPSR.
• The CPSR (with the I bit and F bit set) is moved to the SPSR_IRQ.
This means that, on entry to the IRQ interrupt service routine, you can see the unusual
effect that an IRQ interrupt has just been taken while the I bit in the SPSR is set. In the
example above, the F bit will also be set in both the CPSR and SPSR. This means that
FIQs are disabled upon entry to the IRQ service routine, and will remain so until explicitly
re-enabled. FIQs will not be re-enabled automatically by the IRQ return sequence.
Although the example shows both IRQ and FIQ interrupts being disabled, similar behavior
occurs when only one of the two interrupt types is being disabled. The fact that the core
processes the IRQ after completion of the MSR instruction which disables IRQs does not
normally cause a problem, since an interrupt arriving just one cycle earlier would be
expected to be taken. When the interrupt routine returns with an instruction like:
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
54 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
SUBS pc, lr, #4
The SPSR_IRQ is restored to the CPSR. The CPSR will now have the I bit and F bit set,
and therefore execution will continue with all interrupts disabled. However, this can cause
problems in the following cases:
Problem 1: A particular routine maybe called as an IRQ handler, or as a regular
subroutine. In the latter case, the system guarantees that IRQs would have been disabled
prior to the routine being called. The routine exploits this restriction to determine how it
was called (by examining the I bit of the SPSR), and returns using the appropriate
instruction. If the routine is entered due to an IRQ being received during execution of the
MSR instruction which disables IRQs, then the I bit in the SPSR will be set. The routine
would therefore assume that it could not have been entered via an IRQ.
Problem 2: FIQs and IRQs are both disabled by the same write to the CPSR. In this case,
if an IRQ is received during the CPSR write, FIQs will be disabled for the execution time of
the IRQ handler. This may not be acceptable in a system where FIQs must not be
disabled for more than a few cycles.
5.7.1.1 Workaround
There are 3 suggested work-arounds. Which of these is most applicable will depend upon
the requirements of the particular system.
5.7.1.1.1
Solution 1: Test for an IRQ received during a write to disable IRQs
Add code similar to the following at the start of the interrupt routine.
SUB
STMFD
MRS
TST
LDMNEFD
lr, lr, #4
sp!, {..., lr}
lr, SPSR
lr, #I_Bit
sp!, {..., pc}^
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Adjust LR to point to return
Get some free regs
See if we got an interrupt while
interrupts were disabled.
If so, just return immediately.
The interrupt will remain pending since we haven’t
acknowledged it and will be reissued when interrupts
are next enabled.
Rest of interrupt routine
This code will test for the situation where the IRQ was received during a write to disable
IRQs. If this is the case, the code returns immediately - resulting in the IRQ not being
acknowledged (cleared), and further IRQs being disabled.
Similar code may also be applied to the FIQ handler, in order to resolve the first issue.
This is the recommended workaround, as it overcomes both problems mentioned above.
However, in the case of problem two, it does add several cycles to the maximum length of
time FIQs will be disabled.
5.7.1.1.2
Solution 2: Disable IRQs and FIQs using separate writes to the CPSR
MRS
ORR
MSR
ORR
MSR
UM10114
User manual
r0, cpsr
r0, r0, #I_Bit
cpsr_c, r0
r0, r0, #F_Bit
cpsr_c, r0
;disable IRQs
;disable FIQs
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
55 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
This is the best workaround where the maximum time for which FIQs are disabled is
critical (it does not increase this time at all). However, it does not solve problem one, and
requires extra instructions at every point where IRQs and FIQs are disabled together.
5.7.1.1.3
Solution 3: Re-enable FIQs at the beginning of the IRQ handler
As the required state of all bits in the c field of the CPSR are known, this can be most
efficiently be achieved by writing an immediate value to CPSR_C, for example:
MSR cpsr_c, #I_Bit:OR:irq_MODE
;IRQ should be disabled
;FIQ enabled
;ARM state, IRQ mode
This requires only the IRQ handler to be modified, and FIQs may be re-enabled more
quickly than by using workaround 1. However, this should only be used if the system can
guarantee that FIQs are never disabled while IRQs are enabled. It does not address
problem one.
5.8 VIC usage notes
If user code is running from an on-chip RAM and an application uses interrupts, interrupt
vectors must be re-mapped to on-chip address 0x0. This is necessary because all the
exception vectors are located at addresses 0x0 and above. This is easily achieved by
configuring the MEMMAP register (see Table 20) to User RAM mode. Application code
should be linked such that at 0x4000 0000 the Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) will reside.
Although multiple sources can be selected (VICIntSelect) to generate FIQ request, only
one interrupt service routine should be dedicated to service all available/present FIQ
request(s). Therefore, if more than one interrupt sources are classified as FIQ the FIQ
interrupt service routine must read VICFIQStatus to decide based on this content what to
do and how to process the interrupt request. However, it is recommended that only one
interrupt source should be classified as FIQ. Classifying more than one interrupt sources
as FIQ will increase the interrupt latency.
Following the completion of the desired interrupt service routine, clearing of the interrupt
flag on the peripheral level will propagate to corresponding bits in VIC registers
(VICRawIntr, VICFIQStatus and VICIRQStatus). Also, before the next interrupt can be
serviced, it is necessary that write is performed into the VICVectAddr register before the
return from interrupt is executed. This write will clear the respective interrupt flag in the
internal interrupt priority hardware.
In order to disable the interrupt at the VIC you need to clear corresponding bit in the
VICIntEnClr register, which in turn clears the related bit in the VICIntEnable register. This
also applies to the VICSoftInt and VICSoftIntClear in which VICSoftIntClear will clear the
respective bits in VICSoftInt. For example, if VICSoftInt = 0x0000 0005 and bit 0 has to be
cleared, VICSoftIntClear = 0x0000 0001 will accomplish this. Before the new clear
operation on the same bit in VICSoftInt using writing into VICSoftIntClear is performed in
the future, VICSoftIntClear = 0x0000 0000 must be assigned. Therefore writing 1 to any
bit in Clear register will have one-time-effect in the destination register.
If the watchdog is enabled for interrupt on underflow or invalid feed sequence only then
there is no way of clearing the interrupt. The only way you could perform return from
interrupt is by disabling the interrupt at the VIC (using VICIntEnClr).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
56 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
Example: Assuming that UART0 and SPI0 are generating interrupt requests that are
classified as vectored IRQs (UART0 being on the higher level than SPI0), while UART1
and I2C are generating non-vectored IRQs, the following could be one possibility for VIC
setup:
VICIntSelect = 0x0000 0000
VICIntEnable = 0x0000 06C0
VICDefVectAddr = 0x...
VICVectAddr0 = 0x...
VICVectAddr1 = 0x...
VICVectCntl0 = 0x0000 0026
VICVectCntl1 = 0x0000 002A
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
SPI0, I2C, UART1 and UART0 are IRQ =>
bit10, bit9, bit7 and bit6=0
SPI0, I2C, UART1 and UART0 are enabled interrupts =>
bit10, bit9, bit 7 and bit6=1
holds address at what routine for servicing
non-vectored IRQs (i.e. UART1 and I2C) starts
holds address where UART0 IRQ service routine starts
holds address where SPI0 IRQ service routine starts
interrupt source with index 6 (UART0) is enabled as
the one with priority 0 (the highest)
interrupt source with index 10 (SPI0) is enabled
as the one with priority 1
After any of IRQ requests (SPI0, I2C, UART0 or UART1) is made, microcontroller will
redirect code execution to the address specified at location 0x0000 0018. For vectored
and non-vectored IRQ’s the following instruction could be placed at 0x0000 0018:
LDR pc, [pc,#-0xFF0]
This instruction loads PC with the address that is present in VICVectAddr register.
In case UART0 request has been made, VICVectAddr will be identical to VICVectAddr0,
while in case SPI0 request has been made value from VICVectAddr1 will be found here. If
neither UART0 nor SPI0 have generated IRQ request but UART1 and/or I2C were the
reason, content of VICVectAddr will be identical to VICDefVectAddr.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
57 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
6.1 How to read this chapter
Remark: The LPC21xx and LPC22xx have different features and peripherals enabled
depending on part number and version. Refer to Table 52 for registers that need to be
configured for each specific part and peripheral.
The following register descriptions include all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts. Registers not
listed in Table 52 are identical for all parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
Table 52.
LPC21xx/22xx part-specific register bits
Power control for
peripherals
Hi-Speed GPIO
Peripheral Clock
Memory mapping
modes
PCONP bit, Table 74
SCS bit, Table 61
APBDIV bit, Table 76
MEMMAP mode,
Table 62
no suffix and /00 parts
LPC2109
all[1] + PCCAN1
n/a
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2119
all[1] + PCCAN1/2
n/a
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2129
all[1]
n/a
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
n/a
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
+ PCCAN1/2
all common
peripherals[1]
LPC2124
all common
peripherals[1]
n/a
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2194
all[1]+ PCCAN1/2/3/4
n/a
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2210
all[1]
n/a
APBDIV/XCLK
ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2220
all[1]
+ PCEMC,
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV/XCLK
ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2212
all[1]
+ PCEMC
n/a
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2214
all[1] + PCEMC
n/a
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2290
all[1]
+ PCEMC, PCAN1/2
n/a
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2292
all[1]
+ PCEMC, PCAN1/2
n/a
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2294
all[1]
n/a
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2114
+ PCEMC
PCSSP[2]
+ PCEMC,
PCCAN1/2/3/4
/01 parts
LPC2109
all[1] + PCSSP, PCCAN1
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2119
all[1] + PCSSP, PCCAN1/2
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2129
all[1] + PCSSP, PCCAN1/2
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2114
all[1]
+ PCSSP
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2124
all[1]
+ PCSSP
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2194
all[1]
+ PCSSP, PCCAN1/2/3/4 GPIO0/1M
APBDIV
Flash/ROM/RAM
LPC2210
all[1] + PCEMC, PCSSP[2]
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV/XCLK
ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2212
all[1]
+ PCEMC,
PCSSP[2]
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2214
all[1]
+ PCEMC,
PCSSP[2]
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
58 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 52.
LPC21xx/22xx part-specific register bits
Power control for
peripherals
Hi-Speed GPIO
Peripheral Clock
Memory mapping
modes
PCONP bit, Table 74
SCS bit, Table 61
APBDIV bit, Table 76
MEMMAP mode,
Table 62
LPC2290
all[1] + PCEMC, PCSSP[2],
PCCAN1/2
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2292
all[1] + PCEMC, PCSSP[2],
PCCAN1/2
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
LPC2294
all[1] + PCEMC, PCSSP[2],
PCCAN1/2/3/4
GPIO0/1M
APBDIV/XCLK
Flash/ROM/RAM/EMC
[1]
The PCONP bits common to all parts are: PCTIM0/1, PCUART0/1, PCI2C, PCSPI0/1, PCRTC, PCAD.
[2]
Use the PCSSP bit to configure the SPI1 interface as SSP interface.
6.2 Summary of system control block functions
The System Control Block includes several system features and control registers for a
number of functions that are not related to specific peripheral devices. These include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crystal Oscillator
External Interrupt Inputs
Miscellaneous System Controls and Status
Memory Mapping Control
PLL
Power Control
Reset
APB Divider
Wake-up Timer
Each type of function has its own registers if any are required and unneeded bits are
defined as reserved in order to allow future expansion. Unrelated functions never share
the same register addresses
6.3 Pin description
Table 53 shows pins that are associated with System Control block functions.
Table 53.
Pin summary
Pin name
Pin
direction
Pin description
XTAL1
Input
Crystal Oscillator Input - Input to the oscillator and internal clock
generator circuits
XTAL2
Output
Crystal Oscillator Output - Output from the oscillator amplifier
EINT0
Input
External Interrupt Input 0 - An active low/high level or
falling/rising edge general purpose interrupt input. This pin may be
used to wake up the processor from Idle or Power-down modes.
Pins P0.1 and P0.16 can be selected to perform EINT0 function.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
59 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 53.
Pin summary
Pin name
Pin
direction
Pin description
EINT1
Input
External Interrupt Input 1 - See the EINT0 description above.
Pins P0.3 and P0.14 can be selected to perform EINT1 function.
Important: LOW level on pin P0.14 immediately after reset is
considered as an external hardware request to start the ISP
command handler. More details on ISP and Serial Boot Loader can
be found in Section 21.5 on page 311.
EINT2
Input
External Interrupt Input 2 - See the EINT0 description above.
Pins P0.7 and P0.15 can be selected to perform EINT2 function.
EINT3
Input
External Interrupt Input 3 - See the EINT0 description above.
Pins P0.9, P0.20 and P0.30 can be selected to perform EINT3
function.
Input
RESET
External Reset input - A LOW on this pin resets the chip, causing
I/O ports and peripherals to take on their default states and the
processor to begin execution at address 0x0000 0000.
6.4 Register description
All registers, regardless of size, are on word address boundaries. Details of the registers
appear in the description of each function.
Table 54.
Summary of system control registers
Name
Description
Access
Reset
value[1]
Address
External Interrupts
EXTINT
External Interrupt Flag Register
R/W
0
0xE01F C140
EXTWAKE
External Interrupt Wake-up Register
R/W
0
0xE01F C144
EXTMODE
External Interrupt Mode Register
R/W
0
0xE01F C148
EXTPOLAR
External Interrupt Polarity Register
R/W
0
0xE01F C14C
R/W
0
0xE01F C040
R/W
0
0xE01F C080
Memory Mapping Control
MEMMAP
Memory Mapping Control
Phase Locked Loop
PLLCON
PLL Control Register
PLLCFG
PLL Configuration Register
R/W
0
0xE01F C084
PLLSTAT
PLL Status Register
RO
0
0xE01F C088
PLLFEED
PLL Feed Register
WO
NA
0xE01F C08C
Power Control
PCON
Power Control Register
R/W
0
0xE01F C0C0
PCONP
Power Control for Peripherals
R/W
0x1FBE
0xE01F C0C4
APB Divider Control
R/W
0
0xE01F C100
R/W
0
0xE01F C1A0
APB Divider
APBDIV
Syscon Miscellaneous Registers
SCS
[1]
UM10114
User manual
System Controls and Status
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
60 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.5 Crystal oscillator
An input signal of 50-50 duty cycle within a frequency range from 1 MHz to 25 MHz should
be used by the LPC21xx/22xx if supplied to its input XTAL1 pin. This microcontroller’s
onboard oscillator circuit supports external crystals in the range of 1 MHz to 25 MHz only.
If the on-chip PLL system or the boot-loader is used, the input clock frequency is limited to
an exclusive range of 10 MHz to 25 MHz.
The oscillator output frequency is called FOSC, and the ARM processor clock frequency is
referred to as CCLK for purposes of rate equations, etc. elsewhere in this document. FOSC
and CCLK are the same value unless the PLL is running and connected. Refer to the
Section 6.9 “Phase Locked Loop (PLL)” on page 70 for details and frequency limitations.
The onboard oscillator in the LPC21xx/LPC22xx can operate in one of two modes: slave
mode and oscillation mode.
In slave mode the input clock signal should be coupled by means of a capacitor of 100 pF
(CC in Figure 14, drawing a), with an amplitude of at least 200 mVrms. The XTAL2 pin in
this configuration can be left not connected. If slave mode is selected, the FOSC signal of
50-50 duty cycle can range from 1 MHz to 25 MHz.
External components and models used in oscillation mode are shown in Figure 14,
drawings b and c, and in Table 55. Since the feedback resistance is integrated on chip,
only a crystal and the capacitances CX1 and CX2 need to be connected externally in case
of fundamental mode oscillation (the fundamental frequency is represented by L, CL and
RS). Capacitance CP in Figure 14, drawing c, represents the parallel package capacitance
and should not be larger than 7 pF. Parameters FC, CL, RS and CP are supplied by the
crystal manufacturer.
Choosing the oscillation mode as an on-board oscillator mode of operation, limits FOSC
clock selection to 1 MHz to 25 MHz.
LPC21xx/22xx
XTAL1
XTAL2
LPC21xx/22xx
XTAL1
XTAL2
L
<=>
CC
CL
CP
Xtal
Clock
a)
CX1
CX2
b)
RS
c)
Fig 14. Oscillator modes and models: a) slave mode of operation, b) oscillation mode of operation, c) external
crystal model used for CX1/X2 evaluation
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
61 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 55.
Recommended values for CX1/X2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external
components parameters)
Fundamental
Crystal load
oscillation frequency capacitance CL
FOSC
Maximum crystal
series resistance RS
External load
capacitors CX1, CX2
1 MHz - 5 MHz
NA
NA
20 pF
NA
NA
30 pF
< 300
58 pF, 58 pF
10 pF
< 300
18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF
< 300
38 pF, 38 pF
30 pF
< 300
58 pF, 58 pF
10 pF
< 300
18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF
< 220
38 pF, 38 pF
30 pF
< 140
58 pF, 58 pF
10 pF
5 MHz - 10 MHz
10 MHz - 15 MHz
15 MHz - 20 MHz
20 MHz - 25 MHz
10 pF
< 220
18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF
< 140
38 pF, 38 pF
30 pF
< 80
58 pF, 58 pF
10 pF
< 160
18 pF, 18 pF
20 pF
< 90
38 pF, 38 pF
30 pF
< 50
58 pF, 58 pF
f OSC selection
true
on-chip PLL used
in application?
false
true
ISP used for initial
code download?
false
external crystal
oscillator used?
true
false
MIN fOSC = 10 MHz
MAX fOSC = 25 MHz
MIN fOSC = 1 MHz
MAX fOSC = 25 MHz
MIN fOSC = 1 MHz
MAX fOSC = 25 MHz
mode a and/or b
mode a
mode b
Fig 15. FOSC selection algorithm
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
62 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.6 External interrupt inputs
The LLPC21xx/LPC22xx includes four external interrupt inputs as selectable pin
functions. The external interrupt inputs can optionally be used to wake up the processor
from Power-down mode.
6.6.1 Register description
The external interrupt function has four registers associated with it. The EXTINT register
contains the interrupt flags, and the EXTWAKE register contains bits that enable individual
external interrupts to wake up the microcontroller from Power-down mode. The
EXTMODE and EXTPOLAR registers specify the level and edge sensitivity parameters.
Table 56.
External interrupt registers
Name
Description
Access Reset
Address
value[1]
EXTINT
The External Interrupt Flag Register contains
interrupt flags for EINT0, EINT1, EINT2 and
EINT3. See Table 57.
R/W
0
0xE01F C140
EXTWAKE
The External Interrupt Wake-up Register
R/W
contains four enable bits that control whether
each external interrupt will cause the processor
to wake up from Power-down mode. See
Table 58.
0
0xE01F C144
EXTMODE
The External Interrupt Mode Register controls
whether each pin is edge- or level sensitive.
R/W
0
0xE01F C148
EXTPOLAR
The External Interrupt Polarity Register controls R/W
which level or edge on each pin will cause an
interrupt.
0
0xE01F C14C
[1]
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
6.6.2 External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT - 0xE01F C140)
When a pin is selected for its external interrupt function, the level or edge on that pin
(selected by its bits in the EXTPOLAR and EXTMODE registers) will set its interrupt flag in
this register. This asserts the corresponding interrupt request to the VIC, which will cause
an interrupt if interrupts from the pin are enabled.
Writing ones to bits EINT0 through EINT3 in EXTINT register clears the corresponding
bits. In level-sensitive mode this action has an effect only when the pin is in its inactive
state.
Once a bit from EINT0 to EINT3 is set and an appropriate code starts to execute (handling
wake-up and/or external interrupt), this bit in EXTINT register must be cleared. Otherwise
the event that was just triggered by activity on the EINT pin will not be recognized in the
future.
Important: whenever a change of external interrupt operating mode (i.e. active
level/edge) is performed (including the initialization of an external interrupt), the
corresponding bit in the EXTINT register must be cleared! For details see
Section 6.6.4 “External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE - 0xE01F C148)” and
Section 6.6.5 “External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR - 0xE01F C14C)”.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
63 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
For example, if a system wakes up from power-down using a low level on external
interrupt 0 pin, its post-wake-up code must reset the EINT0 bit in order to allow future
entry into the power-down mode. If the EINT0 bit is left set to 1, subsequent attempts to
invoke Power-down mode will fail. The same goes for external interrupt handling.
More details on the Power-down mode will be discussed in the following chapters.
Table 57.
External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT - address 0xE01F C140) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
EINT0
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT0 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0
its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT0 function is selected for its pin,
and the selected edge occurs on the pin.
Up to two pins can be selected to perform the EINT0 function (see P0.1 and P0.16 description in
Section 7.2 and Section 7.3).
This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its
active state (e.g. if EINT0 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the
corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the
pin becomes high).
1
EINT1
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT1 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0
its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT1 function is selected for its pin,
and the selected edge occurs on the pin.
Up to two pins can be selected to perform the EINT1 function (see P0.3 and P0.14 description in
Section 7.2 and Section 7.3).
This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its
active state (e.g. if EINT1 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the
corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the
pin becomes high).
2
EINT2
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT2 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0
its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT2 function is selected for its pin,
and the selected edge occurs on the pin.
Up to two pins can be selected to perform the EINT2 function (see P0.7 and P0.15 description in
Section 7.2 and Section 7.3).
This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its
active state (e.g. if EINT2 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the
corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the
pin becomes high).
3
EINT3
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT3 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0
its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT3 function is selected for its pin,
and the selected edge occurs on the pin.
Up to three pins can be selected to perform the EINT3 function (see P0.9, P0.20 and P0.30
description in Section 7.2 and Section 7.3).
This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its
active state (e.g. if EINT3 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the
corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the
pin becomes high).
7:4
-
UM10114
User manual
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved NA
bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
64 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.6.3 External interrupt Wake-up register (EXTWAKE - 0xE01F C144)
Enable bits in the EXTWAKE register allow the external interrupts and other sources to
wake up the processor if it is in Power-down mode. The related EINTn function must be
mapped to the pin in order for the wake-up process to take place. It is not necessary for
the interrupt to be enabled in the Vectored Interrupt Controller for a wake-up to take place.
This arrangement allows additional capabilities, such as having an external interrupt input
wake up the processor from Power-down mode without causing an interrupt (simply
resuming operation), or allowing an interrupt to be enabled during Power-down without
waking the processor up if it is asserted (eliminating the need to disable the interrupt if the
wake-up feature is not desirable in the application).
For an external interrupt pin to be a source that would wake up the microcontroller from
Power-down mode, it is also necessary to clear the corresponding bit in the External
Interrupt Flag register (Section 6.6.2 on page 63).
Table 58.
Interrupt Wakeup register (INTWAKE - address 0xE01F C144) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
EXTWAKE0
When one, assertion of EINT0 will wake up the processor from 0
Power-down mode.
1
EXTWAKE1
When one, assertion of EINT1 will wake up the processor from 0
Power-down mode.
2
EXTWAKE2
When one, assertion of EINT2 will wake up the processor from 0
Power-down mode.
3
EXTWAKE3
When one, assertion of EINT3 will wake up the processor from 0
Power-down mode.
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
6.6.4 External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE - 0xE01F C148)
The bits in this register select whether each EINT pin is level- or edge-sensitive. Only pins
that are selected for the EINT function (see Section 8.6) and enabled via the VICIntEnable
register (Section 5.5.4 “Interrupt Enable Register (VICIntEnable - 0xFFFF F010)” on page
47) can cause interrupts from the External Interrupt function (though of course pins
selected for other functions may cause interrupts from those functions).
Note: Software should only change a bit in this register when its interrupt is
disabled in the VICIntEnable register, and should write the corresponding 1 to the
EXTINT register before enabling (initializing) or re-enabling the interrupt, to clear
the EXTINT bit that could be set by changing the mode.
Table 59.
External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE - address 0xE01F C148) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
Value
0
EXTMODE0 0
1
EXTMODE1 0
1
1
2
UM10114
User manual
EXTMODE2 0
Description
Reset
value
Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT0.
0
EINT0 is edge sensitive.
Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT1.
0
EINT1 is edge sensitive.
Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT2.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
65 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 59.
External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE - address 0xE01F C148) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
Value
3
EXTMODE3 0
1
7:4
-
Description
Reset
value
EINT2 is edge sensitive.
Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT3.
0
1
EINT3 is edge sensitive.
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
6.6.5 External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR - 0xE01F C14C)
In level-sensitive mode, the bits in this register select whether the corresponding pin is
high- or low-active. In edge-sensitive mode, they select whether the pin is rising- or
falling-edge sensitive. Only pins that are selected for the EINT function (see Section 8.6)
and enabled in the VICIntEnable register (Section 5.5.4 “Interrupt Enable Register
(VICIntEnable - 0xFFFF F010)” on page 47) can cause interrupts from the External
Interrupt function (though of course pins selected for other functions may cause interrupts
from those functions).
Note: Software should only change a bit in this register when its interrupt is
disabled in the VICIntEnable register, and should write the corresponding 1 to the
EXTINT register before enabling (initializing) or re-enabling the interrupt, to clear
the EXTINT bit that could be set by changing the polarity.
Table 60.
Bit
Symbol
0
1
2
3
Description
Reset
value
EXTPOLAR0 0
EINT0 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE0).
0
1
EINT0 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE0).
EXTPOLAR1 0
EINT1 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE1).
1
EINT1 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE1).
EXTPOLAR2 0
EINT2 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE2).
1
EINT2 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE2).
EXTPOLAR3 0
EINT3 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE3).
1
EINT3 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on
EXTMODE3).
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
7:4 -
UM10114
User manual
External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR - address 0xE01F C14C) bit
description
Value
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
0
0
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
66 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.6.6 Multiple external interrupt pins
Software can select multiple pins for each of EINT3:0 in the Pin Select registers, which
are described in Section 8.6. The external interrupt logic for each of EINT3:0 receives the
state of all of its associated pins from the pins’ receivers, along with signals that indicate
whether each pin is selected for the EINT function.
The external interrupt logic handles the case when more than one pin is selected for a
particular interrupt, depending on how the interrupt’s mode and polarity bits are set:
• In Low-Active Level Sensitive mode, the states of all pins selected for the same EINTx
functionality are digitally combined using a positive logic AND gate.
• In High-Active Level Sensitive mode, the states of all pins selected for the same
EINTx functionality are digitally combined using a positive logic OR gate.
• In Edge Sensitive mode, regardless of polarity, the pin with the lowest GPIO port
number is used. (Selecting multiple pins for an EINTx in edge-sensitive mode could
be considered a programming error.)
The signal derived by this logic processing multiple external interrupt pins is the “EINTi to
wake-up timer” signal in the following logic schematic Figure 16.
For example, if the EINT3 function is selected in the PINSEL0 and PINSEL1 registers for
pins P0.9, P0.20 and P0.30, and EINT3 is configured to be low level sensitive, the inputs
from all three pins will be logically ANDed. When more than one EINT pin is logically
ORed, the interrupt service routine can read the states of the pins from the GPIO port
using the IO0PIN and IO1PIN registers, to determine which pins caused the interrupt.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
67 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
wakeup enable
(one bit of EXTWAKE)
D
APB Bus Data
GLITCH
FILTER
EINTi
APB Read
of EXTWAKE
EINTi to wakeup
timer1
Q
PCLK
interrupt flag
(one bit of EXTINT)
EXTPOLARi
1
D
S
S
S
Q
Q
R
EXTMODEi
Q
to VIC
R
PCLK
PCLK
APB read of
EXTINT
reset
write 1 to EXTINTi
(1) See Figure 19.
Fig 16. External interrupt logic
6.7 Other system controls
Some aspects of controlling LPC21xx/LPC22xx operation that do not fit into peripheral or
other registers are grouped here.
6.7.1 System Control and Status flags register (SCS - 0xE01F C1A0)
Table 61.
UM10114
User manual
System Control and Status flags register (SCS - address 0xE01F C1A0) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
0
GPIO0M
Value
Description
Reset
value
GPIO port 0 mode selection.
0
0
GPIO port 0 is accessed via APB addresses in a fashion
compatible with previous LCP2000 devices.
1
High speed GPIO is enabled on GPIO port 0, accessed via
addresses in the on-chip memory range. This mode
includes the port masking feature described in
Section 9.5.5 “Fast GPIO port Mask register
FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010, FIO1MASK 0x3FFF C030)”
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
68 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 61.
System Control and Status flags register (SCS - address 0xE01F C1A0) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
1
GPIO1M
31:2
Value
Description
Reset
value
GPIO port 1 mode selection.
0
0
GPIO port 1 is accessed via APB addresses in a fashion
compatible with previous LCP2000 devices.
1
High speed GPIO is enabled on GPIO port 1, accessed via
addresses in the on-chip memory range. This mode
includes the port masking feature described in
Section 9.5.5 “Fast GPIO port Mask register
FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010, FIO1MASK 0x3FFF C030)”
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
6.8 Memory mapping control
The Memory Mapping Control alters the mapping of the interrupt vectors that appear
beginning at address 0x0000 0000. This allows code running in different memory spaces
to have control of the interrupts.
6.8.1 Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP - 0xE01F C040)
Whenever an exception handling is necessary, the microcontroller will fetch an instruction
residing on the exception corresponding address as described in Table 19 “ARM
exception vector locations” on page 23. The MEMMAP register determines the source of
data that will fill this table.
Table 62.
Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP - address 0xE01F C040) bit
description
Bit
Symbol Value
Description
Reset
value
1:0
MAP
00
Boot Loader Mode. Interrupt vectors are re-mapped to Boot
Block.
00[1]
01
User flash mode. Interrupt vectors are not re-mapped and
reside in Flash memory
10
User RAM Mode. Interrupt vectors are re-mapped to Static
RAM.
11
User External memory Mode. Interrupt vectors are re-mapped
to external memory.
Remark: This mode is available in 144-pin parts with external
memory controller only. This value is reserved for parts
without external memory controller, and user software should
not write ones to reserved bits.
Warning: Improper setting of this value may result in incorrect
operation of the device.
7:2
UM10114
User manual
-
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
69 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
[1]
The hardware reset value of the MAP1:0 bits is 00 for LPC21xx/LPC22xx parts. The apparent reset value
visible to the user is different because it is altered by the Boot Loader code, which always runs initially at
reset.
6.8.2 Memory mapping control usage notes
The Memory Mapping Control simply selects one out of three available sources of data
(sets of 64 bytes each) necessary for handling ARM exceptions (interrupts).
For example, whenever a Software Interrupt request is generated, the ARM core will
always fetch 32-bit data residing on 0x0000 0008 see Table 19 “ARM exception vector
locations” on page 23. This means that when MEMMAP[1:0]=10 (User RAM Mode), a
read/fetch from 0x0000 0008 will provide data stored in 0x4000 0008. In case of
MEMMAP[1:0]=00 (Boot Loader Mode), a read/fetch from 0x0000 0008 will provide data
available also at 0x7FFF E008 (Boot Block remapped from on-chip Bootloader).
MEMMAP[1:1]=11 (User External Memory Mode) will result in fetching data from off-chip
memory at location 0x8000 0008.
6.9 Phase Locked Loop (PLL)
The PLL accepts an input clock frequency in the range of 10 MHz to 25 MHz only. The
input frequency is multiplied up the range of 10 MHz to 75 MHz for the CCLK clock using
a Current Controlled Oscillators (CCO). The multiplier can be an integer value from 1 to
32 (in practice, the multiplier value cannot be higher than 7 on the LPC21xx/LPC22xx due
to the upper frequency limit of the CPU). The CCO operates in the range of 156 MHz to
320 MHz, so there is an additional divider in the loop to keep the CCO within its frequency
range while the PLL is providing the desired output frequency. The output divider may be
set to divide by 2, 4, 8, or 16 to produce the output clock. Since the minimum output
divider value is 2, it is insured that the PLL output has a 50% duty cycle. A block diagram
of the PLL is shown in Figure 17.
PLL activation is controlled via the PLLCON register. The PLL multiplier and divider
values are controlled by the PLLCFG register. These two registers are protected in order
to prevent accidental alteration of PLL parameters or deactivation of the PLL. Since all
chip operations, including the Watchdog Timer, are dependent on the PLL when it is
providing the chip clock, accidental changes to the PLL setup could result in unexpected
behavior of the microcontroller. The protection is accomplished by a feed sequence
similar to that of the Watchdog Timer. Details are provided in the description of the
PLLFEED register.
The PLL is turned off and bypassed following a chip reset and when by entering
Power-down mode. The PLL is enabled by software only. The program must configure
and activate the PLL, wait for the PLL to Lock, then connect to the PLL as a clock source.
6.9.1 Register description
The PLL is controlled by the registers shown in Table 63. More detailed descriptions
follow.
Warning: Improper setting of the PLL values may result in incorrect operation of the
device!
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
70 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 63.
PLL registers
Name
Description
PLLCON
PLL Control Register. Holding register for updating PLL control bits. R/W
Values written to this register do not take effect until a valid PLL feed
sequence has taken place.
0
0xE01F C080
PLLCFG
PLL Configuration Register. Holding register for updating PLL
R/W
configuration values. Values written to this register do not take effect
until a valid PLL feed sequence has taken place.
0
0xE01F C084
PLLSTAT
PLL Status Register. Read-back register for PLL control and
configuration information. If PLLCON or PLLCFG have been written
to, but a PLL feed sequence has not yet occurred, they will not
reflect the current PLL state. Reading this register provides the
actual values controlling the PLL, as well as the status of the PLL.
0
0xE01F C088
PLLFEED
PLL Feed Register. This register enables loading of the PLL control WO
and configuration information from the PLLCON and PLLCFG
registers into the shadow registers that actually affect PLL operation.
NA
0xE01F C08C
[1]
Access Reset
Address
value[1]
RO
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
PLLC
CLOCK
SYNCHRONIZATION
0
direct
PSEL[1:0]
PD
PD
PLLE
0
bypass
FOSC
1
PLOCK
PHASEFREQUENCY
DETECTOR
CCO
FCCO
CD
0
/2P
0
0
CCLK
1
1
PD
FOUT
CD
DIV-BY-M
MSEL<4:0>
MSEL[4:0]
Fig 17. PLL block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
71 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.9.2 PLL Control register (PLLCON - 0xE01F C080)
The PLLCON register contains the bits that enable and connect the PLL. Enabling the
PLL allows it to attempt to lock to the current settings of the multiplier and divider values.
Connecting the PLL causes the processor and all chip functions to run from the PLL
output clock. Changes to the PLLCON register do not take effect until a correct PLL feed
sequence has been given (see Section 6.9.7 “PLL Feed register (PLLFEED 0xE01F C08C)” and Section 6.9.3 “PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - 0xE01F C084)”
on page 72).
Table 64.
PLL Control register (PLLCON - address 0xE01F C080) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
PLLE
0
PLL Enable. When one, and after a valid PLL feed, this bit will
activate the PLL and allow it to lock to the requested frequency. See
PLLSTAT register, Table 66.
1
PLLC
PLL Connect. When PLLC and PLLE are both set to one, and after a 0
valid PLL feed, connects the PLL as the clock source for the
microcontroller. Otherwise, the oscillator clock is used directly by the
microcontroller. See PLLSTAT register, Table 66.
7:2
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
The PLL must be set up, enabled, and Lock established before it may be used as a clock
source. When switching from the oscillator clock to the PLL output or vice versa, internal
circuitry synchronizes the operation in order to ensure that glitches are not generated.
Hardware does not insure that the PLL is locked before it is connected or automatically
disconnect the PLL if lock is lost during operation. In the event of loss of PLL lock, it is
likely that the oscillator clock has become unstable and disconnecting the PLL will not
remedy the situation.
6.9.3 PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - 0xE01F C084)
The PLLCFG register contains the PLL multiplier and divider values. Changes to the
PLLCFG register do not take effect until a correct PLL feed sequence has been given (see
Section 6.9.7 “PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - 0xE01F C08C)” on page 74). Calculations
for the PLL frequency, and multiplier and divider values are found in the PLL Frequency
Calculation section on page 74.
Table 65.
PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - address 0xE01F C084) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
4:0
MSEL
PLL Multiplier value. Supplies the value "M" in the PLL frequency
calculations.
0
Note: For details on selecting the right value for MSEL see
Section 6.9.9 “PLL frequency calculation” on page 74.
6:5
PSEL
PLL Divider value. Supplies the value "P" in the PLL frequency
calculations.
0
Note: For details on selecting the right value for PSEL see
Section 6.9.9 “PLL frequency calculation” on page 74.
7
UM10114
User manual
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
72 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.9.4 PLL Status register (PLLSTAT - 0xE01F C088)
The read-only PLLSTAT register provides the actual PLL parameters that are in effect at
the time it is read, as well as the PLL status. PLLSTAT may disagree with values found in
PLLCON and PLLCFG because changes to those registers do not take effect until a
proper PLL feed has occurred (see Section 6.9.7 “PLL Feed register (PLLFEED 0xE01F C08C)”).
Table 66.
PLL Status register (PLLSTAT - address 0xE01F C088) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
4:0
MSEL
Read-back for the PLL Multiplier value. This is the value currently
used by the PLL.
0
6:5
PSEL
Read-back for the PLL Divider value. This is the value currently
used by the PLL.
0
7
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
8
PLLE
Read-back for the PLL Enable bit. When one, the PLL is currently 0
activated. When zero, the PLL is turned off. This bit is automatically
cleared when Power-down mode is activated.
9
PLLC
Read-back for the PLL Connect bit. When PLLC and PLLE are both 0
one, the PLL is connected as the clock source for the
microcontroller. When either PLLC or PLLE is zero, the PLL is
bypassed and the oscillator clock is used directly by the
microcontroller. This bit is automatically cleared when Power-down
mode is activated.
10
PLOCK
Reflects the PLL Lock status. When zero, the PLL is not locked.
When one, the PLL is locked onto the requested frequency.
15:11
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
0
6.9.5 PLL Interrupt
The PLOCK bit in the PLLSTAT register is connected to the interrupt controller. This
allows for software to turn on the PLL and continue with other functions without having to
wait for the PLL to achieve lock. When the interrupt occurs (PLOCK = 1), the PLL may be
connected, and the interrupt disabled. For details on how to enable and disable the PLL
interrupt, see Section 5.5.4 “Interrupt Enable Register (VICIntEnable - 0xFFFF F010)” on
page 47 and Section 5.5.5 “Interrupt Enable Clear Register (VICIntEnClear 0xFFFF F014)” on page 48.
6.9.6 PLL Modes
The combinations of PLLE and PLLC are shown in Table 67.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
73 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 67.
PLL Control bit combinations
PLLC
PLLE
PLL Function
0
0
PLL is turned off and disconnected. The CCLK equals (system runs from) the
unmodified clock input.
0
1
The PLL is active, but not yet connected. The PLL can be connected after
PLOCK is asserted.
1
0
Same as 00 combination. This prevents the possibility of the PLL being
connected without also being enabled.
1
1
The PLL is active and has been connected as the system clock source.
CCLK/system clock equals the PLL output.
6.9.7 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - 0xE01F C08C)
A correct feed sequence must be written to the PLLFEED register in order for changes to
the PLLCON and PLLCFG registers to take effect. The feed sequence is:
1. Write the value 0xAA to PLLFEED.
2. Write the value 0x55 to PLLFEED.
The two writes must be in the correct sequence, and must be consecutive APB bus
cycles. The latter requirement implies that interrupts must be disabled for the duration of
the PLL feed operation. If either of the feed values is incorrect, or one of the previously
mentioned conditions is not met, any changes to the PLLCON or PLLCFG register will not
become effective.
Table 68.
PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - address 0xE01F C08C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
7:0
PLLFEED
The PLL feed sequence must be written to this register in order for
PLL configuration and control register changes to take effect.
0x00
6.9.8 PLL and Power-down mode
Power-down mode automatically turns off and disconnects activated PLL. Wakeup from
Power-down mode does not automatically restore the PLL settings, this must be done in
software. Typically, a routine to activate the PLL, wait for lock, and then connect the PLL
can be called at the beginning of any interrupt service routine that might be called due to
the wakeup. It is important not to attempt to restart the PLL by simply feeding it when
execution resumes after a wakeup from Power-down mode. This would enable and
connect the PLL at the same time, before PLL lock is established.
6.9.9 PLL frequency calculation
The PLL equations use the following parameters:
Table 69.
UM10114
User manual
Elements determining PLL’s frequency
Element
Description
FOSC
the frequency from the crystal oscillator/external oscillator
FCCO
the frequency of the PLL current controlled oscillator
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
74 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 69.
Elements determining PLL’s frequency
Element
Description
CCLK
the PLL output frequency (also the processor clock frequency)
M
PLL Multiplier value from the MSEL bits in the PLLCFG register
P
PLL Divider value from the PSEL bits in the PLLCFG register
The PLL output frequency (when the PLL is both active and connected) is given by:
CCLK = M FOSC or CCLK = FCCO / (2 P)
The CCO frequency can be computed as:
FCCO = CCLK 2 P or FCCO = FOSC M 2 P
The PLL inputs and settings must meet the following:
• FOSC is in the range of 10 MHz to 25 MHz.
• CCLK is in the range of 10 MHz to Fmax (the maximum allowed frequency for the
microcontroller - determined by the system microcontroller is embedded in).
• FCCO is in the range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz.
6.9.10 Procedure for determining PLL settings
If a particular application uses the PLL, its configuration may be determined as follows:
1. Choose the desired processor operating frequency (CCLK). This may be based on
processor throughput requirements, need to support a specific set of UART baud
rates, etc. Bear in mind that peripheral devices may be running from a lower clock
than the processor (see Section 6.12 “APB divider” on page 81).
2. Choose an oscillator frequency (FOSC). CCLK must be the whole (non-fractional)
multiple of FOSC.
3. Calculate the value of M to configure the MSEL bits. M = CCLK / FOSC. M must be in
the range of 1 to 32. The value written to the MSEL bits in PLLCFG is M 1 (see
Table 71.
4. Find a value for P to configure the PSEL bits, such that FCCO is within its defined
frequency limits. FCCO is calculated using the equation given above. P must have one
of the values 1, 2, 4, or 8. The value written to the PSEL bits in PLLCFG is 00 for
P = 1; 01 for P = 2; 10 for P = 4; 11 for P = 8 (see Table 70).
Table 70.
UM10114
User manual
PLL Divider values
PSEL Bits (PLLCFG bits [6:5])
Value of P
00
1
01
2
10
4
11
8
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
75 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 71.
PLL Multiplier values
MSEL Bits (PLLCFG bits [4:0])
Value of M
00000
1
00001
2
00010
3
00011
4
...
...
11110
31
11111
32
6.9.11 PLL configuring examples
Example: System design asks for FOSC= 10 MHz and requires CCLK = 60 MHz.
Based on these specifications, M = CCLK / Fosc = 60 MHz / 10 MHz = 6. Consequently,
M - 1 = 5 will be written as PLLCFG[4:0].
Value for P can be derived from P = FCCO / (CCLK x 2), using condition that FCCO must be
in range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz. Assuming the lowest allowed frequency for
FCCO = 156 MHz, P = 156 MHz / (2 x 60 MHz) = 1.3. The highest FCCO frequency criteria
produces P = 2.67. The only solution for P that satisfies both of these requirements and is
listed in Table 70 is P = 2. Therefore, PLLCFG[6:5] = 1 will be used.
6.10 Power control
The LPC21xx/LPC22xx supports two reduced power modes: Idle mode and Power-down
mode. In Idle mode, execution of instructions is suspended until either a reset or interrupt
occurs. Peripheral functions continue operation during Idle mode and may generate
interrupts to cause the processor to resume execution. Idle mode eliminates power used
by the processor itself, memory systems and related controllers, and internal buses.
In Power-down mode, the oscillator is shut down and the chip receives no internal clocks.
The processor state and registers, peripheral registers, and internal SRAM values are
preserved throughout Power-down mode and the logic levels of chip pins remain static.
The Power-down mode can be terminated and normal operation resumed by either a
reset or certain specific interrupts that are able to function without clocks. Since all
dynamic operation of the chip is suspended, Power-down mode reduces chip power
consumption to nearly zero.
Entry to Power-down and Idle modes must be coordinated with program execution.
Wakeup from Power-down or Idle modes via an interrupt resumes program execution in
such a way that no instructions are lost, incomplete, or repeated. Wake up from
Power-down mode is discussed further in Section 6.13 “Wakeup timer” on page 83.
A Power Control for Peripherals feature allows individual peripherals to be turned off if
they are not needed in the application, resulting in additional power savings.
6.10.1 Register description
The Power Control function contains two registers, as shown in Table 72. More detailed
descriptions follow.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
76 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 72.
Power control registers
Name
Description
Access Reset
value[1]
PCON
Power Control Register. This register contains R/W
control bits that enable the two reduced power
operating modes of the microcontroller. See
Table 73.
PCONP Power Control for Peripherals Register. This R/W
register contains control bits that enable and
disable individual peripheral functions,
Allowing elimination of power consumption by
peripherals that are not needed.
[1]
0x00
Address
0xE01F C0C0
0x0000 1FBE 0xE01F C0C4
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
6.10.2 Power Control register (PCON - 0xE01F COCO)
The PCON register contains two bits. Writing a one to the corresponding bit causes entry
to either the Power-down or Idle mode. If both bits are set, Power-down mode is entered.
Table 73.
Power Control register (PCON - address 0xE01F COCO) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
IDL
Idle mode - when 1, this bit causes the processor clock to be stopped,
while on-chip peripherals remain active. Any enabled interrupt from a
peripheral or an external interrupt source will cause the processor to
resume execution.
0
1
PD
Power-down mode - when 1, this bit causes the oscillator and all
0
on-chip clocks to be stopped. A wakeup condition from an external
interrupt can cause the oscillator to restart, the PD bit to be cleared, and
the processor to resume execution.
7:2
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
6.10.3 Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP - 0xE01F COC4)
The PCONP register allows turning off selected peripheral functions for the purpose of
saving power. This is accomplished by gating off the clock source to the specified
peripheral blocks. A few peripheral functions cannot be turned off (i.e. the Watchdog timer,
GPIO, the Pin Connect block, and the System Control block). Some peripherals,
particularly those that include analog functions, may consume power that is not clock
dependent. These peripherals may contain a separate disable control that turns off
additional circuitry to reduce power. Each bit in PCONP controls one of the peripherals.
The bit numbers correspond to the related peripheral number as shown in the APB
peripheral map Table 18 “APB peripheries and base addresses”.
If a peripheral control bit is 1, that peripheral is enabled. If a peripheral bit is 0, that
peripheral is disabled to conserve power. For example, if bit 7 is 1, the I2C interface is
enabled. If bit 7 is 0, the I2C1 interface is disabled.
Important: valid read from a peripheral register and valid write to a peripheral
register is possible only if that peripheral is enabled in the PCONP register!
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
77 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
Table 74.
Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP - address 0xE01F C0C4) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
1
PCTIM0
Timer/Counter 0 power/clock control bit.
1
2
PCTIM1
Timer/Counter 1 power/clock control bit.
1
3
PCUART0
UART0 power/clock control bit.
1
4
PCUART1
UART1 power/clock control bit.
1
5
PCPWM0
PWM0 power/clock control bit.
1
6
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
7
PCI2C
The I2C interface power/clock control bit.
1
8
PCSPI0
The SPI0 interface power/clock control bit.
1
9
PCRTC
The RTC power/clock control bit.
1
10
PCSPI1
The SPI1 interface power/clock control bit.
1
11
PCEMC
The EMC power/clock control bit.
1
12
PCAD
A/D Converter (ADC) power/clock control bit.
1
Note: Clear the PDN bit in the ADCR before clearing this bit, and set
this bit before setting PDN.
13
PCCAN1
CAN1 controller bit.
1
14
PCCAN2
CAN2 controller bit.
1
15
PCCAN3
CAN3 controller bit.
1
16
PCCAN4
CAN4 controller bit.
1
20:17
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
21
PCSSP
The SSP interface power/clock control bit
0
Remark: Setting this bit to 1 and bit 10 (PSPI1) to 0, selects the SPI1
interface as SSP interface. At reset, SPI1 is enabled. See
Section 14.3 on page 218.
31:22
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
6.10.4 Power control usage notes
After every reset, the PCONP register contains the value that enables all interfaces and
peripherals controlled by the PCONP. Therefore, apart from proper configuring via
peripheral dedicated registers, the user’s application has no need to access the PCONP
in order to start using any of the on-board peripherals.
Power saving oriented systems should have 1s in the PCONP register only in positions
that match peripherals really used in the application. All other bits, declared to be
Reserved or dedicated to the peripherals not used in the current application, must be
cleared to 0.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
78 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.11 Reset
Reset has two sources on the LPC21xx/LPC22xx: the RESET pin and Watchdog reset.
The RESET pin is a Schmitt trigger input pin with an additional glitch filter. Assertion of
chip reset by any source starts the wakeup timer (see description in Section 6.13
“Wakeup timer” in this chapter), causing reset to remain asserted until the external reset is
de-asserted, the oscillator is running, a fixed number of clocks have passed, and the
on-chip circuitry has completed its initialization. The relationship between reset, the
oscillator, and the wakeup timer during the startup sequence are shown in Figure 18. See
Figure 19 for a block diagram of the Reset logic.
The reset glitch filter allows the processor to ignore external reset pulses that are very
short, and also determines the minimum duration of RESET that must be asserted in
order to guarantee a chip reset. Once asserted, RESET pin can be deasserted only when
crystal oscillator is fully running and an adequate signal is present on the XTAL1 pin of the
microcontroller. Assuming that an external crystal is used in the crystal oscillator
subsystem, after power on, the RESET pin should be asserted for 10 ms. For all
subsequent resets, when the crystal oscillator is already running and a stable signal is on
the XTAL1 pin, the RESET pin needs to be asserted for 300 ns only.
When the internal reset is removed, the processor begins executing at address 0, which is
initially the reset vector mapped from the Boot Block. At that point, all of the processor and
peripheral registers have been initialized to predetermined values.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
79 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
VDD(3V3), VDD(1V8) sequencing
(no sequencing requirements)[2]
oscillator starts
0.5 ms[4]
valid clocks
oscillator
VDD(3V3)
3.0 V[3]
GND
VDD(1V8)
1.65 V[3]
GND
reset
boot time
clock stability
time
4096 clocks
reset time[1]
1000
clocks
PLL
lock time
= 100 s
SPI
boot
time
jump to user code
processor status
002aad483
(1) Reset time: The time reset needs to be held LOW. This time depends on system parameters such as VDD(1V8), V3V3 rise time,
and the oscillator startup time. There are no restrictions from the microcontroller except that VDD(1V8), V3V3, and the oscillator
must be within the specific operating range.
(2) There are no sequencing requirements for V3V3 and VDD(1V8).
(3) When V3V3 and VDD(1V8) reach the minimum voltage, a reset is registered within two valid oscillator clocks.
(4) Typical startup time is 0.5 ms for a 12 MHz crystal.
Fig 18. Startup sequence diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
80 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
external
reset
reset to the
on-chip circuitry
C
Q
watchdog
reset
reset to
PCON.PD
S
WAKE-UP TIMER
START
power
down
COUNT 2 n
EINT0 wake-up
EINT1 wake-up
C
Q
oscillator
output (FOSC)
S
EINT2 wake-up
write “1”
from APB
Reset
EINT3 wake-up
PLL
ABP read of
PDBIT
in PCON
FOSC
to CPU
Fig 19. Reset block diagram including the wakeup timer
External and internal resets have some small differences. An external reset causes the
value of certain pins to be latched to configure the part. External circuitry cannot
determine when an internal reset occurs in order to allow setting up those special pins, so
those latches are not reloaded during an internal reset. Pins that are examined during an
external reset for various purposes are: P1.20/TRACESYNC, P1.26/RTCK (see
Section 7.2, Section 7.3, and Section 8.6 . Pin P0.14 (see Section 21.5) is examined by
on-chip bootloader when this code is executed after every reset.
6.12 APB divider
The APB Divider determines the relationship between the processor clock (CCLK) and the
clock used by peripheral devices (PCLK). The APB Divider serves two purposes.
1. The first purpose is to provide peripherals with desired PCLK via APB bus so that they
can operate at the speed chosen for the ARM processor. In order to achieve this, the
APB bus may be slowed down to one half or one fourth of the processor clock rate.
Because the APB bus must work properly at power up (and its timing cannot be
altered if it does not work since the APB divider control registers reside on the APB
bus), the default condition at reset is for the APB bus to run at one quarter speed.
2. The second purpose of the APB Divider is to allow power savings when an application
does not require any peripherals to run at the full processor rate.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
81 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
The connection of the APB Divider relative to the oscillator and the processor clock is
shown in Figure 20. Because the APB Divider is connected to the PLL output, the PLL
remains active (if it was running) during Idle mode.
6.12.1 Register description
Only one register is used to control the APB Divider.
Table 75.
APB divider register map
Name
Description
APBDIV
Controls the rate of the APB clock in relation to R/W
the processor clock.
[1]
Access Reset
Address
value[1]
0x00
0xE01F C100
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
6.12.2 APB divider register (APBDIV - 0xE01F C100)
The APB Divider register contains two bits, allowing three divider values, as shown in
Table 76.
Table 76.
APB Divider register (APBDIV - address 0xE01F C100) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value
Description
Reset
value
1:0
APBDIV
00
APB bus clock is one fourth of the processor clock.
00
01
APB bus clock is the same as the processor clock.
10
APB bus clock is one half of the processor clock.
11
Reserved. If this value is written to the APBDIV register,
it has no effect (the previous setting is retained).
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
NA
On the LPC22xx devices only, these bits control the
clock that can be driven onto the P3.23/A23/XCLK pin.
They have the same encoding as the APBDIV bits
above. Bits 13 and 27:25 in the PINSEL2 register
(Section 8.6.4) controls whether the pin carries A23 or
the clock selected by this field.
00
3:2
-
5:4
XCLKDIV
Remark: If this field and APBDIV have the same value,
the same clock is used on the APB and XCLK. (This
might be useful for external logic dealing with the APB
peripherals).
7:6
UM10114
User manual
-
00
XCLK clock is one fourth of the processor clock.
01
XCLK clock is the same as the processor clock.
10
XCLK clock is one half of the processor clock.
11
Reserved. If this value is written to the APBDIV register,
it has no effect (the previous setting is retained).
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
82 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
crystal oscillator or
external clock source
(FOSC)
processor clock
(CCLK)
PLL0
APB DIVIDER
APB clock
(PCLK)
Fig 20. APB divider connections
6.13 Wakeup timer
On the LPC21xx/LPC22xx, the wakeup timer enforces a minimum reset duration based
on the crystal oscillator and is activated whenever there is a wakeup from Power-down
mode or any type of reset.
The purpose of the wakeup timer is to ensure that the oscillator and other analog
functions required for chip operation are fully functional before the processor is allowed to
execute instructions. This is important at power on, all types of reset, and whenever any of
the aforementioned functions are turned off for any reason. Since the oscillator and other
functions are turned off during Power-down mode, any wakeup of the processor from
Power-down mode makes use of the wakeup timer.
The wakeup timer monitors the crystal oscillator to check whether it is safe to begin code
execution. When power is applied to the chip, or some event caused the chip to exit
Power-down mode, some time is required for the oscillator to produce a signal of sufficient
amplitude to drive the clock logic. The amount of time depends on many factors, including
the rate of VDD ramp (in the case of power on), the type of crystal and its electrical
characteristics (if a quartz crystal is used) as well as any other external circuitry (e.g.
capacitors), and the characteristics of the oscillator itself under the existing ambient
conditions.
Once a clock is detected, the wakeup timer counts 4096 clocks and then enables the flash
memory to initialize. When the flash memory initialization is complete, the processor is
released to execute instructions if the external reset has been deasserted. If an external
clock source is used in the system (as opposed to a crystal connected to the oscillator
pins), the possibility that there could be little or no delay for oscillator start-up must be
considered. The wakeup timer design then ensures that any other required chip functions
will be operational prior to the beginning of program execution.
Any of the various resets can bring the microcontroller out of power-down mode, as can
the external interrupts EINT3:0. When one of these interrupts is enabled for wakeup and
its selected event occurs, an oscillator wakeup cycle is started. The actual interrupt (if
any) occurs after the wakeup timer expires and is handled by the Vectored Interrupt
Controller.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
83 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
The pin multiplexing on the LPC21xx/LPC22xx (see Section 7.2, Section 7.3, and
Section 8.6) allows peripherals that share pins with external interrupts to, in effect, bring
the device out of Power-down mode. The following pin-function pairings allow interrupts
from events relating to UART0 or 1, SPI 0 or 1, or the I2C: RXD0 / EINT0, SDA / EINT1,
SSEL0 / EINT2, RXD1 / EINT3, DCD1 / EINT1, RI1 / EINT2, SSEL1 / EINT3.
To put the device in Power-down mode and allow activity on one or more of these buses
or lines to power it back up, software should reprogram the pin function to External
Interrupt, select the appropriate mode and polarity for the Interrupt, and then select
Power-down mode. Upon wakeup software should restore the pin multiplexing to the
peripheral function.
6.14 Code security vs. debugging
Applications in development typically need the debugging and tracing facilities in the
LPC21xx/LPC22xx. Later in the life cycle of an application, it may be more important to
protect the application code from observation by hostile or competitive eyes. The Code
Read Protection feature of the LPC21xx/LPC22xx allows an application to control whether
it can be debugged or protected from observation.
Details on the way Code Read Protection works can be found in Section 21.8 “Code Read
Protection (CRP)”.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
84 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
7.1 How to read this chapter
The pin configurations are identical for all 64-pin packages and all 144-pin packages with
the exception of the CAN pins which depend on the CAN configuration for each part, see
Table 77 and Table 78. Pin configurations are identical for no-suffix, /00, and /01 versions.
Table 77.
LPC21xx part-specific pin configurations 64-pin packages
LPC209, LPC2109/01
LPC2119, LPC2119/01
LPC2129, LPC2129/01
LPC2114, LPC2114/01
LPC2124, LPC2124/01
LPC2194, LPC2194/01
P0[21]/PWM5/CAP1[3]
P0[21]/PWM5/CAP1[3]
P0[21]/PWM5/RD3/CAP1[3]
Pin number
Table 79
1
P0[21]/PWM5/CAP1[3]
2
P0[22]/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0] P0[22]/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0] P0[22]/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0] P0[22]/TD3/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0]
3
P0[23]
P0[23]/RD2
P0[23]
P0[23]/RD2
5
P0[24]
P0[24]/TD2
P0[24]
P0[24]/TD2
9
P0[25]/RD1
P0[25]/RD1
P0[25]
P0[25]/RD1
10
TD1
TD1
n.c.
TD1
38
P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]
P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]
P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]
P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]/RD4
39
P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]
P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]
P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]
P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]/TD4
Table 78.
LPC22xx part-specific pin configurations 144-pin packages
LPC2210, LPC2210/01
LPC2220
LPC2212, LPC2212/01
LPC2214, LPC2214/01
LPC2290, LPC2290/01
LPC2292, LPC2292/01
LPC2294, LPC2294/01
Pin number
LQFP144
Table 81
TFBGA144
Table 80
4
C1
P0[21]/PWM5/CAP1[3]
P0[21]/PWM5/CAP1[3]
P0[21]/PWM5/RD3/CAP1[13]
5
D4
P0[22]/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0]
P0[22]/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0]
P0[22]/TD3/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0
6
D3
P0[23]
P0[23]/RD2
P0[23]/RD2
8
D1
P0[24]
P0[24]/TD2
P0[24]/TD2
21
H1
P0[25]
P0[25]/RD1
P0[25]/RD1
22
H2
n.c.
TD1
TD1
84
J13
P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]
P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]
P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]/RD4
85
H10
P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]
P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]
P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]/TD4
The SPI1 pins are shared with the SSP pins if the SSP interface is implemented. The
following parts have an SSP interface:
• LPC2109/01, LPC2119/01, LPC2129/01
• LPC2114/01, LPC2124/01
• LPC2194/01
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
85 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
•
•
•
•
LPC2210/01, LPC2220
LPC2212/01, LPC2214/01
LPC2290/01
LPC2292/01, LPC2294/01
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
49 VDD(1V8)
50 VSS
51 VDD(3V3)
52 P1[30]/TMS
53 P0[18]/CAP1[3]/MISO1/MAT1[3]
54 P0[19]/MAT1[2]/MOSI1/CAP1[2]
55 P0[20]/MAT1[3]/SSEL1/EINT3
56 P1[29]/TCK
57 RESET
58 VSSA(PLL)
59 VSSA
60 P1[28]/TDI
61 XTAL2
62 XTAL1
63 VDDA(1V8)
64 P1[27]/TDO
7.2 Pin configuration for 64-pin packages
P0[21]/PWM5/RD3/CAP1[3]
1
48 P1[20]/TRACESYNC
P0[22]/TD3/CAP0[0]/MAT0[0]
2
47 P0[17]/CAP1[2]/SCK1/MAT1[2]
P0[23]/RD2
3
46 P0[16]/EINT0/MAT0[2]/CAP0[2]
P1[19]/TRACEPKT3
4
45 P0[15]/RI1/EINT2
P0[24]/TD2
5
44 P1[21]/PIPESTAT0
VSS
6
VDDA(3V3)
7
P1[18]/TRACEPKT2
8
P0[25]/RD1
9
43 VDD(3V3)
LPC21xx
LPC21xx/01
42 VSS
41 P0[14]/DCD1/EINT1
40 P1[22]/PIPESTAT1
TD1 10
39 P0[13]/DTR1/MAT1[1]/TD4
P0[27]/AIN0/CAP0[1]/MAT0[1] 11
38 P0[12]/DSR1/MAT1[0]/RD4
P1[17]/TRACEPKT1 12
37 P0[11]/CTS1/CAP1[1]
P0[28]/AIN1/CAP0[2]/MAT0[2] 13
36 P1[23]/PIPESTAT2
P0[29]/AIN2/CAP0[3]/MAT0[3] 14
35 P0[10]/RTS1/CAP1[0]
P0[30]/AIN3/EINT3/CAP0[0] 15
34 P0[9]/RXD1/PWM6/EINT3
P1[16]/TRACEPKT0 16
P1[24]/TRACECLK 32
P0[7]/SSEL0/PWM2/EINT2 31
P0[6]/MOSI0/CAP0[2] 30
P0[5]/MISO0/MAT0[1] 29
P1[25]/EXTIN0 28
P0[4]/SCK0/CAP0[1] 27
P0[3]/SDA/MAT0[0]/EINT1 26
VSS 25
P1[26]/RTCK 24
VDD(3V3) 23
P0[2]/SCL/CAP0[0] 22
P0[1]/RXD0/PWM3/EINT0 21
P1[31]/TRST 20
P0[0]/TXD0/PWM1 19
VSS 18
VDD(1V8) 17
33 P0[8]/TXD1/PWM4
Fig 21. LPC21xx pin configuration (LQFP64 pin package)
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
86 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 79.
LPC21xx Pin description (64-pin packages)
Symbol
Pin
P0[0] to P0[31]
P0[0]/TXD0/
PWM1
19[1]
P0[1]/RXD0/
PWM3/EINT0
21[2]
P0[2]/SCL/
CAP0[0]
22[3]
P0[3]/SDA/
MAT0[0]/EINT1
26[3]
P0[4]/SCK0/
CAP0[1]
27[1]
P0[5]/MISO0/
MAT0[1]
29[1]
P0[6]/MOSI0/
CAP0[2]
30[1]
P0[7]/SSEL0/
PWM2/EINT2
31[2]
P0[8]/TXD1/
PWM4
33[1]
P0[9]/RXD1/
PWM6/EINT3
34[2]
P0[10]/RTS1/
CAP1[0]
35[1]
P0[11]/CTS1/
CAP1[1]
37[1]
P0[12]/DSR1/
MAT1[0]/RD4
38[1]
P0[13]/DTR1/
MAT1[1]/TD4
39[1]
UM10114
User manual
Type Description
I/O
Port 0 is a 32-bit bidirectional I/O port with individual direction controls for each bit.
The operation of port 0 pins depends upon the pin function selected via the Pin
Connect Block. Pins 26 and 31 of port 0 are not available.
O
TXD0 — Transmitter output for UART0.
O
PWM1 — Pulse Width Modulator output 1.
I
RXD0 — Receiver input for UART0.
O
PWM3 — Pulse Width Modulator output 3.
I
EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input.
I/O
SCL — I2C-bus clock input/output. Open-drain output (for I2C-bus compliance).
I
CAP0[0] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
I/O
SDA — I2C-bus data input/output. Open-drain output (for I2C-bus compliance).
O
MAT0[0] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
I
EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
I/O
SCK0 — Serial clock for SPI0. SPI clock output from master or input to slave.
I
CAP0[1] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
I/O
MISO0 — Master In Slave Out for SPI0. Data input to SPI master or data output
from SPI slave.
O
MAT0[1] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
I/O
MOSI0 — Master Out Slave In for SPI0. Data output from SPI master or data input
to SPI slave.
I
CAP0[2] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
SSEL0 — Slave Select for SPI0. Selects the SPI interface as a slave.
O
PWM2 — Pulse Width Modulator output 2.
I
EINT2 — External interrupt 2 input.
O
TXD1 — Transmitter output for UART1.
O
PWM4 — Pulse Width Modulator output 4.
I
RXD1 — Receiver input for UART1.
O
PWM6 — Pulse Width Modulator output 6.
I
EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
O
RTS1 — Request to Send output for UART1.
I
CAP1[0] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 0.
I
CTS1 — Clear to Send input for UART1.
I
CAP1[1] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 1.
I
DSR1 — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
O
MAT1[0] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 0.
O
RD4 — CAN4 receiver input.
O
DTR1 — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1.
O
MAT1[1] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 1.
O
TD4 — CAN4 transmitter output.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
87 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 79.
LPC21xx Pin description (64-pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin
Type Description
P0[14]/DCD1/
EINT1
41[2]
I
DCD1 — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
I
EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW forces on-chip bootloader to take
control of the part after reset.
P0[15]/RI1/EINT2
45[2]
P0[16]/EINT0/
MAT0[2]/CAP0[2]
46[2]
P0[17]/CAP1[2]/
SCK1/MAT1[2]
47[1]
P0[18]/CAP1[3]/
MISO1/MAT1[3]
53[1]
P0[19]/MAT1[2]/
MOSI1/CAP1[2]
54[1]
P0[20]/MAT1[3]/
SSEL1/EINT3
55[2]
P0[21]/PWM5/
RD3/CAP1[3]
1[1]
P0[22]/TD3/
CAP0[0]/MAT0[0]
2[1]
P0[23]/RD2
3[1]
P0[24]/TD2
5[1]
I
RI1 — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
I
EINT2 — External interrupt 2 input.
I
EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input.
O
MAT0[2] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
CAP0[2] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
CAP1[2] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 2.
I/O
SCK1 — Serial Clock for SPI1/SSP. SPI clock output from master or input to slave.
O
MAT1[2] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 2.
I
CAP1[3] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 3.
I/O
MISO1 — Master In Slave Out for SPI1/SSP. Data input to SPI master or data
output from SPI slave.
O
MAT1[3] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 3.
O
MAT1[2] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 2.
I/O
MOSI1 — Master Out Slave In for SPI1/SSP. Data output from SPI master or data
input to SPI slave.
I
CAP1[2] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 2.
O
MAT1[3] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 3.
I
SSEL1 — Slave Select for SPI1/SSP. Selects the SPI interface as a slave.
I
EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
O
PWM5 — Pulse Width Modulator output 5.
I
RD3 — CAN3 receiver input.
I
CAP1[3] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 3.
O
TD3 — CAN3 transmitter output.
I
CAP0[0] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
O
MAT0[0] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
I
CAN2 receiver input.
O
CAN2 transmitter output.
P0[25]/RD1
9[1]
O
CAN1 receiver input.
P0[27]/AIN0/
CAP0[1]/MAT0[1]
11[4]
I
AIN0 — A/D converter, input 0. This analog input is always connected to its pin.
I
CAP0[1] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
O
MAT0[1] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
I
AIN1 — A/D converter, input 1. This analog input is always connected to its pin.
I
CAP0[2] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2.
O
MAT0[2] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
AIN2 — A/D converter, input 2. This analog input is always connected to its pin.
I
CAP0[3] — Capture input for Timer 0, Channel 3.
O
MAT0[3] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 3.
P0[28]/AIN1/
CAP0[2]/MAT0[2]
13[4]
P0[29]/AIN2/
CAP0[3]/MAT0[3]
14[4]
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
88 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 79.
LPC21xx Pin description (64-pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin
Type Description
P0[30]/AIN3/
EINT3/CAP0[0]
15[4]
I
AIN3 — A/D converter, input 3. This analog input is always connected to its pin.
I
EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
P1[0] to P1[31]
I
CAP0[0] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
I/O
Port 1 is a 32-bit bidirectional I/O port with individual direction controls for each bit.
The operation of port 1 pins depends upon the pin function selected via the Pin
Connect Block. Pins 0 through 15 of port 1 are not available.
P1[16]/
TRACEPKT0
16[5]
O
Trace Packet, bit 0. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[17]/
TRACEPKT1
12[5]
O
Trace Packet, bit 1. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[18]/
TRACEPKT2
8[5]
O
Trace Packet, bit 2. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[19]/
TRACEPKT3
4[5]
O
Trace Packet, bit 3. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[20]/
TRACESYNC
48[5]
O
P1[21]/
PIPESTAT0
44[5]
O
Pipeline Status, bit 0. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[22]/
PIPESTAT1
40[5]
O
Pipeline Status, bit 1. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[23]/
PIPESTAT2
36[5]
O
Pipeline Status, bit 2. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[24]/
TRACECLK
32[5]
O
Trace Clock. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
P1[25]/EXTIN0
28[5]
I
External Trigger Input. Standard I/O with internal pull-up.
P1[26]/RTCK
24[5]
I/O
Returned Test Clock output. Extra signal added to the JTAG port. Assists debugger
synchronization when processor frequency varies. Bidirectional pin with internal
pull-up.
Trace Synchronization. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW, enables pins P1[25:16] to operate as
Trace port after reset.
Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW, enables pins P1[31:26] to operate as
Debug port after reset.
P1[27]/TDO
64[5]
O
Test Data out for JTAG interface.
P1[28]/TDI
60[5]
I
Test Data in for JTAG interface.
P1[29]/TCK
56[5]
I
Test Clock for JTAG interface. This clock must be slower than 16 of the CPU clock
(CCLK) for the JTAG interface to operate.
P1[30]/TMS
52[5]
I
Test Mode Select for JTAG interface.
P1[31]/TRST
20[5]
I
Test Reset for JTAG interface.
TD1
10
O
CAN1 transmitter output.
RESET
57
I
external reset input; a LOW on this pin resets the device, causing I/O ports and
peripherals to take on their default states, and processor execution to begin at
address 0. TTL with hysteresis, 5 V tolerant.
XTAL1
62
I
input to the oscillator circuit and internal clock generator circuits.
XTAL2
61
O
output from the oscillator amplifier.
VSS
6, 18, 25,
42, 50
I
ground: 0 V reference.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
89 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 79.
LPC21xx Pin description (64-pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin
Type Description
VSSA
59
I
analog ground; 0 V reference. This should nominally be the same voltage as VSS,
but should be isolated to minimize noise and error.
VSSA(PLL)
58
I
PLL analog ground; 0 V reference. This should nominally be the same voltage as
VSS, but should be isolated to minimize noise and error.
VDD(1V8)
17, 49
I
1.8 V core power supply; this is the power supply voltage for internal circuitry.
VDDA(1V8)
63
I
analog 1.8 V core power supply; this is the power supply voltage for internal
circuitry. This should be nominally the same voltage as VDD(1V8) but should be
isolated to minimize noise and error.
VDD(3V3)
23, 43, 51
I
3.3 V pad power supply; this is the power supply voltage for the I/O ports.
VDDA(3V3)
7
I
analog 3.3 V pad power supply; this should be nominally the same voltage as
VDD(3V3) but should be isolated to minimize noise and error. The level on this pin
also provides the voltage reference level for the ADC.
[1]
5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control.
[2]
5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control. If configured for an input
function, this pad utilizes built-in glitch filter that blocks pulses shorter than 3 ns.
[3]
Open drain 5 V tolerant digital I/O I2C-bus 400 kHz specification compatible pad. It requires external pull-up to provide an output
functionality. Open-drain functionality applies to all output functions on this pin.
[4]
5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O (with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control) and analog input function. If configured
for a digital input function, this pad utilizes built-in glitch filter that blocks pulses shorter than 3 ns. When configured as an ADC input,
digital section of the pad is disabled.
[5]
5 V tolerant pad with built-in pull-up resistor providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control.
The pull-up resistor’s value ranges from 60 k to 300 k.
109
144
7.3 Pin configuration for 144-pin packages
1
108
LPC22xx
72
73
37
36
(1) Pin configuration is identical for devices with and without /00 and /01 suffixes.
Fig 22. LQFP144 pinning
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
90 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
ball A1
index area
LPC22xx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
Transparent top view
(1) Pin configuration is identical for devices with and without /00 and /01 suffixes.
Fig 23. TFBGA144 pinning
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
91 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 80.
LPC22xx Ball allocation
Row Column
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
A
P2[22]/
D22
VDDA(1V8)
P1[28]/
TDI
P2[21]/
D21
P2[18]/
D18
P2[14]/
D14
P1[29]/
TCK
P2[11]/
D11
P2[10]/
D10
P2[7]/D7
VDD(3V3)
V
B
VDD(3V3)
P1[27]/
TDO
XTAL2
VSSA(PLL)
P2[19]/
D19
P2[15]/
D15
P2[12]/
D12
P0[20]/
MAT1[3]/
SSEL1/
EINT3
VDD(3V3)
P2[6]/D6
VSS
P
C
P0[21]/
PWM5/
CAP1[3]
VSS
XTAL1
VSSA
RESET
P2[16]/
D16
P2[13]/
D13
P0[19]/
MAT1[2]/
MOSI1/
CAP1[2]
P2[9]/D9
P2[5]/D5
P2[2]/D2
P
D
P0[24]/
TD2
P1[19]/
TRACE
PKT3
P0[23]/
RD2
P0[22]/
CAP0[0]/
MAT0[0]
P2[20]/
D20
P2[17]/
D17
VSS
P0[18]/
CAP1[3]/
MISO1/
MAT1[3]
P2[8]/D8
P1[30]/
TMS
VSS
P
T
S
E
P2[25]/
D25
P2[24]/
D24
P2[23]/
D23
VSS
P0[16]/
EINT0/
MAT0[2]/
CAP0[2]
P0[15]/
RI1/
EINT2
P
F
P2[27]/
D27/
BOOT1
P1[18]/
TRACE
PKT2
VDDA(3V3)
P2[26]/
D26/
BOOT0
P3[31]/
BLS0
P1[21]/
PIPE
STAT0
V
G
P2[29]/
D29
P2[28]/
D28
P2[30]/
P2[31]/
D30/AIN4 D31/AIN5
P0[14]/
DCD1/
EINT1
P1[0]/CS0 P
H
P0[25]/
RD1
TD1
P0[27]/
AIN0/
CAP0[1]/
MAT0[1]
P1[17]/
TRACE
PKT1
P0[13]/
DTR1/
MAT1[1]
P1[22]/
PIPE
STAT1
P
J
P0[28]/
AIN1/
CAP0[2]/
MAT0[2]
VSS
P3[29]/
BLS2/
AIN6
P3[28]/
BLS3/
AIN7
P3[3]/A3
P1[23]/
PIPE
STAT2
P
C
C
K
P3[27]/
WE
P3[26]/
CS1
VDD(3V3)
P3[22]/
A22
P3[20]/
A20
P0[1]/
RXD0/
PWM3/
EINT0
P3[14]/
A14
P1[25]/
EXTIN0
P3[11]/
A11
VDD(3V3)
P0[10]/
RTS1/
CAP1[0]
V
L
P0[29]/
AIN2/
CAP0[3]/
MAT0[3]
P0[30]/
AIN3/
EINT3/
CAP0[0]
P1[16]/
TRACE
PKT0
P0[0]/
TXD0/
PWM1
P3[19]/
A19
P0[2]/
SCL/
CAP0[0]
P3[15]/
A15
P0[4]/
SCK0/
CAP0[1]
P3[12]/
A12
VSS
P1[24]/
TRACE
CLK
P
T
P
M
P3[25]/
CS2
P3[24]/
CS3
VDD(3V3)
P1[31]/
TRST
P3[18]/
A18
VDD(3V3)
P3[16]/
A16
P0[3]/
SDA/
MAT0[0]/
EINT1
P3[13]/
A13
P3[9]/A9
P0[7]/
SSEL0/
PWM2/
EINT2
P
N
VDD(1V8)
VSS
P3[23]/
A23/
XCLK
P3[21]/
A21
P3[17]/
A17
P1[26]/
RTCK
VSS
VDD(3V3)
P0[5]/
MISO0/
MAT0[1]
P3[10]/
A10
P0[6]/
MOSI0/
CAP0[2]
P
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
92 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 81.
LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages)
Symbol
Pin (LQFP)
Pin (TFBGA) Type
P0[0] to P0[31]
I/O
Description
Port 0: Port 0 is a 32-bit bidirectional I/O port with individual
direction controls for each bit. The operation of port 0 pins
depends upon the pin function selected via the Pin Connect
Block.
Pins 26 and 31 of port 0 are not available.
P0[0]/TXD0/
PWM1
42[1]
L4[1]
P0[1]/RXD0/
PWM3/EINT0
49[2]
K6[2]
P0[2]/SCL/
CAP0[0]
50[3]
L6[3]
P0[3]/SDA/
MAT0[0]/EINT1
58[3]
M8[3]
P0[4]/SCK0/
CAP0[1]
59[1]
L8[1]
P0[5]/MISO0/
MAT0[1]
61[1]
N9[1]
P0[6]/MOSI0/
CAP0[2]
68[1]
N11[1]
P0[7]/SSEL0/
PWM2/EINT2
69[2]
M11[2]
O
TXD0 — Transmitter output for UART0.
O
PWM1 — Pulse Width Modulator output 1.
I
RXD0 — Receiver input for UART0.
O
PWM3 — Pulse Width Modulator output 3.
I
EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input
I/O
SCL — I2C-bus clock input/output. Open-drain output (for
I2C-bus compliance).
I
CAP0[0] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
I/O
SDA — I2C-bus data input/output. Open-drain output (for
I2C-bus compliance).
O
MAT0[0] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
I
EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
I/O
SCK0 — Serial clock for SPI0. SPI clock output from master
or input to slave.
I
CAP0[1] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
I/O
MISO0 — Master In Slave OUT for SPI0. Data input to SPI
master or data output from SPI slave.
O
MAT0[1] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
I/O
MOSI0 — Master Out Slave In for SPI0. Data output from SPI
master or data input to SPI slave.
I
CAP0[2] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
SSEL0 — Slave Select for SPI0. Selects the SPI interface as
a slave.
O
PWM2 — Pulse Width Modulator output 2.
I
EINT2 — External interrupt 2 input.
P0[8]/TXD1/
PWM4
75[1]
L12[1]
O
TXD1 — Transmitter output for UART1.
O
PWM4 — Pulse Width Modulator output 4.
P0[9]/RXD1/
PWM6/EINT3
76[2]
L13[2]
I
RXD1 — Receiver input for UART1.
O
PWM6 — Pulse Width Modulator output 6.
I
EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
P0[10]/RTS1/
CAP1[0]
78[1]
O
RTS1 — Request to Send output for UART1.
I
CAP1[0] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 0.
P0[11]/CTS1/
CAP1[1]
83[1]
J12[1]
I
CTS1 — Clear to Send input for UART1.
I
CAP1[1] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 1.
P0[12]/DSR1/
MAT1[0]/RD4
84[1]
J13[1]
UM10114
User manual
K11[1]
I
DSR1 — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
O
MAT1[0] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 0.
I
RD4 — CAN4 receiver input (LPC2294 only).
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
93 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 81.
LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin (LQFP)
Pin (TFBGA) Type
Description
P0[13]/DTR1/
MAT1[1]/TD4
85[1]
H10[1]
O
DTR1 — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1.
O
MAT1[1] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 1.
O
TD4 — CAN4 transmitter output (LPC2294 only).
P0[14]/DCD1/
EINT1
92[2]
I
DCD1 — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
I
EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
G10[2]
Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW forces on-chip
bootloader to take over control of the part after reset.
P0[15]/RI1/
EINT2
99[2]
E11[2]
P0[16]/EINT0/
MAT0[2]/
CAP0[2]
100[2]
E10[2]
P0[17]/CAP1[2]/
SCK1/MAT1[2]
101[1]
P0[18]/CAP1[3]/
MISO1/MAT1[3]
121[1]
P0[19]/MAT1[2]/
MOSI1/CAP1[2]
122[1]
P0[20]/MAT1[3]/
SSEL1/EINT3
123[2]
P0[21]/PWM5/
RD3/CAP1[3]
4[1]
D13[1]
D8[1]
C8[1]
B8[2]
C1[1]
RI1 — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
I
EINT2 — External interrupt 2 input.
I
EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input.
O
MAT0[2] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
CAP0[2] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
CAP1[2] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 2.
I/O
SCK1 — Serial Clock for SPI1/SSP. SPI clock output from
master or input to slave.
O
MAT1[2] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 2.
I
CAP1[3] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 3.
I/O
MISO1 — Master In Slave Out for SPI1/SSP. Data input to
SPI master or data output from SPI slave.
O
MAT1[3] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 3.
O
MAT1[2] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 2.
I/O
MOSI1 — Master Out Slave In for SPI1/SSP. Data output from
SPI master or data input to SPI slave.
I
CAP1[2] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 2.
O
MAT1[3] — Match output for Timer 1, channel 3.
I
SSEL1 — Slave Select for SPI1/SSP. Selects the SPI
interface as a slave.
I
EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
O
PWM5 — Pulse Width Modulator output 5.
I
RD3 — CAN3 receiver input (LPC2294 only).
I
CAP1[3] — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 3.
O
TD3 — CAN3 transmitter output (LPC2294 only).
I
CAP0[0] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
P0[22]/TD3/
CAP0[0]/
MAT0[0]
5[1]
O
MAT0[0] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
P0[23]/RD2
6[1]
D3[1]
I
RD2 — CAN2 receiver input.
P0[24]/TD2
8[1]
D1[1]
O
TD2 — CAN2 transmitter output.
P0[25]/RD1
21[1]
H1[1]
I
RD1 — CAN1 receiver input.
P0[27]/AIN0/
CAP0[1]/
MAT0[1]
23[4]
H3[4]
I
AIN0 — ADC, input 0. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
I
CAP0[1] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
O
MAT0[1] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
UM10114
User manual
D4[1]
I
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
94 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 81.
LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin (LQFP)
Pin (TFBGA) Type
Description
P0[28]/AIN1/
CAP0[2]/
MAT0[2]
25[4]
J1[4]
I
AIN1 — ADC, input 1. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
I
CAP0[2] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2.
O
MAT0[2] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 2.
I
AIN2 — ADC, input 2. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
I
CAP0[3] — Capture input for Timer 0, Channel 3.
O
MAT0[3] — Match output for Timer 0, channel 3.
I
AIN3 — ADC, input 3. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
I
EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
I
CAP0[0] — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
I/O
Port 1: Port 1 is a 32-bit bidirectional I/O port with individual
direction controls for each bit. The operation of port 1 pins
depends upon the pin function selected via the Pin Connect
Block.
P0[29]/AIN2/
CAP0[3]/
MAT0[3]
P0[30]/AIN3/
EINT3/CAP0[0]
32[4]
33[4]
L1[4]
L2[4]
P1[0] to P1[31]
Pins 2 through 15 of port 1 are not available.
P1[0]/CS0
91[5]
G11[5]
P1[1]/OE
90[5]
G13[5]
O
OE — LOW-active Output Enable signal.
P1[16]/
TRACEPKT0
34[5]
L3[5]
O
TRACEPKT0 — Trace Packet, bit 0. Standard I/O port with
internal pull-up.
P1[17]/
TRACEPKT1
24[5]
H4[5]
O
TRACEPKT1 — Trace Packet, bit 1. Standard I/O port with
internal pull-up.
P1[18]/
TRACEPKT2
15[5]
F2[5]
O
TRACEPKT2 — Trace Packet, bit 2. Standard I/O port with
internal pull-up.
P1[19]/
TRACEPKT3
7[5]
D2[5]
O
TRACEPKT3 — Trace Packet, bit 3. Standard I/O port with
internal pull-up.
P1[20]/
TRACESYNC
102[5]
D12[5]
O
TRACESYNC — Trace Synchronization. Standard I/O port
with internal pull-up.
O
CS0 — LOW-active Chip Select 0 signal.
(Bank 0 addresses range 0x8000 0000 to 0x80FF FFFF)
Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW, enables pins
P1[25:16] to operate as Trace port after reset.
P1[21]/
PIPESTAT0
95[5]
F11[5]
O
PIPESTAT0 — Pipeline Status, bit 0. Standard I/O port with
internal pull-up.
P1[22]/
PIPESTAT1
86[5]
H11[5]
O
PIPESTAT1 — Pipeline Status, bit 1. Standard I/O port with
internal pull-up.
P1[23]/
PIPESTAT2
82[5]
J11[5]
O
PIPESTAT2 — Pipeline Status, bit 2. Standard I/O port with
internal pull-up.
P1[24]/
TRACECLK
70[5]
L11[5]
O
TRACECLK — Trace Clock. Standard I/O port with internal
pull-up.
P1[25]/EXTIN0
60[5]
K8[5]
I
EXTIN0 — External Trigger Input. Standard I/O with internal
pull-up.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
95 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 81.
LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin (LQFP)
Pin (TFBGA) Type
Description
P1[26]/RTCK
52[5]
N6[5]
RTCK — Returned Test Clock output. Extra signal added to
the JTAG port. Assists debugger synchronization when
processor frequency varies. Bidirectional pin with internal
pull-up.
I/O
Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW, enables pins
P1[31:26] to operate as Debug port after reset.
P1[27]/TDO
144[5]
B2[5]
O
TDO — Test Data out for JTAG interface.
P1[28]/TDI
140[5]
A3[5]
I
TDI — Test Data in for JTAG interface.
P1[29]/TCK
126[5]
A7[5]
I
TCK — Test Clock for JTAG interface. This clock must be
slower than 16 of the CPU clock (CCLK) for the JTAG
interface to operate.
P1[30]/TMS
113[5]
D10[5]
I
TMS — Test Mode Select for JTAG interface.
P1[31]/TRST
43[5]
M4[5]
I
TRST — Test Reset for JTAG interface.
I/O
Port 2 — Port 2 is a 32-bit bidirectional I/O port with individual
direction controls for each bit. The operation of port 2 pins
depends upon the pin function selected via the Pin Connect
Block.
P2[0] to P2[31]
P2[0]/D0
98[5]
E12[5]
I/O
D0 — External memory data line 0.
P2[1]/D1
105[5]
C12[5]
I/O
D1 — External memory data line 1.
P2[2]/D2
106[5]
C11[5]
I/O
D2 — External memory data line 2.
P2[3]/D3
108[5]
B12[5]
I/O
D3 — External memory data line 3.
P2[4]/D4
109[5]
A13[5]
I/O
D4 — External memory data line 4.
P2[5]/D5
114[5]
C10[5]
I/O
D5 — External memory data line 5.
P2[6]/D6
115[5]
B10[5]
I/O
D6 — External memory data line 6.
P2[7]/D7
116[5]
A10[5]
I/O
D7 — External memory data line 7.
P2[8]/D8
117[5]
D9[5]
I/O
D8 — External memory data line 8.
P2[9]/D9
118[5]
C9[5]
I/O
D9 — External memory data line 9.
P2[10]/D10
120[5]
A9[5]
I/O
D10 — External memory data line 10.
P2[11]/D11
124[5]
A8[5]
I/O
D11 — External memory data line 11.
P2[12]/D12
125[5]
B7[5]
I/O
D12 — External memory data line 12.
P2[13]/D13
127[5]
C7[5]
I/O
D13 — External memory data line 13.
P2[14]/D14
129[5]
A6[5]
I/O
D14 — External memory data line 14.
P2[15]/D15
130[5]
B6[5]
I/O
D15 — External memory data line 15.
P2[16]/D16
131[5]
C6[5]
I/O
D16 — External memory data line 16.
P2[17]/D17
132[5]
D6[5]
I/O
D17 — External memory data line 17.
P2[18]/D18
133[5]
A5[5]
I/O
D18 — External memory data line 18.
P2[19]/D19
134[5]
B5[5]
I/O
D19 — External memory data line 19.
P2[20]/D20
136[5]
D5[5]
I/O
D20 — External memory data line 20.
P2[21]/D21
137[5]
A4[5]
I/O
D21 — External memory data line 21.
P2[22]/D22
1[5]
A1[5]
I/O
D22 — External memory data line 22.
P2[23]/D23
10[5]
E3[5]
I/O
D23 — External memory data line 23.
P2[24]/D24
11[5]
E2[5]
I/O
D24 — External memory data line 24.
P2[25]/D25
12[5]
E1[5]
I/O
D25 — External memory data line 25.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
96 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 81.
LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin (LQFP)
Pin (TFBGA) Type
Description
P2[26]/D26/
BOOT0
13[5]
F4[5]
I/O
D26 — External memory data line 26.
I
BOOT0 — While RESET is low, together with BOOT1
controls booting and internal operation. Internal pull-up
ensures high state if pin is left unconnected.
P2[27]/D27/
BOOT1
16[5]
I/O
D27 — External memory data line 27.
I
BOOT1 — While RESET is low, together with BOOT0
controls booting and internal operation. Internal pull-up
ensures high state if pin is left unconnected.
F1[5]
BOOT1:0 = 00 selects 8-bit memory on CS0 for boot.
BOOT1:0 = 01 selects 16-bit memory on CS0 for boot.
BOOT1:0 = 10 selects 32-bit memory on CS0 for boot.
BOOT1:0 = 11 selects internal flash memory or 16-bit memory
for CS0 boot for flashless LPC22xx.
P2[28]/D28
17[5]
G2[5]
I/O
D28 — External memory data line 28.
P2[29]/D29
18[5]
G1[5]
I/O
D29 — External memory data line 29.
P2[30]/D30/
AIN4
19[4]
G3[2]
I/O
D30 — External memory data line 30.
I
AIN4 — ADC, input 4. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
P2[31]/D31/
AIN5
20[4]
I/O
D31 — External memory data line 31.
I
AIN5 — ADC, input 5. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
I/O
Port 3 — Port 3 is a 32-bit bidirectional I/O port with individual
direction controls for each bit. The operation of port 3 pins
depends upon the pin function selected via the Pin Connect
Block.
G4[2]
P3[0] to P3[31]
P3[0]/A0
89[5]
G12[5]
O
A0 — External memory address line 0.
P3[1]/A1
88[5]
H13[5]
O
A1 — External memory address line 1.
P3[2]/A2
87[5]
H12[5]
O
A2 — External memory address line 2.
P3[3]/A3
81[5]
J10[5]
O
A3 — External memory address line 3.
P3[4]/A4
80[5]
K13[5]
O
A4 — External memory address line 4.
P3[5]/A5
74[5]
M13[5]
O
A5 — External memory address line 5.
P3[6]/A6
73[5]
N13[5]
O
A6 — External memory address line 6.
P3[7]/A7
72[5]
M12[5]
O
A7 — External memory address line 7.
P3[8]/A8
71[5]
N12[5]
O
A8 — External memory address line 8.
P3[9]/A9
66[5]
M10[5]
O
A9 — External memory address line 9.
P3[10]/A10
65[5]
N10[5]
O
A10 — External memory address line 10.
P3[11]/A11
64[5]
K9[5]
O
A11 — External memory address line 11.
P3[12]/A12
63[5]
L9[5]
O
A12 — External memory address line 12.
P3[13]/A13
62[5]
M9[5]
O
A13 — External memory address line 13.
P3[14]/A14
56[5]
K7[5]
O
A14 — External memory address line 14.
P3[15]/A15
55[5]
L7[5]
O
A15 — External memory address line 15.
P3[16]/A16
53[5]
M7[5]
O
A16 — External memory address line 16.
P3[17]/A17
48[5]
N5[5]
O
A17 — External memory address line 17.
P3[18]/A18
47[5]
M5[5]
O
A18 — External memory address line 18.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
97 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 81.
LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin (LQFP)
Pin (TFBGA) Type
Description
P3[19]/A19
46[5]
L5[5]
O
A19 — External memory address line 19.
P3[20]/A20
45[5]
K5[5]
O
A20 — External memory address line 20.
P3[21]/A21
44[5]
N4[5]
O
A21 — External memory address line 21.
P3[22]/A22
41[5]
K4[5]
O
A22 — External memory address line 22.
P3[23]/A23/
XCLK
40[5]
N3[5]
I/O
A23 — External memory address line 23.
O
XCLK — Clock output.
P3[24]/CS3
36[5]
M2[5]
O
CS3 — LOW-active Chip Select 3 signal.
P3[25]/CS2
35[5]
M1[5]
P3[26]/CS1
30[5]
K2[5]
O
P3[27]/WE
29[5]
K1[5]
O
WE — LOW-active Write enable signal.
P3[28]/BLS3/
AIN7
28[4]
J4[4]
O
BLS3 — LOW-active Byte Lane Select signal (Bank 3).
I
AIN7 — ADC, input 7. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
P3[29]/BLS2/
AIN6
27[4]
O
BLS2 — LOW-active Byte Lane Select signal (Bank 2).
I
AIN6 — ADC, input 6. This analog input is always connected
to its pin.
P3[30]/BLS1
97[4]
E13[4]
O
BLS1 — LOW-active Byte Lane Select signal (Bank 1).
P3[31]/BLS0
96[4]
F10[4]
O
BLS0 — LOW-active Byte Lane Select signal (Bank 0).
TD1
22[5]
H2[5]
O
TD1: CAN1 transmitter output.
RESET
135[6]
C5[6]
I
External Reset input: A LOW on this pin resets the device,
causing I/O ports and peripherals to take on their default
states, and processor execution to begin at address 0. TTL
with hysteresis, 5 V tolerant.
XTAL1
142[7]
C3[7]
I
Input to the oscillator circuit and internal clock generator
circuits.
XTAL2
141[7]
B3[7]
O
Output from the oscillator amplifier.
VSS
3, 9, 26, 38,
54, 67, 79,
93, 103, 107,
111, 128
C2, E4, J2,
N2, N7, L10,
K12, F13,
D11, B13,
B11, D7
I
Ground: 0 V reference.
VSSA
139
C4
I
Analog ground: 0 V reference. This should nominally be the
same voltage as VSS, but should be isolated to minimize noise
and error.
VSSA(PLL)
138
B4
I
PLL analog ground: 0 V reference. This should nominally be
the same voltage as VSS, but should be isolated to minimize
noise and error.
VDD(1V8)
37, 110
N1, A12
I
1.8 V core power supply: This is the power supply voltage
for internal circuitry.
(Bank 3 addresses range 0x8300 0000 to 0x83FF FFFF)
O
CS2 — LOW-active Chip Select 2 signal.
(Bank 2 addresses range 0x8200 0000 to 0x82FF FFFF)
CS1 — LOW-active Chip Select 1 signal.
(Bank 1 addresses range 0x8100 0000 to 0x81FF FFFF)
UM10114
User manual
J3[4]
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
98 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
Table 81.
LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages) …continued
Symbol
Pin (LQFP)
Pin (TFBGA) Type
Description
VDDA(1V8)
143
A2
Analog 1.8 V core power supply: This is the power supply
voltage for internal circuitry. This should be nominally the
same voltage as VDD(1V8) but should be isolated to minimize
noise and error.
VDD(3V3)
2, 31, 39, 51, B1, K3, M3,
I
57, 77, 94,
M6, N8, K10,
104, 112, 119 F12, C13,
A11, B9
3.3 V pad power supply: This is the power supply voltage for
the I/O ports.
VDDA(3V3)
14
Analog 3.3 V pad power supply: This should be nominally
the same voltage as VDD(3V3) but should be isolated to
minimize noise and error. The level on this pin also provides
the voltage reference level for the ADC.
F3
I
I
[1]
5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control.
[2]
5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control. If configured for an input
function, this pad utilizes built-in glitch filter that blocks pulses shorter than 3 ns.
[3]
Open drain 5 V tolerant digital I/O I2C-bus 400 kHz specification compatible pad. It requires external pull-up to provide an output
functionality. Open-drain functionality applies to all output functions on this pin.
[4]
5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O (with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control) and analog input function. If configured
for a digital input function, this pad utilizes built-in glitch filter that blocks pulses shorter than 3 ns. When configured as an ADC input,
digital section of the pad is disabled.
[5]
5 V tolerant pad with built-in pull-up resistor providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and 10 ns slew rate control.
The pull-up resistor’s value ranges from 60 k to 300 k.
[6]
5 V tolerant pad providing digital input (with TTL levels and hysteresis) function only.
[7]
Pad provides special analog functionality.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
99 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
8.1 How to read this chapter
The pin connect blocks are identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts, respectively. The
LPC22xx use additional bits in the PINSEL2 register to select the EMC, additional ADC
pins, and for boot control (see Table 83). For parts with CAN interface, see Table 82 for
which bits select the CAN pins in the PINSEL registers. The CAN bit settings are reserved
for parts without CAN interfaces.
Table 82.
CAN configuration in the LPC21xx/22xx pin connect registers
Pin
available in part
PINSEL register
Bits
no suffix, /00, /01
RD1[1]
LPC2109
LPC2119
LPC2129
LPC2194
LPC2290
LPC2292
LPC2294
PINSEL1 Table 87
19:18
RD2/TD2
LPC2119
LPC2129
LPC2194
LPC2290
LPC2292
PINSEL1 Table 87
15:14/17:16
LPC2294
RD3/TD3
LPC2194
LPC2294
PINSEL1 Table 87
11:10/13:12
RD4/TD4
LPC2194
LPC2294
PINSEL0 Table 86
25:24/27:26
[1]
The TD1 output, if available, is not shared with other pins.
Table 83.
Pin select registers for 64-pin (LPC21xx) and 144-pin (LPC22xx) configurations
Parts
PINSEL0
PINSEL1
PINSEL2
Boot control
all LPC21xx
Table 86
Table 87
Table 88
n/a
all LPC22xx
Table 86
Table 87
Table 89
Table 90
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
8.2 Features
Allows individual pin configuration.
8.3 Applications
The purpose of the Pin connect block is to configure the microcontroller pins to the
desired functions.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
100 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
8.4 Description
The pin connect block allows selected pins of the microcontroller to have more than one
function. Configuration registers control the multiplexers to allow connection between the
pin and the on chip peripherals.
Peripherals should be connected to the appropriate pins prior to being activated, and prior
to any related interrupts being enabled. Activity of any enabled peripheral function that is
not mapped to a related pin should be considered undefined.
Selection of a single function on a port pin completely excludes all other functions
otherwise available on the same pin.
The only exception are the inputs to the A/D converter. Regardless of the function that is
selected for the port pin that also hosts the A/D input, this A/D input can be read at any
time, and variations of the voltage level on this pin will be reflected in the A/D readings.
However, valid analog readings can be obtained if and only if the analog input function is
selected. Only then the proper interface circuit is active in between the physical pin and
the A/D module. In all other cases, the logic necessary for the digital function will be active
and will disrupt proper behavior of the A/D.
8.5 Pin function Select register values
The PINSEL registers control the functions of device pins as shown below. Pairs of bits in
these registers correspond to specific device pins.
Table 84.
Pin function Select register bits
PINSEL0 & PINSEL1 values Function
Value after reset
00
Primary (default) function, typically GPIO port
00
01
First alternate function
10
Second alternate function
11
Third alternate function
The direction control bit in the IO0DIR/IO1DIR register is effective only when the GPIO
function is selected for a pin. For other functions, direction is controlled automatically.
Each derivative typically has a different pinout and therefore a different set of functions
possible for each pin. Details for a specific derivative may be found in the appropriate data
sheet.
8.6 Register description
The Pin Control Module contains 3 registers as shown in Table 85 below.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
101 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
Table 85.
Pin connect block register map
Name
Description
PINSEL0
Access
Reset value
Address
Pin function select R/W
register 0
0x0000 0000
0xE002 C000
PINSEL1
Pin function select R/W
register 1
0x1540 0000
0xE002 C004
PINSEL2
Pin function select R/W
register 2
See Table 88.
0xE002 C014
8.6.1 Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 - 0xE002 C000)
The PINSEL0 register controls the functions of the pins using the settings listed in
Table 86. The direction control bit in the IO0DIR register is effective only when the GPIO
function is selected for a pin. For other functions, direction is controlled automatically.
The CAN bit settings are reserved for parts without CAN interfaces (see Table 82).
Table 86.
Bit
Symbol
1:0
P0.0
3:2
5:4
7:6
9:8
11:10
UM10114
User manual
Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 - address 0xE002 C000) bit description )
P0.1
P0.2[1]
P0.3[1]
P0.4
P0.5
Value
Function
Reset value
0
00
GPIO Port 0.0
01
TXD (UART0)
10
PWM1
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.1
01
RxD (UART0)
10
PWM3
11
EINT0
00
GPIO Port 0.2
01
SCL (I2C)
10
Capture 0.0 (Timer 0)
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.3
01
SDA (I2C)
10
Match 0.0 (Timer 0)
11
EINT1
00
GPIO Port 0.4
01
SCK0 (SPI0)
10
Capture 0.1 (Timer 0)
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.5
01
MISO0 (SPI0)
10
Match 0.1 (Timer 0)
11
Reserved
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
0
0
0
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
102 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
Table 86.
Symbol
Value
Function
Reset value
13:12
P0.6
00
GPIO Port 0.6
0
01
MOSI0 (SPI0)
10
Capture 0.2 (Timer 0)
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.7
01
SSEL0 (SPI0)
15:14
17:16
19:18
21:20
23:22
25:24
27:26
29:28
31:30
[1]
UM10114
User manual
Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 - address 0xE002 C000) bit description )
Bit
P0.7
P0.8
P0.9
P0.10
P0.11
P0.12
P0.13
P0.14
P0.15
10
PWM2
11
EINT2
00
GPIO Port 0.8
01
TXD UART1
10
PWM4
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.9
01
RxD (UART1)
10
PWM6
11
EINT3
00
GPIO Port 0.10
01
RTS1 (UART1)
10
Capture 1.0 (Timer 1)
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.11
01
CTS1 (UART1)
10
Capture 1.1 (Timer 1)
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.12
01
DSR1 (UART1)
10
Match 1.0 (Timer 1)
11
RD4 (CAN 4)
00
GPIO Port 0.13
01
DTR1 (UART1)
10
Match 1.1 (Timer 1)
11
TD4 (CAN 4)
00
GPIO Port 0.14
01
DCD1 (UART1)
10
EINT1
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.15
01
RI1 (UART1)
10
EINT2
11
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
All functions on this pin are open-drain outputs for I2C-bus compliance.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
103 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
8.6.2 Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - 0xE002 C004)
The PINSEL1 register controls the functions of the pins using the settings listed in
Table 87. The direction control bit in the IO0DIR register is effective only when the GPIO
function is selected for a pin. For other functions direction is controlled automatically.
The CAN bit settings are reserved for parts without CAN interfaces (see Table 82).
Table 87.
Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - address 0xE002 C004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value
Function
Reset value
1:0
P0.16
00
GPIO Port 0.16
0
3:2
5:4
7:6
9:8
11:10
13:12
15:14
UM10114
User manual
P0.17
P0.18
P0.19
P0.20
P0.21
P0.22
P0.23
01
EINT0
10
Match 0.2 (Timer 0)
11
Capture 0.2 (Timer 0)
00
GPIO Port 0.17
01
Capture 1.2 (Timer 1)
10
SCK1 (SSP)
11
Match 1.2 (Timer 1)
00
GPIO Port 0.18
01
Capture 1.3 (Timer 1)
10
MISO1 (SSP)
11
Match 1.3 (Timer 1)
00
GPIO Port 0.19
01
Match 1.2 (Timer 1)
10
MOSI1 (SSP)
11
Capture 1.2 (Timer 1)
00
GPIO Port 0.20
01
Match 1.3 (Timer 1)
10
SSEL1 (SSP)
11
EINT3
00
GPIO Port 0.21
01
PWM5
10
RD3 (CAN 3)
11
Capture 1.3 (Timer 1)
00
GPIO Port 0.22
01
TD3 (CAN 3)
10
Capture 0.0 (Timer 0)
11
Match 0.0 (Timer 0)
00
GPIO Port 0.23
01
RD2 (CAN2)
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
104 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
Table 87.
Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - address 0xE002 C004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value
Function
Reset value
17:16
P0.24
00
GPIO Port 0.24
0
01
TD2 (CAN2)
19:18
21:20
23:22
25:24
27:26
29:28
31:30
P0.25
P0.26
P0.27
P0.28
P0.29
P0.30
P0.31
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.25
01
RD1 (CAN1)
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
00
Reserved
01
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
00
GPIO Port 0.27
01
AIN0
10
CAP0.1 (Timer 0)
11
MAT0.1 (Timer 0)
00
GPIO Port 0.28
01
AIN1
10
Capture 0.2 (Timer 0)
11
Match 0.2 (Timer 0)
00
GPIO Port 0.29
01
AIN2
10
Capture 0.3 (Timer 0)
11
Match 0.3 (Timer 0)
00
GPIO Port 0.30
01
AIN3
10
EINT3
11
Capture 0.0 (Timer 0)
00
Reserved
01
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
0
0
01
01
01
01
0
8.6.3 LPC21xx Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014)
The PINSEL2 register controls the functions of the pins using the settings listed in
Table 88. The direction control bit in the IO1DIR register is effective only when the GPIO
function is selected for a pin. For other functions direction is controlled automatically.
Warning: use read-modify-write operation when accessing PINSEL2 register. Accidental
write of 0 to bit 2 and/or bit 3 results in loss of debug and/or trace functionality! Changing
of either bit 4 or bit 5 from 1 to 0 may cause an incorrect code execution!
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
105 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
Table 88.
Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Function
1:0
-
-
2
GPIO/DEBUG 0
3
GPIO/TRACE 0
1
31:4 -
Reset value
Reserved, user software should not write ones
NA
to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved
bit is not defined.
Pins P1.36-26 are used as GPIO pins.
P1.26/RTCK
Pins P1.36-26 are used as a Debug port.
Pins P1.25-16 are used as GPIO pins.
P1.20/
TRACESYNC
1
Pins P1.25-16 are used as a Trace port.
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones
NA
to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved
bit is not defined.
8.6.4 LPC22xx Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014)
The PINSEL2 register controls the functions of the pins using the settings listed in
Table 89. The direction control bit in the IODIR register is effective only when the GPIO
function is selected for a pin. For other functions direction is controlled automatically.
Warning: Use read-modify-write operation when accessing PINSEL2 register. Accidental
write of 0 to bit 2 and/or bit 3 results in loss of debug and/or trace functionality! Changing
of either bit 4 or bit 5 from 1 to 0 may cause an incorrect code execution!
Table 89.
Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Function
Value after
reset
1:0
-
NA
NA
2
GPIO/
DEBUG
Controls the use of P1.31-26 pins.
3
GPIO/
TRACE
UM10114
User manual
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
0
Pins P1.31-26 are used as GPIO pins.
1
Pins P1.31-26 are used as a Debug port.
Controls the use of P1.25-16 pins.
0
Pins P1.25-16 are used as GPIO pins.
1
Pins P1.25-16 are used as a Trace port.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
P1.26/RTCK
P1.20/
TRACESYNC
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
106 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
Table 89.
Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Function
Value after
reset
5:4
CTRLDBP
Controls the use of the data bus and strobe pins. At a reset triggered via the
RESET pin, these bits are loaded with the content from lines BOOT1:0; if a
watchdog reset occurs, these two bits are loaded with the BOOT10_SAVE
register content (see Section 8.6.5 “Boot control for LPC22xx parts” on page
109).
BOOT1:0 or
BOOT10_SAVE
Functions available based on PINSEL2[5:4] values
6
7
8
CTRLP329
CTRLP328
CTRLP327
10:9
-
11
CTRLP326
Pins
10
01
00
11
P1.1
OE
P1.1
P2.7:0
D7:0
P2.7:0
P2.15:8
D15:8
P2.27:16
D27:16
P2.27:16
P2.29:28
D29:28
P2.29:28 or reserved (see bit 20)
P2.30
D30
P2.30 or AIN4 (see bit 21)
P2.31
D31
P2.31 or AIN5 (see bit 22)
P1.0
CS0
P1.0
P3.31
BLS0
P3.31
P3.30
BLS1
P3.28
BLS2
P3.28 or AIN7 (see bit 7)
P3.29
BLS3
P3.29 or AIN6 (see bit 6)
P2.15:8
P3.30
If bits 5:4 are not 10, controls the use of pin P3.29:
0
P3.29 is a GPIO pin.
1
P3.29 is an ADC input pin (AIN6).
If bits 5:4 are not 10, controls the use of pin P3.28:
0
P3.28 is a GPIO pin.
1
P3.28 is an ADC input pin (AIN7).
Controls the use of pin P3.27:
0
P3.27 is a GPIO pin.
1
P3.27 is a Write Enable pin (WE).
Reserved
0
P3.26 is a GPIO pin.
1
P3.26 is a chip/memory bank select pin (CS1).
Reserved
-
NA
13
CTRLP323
If bits 27:25 are not 111, controls the use of pin P3.23/A23/XCLK:
User manual
1
0
-
Controls the use of pin P3.26:
12
UM10114
1
0
-
0
P3.23 is a GPIO/address line pin (see bits 27:25).
1
P3.23 is XCLK output pin.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
107 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
Table 89.
Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Function
Value after
reset
15:14
CTRLP325
Controls the use of pin P3.25:
00
17:16
CTRLP324
00
P3.25 is a GPIO pin.
01
P3.25 is a chip/memory bank select pin (CS2).
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
Controls the use of pin P3.24:
00
P3.24 is a GPIO pin.
01
P3.24 is a chip/memory bank select pin (CS3).
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
NA
Reserved
19:18
-
20
CTRLP229_28 If bits PINSEL2[5:4] are not 10, controls the use of pin P2.29:28:
21
22
23
24
27:25
31:28
CTRLP230
CTRLP231
CTRLP300
CTRLP301
CTRLAB
-
UM10114
User manual
00
-
0
P2.29 and P2.28 are GPIO pins.
1
Reserved
If bits PINSEL2[5:4] are not 10, controls the use of pin P2.30:
0
P2.30 is a GPIO pin.
1
P2.30 is an ADC input pin (AIN4).
If bits PINSEL2[5:4] are not 10, controls the use of pin P2.31:
0
P2.31 is a GPIO pin.
1
P2.31 is an ADC input pin (AIN5).
Controls the use of pin P3.0:
0
P3.0/A0 is a GPIO pin.
1
P3.0/A0 is an address line.
Controls the use of pin P3.1:
0
3.1/A1 is a GPIO pin.
1
3.1/A1 is an address line.
0
1
1
1 if
BOOT1:0 = 00
at RESET = 0,
0 otherwise
BOOT1 during
Reset
Controls the number of pins among P3.23/A23/XCLK and P3.22:2/A2.22:2 that 000 if
are address lines:
BOOT1:0 = 11
at Reset;
000
None
111 otherwise
001
A3:2 are address lines.
010
A5:2 are address lines.
011
A7:2 are address lines.
100
A11:2 are address lines.
101
A15:2 are address lines.
110
A19:2 are address lines.
111
A23:2 are address lines.
NA
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
00
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
108 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
8.6.5 Boot control for LPC22xx parts
The state of the BOOT1:0 pins (P2.26 and P2.27) while RESET is low controls booting
and initial operation. Internal pull-up resistors in the receivers ensure high state if a pin is
left unconnected. Board designers can connect weak pull-down resistors (10 k) or
transistors that drive low while RESET is low to these pins to select among the following
options:
Table 90.
Boot control on BOOT1:0
P2.27/D27/BOOT1 P2.26/D26/BOOT0 Boot from
0
0
8 bit memory on CS0[1]
0
1
16 bit memory on CS0[1]
1
0
32 bit memory on CS0[1]
1
1
internal flash memory or 16 bit memory on CS0[1] for
flashless parts LPC2210/20/90
[1]
See Section 4.6 on how to connect external memory to the LPC22xx.
When the LPC22xx hardware detects a rising edge on the Reset pin, it latches content
from BOOT[1:0] pins and stores it into bits 5 and 4 of the BOOT10_SAVE register
(0x3FFF 8030). Once this register is written, it is accessible for reading only.
Whenever the boot loader is executed, it reads the content of the BOOT10_SAVE
register, and configures the PINSEL2 (address and data bus structure) together with other
resources. For the boot loader flowchart details, see Figure 73 for parts with flash and
Figure 76 for flashless parts.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
109 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO)
controller
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
9.1 How to read this chapter
For port 0 and port 1 , the GPIO can be selected to be Fast GPIO or legacy GPIO (see
Section 9.5). Port 2 and port 3 are available in the 144-pin packages only and are always
legacy GPIO. See table Table 91 for a list of LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and their GPIO
pins and available ports.
Not all pins are available on port 0 and port 1. The respective bits in the GPIO registers
are reserved.
Table 91.
GPIO features
Part
Legacy I/O ports
Register base address
Fast GPIO ports
Register base address
P0
P1
P2
P3
P0
P1
0xE002 8000
0xE002 8010
0xE002 8020
0xE002 8030
0x3FFF C000
0x3FFF C020
no suffix and /00 parts
LPC2109
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
-
-
LPC2119
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
-
-
LPC2129
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
-
-
LPC2114
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
-
-
LPC2124
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
-
-
LPC2194
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
-
-
LPC2210
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
-
-
LPC2220
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
LPC2212
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
-
-
LPC2214
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
-
-
LPC2290
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
-
-
LPC2292
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
-
-
LPC2294
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
-
-
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
/01 parts
LPC2109
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
110 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 91.
Part
GPIO features
Legacy I/O ports
Register base address
P0
Fast GPIO ports
Register base address
P1
P2
P3
P0
P1
0xE002 8000
0xE002 8010
0xE002 8020
0xE002 8030
0x3FFF C000
0x3FFF C020
LPC2119
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
LPC2129
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
LPC2114
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
LPC2124
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
LPC2194
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
-
-
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16]
LPC2210
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
LPC2212
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
LPC2214
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
LPC2290
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
LPC2292
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
LPC2294
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16],
P1[1:0]
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
P0[30:27],
P0[25:0]
P1[31:16], P1[1:0]
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
9.2 Features
• Every physical GPIO port can be accessed either through registers providing
enhanced features and accelerated port access or through legacy registers providing
backward compatibility to earlier LPC2000 devices.
• Accelerated Fast GPIO functions (see Table 91):
– GPIO registers are relocated to the ARM local bus so that the fastest possible I/O
timing can be achieved.
– Mask registers allow treating sets of port bits as a group, leaving other bits
unchanged.
– All registers are byte, half-word, and word addressable.
– The entire port value can be written in one instruction.
• Bit-level set and clear registers allow a single instruction set or clear of any number of
bits in one port.
• Direction of each pin can be controlled individually.
• All I/O default to inputs after reset.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
111 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
• Backward compatibility with other earlier devices is maintained with legacy registers
appearing at the original addresses on the APB bus.
9.3 Applications
•
•
•
•
General purpose I/O
Driving LEDs, or other indicators
Controlling off-chip devices
Sensing digital inputs
9.4 Pin description
Table 92.
GPIO pin description
Pin
Type
Description
P031:0]
P1[31:0]
Input/
Output
General purpose input/output. The number of GPIOs actually
available depends on the use of alternate functions.
P2[31:0]
P3[31:0]
Input/
Output
External bus data/address lines shared with GPIO, digital and
analog functions. The number of GPIOs/digital and analog
functions available depends on the selected bus structure.
9.5 Register description
LPC21xx/LPC22xx devices have two 32-bit General Purpose I/O ports. PORT0 and
PORT1 are controlled by two groups of 4 registers as shown in Table 93 and Table 94.
LPC22xx devices have two additional 32-bit ports, PORT2 and PORT3. These ports can
be configured either as external memory data address and data bus or as GPIOs sharing
pins with a handful of digital and analog functions. Details on PORT2 and PORT3 usage
can be found in Section 8.6.4.
Legacy registers shown in Table 93 allow backward compatibility with earlier family
devices, using existing code. The functions and relative timing of older GPIO
implementations is preserved.
The registers in Table 94 represent the enhanced Fast GPIO features available on the
PORT0 and PORT1 only. All of these registers are located directly on the local bus of the
CPU for the fastest possible read and write timing. An additional feature has been added
that provides byte and half-word addressability of all GPIO registers. A mask register
allows treating groups of bits in a single GPIO port separately from other bits on the same
port.
When PORT0 and/or PORT1 are used, the user must select whether a these ports will be
accessed via registers that provide enhanced features or a legacy set of registers (see
Section 6.7.1). While both of a port’s fast and legacy GPIO registers are controlling the
same physical pins, these two port control branches are mutually exclusive and operate
independently. For example, changing a pin’s output through a fast register will not be
observable trough the corresponding legacy register.
The following text will refer to the legacy GPIO as "the slow" GPIO, while GPIO equipped
with the enhanced features will be referred as "the fast" GPIO.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
112 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
The "slow", legacy registers are word accessible only. The “fast” GPIO registers are byte,
half-word, and word accessible.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
113 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 93.
GPIO register map (legacy APB accessible registers)
Generic Description
Name
Access Reset
value[1]
PORT0
Address &
Name
PORT1
Address &
Name
PORT2
Address &
name
PORT3
Address &
name
IOPIN
GPIO Port Pin value register. R/W
The current state of the
GPIO configured port pins
can always be read from this
register, regardless of pin
direction.
NA
0xE002 8000
IO0PIN
0xE002 8010
IO1PIN
0xE002 8020
IO2PIN
0xE002 8030
IO3PIN
IOSET
GPIO Port Output Set
R/W
register. This register
controls the state of output
pins in conjunction with the
IOCLR register. Writing ones
produces HIGHs at the
corresponding port pins.
Writing zeroes has no effect.
0x0000
0000
0xE002 8004
IO0SET
0xE002 8014
IO1SET
0xE002 8024
IO2SET
0xE002 8034
IO3SET
IODIR
GPIO Port Direction control
register. This register
individually controls the
direction of each port pin.
R/W
0x0000
0000
0xE002 8008
IO0DIR
0xE002 8018
IO1DIR
0xE002 8028
IO2DIR
0xE002 8038
IO3DIR
IOCLR
GPIO Port Output Clear
register. This register
controls the state of output
pins. Writing ones produces
LOWs at the corresponding
port pins and clears the
corresponding bits in the
IOSET register. Writing
zeroes has no effect.
WO
0x0000
0000
0xE002 800C 0xE002 801C 0xE002 802C 0xE002 803C
IO0CLR
IO1CLR
IO2CLR
IO3CLR
[1]
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
Table 94.
GPIO register map (local bus accessible registers - enhanced GPIO features)
Generic
Name
Description
Access Reset
value[1]
FIODIR
Fast GPIO Port Direction control register.
This register individually controls the
direction of each port pin.
R/W
0x0000 0000 0x3FFF C000
FIO0DIR
0x3FFF C020
FIO1DIR
FIOMASK
Fast Mask register for port. Writes, sets,
R/W
clears, and reads to port (done via writes to
FIOPIN, FIOSET, and FIOCLR, and reads of
FIOPIN). Only the bits enabled by zeroes in
this register are altered or cleared.
0x0000 0000 0x3FFF C010
FIO0MASK
0x3FFF C030
FIO1MASK
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
PORT0
PORT1
Address & Name Address & Name
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
114 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 94.
GPIO register map (local bus accessible registers - enhanced GPIO features)
Generic
Name
Description
FIOPIN
Fast Port Pin value register using FIOMASK. R/W
The current state of digital port pins can be
read from this register, regardless of pin
direction or alternate function selection (as
long as pins is not configured as an input to
ADC). The value read is masked by ANDing
with FIOMASK. Writing to this register
places corresponding values in all bits
enabled by zeroes in FIOMASK.
0x0000 0000 0x3FFF C014
FIO0PIN
0x3FFF C034
FIO1PIN
FIOSET
Fast Port Output Set register using
R/W
FIOMASK. This register controls the state of
output pins. Writing 1s produces highs at the
corresponding port pins. Writing 0s has no
effect. Reading this register returns the
current contents of the port output register.
Only bits enabled by zeroes in FIOMASK
can be altered.
0x0000 0000 0x3FFF C018
FIO0SET
0x3FFF C038
FIO1SET
FIOCLR
Fast Port Output Clear register using
FIOMASK0. This register controls the state
of output pins. Writing 1s produces lows at
the corresponding port pins. Writing 0s has
no effect. Only bits enabled by zeroes in
FIOMASK can be altered.
0x0000 0000 0x3FFF C01C
FIO0CLR
0x3FFF C03C
FIO1CLR
[1]
Access Reset
value[1]
WO
PORT0
PORT1
Address & Name Address & Name
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
9.5.1 GPIO port Direction register IODIR (IO0DIR - 0xE002 8008, IO1DIR 0xE002 8018, IO2DIR - 0xE002 8028, IO3DIR - 0xE002 8038, FIO0DIR 0x3FFF C000, FIO1DIR - 0x3FFF C020)
This word accessible register is used to control the direction of the pins when they are
configured as GPIO port pins. Direction bit for any pin must be set according to the pin
functionality.
Legacy registers are the IO0DIR, IO1DIR, IO2DIR and IO3DIR while the enhanced GPIO
functions are supported via the FIO0DIR and FIO1DIR registers.
Table 95.
GPIO port 0 Direction register (IO0DIR - address 0xE002 8008) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
P0xDIR
Table 96.
Value Description
Reset value
Slow GPIO Direction control bits. Bit 0 controls P0.0 ... bit 31 controls P0.31.
0
Controlled pin is input.
1
Controlled pin is output.
0x0000 0000
GPIO port 1 Direction register (IO1DIR - address 0xE002 8018) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
P1xDIR
UM10114
User manual
Value Description
Reset value
Slow GPIO Direction control bits. Bit 0 in IO1DIR controls P1.0 ... Bit 31 in
IO1DIR controls P1.31.
0
Controlled pin is input.
1
Controlled pin is output.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0x0000 0000
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
115 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 97.
GPIO port 2 Direction register (IO2DIR - address 0xE002 8028) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
P2xDIR
Table 98.
Value Description
Reset value
Slow GPIO Direction control bits. Bit 0 in IO2DIR controls P2.0 ... Bit 31 in
IO2DIR controls P2.31.
0
Controlled pin is input.
1
Controlled pin is output.
0x0000 0000
GPIO port 3 Direction register (IO3DIR - address 0xE002 8038) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
P3xDIR
Table 99.
Value Description
Reset value
Slow GPIO Direction control bits. Bit 0 in IO3DIR controls P3.0 ... Bit 31 in
IO3DIR controls P3.31.
0
Controlled pin is input.
1
Controlled pin is output.
0x0000 0000
Fast GPIO port 0 Direction register (FIO0DIR - address 0x3FFF C000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
FP0xDIR
Value Description
Reset value
Fast GPIO Direction control bits. Bit 0 in FIO0DIR controls P0.0 ... Bit 31 in
FIO0DIR controls P0.31.
0
Controlled pin is input.
1
Controlled pin is output.
0x0000 0000
Table 100. Fast GPIO port 1 Direction register (FIO1DIR - address 0x3FFF C020) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
FP1xDIR
Value Description
Reset value
Fast GPIO Direction control bits. Bit 0 in FIO1DIR controls P1.0 ... Bit 31 in
FIO1DIR controls P1.31.
0
Controlled pin is input.
1
Controlled pin is output.
0x0000 0000
In addition to the 32-bit long and word only accessible FIODIR register, every fast GPIO
port can also be controlled via several byte and half-word accessible registers listed in
Table 101 and Table 102. Next to providing the same functions as the FIODIR register,
these additional registers allow easier and faster access to the physical port pins.
Table 101. Fast GPIO port 0 Direction control byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO0DIR0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C000
Fast GPIO Port 0 Direction control register 0. Bit 0 in FIO0DIR0
register corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 7 to P0.7.
0x00
FIO0DIR1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C001
Fast GPIO Port 0 Direction control register 1. Bit 0 in FIO0DIR1
register corresponds to P0.8 ... bit 7 to P0.15.
0x00
FIO0DIR2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C002
Fast GPIO Port 0 Direction control register 2. Bit 0 in FIO0DIR2
register corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 7 to P0.23.
0x00
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
116 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 101. Fast GPIO port 0 Direction control byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO0DIR3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C003
Fast GPIO Port 0 Direction control register 3. Bit 0 in FIO0DIR3
register corresponds to P0.24 ... bit 7 to P0.31.
0x00
FIO0DIRL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C000
Fast GPIO Port 0 Direction control Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0DIRL register corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 15 to P0.15.
0x0000
FIO0DIRU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C002
Fast GPIO Port 0 Direction control Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0DIRU register corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 15 to P0.31.
0x0000
Table 102. Fast GPIO port 1 Direction control byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO1DIR0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C020
Fast GPIO Port 1 Direction control register 0. Bit 0 in FIO1DIR0
register corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 7 to P1.7.
0x00
FIO1DIR1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C021
Fast GPIO Port 1 Direction control register 1. Bit 0 in FIO1DIR1
register corresponds to P1.8 ... bit 7 to P1.15.
0x00
FIO1DIR2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C022
Fast GPIO Port 1 Direction control register 2. Bit 0 in FIO1DIR2
register corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 7 to P1.23.
0x00
FIO1DIR3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C023
Fast GPIO Port 1 Direction control register 3. Bit 0 in FIO1DIR3
register corresponds to P1.24 ... bit 7 to P1.31.
0x00
FIO1DIRL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C020
Fast GPIO Port 1 Direction control Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1DIRL register corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 15 to P1.15.
0x0000
FIO1DIRU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C022
Fast GPIO Port 1 Direction control Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1DIRU register corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 15 to P1.31.
0x0000
9.5.2 GPIO port output Set register IOSET (IO0SET - 0xE002 8004, IO1SET 0xE002 8014, IO2SET - 0xE002 8024, IO3SET - 0xE002 8034, FIO0SET
- 0x3FFF C018, FIO1SET - 0x3FFF C038)
This register is used to produce a HIGH level output at the port pins configured as GPIO in
an OUTPUT mode. Writing 1 produces a HIGH level at the corresponding port pins.
Writing 0 has no effect. If any pin is configured as an input or a secondary function, writing
1 to the corresponding bit in the IOSET has no effect.
Reading the IOSET register returns the value of this register, as determined by previous
writes to IOSET and IOCLR (or IOPIN as noted above). This value does not reflect the
effect of any outside world influence on the I/O pins.
Legacy registers are the IO0SET, IO1SET, IO2SET and IO3SET while the enhanced
GPIOs are supported via the FIO0SET and FIO1SET registers. Access to a port pins via
the FIOSET register is conditioned by the corresponding FIOMASK register (see
Section 9.5.5 “Fast GPIO port Mask register FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010,
FIO1MASK - 0x3FFF C030)”).
Table 103. GPIO port 0 output Set register (IO0SET - address 0xE002 8004 bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
31:0
P0xSET
Slow GPIO output value Set bits. Bit 0 in IO0SET corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 31 0x0000 0000
in IO0SET corresponds to P0.31.
UM10114
User manual
Reset value
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
117 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 104. GPIO port 1 output Set register (IO1SET - address 0xE002 8014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P1xSET
Slow GPIO output value Set bits. Bit 0 in IO1SET corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit 31 0x0000 0000
in IO1SET corresponds to P1.31.
Table 105. GPIO port 2 output Set register (IO2SET - address 0xE002 8024) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P2xSET
Slow GPIO output value Set bits. Bit 0 in IO2SET corresponds to P2.0 ... Bit 31 0x0000 0000
in IO2SET corresponds to P2.31.
Table 106. GPIO port 3 output Set register (IO3SET - address 0xE002 8034) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P3xSET
Slow GPIO output value Set bits. Bit 0 in IO3SET corresponds to P3.0 ... Bit 31 0x0000 0000
in IO3SET corresponds to P3.31.
Table 107. Fast GPIO port 0 output Set register (FIO0SET - address 0x3FFF C018) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
FP0xSET
Fast GPIO output value Set bits. Bit 0 in FIO0SET corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 31 0x0000 0000
in FIO0SET corresponds to P0.31.
Table 108. Fast GPIO port 1 output Set register (FIO1SET - address 0x3FFF C038) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
FP1xSET
Fast GPIO output value Set bits. Bit 0 in FIO1SET corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit
31 in FIO1SET corresponds to P1.31.
0x0000 0000
Aside from the 32-bit long and word only accessible FIOSET register, every fast GPIO
port can also be controlled via several byte and half-word accessible registers listed in
Table 109 and Table 110. Next to providing the same functions as the FIOSET register,
these additional registers allow easier and faster access to the physical port pins.
Table 109. Fast GPIO port 0 output Set byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO0SET0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C018
Fast GPIO Port 0 output Set register 0. Bit 0 in FIO0SET0 register
corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 7 to P0.7.
0x00
FIO0SET1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C019
Fast GPIO Port 0 output Set register 1. Bit 0 in FIO0SET1 register
corresponds to P0.8 ... bit 7 to P0.15.
0x00
FIO0SET2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C01A Fast GPIO Port 0 output Set register 2. Bit 0 in FIO0SET2 register
corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 7 to P0.23.
0x00
FIO0SET3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C01B Fast GPIO Port 0 output Set register 3. Bit 0 in FIO0SET3 register
corresponds to P0.24 ... bit 7 to P0.31.
0x00
FIO0SETL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C018
Fast GPIO Port 0 output Set Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0SETL register corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 15 to P0.15.
0x0000
FIO0SETU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C01A Fast GPIO Port 0 output Set Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0SETU register corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 15 to P0.31.
0x0000
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
118 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 110. Fast GPIO port 1 output Set byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO1SET0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C038
Fast GPIO Port 1 output Set register 0. Bit 0 in FIO1SET0 register
corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 7 to P1.7.
0x00
FIO1SET1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C039
Fast GPIO Port 1 output Set register 1. Bit 0 in FIO1SET1 register
corresponds to P1.8 ... bit 7 to P1.15.
0x00
FIO1SET2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C03A Fast GPIO Port 1 output Set register 2. Bit 0 in FIO1SET2 register
corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 7 to P1.23.
0x00
FIO1SET3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C03B Fast GPIO Port 1 output Set register 3. Bit 0 in FIO1SET3 register
corresponds to P1.24 ... bit 7 to P1.31.
0x00
FIO1SETL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C038
Fast GPIO Port 1 output Set Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1SETL register corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 15 to P1.15.
0x0000
FIO1SETU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C03A Fast GPIO Port 1 output Set Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1SETU register corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 15 to P1.31.
0x0000
9.5.3 GPIO port output Clear register IOCLR (IO0CLR - 0xE002 800C,
IO1CLR - 0xE002 801C, IO2CLR - 0xE002 802C, IO3CLR 0xE002 803C, FIO0CLR - 0x3FFF C01C, FIO1CLR - 0x3FFF C03C)
This register is used to produce a LOW level output at port pins configured as GPIO in an
OUTPUT mode. Writing 1 produces a LOW level at the corresponding port pin and clears
the corresponding bit in the IOSET register. Writing 0 has no effect. If any pin is configured
as an input or a secondary function, writing to IOCLR has no effect.
Legacy registers are the IO0CLR, IO1CLR, IO2CLR and IO3CLR while the enhanced
GPIOs are supported via the FIO0CLR and FIO1CLR registers. Access to a port pins via
the FIOCLR register is conditioned by the corresponding FIOMASK register (see
Section 9.5.5 “Fast GPIO port Mask register FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010,
FIO1MASK - 0x3FFF C030)”).
Table 111. GPIO port 0 output Clear register 0 (IO0CLR - address 0xE002 800C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P0xCLR
Slow GPIO output value Clear bits. Bit 0 in IO0CLR corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 0x0000 0000
31 in IO0CLR corresponds to P0.31.
Table 112. GPIO port 1 output Clear register 1 (IO1CLR - address 0xE002 801C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P1xCLR
Slow GPIO output value Clear bits. Bit 0 in IO1CLR corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit
31 in IO1CLR corresponds to P1.31.
0x0000 0000
Table 113. GPIO port 2 output Clear register 2 (IO2CLR - address 0xE002 802C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P2xCLR
Slow GPIO output value Clear bits. Bit 0 in IO2CLR corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit
31 in IO2CLR corresponds to P2.31.
0x0000 0000
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
119 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 114. GPIO port 3 output Clear register 3 (IO3CLR - address 0xE002 803C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P3xCLR
Slow GPIO output value Clear bits. Bit 0 in IO3CLR corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit
31 in IO3CLR corresponds to P2.31.
0x0000 0000
Table 115. Fast GPIO port 0 output Clear register 0 (FIO0CLR - address 0x3FFF C01C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
FP0xCLR
Fast GPIO output value Clear bits. Bit 0 in FIO0CLR corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 0x0000 0000
31 in FIO0CLR corresponds to P0.31.
Table 116. Fast GPIO port 1 output Clear register 1 (FIO1CLR - address 0x3FFF C03C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
FP1xCLR
Fast GPIO output value Clear bits. Bit 0 in FIO1CLR corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit 0x0000 0000
31 in FIO1CLR corresponds to P1.31.
Aside from the 32-bit long and word only accessible FIOCLR register, every fast GPIO
port can also be controlled via several byte and half-word accessible registers listed in
Table 117 and Table 118. Next to providing the same functions as the FIOCLR register,
these additional registers allow easier and faster access to the physical port pins.
Table 117. Fast GPIO port 0 output Clear byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO0CLR0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C01C Fast GPIO Port 0 output Clear register 0. Bit 0 in FIO0CLR0 register 0x00
corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 7 to P0.7.
FIO0CLR1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C01D Fast GPIO Port 0 output Clear register 1. Bit 0 in FIO0CLR1 register 0x00
corresponds to P0.8 ... bit 7 to P0.15.
FIO0CLR2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C01E Fast GPIO Port 0 output Clear register 2. Bit 0 in FIO0CLR2 register 0x00
corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 7 to P0.23.
FIO0CLR3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C01F
FIO0CLRL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C01C Fast GPIO Port 0 output Clear Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0CLRL register corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 15 to P0.15.
0x0000
FIO0CLRU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C01E Fast GPIO Port 0 output Clear Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0SETU register corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 15 to P0.31.
0x0000
Fast GPIO Port 0 output Clear register 3. Bit 0 in FIO0CLR3 register 0x00
corresponds to P0.24 ... bit 7 to P0.31.
Table 118. Fast GPIO port 1 output Clear byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
FIO1CLR0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C03C Fast GPIO Port 1 output Clear register 0. Bit 0 in FIO1CLR0 register 0x00
corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 7 to P1.7.
FIO1CLR1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C03D Fast GPIO Port 1 output Clear register 1. Bit 0 in FIO1CLR1 register 0x00
corresponds to P1.8 ... bit 7 to P1.15.
FIO1CLR2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C03E Fast GPIO Port 1 output Clear register 2. Bit 0 in FIO1CLR2 register 0x00
corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 7 to P1.23.
UM10114
User manual
Description
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Reset
value
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
120 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 118. Fast GPIO port 1 output Clear byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO1CLR3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C03F
Fast GPIO Port 1 output Clear register 3. Bit 0 in FIO1CLR3 register 0x00
corresponds to P1.24 ... bit 7 to P1.31.
FIO1CLRL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C03C Fast GPIO Port 1 output Clear Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1CLRL register corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 15 to P1.15.
0x0000
FIO1CLRU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C03E Fast GPIO Port 1 output Clear Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1CLRU register corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 15 to P1.31.
0x0000
9.5.4 GPIO port Pin value register IOPIN (IO0PIN - 0xE002 8000, IO1PIN 0xE002 8010, IO2PIN - 0xE002 8020, IO3PIN - 0xE002 8030, FIO0PIN 0x3FFF C014, FIO1PIN - 0x3FFF C034)
This register provides the value of port pins that are configured to perform only digital
functions. The register will give the logic value of the pin regardless of whether the pin is
configured for input or output, or as GPIO or an alternate digital function. As an example,
a particular port pin may have GPIO input, GPIO output, UART receive, and PWM output
as selectable functions. Any configuration of that pin will allow its current logic state to be
read from the corresponding IOPIN register.
If a pin has an analog function as one of its options, the pin state cannot be read if the
analog configuration is selected. Selecting the pin as an A/D input disconnects the digital
features of the pin. In that case, the pin value read in the IOPIN register is not valid.
Writing to the IOPIN register stores the value in the port output register, bypassing the
need to use both the IOSET and IOCLR registers to obtain the entire written value. This
feature should be used carefully in an application since it affects the entire port.
Legacy registers are the IO0PIN, IO1PIN, IO2PIN and IO3PIN while the enhanced GPIOs
are supported via the FIO0PIN and FIO1PIN registers. Access to a port pins via the
FIOPIN register is conditioned by the corresponding FIOMASK register (see Section 9.5.5
“Fast GPIO port Mask register FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010, FIO1MASK 0x3FFF C030)”).
Only pins masked with zeros in the Mask register (see Section 9.5.5 “Fast GPIO port
Mask register FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010, FIO1MASK - 0x3FFF C030)”) will
be correlated to the current content of the Fast GPIO port pin value register.
Table 119. GPIO port 0 Pin value register (IO0PIN - address 0xE002 8000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P0xVAL
Slow GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in IO0PIN corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 31 in IO0PIN
corresponds to P0.31.
NA
Table 120. GPIO port 1 Pin value register (IO1PIN - address 0xE002 8010) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P1xVAL
Slow GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in IO1PIN corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit 31 in IO1PIN
corresponds to P1.31.
NA
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
121 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 121. GPIO port 2 Pin value register (IO2PIN - address 0xE002 8020) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P2xVAL
Slow GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in IO2PIN corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit 31 in IO2PIN
corresponds to P2.31.
NA
Table 122. GPIO port 3 Pin value register (IO3PIN - address 0xE002 8030) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
P3xVAL
Slow GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in IO3PIN corresponds to P3.0 ... Bit 31 in IO3PIN
corresponds to P3.31.
NA
Table 123. Fast GPIO port 0 Pin value register (FIO0PIN - address 0x3FFF C014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
FP0xVAL
Fast GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in FIO0PIN corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 31 in FIO0PIN
corresponds to P0.31.
NA
Table 124. Fast GPIO port 1 Pin value register (FIO1PIN - address 0x3FFF C034) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
FP1xVAL
Fast GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in FIO1PIN corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit 31 in FIO1PIN
corresponds to P1.31.
NA
Aside from the 32-bit long and word only accessible FIOPIN register, every fast GPIO port
can also be controlled via several byte and half-word accessible registers listed in
Table 125 and Table 126. Next to providing the same functions as the FIOPIN register,
these additional registers allow easier and faster access to the physical port pins.
Table 125. Fast GPIO port 0 Pin value byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO0PIN0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C014
Fast GPIO Port 0 Pin value register 0. Bit 0 in FIO0PIN0 register
corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 7 to P0.7.
0x00
FIO0PIN1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C015
Fast GPIO Port 0 Pin value register 1. Bit 0 in FIO0PIN1 register
corresponds to P0.8 ... bit 7 to P0.15.
0x00
FIO0PIN2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C016
Fast GPIO Port 0 Pin value register 2. Bit 0 in FIO0PIN2 register
corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 7 to P0.23.
0x00
FIO0PIN3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C017
Fast GPIO Port 0 Pin value register 3. Bit 0 in FIO0PIN3 register
corresponds to P0.24 ... bit 7 to P0.31.
0x00
FIO0PINL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C014
Fast GPIO Port 0 Pin value Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0PINL register corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 15 to P0.15.
0x0000
FIO0PINU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C016
Fast GPIO Port 0 Pin value Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0PINU register corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 15 to P0.31.
0x0000
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
122 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Table 126. Fast GPIO port 1 Pin value byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO1PIN0
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C034
Fast GPIO Port 1 Pin value register 0. Bit 0 in FIO1PIN0 register
corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 7 to P1.7.
0x00
FIO1PIN1
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C035
Fast GPIO Port 1 Pin value register 1. Bit 0 in FIO1PIN1 register
corresponds to P1.8 ... bit 7 to P1.15.
0x00
FIO1PIN2
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C036
Fast GPIO Port 1 Pin value register 2. Bit 0 in FIO1PIN2 register
corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 7 to P1.23.
0x00
FIO1PIN3
8 (byte)
0x3FFF C037
Fast GPIO Port 1 Pin value register 3. Bit 0 in FIO1PIN3 register
corresponds to P1.24 ... bit 7 to P1.31.
0x00
FIO1PINL
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C034
Fast GPIO Port 1 Pin value Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1PINL register corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 15 to P1.15.
0x0000
FIO1PINU
16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C036
Fast GPIO Port 1 Pin value Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1PINU register corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 15 to P1.31.
0x0000
9.5.5 Fast GPIO port Mask register FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010,
FIO1MASK - 0x3FFF C030)
This register is available in the enhanced group of registers only. It is used to select the
port pins that will and will not be affected by a write accesses to the FIOPIN, FIOSET or
FIOSLR register. The mask register also filters the port’s content when the FIOPIN
register is read.
A zero in this register’s bit enables an access to the corresponding physical pin via a read
or write access. If a bit in this register is one, the corresponding pin will not be changed
with write access and if read, will not be reflected in the updated FIOPIN register. For
software examples, see Section 9.6 “GPIO usage notes” on page 124
Table 127. Fast GPIO port 0 Mask register (FIO0MASK - address 0x3FFF C010) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
FP0xMASK
Value Description
Reset value
Fast GPIO physical pin access control.
0x0000 0000
0
Pin is affected by writes to the FIOSET, FIOCLR, and FIOPIN registers.
Current state of the pin will be observable in the FIOPIN register.
1
Physical pin is unaffected by writes into the FIOSET, FIOCLR and FIOPIN
registers. When the FIOPIN register is read, this bit will not be updated with
the state of the physical pin.
Table 128. Fast GPIO port 1 Mask register (FIO1MASK - address 0x3FFF C030) bit description
Bit
Symbol
31:0
FP1xMASK
UM10114
User manual
Value Description
Reset value
Fast GPIO physical pin access control.
0x0000 0000
0
Pin is affected by writes to the FIOSET, FIOCLR, and FIOPIN registers.
Current state of the pin will be observable in the FIOPIN register.
1
Physical pin is unaffected by writes into the FIOSET, FIOCLR and FIOPIN
registers. When the FIOPIN register is read, this bit will not be updated with
the state of the physical pin.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
123 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Aside from the 32-bit long and word only accessible FIOMASK register, every fast GPIO
port can also be controlled via several byte and half-word accessible registers listed in
Table 129 and Table 130. Next to providing the same functions as the FIOMASK register,
these additional registers allow easier and faster access to the physical port pins.
Table 129. Fast GPIO port 0 Mask byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO0MASK0 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C010
Fast GPIO Port 0 Mask register 0. Bit 0 in FIO0MASK0 register
corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 7 to P0.7.
0x00
FIO0MASK1 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C011
Fast GPIO Port 0 Mask register 1. Bit 0 in FIO0MASK1 register
corresponds to P0.8 ... bit 7 to P0.15.
0x00
FIO0MASK2 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C012
Fast GPIO Port 0 Mask register 2. Bit 0 in FIO0MASK2 register
corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 7 to P0.23.
0x00
FIO0MASK3 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C013
Fast GPIO Port 0 Mask register 3. Bit 0 in FIO0MASK3 register
corresponds to P0.24 ... bit 7 to P0.31.
0x00
FIO0MASKL 16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C010
Fast GPIO Port 0 Mask Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0MASKL register corresponds to P0.0 ... bit 15 to P0.15.
0x0000
FIO0MASKU 16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C012
Fast GPIO Port 0 Mask Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO0MASKU register corresponds to P0.16 ... bit 15 to P0.31.
0x0000
Table 130. Fast GPIO port 1 Mask byte and half-word accessible register description
Register
name
Register
Address
length (bits)
& access
Description
Reset
value
FIO1MASK0 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C010
Fast GPIO Port 1 Mask register 0. Bit 0 in FIO1MASK0 register
corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 7 to P1.7.
0x00
FIO1MASK1 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C011
Fast GPIO Port 1 Mask register 1. Bit 0 in FIO1MASK1 register
corresponds to P1.8 ... bit 7 to P1.15.
0x00
FIO1MASK2 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C012
Fast GPIO Port 1 Mask register 2. Bit 0 in FIO1MASK2 register
corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 7 to P1.23.
0x00
FIO1MASK3 8 (byte)
0x3FFF C013
Fast GPIO Port 1 Mask register 3. Bit 0 in FIO1MASK3 register
corresponds to P1.24 ... bit 7 to P1.31.
0x00
FIO1MASKL 16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C010
Fast GPIO Port 1 Mask Lower half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1MASKL register corresponds to P1.0 ... bit 15 to P1.15.
0x0000
FIO1MASKU 16
(half-word)
0x3FFF C012
Fast GPIO Port 1 Mask Upper half-word register. Bit 0 in
FIO1MASKU register corresponds to P1.16 ... bit 15 to P1.31.
0x0000
9.6 GPIO usage notes
9.6.1 Example 1: sequential accesses to IOSET and IOCLR affecting the
same GPIO pin/bit
The state of a GPIO pin configured as output is determined by writes into the pin’s port
IOSET and IOCLR registers. The last access to the IOSET/IOCLR register will determine
the final output of the pin.
In the following code example
IO0DIR = 0x0000 0080 ;pin P0.7 configured as output
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
124 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
IO0CLR = 0x0000 0080 ;P0.7 goes LOW
IO0SET = 0x0000 0080 ;P0.7 goes HIGH
IO0CLR = 0x0000 0080 ;P0.7 goes LOW
pin P0.7 is configured as an output pin (write to IO0DIR register). Then, the P0.7 output
pin is set to low (first write to IO0CLR register). A short high pulse follows on P0.7 (write
access to IO0SET), and the second write to IO0CLR register sets pin P0.7 back to low
level.
9.6.2 Example 2: an immediate output of 0s and 1s on a GPIO port
Writing 1’s to the port’s IOSET register (setting port output to HIGH) followed by writing 1’s
to the IOCLR register (setting port output to LOW) causes a slight delay between the
HIGH and LOW output at the port’s pins.
There are systems that can tolerate this delay of a valid output, but for some applications
simultaneous output of a binary content (mixed 0s and 1s) within a group of pins on a
single GPIO port is required. This can be accomplished by writing to the port’s IOPIN
register.
The following code will preserve existing output on PORT0 pins P0.[31:16] and P0.[7:0]
and at the same time set P0.[15:8] to 0xA5, regardless of the previous value of pins
P0.[15:8]:
IO0PIN = (IO0PIN && 0xFFFF00FF) || 0x0000A500
The same outcome can be obtained using the fast port access.
Solution 1: using 32-bit (word) accessible fast GPIO registers
FIO0MASK = 0xFFFF00FF;
FIO0PIN = 0x0000A500;
Solution 2: using 16-bit (half-word) accessible fast GPIO registers
FIO0MASKL = 0x00FF;
FIO0PINL = 0xA500;
Solution 3: using 8-bit (byte) accessible fast GPIO registers
FIO0PIN1 = 0xA5;
9.6.3 Writing to IOSET/IOCLR .vs. IOPIN
Writing to the IOSET/IOCLR register allows easy change of the port’s selected output pins
to high/low level. Only pin/bits in the IOSET/IOCLR written as 1 will be set to high/low
level, while those written as 0 will remain unaffected. However, by just writing to either
IOSET or IOCLR register it is not possible to instantaneously output arbitrary binary data
containing mixture of 0s and 1s on a GPIO port.
Writing to the IOPIN register enables instantaneous output of a desired content on the
parallel GPIO. Binary data written into the IOPIN register will affect all output configured
pins of that parallel port: 0s in the IOPIN will produce low level pin outputs and 1s in IOPIN
will produce high level pin outputs. In order to change output of only a group of port’s pins,
the application must logically AND readout from the IOPIN with a mask. This mask must
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
125 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
contain 0s in bits corresponding to pins that will be changed, and 1s for all others. Finally,
this result has to be logically ORred with the desired content and stored back into the
IOPIN register. Example 2 from above illustrates output of 0xA5 on PORT0 pins 15 to 8
while leaving all other PORT0 output pins unchanged.
9.6.4 Output signal frequency considerations when using the legacy and
enhanced GPIO registers
The enhanced features of fast GPIO ports available on this microcontroller make the
performance of the GPIO pins more dependent on the details of the application code. In
particular, software access to a GPIO pin is 3.5 times faster through the fast GPIO
registers than through the legacy set of registers. As a result, the maximum output
frequency of the digital pin is increased 3.5 times if the fast GPIO registers are used. This
tremendous increase of the output frequency is less noticeable when plain C code is
used. The portion of an application handling the fast port output should be written in
assembly code and executed in the ARM mode to take full advantage of the fast GPIO
access.
The following is a code example in which the pin control section is written in assembly
language for ARM. It illustrates the difference between the fast and slow GPIO port output
capabilities. For the best performances, compile this code in the ARM mode and execute
from the on-chip SRAM memory.
ldr r0,=0xe01fc1a0 /*register address--enable fast port*/
mov r1,#0x1
str r1,[r0]
/*enable fast port0*/
ldr r1,=0xffffffff
ldr r0,=0x3fffc000 /*direction of fast port0*/
str r1,[r0]
ldr r0,=0xe0028018 /*direction of slow port 1*/
str r1,[r0]
ldr r0,=0x3fffc018 /*FIO0SET -- fast port0 register*/
ldr r1,=0x3fffc01c /*FIO0CLR0 -- fast port0 register*/
ldr r2,=0x00001000 /*select fast port 0.12 for toggle*/
ldr r3,=0xE0028014 /*IO1SET -- slow port1 register*/
ldr r4,=0xE002801C /*IO1CLR -- slow port1 register*/
ldr r5,=0x00100000 /*select slow port 1.20 for toggle*/
/*Generate 2 pulses on the fast port*/
str r2,[r0]
str r2,[r1]
str r2,[r0]
str r2,[r1]
/*Generate 2 pulses on the slow port*/
str r5,[r3]
str r5,[r4]
str r5,[r3]
str r5,[r4]
loop: b
loop
Figure 24 illustrates the code from above executed from the LPC21xx/LPC22xx on-chip
SRAM. The PLL generated FCCLK =60 MHz out of external FOSC = 12 MHz and
VPBDIV = 1 (PCLK = CCLK).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
126 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
Fig 24. Illustration of the fast and slow GPIO access and output showing 3.5 x increase of the pin output
frequency
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
127 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter 0 (UART0)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
10.1 How to read this chapter
The following features on the LPC21xx and LPC22xx are available in parts with enhanced
features only:
• Fractional baud rate controller
• Auto-baud control
• Software flow control
Therefore, the registers controlling enhanced features are available only for /01 parts and
LPC2220 (see Table 131).
The baud rate is determined by the register values U0DLL and U0DLM. Enhanced parts
also include a fractional baud rate generator for fine-tuning the baud rate. The fractional
baud rate settings are determined by the content of the U0FDR register.
Table 131. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers
Part
Baud rate
Section 10.4.3
Auto-baud control
Section Section
10.4.4 10.4.11
Software flow control
Section 10.4.5
Section 10.4.6 Section 10.4.12
no suffix and /00 parts
LPC2109
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2119
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2129
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2114
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2124
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2194
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2210
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2220
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2212
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2214
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2290
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2292
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2294
U0DLL
U0DLM -
-
-
-
-
/01 parts
LPC2109
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2119
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2129
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2114
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2124
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2194
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2210
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
128 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Table 131. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers
Part
Baud rate
Auto-baud control
Section 10.4.3
Section Section
10.4.4 10.4.11
Software flow control
Section 10.4.5
Section 10.4.6 Section 10.4.12
LPC2212
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2214
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2290
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2292
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
LPC2294
U0DLL
U0DLM U0FDR
U0ACR
U0IER, bits 9:8
U0IIR, bits 9:8
U0TER
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
10.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
16 byte Receive and Transmit FIFOs
Register locations conforming to ‘550 industry standard
Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1, 4, 8, and 14 bytes
Built-in fractional baud rate generator with autobauding capabilities.
Mechanism that enables software and hardware flow control implementation
10.3 Pin description
Table 132: UART0 pin description
Pin
Type
Description
RXD0
Input
Serial Input. Serial receive data.
TXD0
Output
Serial Output. Serial transmit data.
10.4 Register description
UART0 contains registers organized as shown in Table 133. The Divisor Latch Access Bit
(DLAB) is contained in U0LCR[7] and enables access to the Divisor Latches.
The divisor latches are used to determine the baud rate for all UART transfers. When
setting up the part, follow these steps:
1. Set DLAB = 1 in U0LCR (Section 10.4.8).
2. Set baud rate by writing values to registers DLL and DLM at address 0xE000 C000
Section 10.4.3).
3. Set DLAB = 0 in U0LCR (Section 10.4.8).
4. Read at address 0xE000 C000 accesses the U0RBR register (Section 10.4.1).
5. Write at address 0xE000 C000 accesses the U0THR register (Section 10.4.2).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
129 of 385
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
NXP Semiconductors
UM10114
User manual
Table 133. UART0 register map
Name
Description
Bit functions and addresses
MSB
BIT7
LSB
BIT6
BIT5
BIT4
BIT3
BIT2
BIT1
Access Reset
Address
value[1]
BIT0
8-bit Read Data
RO
NA
0xE000 C000
(DLAB=0)
U0THR
Transmit Holding
Register
8-bit Write Data
WO
NA
0xE000 C000
(DLAB=0)
U0DLL
Divisor Latch LSB
8-bit Data
R/W
0x01
0xE000 C000
(DLAB=1)
U0DLM
Divisor Latch MSB
8-bit Data
R/W
0x00
0xE000 C004
(DLAB=1)
U0IER
Interrupt Enable
Register
-
-
-
-
-
En.ABTO En.ABEO R/W
0x00
-
-
-
-
-
0xE000 C004
(DLAB=0)
Interrupt ID Reg.
-
-
-
-
-
-
0x01
0xE000 C008
FIFOs Enabled
-
-
IIR3
IIR2
IIR1
IIR0
RX Trigger
-
-
-
TX FIFO
Reset
RX FIFO
Reset
FIFO
Enable
WO
0x00
0xE000 C008
Word Length Select R/W
0x00
0xE000 C00C
RO
0x60
0xE000 C014
R/W
0x00
0xE000 C01C
R/W
0x00
0xE000 C020
0x10
0xE000 C028
0x80
0xE000 C030
U0IIR
-
En.RX
Enable
En.RX
Lin.St.Int THRE Int Dat.Av.In
t
ABTO Int ABEO Int RO
U0FCR
FIFO Control
Register
U0LCR
Line Control
Register
DLAB
Set
Break
Stick
Parity
Even
Par.Selct.
Parity
Enable
No. of
Stop Bits
U0LSR
Line Status
Register
RX FIFO
Error
TEMT
THRE
BI
FE
PE
U0SCR
Scratch Pad Reg.
U0ACR
Auto-baud Control
Register
U0FDR
Fractional Divider
Register
U0TER
[1]
TX. Enable Reg.
OE
DR
8-bit Data
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ABTO
Int.Clr
ABEO
Int.Clr
-
-
Aut.Rstrt.
Mode
Start
Reserved[31:8]
MulVal
TXEN
-
DivAddVal
-
-
-
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
-
-
-
R/W
UM10114
130 of 385
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
Receiver Buffer
Register
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
U0RBR
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
10.4.1 UART0 Receiver Buffer register (U0RBR - 0xE000 C000, when
DLAB = 0, Read Only)
The U0RBR is the top byte of the UART0 Rx FIFO. The top byte of the Rx FIFO contains
the oldest character received and can be read via the bus interface. The LSB (bit 0)
represents the “oldest” received data bit. If the character received is less than 8 bits, the
unused MSBs are padded with zeroes.
The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U0LCR must be zero in order to access the
U0RBR. The U0RBR is always Read Only.
Since PE, FE and BI bits correspond to the byte sitting on the top of the RBR FIFO (i.e.
the one that will be read in the next read from the RBR), the right approach for fetching the
valid pair of received byte and its status bits is first to read the content of the U0LSR
register, and then to read a byte from the U0RBR.
Table 134: UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (U0RBR - address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0,
Read Only) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
RBR
The UART0 Receiver Buffer Register contains the oldest
received byte in the UART0 Rx FIFO.
undefined
10.4.2 UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR - 0xE000 C000, when
DLAB = 0, Write Only)
The U0THR is the top byte of the UART0 TX FIFO. The top byte is the newest character in
the TX FIFO and can be written via the bus interface. The LSB represents the first bit to
transmit.
The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U0LCR must be zero in order to access the
U0THR. The U0THR is always Write Only.
Table 135: UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR - address 0xE000 C000, when
DLAB = 0, Write Only) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
THR
Writing to the UART0 Transmit Holding Register causes the data NA
to be stored in the UART0 transmit FIFO. The byte will be sent
when it reaches the bottom of the FIFO and the transmitter is
available.
10.4.3 UART0 Divisor Latch registers (U0DLL - 0xE000 C000 and U0DLM 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 1)
The UART0 Divisor Latch is part of the UART0 Baud Rate Generator and holds the value
used to divide the clock in order to produce the baud rate clock, which must be 16x the
desired baud rate (Equation 1). The U0DLL and U0DLM registers together form a 16 bit
divisor where U0DLL contains the lower 8 bits of the divisor and U0DLM contains the
higher 8 bits of the divisor. A 0x0000 value is treated like a 0x0001 value as division by
zero is not allowed.The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U0LCR must be one in order
to access the UART0 Divisor Latches.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
131 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
(1)
PCLK
UARTn baudrate = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------16 256 UnDLM + UnDLL
Details on how to select the right value for U0DLL and U0DLM if the part includes a
fractional divider (see Table 131) can be found later on in this chapter.
Table 136: UART0 Divisor Latch LSB register (U0DLL - address 0xE000 C000, when
DLAB = 1) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
DLL
The UART0 Divisor Latch LSB Register, along with the U0DLM
register, determines the baud rate of the UART0.
0x01
Table 137: UART0 Divisor Latch MSB register (U0DLM - address 0xE000 C004, when
DLAB = 1) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
DLM
The UART0 Divisor Latch MSB Register, along with the U0DLL
register, determines the baud rate of the UART0.
0x00
10.4.4 UART0 Fractional Divider Register (U0FDR - 0xE000 C028)
The UART0 Fractional Divider Register (U0FDR) controls the clock pre-scaler for the
baud rate generation and can be read and written at the user’s discretion. This pre-scaler
takes the APB clock and generates an output clock according to the specified fractional
requirements.
Important: If the fractional divider is active (DIVADDVAL > 0) and DLM = 0, the value of
the DLL register must be 3 or greater.
Table 138: UARTn Fractional Divider Register (U0FDR - address 0xE000 C028,
U2FDR - 0xE007 8028, U3FDR - 0xE007 C028) bit description
Bit
Function
Value Description
Reset
value
3:0
DIVADDVAL
0
Baud-rate generation pre-scaler divisor value. If this field is 0
0, fractional baud-rate generator will not impact the UARTn
baudrate.
7:4
MULVAL
1
Baud-rate pre-scaler multiplier value. This field must be
1
greater or equal 1 for UARTn to operate properly,
regardless of whether the fractional baud-rate generator is
used or not.
31:8
-
NA
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved 0
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
This register controls the clock pre-scaler for the baud rate generation. The reset value of
the register keeps the fractional capabilities of UART0 disabled making sure that UART0
is fully software and hardware compatible with UARTs not equipped with this feature.
The UART0 baudrate can be calculated as (n = 0):
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
132 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
(2)
PCLK
UARTn baudrate = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DivAddVal
16 256 UnDLM + UnDLL 1 + -----------------------------
MulVal
Where PCLK is the peripheral clock, U0DLM and U0DLL are the standard UART0 baud
rate divider registers, and DIVADDVAL and MULVAL are UART0 fractional baudrate
generator specific parameters.
The value of MULVAL and DIVADDVAL should comply to the following conditions:
1. 0 < MULVAL 15
2. 0 DIVADDVAL 15
3. DIVADDVAL 0), it
is going to impact the measuring of UART0 Rx pin baud-rate, but the value of the U0FDR
register is not going to be modified after rate measurement. Also, when auto-baud is used,
any write to U0DLM and U0DLL registers should be done before U0ACR register write.
The minimum and the maximum baudrates supported by UART0 are function of PCLK,
number of data bits, stop-bits and parity bits.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
142 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
(3)
2 P CLK
PCLK
ratemin = ------------------------- UART0 baudrate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ratemax
16 2 15
16 2 + databits + paritybits + stopbits
10.4.11.2 Auto-baud modes
When the software is expecting an ”AT" command, it configures the UART0 with the
expected character format and sets the U0ACR Start bit. The initial values in the divisor
latches U0DLM and U0DLM don‘t care. Because of the ”A" or ”a" ASCII coding
(”A" = 0x41, ”a" = 0x61), the UART0 Rx pin sensed start bit and the LSB of the expected
character are delimited by two falling edges. When the U0ACR Start bit is set, the
auto-baud protocol will execute the following phases:
1. On U0ACR Start bit setting, the baud-rate measurement counter is reset and the
UART0 U0RSR is reset. The U0RSR baud rate is switch to the highest rate.
2. A falling edge on UART0 Rx pin triggers the beginning of the start bit. The rate
measuring counter will start counting PCLK cycles optionally pre-scaled by the
fractional baud-rate generator.
3. During the receipt of the start bit, 16 pulses are generated on the RSR baud input with
the frequency of the (fractional baud-rate pre-scaled) UART0 input clock,
guaranteeing the start bit is stored in the U0RSR.
4. During the receipt of the start bit (and the character LSB for mode = 0) the rate
counter will continue incrementing with the pre-scaled UART0 input clock (PCLK).
5. If Mode = 0 then the rate counter will stop on next falling edge of the UART0 Rx pin. If
Mode = 1 then the rate counter will stop on the next rising edge of the UART0 Rx pin.
6. The rate counter is loaded into U0DLM/U0DLL and the baud-rate will be switched to
normal operation. After setting the U0DLM/U0DLL the end of auto-baud interrupt
U0IIR ABEOInt will be set, if enabled. The U0RSR will now continue receiving the
remaining bits of the ”A/a" character.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
143 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
'A' (0x41) or 'a' (0x61)
start
bit0
bit1
bit2
bit3
bit4
bit5
bit6
bit7
parity stop
UART0 RX
start bit
LSB of 'A' or 'a'
U0ACR start
rate counter
16xbaud_rate
16 cycles
16 cycles
a. Mode 0 (start bit and LSB are used for auto-baud)
'A' (0x41) or 'a' (0x61)
start
bit0
bit1
bit2
bit3
bit4
bit5
bit6
bit7
parity stop
UART0 RX
start bit
LSB of 'A' or 'a'
U0ACR start
rate counter
16xbaud_rate
16 cycles
b. Mode 1 (only start bit is used for auto-baud)
Fig 26. Autobaud a) mode 0 and b) mode 1 waveform.
10.4.12 UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER - 0xE000 C030)
The U0TER enables implementation of software flow control. When TXEn=1, UART0
transmitter will keep sending data as long as they are available. As soon as TXEn
becomes 0, UART0 transmission will stop.
Table 148 describes how to use TXEn bit in order to achieve software flow control.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
144 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Table 148: UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER - address 0xE000 C030) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
6:0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
7
TXEN
When this bit is 1, as it is after a Reset, data written to the THR is output 1
on the TXD pin as soon as any preceding data has been sent. If this bit
is cleared to 0 while a character is being sent, the transmission of that
character is completed, but no further characters are sent until this bit is
set again. In other words, a 0 in this bit blocks the transfer of characters
from the THR or TX FIFO into the transmit shift register. Software
implementing software-handshaking can clear this bit when it receives
an XOFF character (DC3). Software can set this bit again when it
receives an XON (DC1) character.
10.5 Architecture
The architecture of the UART0 is shown below in the block diagram.
The APB interface provides a communications link between the CPU or host and the
UART0.
The UART0 receiver block, U0RX, monitors the serial input line, RXD0, for valid input.
The UART0 RX Shift Register (U0RSR) accepts valid characters via RXD0. After a valid
character is assembled in the U0RSR, it is passed to the UART0 RX Buffer Register FIFO
to await access by the CPU or host via the generic host interface.
The UART0 transmitter block, U0TX, accepts data written by the CPU or host and buffers
the data in the UART0 TX Holding Register FIFO (U0THR). The UART0 TX Shift Register
(U0TSR) reads the data stored in the U0THR and assembles the data to transmit via the
serial output pin, TXD0.
The UART0 Baud Rate Generator block, U0BRG, generates the timing enables used by
the UART0 TX block. The U0BRG clock input source is the APB clock (PCLK). The main
clock is divided down per the divisor specified in the U0DLL and U0DLM registers. This
divided down clock is a 16x oversample clock, NBAUDOUT.
The interrupt interface contains registers U0IER and U0IIR. The interrupt interface
receives several one clock wide enables from the U0TX and U0RX blocks.
Status information from the U0TX and U0RX is stored in the U0LSR. Control information
for the U0TX and U0RX is stored in the U0LCR.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
145 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
U0TX
U0THR
NTXRDY
U0TSR
TXD0
U0BRG
U0DLL
NBAUDOUT
U0DLM
RCLK
U0RX
NRXRDY
INTERRUPT
U0RBR
U0INTR
U0RSR
RXD0
U0IER
U0IIR
U0FCR
U0LSR
U0SCR
U0LCR
PA[2:0]
PSEL
PSTB
PWRITE
APB
INTERFACE
PD[7:0]
DDIS
AR
MR
PCLK
Fig 27. UART0 block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
146 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter 1 (UART1)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
11.1 How to read this chapter
The following features on the LPC21xx and LPC22xx are available in parts with enhanced
features only:
• Fractional baud rate controller
• Auto-baud control
• Software flow control
Therefore, the registers controlling enhanced features are available only for /01 parts and
LPC2220 (see Table 149).
The baud rate is determined by the register values U1DLL and U1DLM. Enhanced parts
also include a fractional baud rate generator for fine-tuning the baud rate. The fractional
baud rate settings are determined by the content of the U1FDR register.
Table 149. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers
Part
Baud rate
Section 11.4.3
Auto-baud control
Section Section
11.4.4 11.4.13
Software flow control
Section 11.4.5
Section 11.4.6
Section 11.4.16
no suffix and /00 parts
LPC2109
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2119
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2129
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2114
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2124
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2194
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2210
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2220
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2212
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2214
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2290
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2292
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
LPC2294
U1DLL
U1DLM -
-
-
-
-
/01 parts
LPC2109
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2119
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2129
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2114
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2124
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2194
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2210
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
147 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Table 149. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers
Part
Baud rate
Auto-baud control
Section 11.4.3
Section Section
11.4.4 11.4.13
Software flow control
Section 11.4.5
Section 11.4.6
Section 11.4.16
LPC2212
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2214
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2290
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2292
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
LPC2294
U1DLL
U1DLM U1FDR
U1ACR
U1IER, bits 9:8
U1IIR, bits 9:8
U1TER
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
11.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
UART1 is identical to UART0 with the addition of a modem interface.
UART1 contains 16 byte Receive and Transmit FIFOs.
Register locations conform to ‘550 industry standard.
Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1, 4, 8, and 14 bytes.
Fractional baud rate generator with autobauding capabilities is built-in.
Mechanism enables software and hardware flow control implementation.
Standard modem interface signals are included, and flow control (auto-CTS/RTS) is
fully supported in hardware.
11.3 Pin description
Table 150. UART1 pin description
Pin
Type
Description
RXD1
Input
Serial Input. Serial receive data.
TXD1
Output
Serial Output. Serial transmit data.
CTS1
Input
Clear To Send. Active LOW signal indicates if the external modem is ready to accept transmitted
data via TXD1 from the UART1. In normal operation of the modem interface (U1MCR[4] = 0), the
complement value of this signal is stored in U1MSR[4]. State change information is stored in
U1MSR[0] and is a source for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled (U1IER[3] = 1).
DCD1
Input
Data Carrier Detect. Active LOW signal indicates if the external modem has established a
communication link with the UART1 and data may be exchanged. In normal operation of the
modem interface (U1MCR[4]=0), the complement value of this signal is stored in U1MSR[7]. State
change information is stored in U1MSR3 and is a source for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled
(U1IER[3] = 1).
DSR1
Input
Data Set Ready. Active LOW signal indicates if the external modem is ready to establish a
communications link with the UART1. In normal operation of the modem interface (U1MCR[4] = 0),
the complement value of this signal is stored in U1MSR[5]. State change information is stored in
U1MSR[1] and is a source for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled (U1IER[3] = 1).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
148 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Table 150. UART1 pin description
Pin
Type
Description
DTR1
Output
Data Terminal Ready. Active LOW signal indicates that the UART1 is ready to establish connection
with external modem. The complement value of this signal is stored in U1MCR[0].
RI1
Input
Ring Indicator. Active LOW signal indicates that a telephone ringing signal has been detected by
the modem. In normal operation of the modem interface (U1MCR[4] = 0), the complement value of
this signal is stored in U1MSR[6]. State change information is stored in U1MSR[2] and is a source
for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled (U1IER[3] = 1).
RTS1
Output
Request To Send. Active LOW signal indicates that the UART1 would like to transmit data to the
external modem. The complement value of this signal is stored in U1MCR[1].
11.4 Register description
UART1 contains registers organized as shown in Table 76. The Divisor Latch Access Bit
(DLAB) is contained in U1LCR[7] and enables access to the Divisor Latches.
The divisor latches are used to determine the baud rate for all UART transfers. When
setting up the part, follow these steps:
1. Set DLAB = 1 in U1LCR (Section 11.4.10).
2. Set baud rate by writing values to registers DLL and DLM at address 0xE000 C000
Section 11.4.3).
3. Set DLAB = 0 in U1LCR (Section 11.4.8).
4. Read at address 0xE000 C000 accesses the U1RBR register (Section 11.4.1).
5. Write at address 0xE000 C000 accesses the U1THR register (Section 11.4.2).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
149 of 385
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
NXP Semiconductors
UM10114
User manual
Table 151. UART1 register map
Name
Description
Bit functions and addresses
MSB
BIT7
LSB
BIT6
BIT5
BIT4
BIT3
BIT2
BIT1
Access Reset
value[1]
Address
BIT0
Receiver Buffer
Register
8-bit Read Data
RO
NA
0xE001 0000
(DLAB=0)
U1THR
Transmit Holding
Register
8-bit Write Data
WO
NA
0xE001 0000
(DLAB=0)
U1DLL
Divisor Latch LSB
8-bit Data
R/W
0x01
0xE001 0000
(DLAB=1)
U1DLM
Divisor Latch MSB
8-bit Data
R/W
0x00
0xE001 0004
(DLAB=1)
U1IER
Interrupt Enable
Register
En.ABTO En.ABEO R/W
0x00
0xE001 0004
(DLAB=0)
0x01
0xE001 0008
U1IIR
Interrupt ID Reg.
-
-
-
-
En.CTS
Int
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
E.Modem En. RX
Enable
En. RX
St.Int
Lin.St. Int THRE Int Dat.Av.Int
-
-
-
-
FIFOs Enabled
-
-
IIR3
IIR2
ABTO Int ABEO Int RO
IIR1
IIR0
RX Trigger
-
-
-
TX FIFO
Reset
RX FIFO
Reset
FIFO
Enable
WO
0x00
0xE001 0008
Word Length Select R/W
0x00
0xE001 000C
FIFO Control
Register
U1LCR
Line Control
Register
DLAB
Set Break
Stick
Parity
Even
Par.Selct.
Parity
Enable
No. of
Stop Bits
U1MCR
Modem Ctrl. Reg.
CTSen
RTSen
-
LoopBck.
-
-
RTS
DTR
R/W
0x00
0xE001 0010
U1LSR
Line Status
Register
RX FIFO
Error
TEMT
THRE
BI
FE
PE
OE
DR
RO
0x60
0xE001 0014
U1MSR
Modem Status
Register
DCD
RI
DSR
CTS
Delta
DCD
Trailing
Edge RI
Delta
DSR
Delta
CTS
RO
0x00
0xE001 0018
U1SCR
Scratch Pad Reg.
R/W
0x00
0xE001 001C
U1ACR
Auto-baud Control
Register
R/W
0x00
0xE001 0020
R/W
0x10
0xE001 0028
R/W
0x80
0xE001 0030
U1FDR
Fractional Divider
Register
U1TER
TX. Enable Reg.
[1]
8-bit Data
-
-
-
-
-
-
ABTO
IntClr
ABEO
IntClr
-
-
-
-
-
Aut.Rstrt.
Mode
Start
Reserved[31:8]
MulVal
TXEN
-
DivAddVal
-
-
-
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
-
-
-
UM10114
150 of 385
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
U1FCR
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
U1RBR
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
11.4.1 UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR - 0xE001 0000, when
DLAB = 0 Read Only)
The U1RBR is the top byte of the UART1 RX FIFO. The top byte of the RX FIFO contains
the oldest character received and can be read via the bus interface. The LSB (bit 0)
represents the “oldest” received data bit. If the character received is less than 8 bits, the
unused MSBs are padded with zeroes.
The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U1LCR must be zero in order to access the
U1RBR. The U1RBR is always Read Only.
Since PE, FE and BI bits correspond to the byte sitting on the top of the RBR FIFO (i.e.
the one that will be read in the next read from the RBR), the right approach for fetching the
valid pair of received byte and its status bits is first to read the content of the U1LSR
register, and then to read a byte from the U1RBR.
Table 152. UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR - address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0
Read Only) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
RBR
The UART1 Receiver Buffer Register contains the oldest
received byte in the UART1 RX FIFO.
undefined
11.4.2 UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR - 0xE001 0000, when
DLAB = 0 Write Only)
The U1THR is the top byte of the UART1 TX FIFO. The top byte is the newest character in
the TX FIFO and can be written via the bus interface. The LSB represents the first bit to
transmit.
The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U1LCR must be zero in order to access the
U1THR. The U1THR is always Write Only.
Table 153. UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR - address 0xE001 0000, when
DLAB = 0 Write Only) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
THR
Writing to the UART1 Transmit Holding Register causes the data NA
to be stored in the UART1 transmit FIFO. The byte will be sent
when it reaches the bottom of the FIFO and the transmitter is
available.
11.4.3 UART1 Divisor Latch registers 0 and 1 (U1DLL - 0xE001 0000 and
U1DLM - 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 1)
The UART0 Divisor Latch is part of the UART0 Baud Rate Generator and holds the value
used to divide the clock in order to produce the baud rate clock, which must be 16x the
desired baud rate (Equation 4). The U1DLL and U1DLM registers together form a 16 bit
divisor where U1DLL contains the lower 8 bits of the divisor and U1DLM contains the
higher 8 bits of the divisor. A 0x0000 value is treated like a 0x0001 value as division by
zero is not allowed.The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U1LCR must be one in order
to access the UART1 Divisor Latches.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
151 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
(4)
PCLK
UARTn baudrate = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------16 256 UnDLM + UnDLL
Details on how to select the right value for U1DLL and U1DLM if the part includes a
fractional divider (see Table 149) can be found later on in this chapter.
Table 154: UART1 Divisor Latch LSB register (U1DLL - address 0xE001 C000, when
DLAB = 1) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
DLL
The UART0 Divisor Latch LSB Register, along with the U1DLM
register, determines the baud rate of the UART1.
0x01
Table 155: UART0 Divisor Latch MSB register (U1DLM - address 0xE001 C004, when
DLAB = 1) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
DLM
The UART1 Divisor Latch MSB Register, along with the U1DLL
register, determines the baud rate of the UART1.
0x00
11.4.4 UART1 Fractional Divider Register (U1FDR - 0xE001 0028)
The UART1 Fractional Divider Register (U1FDR) controls the clock pre-scaler for the
baud rate generation and can be read and written at the user’s discretion. This pre-scaler
takes the APB clock and generates an output clock according to the specified fractional
requirements.
Important: If the fractional divider is active (DIVADDVAL > 0) and DLM = 0, the value of
the DLL register must be 3 or greater.
Table 156. UART1 Fractional Divider Register (U1FDR - address 0xE001 0028) bit description
Bit
Function
Value Description
Reset
value
3:0
DIVADDVAL
0
Baud-rate generation pre-scaler divisor value. If this field is 0
0, fractional baud-rate generator will not impact the UARTn
baudrate.
7:4
MULVAL
1
Baud-rate pre-scaler multiplier value. This field must be
1
greater or equal 1 for UARTn to operate properly,
regardless of whether the fractional baud-rate generator is
used or not.
31:8
-
NA
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved 0
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
This register controls the clock pre-scaler for the baud rate generation. The reset value of
the register keeps the fractional capabilities of UART1 disabled making sure that UART1
is fully software and hardware compatible with UARTs not equipped with this feature.
UART1 baudrate can be calculated as (n = 1):
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
152 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
(5)
PCLK
UARTn baudrate = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DivAddVal
16 256 UnDLM + UnDLL 1 + -----------------------------
MulVal
Where PCLK is the peripheral clock, U1DLM and U1DLL are the standard UART1 baud
rate divider registers, and DIVADDVAL and MULVAL are UART1 fractional baudrate
generator specific parameters.
The value of MULVAL and DIVADDVAL should comply to the following conditions:
1. 0 < MULVAL 15
2. 0 DIVADDVAL 15
3. DIVADDVAL 0), it
is going to impact the measuring of UART1 Rx pin baud-rate, but the value of the U1FDR
register is not going to be modified after rate measurement. Also, when auto-baud is used,
any write to U1DLM and U1DLL registers should be done before U1ACR register write.
The minimum and the maximum baudrates supported by UART1 are function of PCLK,
number of data bits, stop-bits and parity bits.
(6)
2 P CLK
PCLK
ratemin = ------------------------- UART 1 baudrate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = ratemax
16 2 15
16 2 + databits + paritybits + stopbits
11.4.15 Auto-baud modes
When the software is expecting an ”AT" command, it configures the UART1 with the
expected character format and sets the U1ACR Start bit. The initial values in the divisor
latches U1DLM and U1DLM don‘t care. Because of the ”A" or ”a" ASCII coding
(”A" = 0x41, ”a" = 0x61), the UART1 Rx pin sensed start bit and the LSB of the expected
character are delimited by two falling edges. When the U1ACR Start bit is set, the
auto-baud protocol will execute the following phases:
1. On U1ACR Start bit setting, the baud-rate measurement counter is reset and the
UART1 U1RSR is reset. The U1RSR baud rate is switch to the highest rate.
2. A falling edge on UART1 Rx pin triggers the beginning of the start bit. The rate
measuring counter will start counting PCLK cycles optionally pre-scaled by the
fractional baud-rate generator.
3. During the receipt of the start bit, 16 pulses are generated on the RSR baud input with
the frequency of the (fractional baud-rate pre-scaled) UART1 input clock,
guaranteeing the start bit is stored in the U1RSR.
4. During the receipt of the start bit (and the character LSB for mode = 0) the rate
counter will continue incrementing with the pre-scaled UART1 input clock (PCLK).
5. If Mode = 0 then the rate counter will stop on next falling edge of the UART1 Rx pin. If
Mode = 1 then the rate counter will stop on the next rising edge of the UART1 Rx pin.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
166 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
6. The rate counter is loaded into U1DLM/U1DLL and the baud-rate will be switched to
normal operation. After setting the U1DLM/U1DLL the end of auto-baud interrupt
U1IIR ABEOInt will be set, if enabled. The U1RSR will now continue receiving the
remaining bits of the ”A/a" character.
'A' (0x41) or 'a' (0x61)
start
bit0
bit1
bit2
bit3
bit4
bit5
bit6
bit7
parity stop
UART1 RX
start bit
LSB of 'A' or 'a'
U1ACR start
rate counter
16xbaud_rate
16 cycles
16 cycles
a. Mode 0 (start bit and LSB are used for auto-baud)
'A' (0x41) or 'a' (0x61)
start
bit0
bit1
bit2
bit3
bit4
bit5
bit6
bit7
parity stop
UART1 RX
start bit
LSB of 'A' or 'a'
U1ACR start
rate counter
16xbaud_rate
16 cycles
b. Mode 1 (only start bit is used for auto-baud)
Fig 31. Autobaud a) mode 0 and b) mode 1 waveform
11.4.16 UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER - 0xE001 0030)
LPC2101/2102/2103’s U1TER enables implementation of software and hardware flow
control. When TXEn=1, UART1 transmitter will keep sending data as long as they are
available. As soon as TXEn becomes 0, UART1 transmission will stop.
Table 169 describes how to use TXEn bit in order to achieve software flow control.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
167 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
Table 169. UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER - address 0xE001 0030) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
6:0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
7
TXEN
When this bit is 1, as it is after a Reset, data written to the THR 1
is output on the TXD pin as soon as any preceding data has
been sent. If this bit cleared to 0 while a character is being sent,
the transmission of that character is completed, but no further
characters are sent until this bit is set again. In other words, a 0
in this bit blocks the transfer of characters from the THR or TX
FIFO into the transmit shift register. Software can clear this bit
when it detects that the a hardware-handshaking TX-permit
signal CTS has gone false, or it can clear this bit with software
handshaking, when it receives an XOFF character (DC3).
Software can set this bit again when it detects that the
TX-permit signal has gone true, or when it receives an XON
(DC1) character.
11.5 Architecture
The architecture of the UART1 is shown below in the block diagram.
The APB interface provides a communications link between the CPU or host and the
UART1.
The UART1 receiver block, U1RX, monitors the serial input line, RXD1, for valid input.
The UART1 RX Shift Register (U1RSR) accepts valid characters via RXD1. After a valid
character is assembled in the U1RSR, it is passed to the UART1 RX Buffer Register FIFO
to await access by the CPU or host via the generic host interface.
The UART1 transmitter block, U1TX, accepts data written by the CPU or host and buffers
the data in the UART1 TX Holding Register FIFO (U1THR). The UART1 TX Shift Register
(U1TSR) reads the data stored in the U1THR and assembles the data to transmit via the
serial output pin, TXD1.
The UART1 Baud Rate Generator block, U1BRG, generates the timing enables used by
the UART1 TX block. The U1BRG clock input source is the APB clock (PCLK). The main
clock is divided down per the divisor specified in the U1DLL and U1DLM registers. This
divided down clock is a 16x oversample clock, NBAUDOUT.
The modem interface contains registers U1MCR and U1MSR. This interface is
responsible for handshaking between a modem peripheral and the UART1.
The interrupt interface contains registers U1IER and U1IIR. The interrupt interface
receives several one clock wide enables from the U1TX and U1RX blocks.
Status information from the U1TX and U1RX is stored in the U1LSR. Control information
for the U1TX and U1RX is stored in the U1LCR.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
168 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous
MODEM
U1TX
U1THR
CTS
NTXRDY
U1TSR
TXD1
U1MSR
DSR
RI
U1BRG
DCD
DTR
RTS
U1DLL
NBAUDOUT
U1DLM
RCLK
U1MCR
U1RX
NRXRDY
INTERRUPT
U1RBR
U1RSR
RXD1
U1IER
U1INTR
U1IIR
U1FCR
U1LSR
U1SCR
U1LCR
PA[2:0]
PSEL
PSTB
PWRITE
APB
INTERFACE
PD[7:0]
DDIS
AR
MR
PCLK
Fig 32. UART1 block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
169 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
12.1 How to read this chapter
The I2C-bus interface is identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
12.2 Features
• Standard I2C compliant bus interfaces that may be configured as Master, Slave, or
Master/Slave.
• Arbitration between simultaneously transmitting masters without corruption of serial
data on the bus.
• Programmable clock to allow adjustment of I2C transfer rates.
• Bidirectional data transfer between masters and slaves.
• Serial clock synchronization allows devices with different bit rates to communicate via
one serial bus.
• Serial clock synchronization can be used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and
resume serial transfer.
• The I2C-bus may be used for test and diagnostic purposes.
12.3 Applications
Interfaces to external I2C standard parts, such as serial RAMs, LCDs, tone generators,
etc.
12.4 Description
A typical I2C-bus configuration is shown in Figure 33. Depending on the state of the
direction bit (R/W), two types of data transfers are possible on the I2C-bus:
• Data transfer from a master transmitter to a slave receiver. The first byte transmitted
by the master is the slave address. Next follows a number of data bytes. The slave
returns an acknowledge bit after each received byte.
• Data transfer from a slave transmitter to a master receiver. The first byte (the slave
address) is transmitted by the master. The slave then returns an acknowledge bit.
Next follows the data bytes transmitted by the slave to the master. The master returns
an acknowledge bit after all received bytes other than the last byte. At the end of the
last received byte, a “not acknowledge” is returned. The master device generates all
of the serial clock pulses and the START and STOP conditions. A transfer is ended
with a STOP condition or with a repeated START condition. Since a repeated START
condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C-bus will not be
released.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
170 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
The LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface is byte oriented, and have four operating modes: master
transmitter mode, master receiver mode, slave transmitter mode and slave receiver
mode.
The I2C interface complies with entire I2C specification, supporting the ability to turn
power off to the LPC21xx/22xx without causing a problem with other devices on the same
I2C-bus. This is sometimes a useful capability, but intrinsically limits alternate uses for the
same pins if the I2C interface is not used.
pull-up
resistor
pull-up
resistor
SDA
I 2C bus
SCL
SDA
SCL
LPC2xxx
OTHER DEVICE WITH
I 2C INTERFACE
OTHER DEVICE WITH
I 2C INTERFACE
Fig 33. I2C-bus Configuration
12.5 Pin description
Table 170. I2C Pin Description
Pin
Type
Description
SDA
Input/Output
I2C serial data
SCL
Input/Output
I2C Serial clock
Remark: The SDA and SCL outputs are open-drain outputs for I2C-bus compliance.
12.6 I2C operating modes
In a given application, the I2C block may operate as a master, a slave, or both. In the slave
mode, the I2C hardware looks for its own slave address and the general call address. If
one of these addresses is detected, an interrupt is requested. If the processor wishes to
become the bus master, the hardware waits until the bus is free before the master mode is
entered so that a possible slave operation is not interrupted. If bus arbitration is lost in the
master mode, the I2C block switches to the slave mode immediately and can detect its
own slave address in the same serial transfer.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
171 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.6.1 Master Transmitter mode
In this mode data is transmitted from master to slave. Before the master transmitter mode
can be entered, the I2CONSET register must be initialized as shown in Table 171. I2EN
must be set to 1 to enable the I2C function. If the AA bit is 0, the I2C interface will not
acknowledge any address when another device is master of the bus, so it can not enter
slave mode. The STA, STO and SI bits must be 0. The SI Bit is cleared by writing 1 to the
SIC bit in the I2CONCLR register.
Table 171. I2CCONSET used to configure Master mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
-
I2EN
STA
STO
SI
AA
-
-
Value
-
1
0
0
0
0
-
-
The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and
the data direction bit. In this mode the data direction bit (R/W) should be 0 which means
Write. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address and Write bit. Data is
transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is received.
START and STOP conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial
transfer.
The I2C interface will enter master transmitter mode when software sets the STA bit. The
I2C logic will send the START condition as soon as the bus is free. After the START
condition is transmitted, the SI bit is set, and the status code in the I2STAT register is
0x08. This status code is used to vector to a state service routine which will load the slave
address and Write bit to the I2DAT register, and then clear the SI bit. SI is cleared by
writing a 1 to the SIC bit in the I2CONCLR register. The STA bit should be cleared after
writing the slave address.
When the slave address and R/W bit have been transmitted and an acknowledgment bit
has been received, the SI bit is set again, and the possible status codes now are 0x18,
0x20, or 0x38 for the master mode, or 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0 if the slave mode was enabled
(by setting AA to 1). The appropriate actions to be taken for each of these status codes
are shown in Table 186 to Table 189.
S
slave address
R/W
A
DATA
logic 0 = write
logic 1 = read
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
A
DATA
A/A
P
data transferred
(n Bytes + acknowledge)
A = acknowledge (SDA LOW)
A = not acknowledge (SDA HIGH)
S = START condition
P = STOP condition
002aaa929
Fig 34. Format in the Master Transmitter mode
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
172 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.6.2 Master Receiver mode
In the master receiver mode, data is received from a slave transmitter. The transfer is
initiated in the same way as in the master transmitter mode. When the START condition
has been transmitted, the interrupt service routine must load the slave address and the
data direction bit to the I2C Data register (I2DAT), and then clear the SI bit. In this case,
the data direction bit (R/W) should be 1 to indicate a read.
When the slave address and data direction bit have been transmitted and an
acknowledge bit has been received, the SI bit is set, and the Status Register will show the
status code. For master mode, the possible status codes are 0x40, 0x48, or 0x38. For
slave mode, the possible status codes are 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0. For details, refer to
Table 187.
S
slave address
R
A
logic 0 = write
logic 1 = read
DATA
A
DATA
A
P
data transferred
(n Bytes + acknowledge)
A = acknowledge (SDA LOW)
A = not acknowledge (SDA HIGH)
S = START condition
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
002aaa930
Fig 35. Format of Master Receiver mode
After a repeated START condition, I2C may switch to the master transmitter mode.
S
SLA
R
A
logic 0 = write
logic 1 = read
DATA
A
DATA
A
RS
SLA
W
A
DATA
A
P
data transferred
(n Bytes + acknowledge)
A = acknowledge (SDA LOW)
A = not acknowledge (SDA HIGH)
S = START condition
P = STOP condition
SLA = slave address
RS = repeat START condition
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
002aaa931
Fig 36. A Master Receiver switches to Master Transmitter after sending Repeated START
12.6.3 Slave Receiver mode
In the slave receiver mode, data bytes are received from a master transmitter. To initialize
the slave receiver mode, user write the Slave Address register (I2ADR) and write the I2C
Control Set register (I2CONSET) as shown in Table 172.
Table 172. I2CONSET used to configure Slave mode
UM10114
User manual
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
-
I2EN
STA
STO
SI
AA
-
-
Value
-
1
0
0
0
1
-
-
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
173 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
I2EN must be set to 1 to enable the I2C function. AA bit must be set to 1 to acknowledge
its own slave address or the general call address. The STA, STO and SI bits are set to 0.
After I2ADR and I2CONSET are initialized, the I2C interface waits until it is addressed by
its own address or general address followed by the data direction bit. If the direction bit is
0 (W), it enters slave receiver mode. If the direction bit is 1 (R), it enters slave transmitter
mode. After the address and direction bit have been received, the SI bit is set and a valid
status code can be read from the Status register (I2STAT). Refer to Table 188 for the
status codes and actions.
S
slave address
W
A
logic 0 = write
logic 1 = read
DATA
A
DATA
A/A
P/RS
data transferred
(n Bytes + acknowledge)
A = acknowledge (SDA LOW)
A = not acknowledge (SDA HIGH)
S = START condition
P = STOP condition
RS = repeated START condition
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
002aaa932
Fig 37. Format of Slave Receiver mode
12.6.4 Slave Transmitter mode
The first byte is received and handled as in the slave receiver mode. However, in this
mode, the direction bit will be 1, indicating a read operation. Serial data is transmitted via
SDA while the serial clock is input through SCL. START and STOP conditions are
recognized as the beginning and end of a serial transfer. In a given application, I2C may
operate as a master and as a slave. In the slave mode, the I2C hardware looks for its own
slave address and the general call address. If one of these addresses is detected, an
interrupt is requested. When the microcontrollers wishes to become the bus master, the
hardware waits until the bus is free before the master mode is entered so that a possible
slave action is not interrupted. If bus arbitration is lost in the master mode, the I2C
interface switches to the slave mode immediately and can detect its own slave address in
the same serial transfer.
S
slave address
R
A
logic 0 = write
logic 1 = read
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
DATA
A
DATA
A
P
data transferred
(n Bytes + acknowledge)
A = acknowledge (SDA LOW)
A = not acknowledge (SDA HIGH)
S = START condition
P = STOP condition
002aaa933
Fig 38. Format of Slave Transmitter mode
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
174 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.7 I2C Implementation and operation
Figure 39 shows how the on-chip I2C-bus interface is implemented, and the following text
describes the individual blocks.
12.7.1 Input filters and output stages
Input signals are synchronized with the internal clock, and spikes shorter than three
clocks are filtered out.
The output for I2C is a special pad designed to conform to the I2C specification.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
175 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
8
I2ADR
ADDRESS REGISTER
COMPARATOR
INPUT
FILTER
SDA
OUTPUT
STAGE
SHIFT REGISTER
ACK
I2DAT
BIT COUNTER/
ARBITRATION &
SYNC LOGIC
INPUT
FILTER
PCLK
APB BUS
8
TIMING &
CONTROL
LOGIC
SCL
OUTPUT
STAGE
interrupt
SERIAL CLOCK
GENERATOR
I2CONSET
I2CONCLR
I2SCLH
I2SCLL
CONTROL REGISTER & SCL DUTY
CYCLE REGISTERS
16
status
bus
STATUS
DECODER
STATUS REGISTER
I2STAT
8
Fig 39. I2C serial interface block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
176 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.7.2 Address Register, I2ADDR
This register may be loaded with the 7-bit slave address (7 most significant bits) to which
the I2C block will respond when programmed as a slave transmitter or receiver. The LSB
(GC) is used to enable general call address (0x00) recognition.
12.7.3 Comparator
The comparator compares the received 7-bit slave address with its own slave address (7
most significant bits in I2ADR). It also compares the first received 8-bit byte with the
general call address (0x00). If an equality is found, the appropriate status bits are set and
an interrupt is requested.
12.7.4 Shift register, I2DAT
This 8-bit register contains a byte of serial data to be transmitted or a byte which has just
been received. Data in I2DAT is always shifted from right to left; the first bit to be
transmitted is the MSB (bit 7) and, after a byte has been received, the first bit of received
data is located at the MSB of I2DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is
simultaneously being shifted in; I2DAT always contains the last byte present on the bus.
Thus, in the event of lost arbitration, the transition from master transmitter to slave
receiver is made with the correct data in I2DAT.
12.7.5 Arbitration and synchronization logic
In the master transmitter mode, the arbitration logic checks that every transmitted logic 1
actually appears as a logic 1 on the I2C-bus. If another device on the bus overrules a logic
1 and pulls the SDA line low, arbitration is lost, and the I2C block immediately changes
from master transmitter to slave receiver. The I2C block will continue to output clock
pulses (on SCL) until transmission of the current serial byte is complete.
Arbitration may also be lost in the master receiver mode. Loss of arbitration in this mode
can only occur while the I2C block is returning a “not acknowledge: (logic 1) to the bus.
Arbitration is lost when another device on the bus pulls this signal LOW. Since this can
occur only at the end of a serial byte, the I2C block generates no further clock pulses.
Figure 40 shows the arbitration procedure.
(1)
(1)
(2)
1
2
3
(3)
SDA line
SCL line
4
8
9
ACK
Fig 40. Arbitration procedure
The synchronization logic will synchronize the serial clock generator with the clock pulses
on the SCL line from another device. If two or more master devices generate clock pulses,
the “mark” duration is determined by the device that generates the shortest “marks,” and
the “space” duration is determined by the device that generates the longest “spaces”.
Figure 41 shows the synchronization procedure.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
177 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
SDA line
(1)
(3)
(1)
SCL line
(2)
high
period
low
period
Fig 41. Serial clock synchronization
A slave may stretch the space duration to slow down the bus master. The space duration
may also be stretched for handshaking purposes. This can be done after each bit or after
a complete byte transfer. the I2C block will stretch the SCL space duration after a byte has
been transmitted or received and the acknowledge bit has been transferred. The serial
interrupt flag (SI) is set, and the stretching continues until the serial interrupt flag is
cleared.
12.7.6 Serial clock generator
This programmable clock pulse generator provides the SCL clock pulses when the I2C
block is in the master transmitter or master receiver mode. It is switched off when the I2C
block is in a slave mode. The I2C output clock frequency and duty cycle is programmable
via the I2C Clock Control Registers. See the description of the I2CSCLL and I2CSCLH
registers for details. The output clock pulses have a duty cycle as programmed unless the
bus is synchronizing with other SCL clock sources as described above.
12.7.7 Timing and control
The timing and control logic generates the timing and control signals for serial byte
handling. This logic block provides the shift pulses for I2DAT, enables the comparator,
generates and detects start and stop conditions, receives and transmits acknowledge bits,
controls the master and slave modes, contains interrupt request logic, and monitors the
I2C-bus status.
12.7.8 Control register, I2CONSET and I2CONCLR
The I2C control register contains bits used to control the following I2C block functions: start
and restart of a serial transfer, termination of a serial transfer, bit rate, address recognition,
and acknowledgment.
The contents of the I2C control register may be read as I2CONSET. Writing to I2CONSET
will set bits in the I2C control register that correspond to ones in the value written.
Conversely, writing to I2CONCLR will clear bits in the I2C control register that correspond
to ones in the value written.
12.7.9 Status decoder and Status register
The status decoder takes all of the internal status bits and compresses them into a 5-bit
code. This code is unique for each I2C-bus status. The 5-bit code may be used to
generate vector addresses for fast processing of the various service routines. Each
service routine processes a particular bus status. There are 26 possible bus states if all
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
178 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
four modes of the I2C block are used. The 5-bit status code is latched into the five most
significant bits of the status register when the serial interrupt flag is set (by hardware) and
remains stable until the interrupt flag is cleared by software. The three least significant bits
of the status register are always zero. If the status code is used as a vector to service
routines, then the routines are displaced by eight address locations. Eight bytes of code is
sufficient for most of the service routines (see the software example in this section).
12.8 Register description
Each I2C interface contains 7 registers as shown in Table 173 below.
Table 173. I2C register map
Name
Description
Access
Reset
value[1]
Address
I2CONSET
I2C Control Set Register. When a one is written to a bit of this
register, the corresponding bit in the I2C control register is set.
Writing a zero has no effect on the corresponding bit in the I2C
control register.
R/W
0x00
0xE001 C000
I2STAT
I2C Status Register. During I2C operation, this register provides
detailed status codes that allow software to determine the next
action needed.
RO
0xF8
0xE001 C004
I2DAT
I2C Data Register. During master or slave transmit mode, data to R/W
be transmitted is written to this register. During master or slave
receive mode, data that has been received may be read from this
register.
0x00
0xE001 C008
I2ADR
I2C Slave Address Register. Contains the 7-bit slave address for R/W
operation of the I2C interface in slave mode, and is not used in
master mode. The least significant bit determines whether a slave
responds to the general call address.
0x00
0xE001 C00C
I2SCLH
SCH Duty Cycle Register High Half Word. Determines the high
time of the I2C clock.
R/W
0x04
0xE001 C010
I2SCLL
SCL Duty Cycle Register Low Half Word. Determines the low
time of the I2C clock. I2SCLL and I2SCLH together determine the
clock frequency generated by an I2C master and certain times
used in slave mode.
R/W
0x04
0xE001 C014
I2CONCLR
I2C Control Clear Register. When a one is written to a bit of this WO
register, the corresponding bit in the I2C control register is cleared.
Writing a zero has no effect on the corresponding bit in the I2C
control register.
NA
0xE001 C018
[1]
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
12.8.1 I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET - 0xE001 C000)
The I2CONSET registers control setting of bits in the I2CON register that controls
operation of the I2C interface. Writing a one to a bit of this register causes the
corresponding bit in the I2C control register to be set. Writing a zero has no effect.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
179 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Table 174. I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET - address 0xE001 C000) bit description
Bit Symbol
Description
1:0 -
Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
2
AA
Assert acknowledge flag. See the text below.
3
SI
I2C interrupt flag.
0
4
STO
STOP flag. See the text below.
0
5
STA
START flag. See the text below.
0
6
I2EN
I2C
0
7
-
Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
interface enable. See the text below.
Reset
value
I2EN I2C Interface Enable. When I2EN is 1, the I2C interface is enabled. I2EN can be
cleared by writing 1 to the I2ENC bit in the I2CONCLR register. When I2EN is 0, the I2C
interface is disabled.
When I2EN is “0”, the SDA and SCL input signals are ignored, the I2C block is in the “not
addressed” slave state, and the STO bit is forced to “0”.
I2EN should not be used to temporarily release the I2C-bus since, when I2EN is reset, the
I2C-bus status is lost. The AA flag should be used instead.
STA is the START flag. Setting this bit causes the I2C interface to enter master mode and
transmit a START condition or transmit a repeated START condition if it is already in
master mode.
When STA is 1 and the I2C interface is not already in master mode, it enters master mode,
checks the bus and generates a START condition if the bus is free. If the bus is not free, it
waits for a STOP condition (which will free the bus) and generates a START condition
after a delay of a half clock period of the internal clock generator. If the I2C interface is
already in master mode and data has been transmitted or received, it transmits a repeated
START condition. STA may be set at any time, including when the I2C interface is in an
addressed slave mode.
STA can be cleared by writing 1 to the STAC bit in the I2CONCLR register. When STA is
0, no START condition or repeated START condition will be generated.
If STA and STO are both set, then a STOP condition is transmitted on the I2C-bus if it the
interface is in master mode, and transmits a START condition thereafter. If the I2C
interface is in slave mode, an internal STOP condition is generated, but is not transmitted
on the bus.
STO is the STOP flag. Setting this bit causes the I2C interface to transmit a STOP
condition in master mode, or recover from an error condition in slave mode. When STO is
1 in master mode, a STOP condition is transmitted on the I2C-bus. When the bus detects
the STOP condition, STO is cleared automatically.
In slave mode, setting this bit can recover from an error condition. In this case, no STOP
condition is transmitted to the bus. The hardware behaves as if a STOP condition has
been received and it switches to “not addressed” slave receiver mode. The STO flag is
cleared by hardware automatically.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
180 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
SI is the I2C Interrupt Flag. This bit is set when the I2C state changes. However, entering
state F8 does not set SI since there is nothing for an interrupt service routine to do in that
case.
While SI is set, the low period of the serial clock on the SCL line is stretched, and the
serial transfer is suspended. When SCL is high, it is unaffected by the state of the SI flag.
SI must be reset by software, by writing a 1 to the SIC bit in I2CONCLR register.
AA is the Assert Acknowledge Flag. When set to 1, an acknowledge (low level to SDA)
will be returned during the acknowledge clock pulse on the SCL line on the following
situations:
1. The address in the Slave Address Register has been received.
2. The general call address has been received while the general call bit (GC) in I2ADR is
set.
3. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the master receiver mode.
4. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the addressed slave receiver mode
The AA bit can be cleared by writing 1 to the AAC bit in the I2CONCLR register. When AA
is 0, a not acknowledge (high level to SDA) will be returned during the acknowledge clock
pulse on the SCL line on the following situations:
1. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the master receiver mode.
2. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the addressed slave receiver mode.
12.8.2 I2C Control Clear register (I2CONCLR - 0xE001 C018)
The I2CONCLR registers control clearing of bits in the I2CON register that controls
operation of the I2C interface. Writing a one to a bit of this register causes the
corresponding bit in the I2C control register to be cleared. Writing a zero has no effect.
Table 175. I2C Control Set register (I2CONCLR - address 0xE001 C018) bit description
Bit Symbol
Description
Reset
value
1:0 -
Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
2
AAC
Assert acknowledge Clear bit.
3
SIC
I2C interrupt Clear bit.
0
4
-
Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
5
STAC
START flag Clear bit.
0
6
I2ENC
I2C
0
7
-
Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
interface Disable bit.
NA
AAC is the Assert Acknowledge Clear bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the AA bit in the
I2CONSET register. Writing 0 has no effect.
SIC is the I2C Interrupt Clear bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the SI bit in the I2CONSET
register. Writing 0 has no effect.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
181 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
STAC is the Start flag Clear bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the STA bit in the I2CONSET
register. Writing 0 has no effect.
I2ENC is the I2C Interface Disable bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the I2EN bit in the
I2CONSET register. Writing 0 has no effect.
12.8.3 I2C Status register (I2STAT - 0xE001 C004)
Each I2C Status register reflects the condition of the corresponding I2C interface. The I2C
Status register is Read-Only.
Table 176. I2C Status register (I2STAT - address 0xE001) bit description
Bit Symbol
Description
2:0 -
These bits are unused and are always 0.
7:3 Status
These bits give the actual status information about the
Reset value
0
I2C
interface. 0x1F
The three least significant bits are always 0. Taken as a byte, the status register contents
represent a status code. There are 26 possible status codes. When the status code is
0xF8, there is no relevant information available and the SI bit is not set. All other 25 status
codes correspond to defined I2C states. When any of these states entered, the SI bit will
be set. For a complete list of status codes, refer to tables from Table 186 to Table 189.
12.8.4 I2C Data register (I2DAT - 0xE001 C008)
This register contains the data to be transmitted or the data just received. The CPU can
read and write to this register only while it is not in the process of shifting a byte, when the
SI bit is set. Data in I2DAT remains stable as long as the SI bit is set. Data in I2DAT is
always shifted from right to left: the first bit to be transmitted is the MSB (bit 7), and after a
byte has been received, the first bit of received data is located at the MSB of I2DAT.
Table 177. I2C Data register (I2DAT - address 0xE001 C008) bit description
Bit Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0 Data
This register holds data values that have been received, or are to 0
be transmitted.
12.8.5 I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR - 0xE001 C00C)
These registers are readable and writable, and is only used when an I2C interface is set to
slave mode. In master mode, this register has no effect. The LSB of I2ADR is the general
call bit. When this bit is set, the general call address (0x00) is recognized.
Table 178. I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR - address 0xE001 C00C) bit description
Bit Symbol
0
GC
7:1 Address
Description
Reset value
General Call enable bit.
0
The I2C device address for slave mode.
0x00
12.8.6 I2C SCL High duty cycle register (I2SCLH - 0xE001 C010)
Table 179. I2C SCL High Duty Cycle register (I2SCLH - address 0xE001 C010) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
15:0
SCLH
Count for SCL HIGH time period selection.
0x0004
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
182 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.8.7 I2C SCL Low duty cycle register (I2SCLL - 0xE001 C014)
Table 180. I2C SCL Low Duty Cycle register (I2SCLL - address 0xE001 C014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
15:0
SCLL
Count for SCL LOW time period selection.
0x0004
12.8.8 Selecting the appropriate I2C data rate and duty cycle
Software must set values for the registers I2SCLH and I2SCLL to select the appropriate
data rate and duty cycle. I2SCLH defines the number of PCLK cycles for the SCL high
time, I2SCLL defines the number of PCLK cycles for the SCL low time. The frequency is
determined by the following formula (PCLK is the frequency of the peripheral bus APB):
(7)
PCLK
I 2 C bitfrequency = --------------------------------------------------------I2CSCLH + I2CSCLL
The values for I2SCLL and I2SCLH should not necessarily be the same. Software can set
different duty cycles on SCL by setting these two registers. For example, the I2C-bus
specification defines the SCL low time and high time at different values for a 400 kHz I2C
rate. The value of the register must ensure that the data rate is in the I2C data rate range
of 0 through 400 kHz. Each register value must be greater than or equal to 4. Table 181
gives some examples of I2C-bus rates based on PCLK frequency and I2SCLL and
I2SCLH values.
Table 181. Example I2C clock rates
I2C Bit Frequency (kHz) at PCLK (MHz)
I2SCLL +
I2SCLH
1
8
125
10
100
25
50
5
10
16
20
40
200
400
20
100
100
10
160
6.25
40
60
200
320
400
50
100
160
200
400
31.25
62.5
100
125
250
375
200
5
25
50
80
100
200
300
400
2.5
12.5
25
40
50
100
150
800
1.25
6.25
12.5
20
25
50
75
12.9 Details of I2C operating modes
The four operating modes are:
• Master Transmitter
• Master Receiver
• Slave Receiver
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
183 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
• Slave Transmitter
Data transfers in each mode of operation are shown in Figures 42 to 46. Table 182 lists
abbreviations used in these figures when describing the I2C operating modes.
Table 182. Abbreviations used to describe an I2C operation
Abbreviation
Explanation
S
Start Condition
SLA
7-bit slave address
R
Read bit (high level at SDA)
W
Write bit (low level at SDA)
A
Acknowledge bit (low level at SDA)
A
Not acknowledge bit (high level at SDA)
Data
8-bit data byte
P
Stop condition
In Figures 42 to 46, circles are used to indicate when the serial interrupt flag is set. The
numbers in the circles show the status code held in the I2STAT register. At these points, a
service routine must be executed to continue or complete the serial transfer. These
service routines are not critical since the serial transfer is suspended until the serial
interrupt flag is cleared by software.
When a serial interrupt routine is entered, the status code in I2STAT is used to branch to
the appropriate service routine. For each status code, the required software action and
details of the following serial transfer are given in tables from Table 186 to Table 190.
12.9.1 Master Transmitter mode
In the master transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a slave receiver
(see Figure 42). Before the master transmitter mode can be entered, I2CON must be
initialized as follows:
Table 183. I2CONSET used to initialize Master Transmitter mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
-
I2EN
STA
STO
SI
AA
-
-
Value
-
1
0
0
0
x
-
-
The I2C rate must also be configured in the I2SCLL and I2SCLH registers. I2EN must be
set to logic 1 to enable the I2C block. If the AA bit is reset, the I2C block will not
acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address in the event of another
device becoming master of the bus. In other words, if AA is reset, the I2C interface cannot
enter a slave mode. STA, STO, and SI must be reset.
The master transmitter mode may now be entered by setting the STA bit. The I2C logic will
now test the I2C-bus and generate a start condition as soon as the bus becomes free.
When a START condition is transmitted, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set, and the status
code in the status register (I2STAT) will be 0x08. This status code is used by the interrupt
service routine to enter the appropriate state service routine that loads I2DAT with the
slave address and the data direction bit (SLA+W). The SI bit in I2CON must then be reset
before the serial transfer can continue.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
184 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
When the slave address and the direction bit have been transmitted and an
acknowledgment bit has been received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set again, and a
number of status codes in I2STAT are possible. There are 0x18, 0x20, or 0x38 for the
master mode and also 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0 if the slave mode was enabled (AA = logic 1).
The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 186.
After a repeated start condition (state 0x10). The I2C block may switch to the master
receiver mode by loading I2DAT with SLA+R).
12.9.2 Master Receiver mode
In the master receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a slave transmitter
(see Figure 43). The transfer is initialized as in the master transmitter mode. When the
start condition has been transmitted, the interrupt service routine must load I2DAT with the
7-bit slave address and the data direction bit (SLA+R). The SI bit in I2CON must then be
cleared before the serial transfer can continue.
When the slave address and the data direction bit have been transmitted and an
acknowledgment bit has been received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set again, and a
number of status codes in I2STAT are possible. These are 0x40, 0x48, or 0x38 for the
master mode and also 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0 if the slave mode was enabled (AA = 1). The
appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 187. After
a repeated start condition (state 0x10), the I2C block may switch to the master transmitter
mode by loading I2DAT with SLA+W.
12.9.3 Slave Receiver mode
In the slave receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a master transmitter
(see Figure 44). To initiate the slave receiver mode, I2ADR and I2CON must be loaded as
follows:
Table 184. I2CADR usage in Slave Receiver mode
Bit
7
6
5
Symbol
4
3
2
1
own slave 7-bit address
0
GC
The upper 7 bits are the address to which the I2C block will respond when addressed by a
master. If the LSB (GC) is set, the I2C block will respond to the general call address
(0x00); otherwise it ignores the general call address.
Table 185. I2CONSET used to initialize Slave Receiver mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
-
I2EN
STA
STO
SI
AA
-
-
Value
-
1
0
0
0
1
-
-
The I2C-bus rate settings do not affect the I2C block in the slave mode. I2EN must be set
to logic 1 to enable the I2C block. The AA bit must be set to enable the I2C block to
acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address. STA, STO, and SI must
be reset.
When I2ADR and I2CON have been initialized, the I2C block waits until it is addressed by
its own slave address followed by the data direction bit which must be “0” (W) for the I2C
block to operate in the slave receiver mode. After its own slave address and the W bit
have been received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set and a valid status code can be read
from I2STAT. This status code is used to vector to a state service routine. The appropriate
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
185 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 104. The slave
receiver mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the I2C block is in the master
mode (see status 0x68 and 0x78).
If the AA bit is reset during a transfer, the I2C block will return a not acknowledge (logic 1)
to SDA after the next received data byte. While AA is reset, the I2C block does not
respond to its own slave address or a general call address. However, the I2C-bus is still
monitored and address recognition may be resumed at any time by setting AA. This
means that the AA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the I2C block from the I2C-bus.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
186 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
MT
successful
transmission
to a Slave
Receiver
S
SLA
W
A
DATA
A
18H
08H
P
28H
next transfer
started with a
Repeated Start
condition
S
SLA
W
10H
Not
Acknowledge
received after
the Slave
address
A
P
R
20H
Not
Acknowledge
received after a
Data byte
A
P
to Master
receive
mode,
entry
= MR
30H
arbitration lost
in Slave
address or
Data byte
A OR A
other Master
continues
A OR A
38H
arbitration lost
and
addressed as
Slave
A
other Master
continues
38H
other Master
continues
68H 78H B0H
to corresponding
states in Slave mode
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
DATA
n
any number of data bytes and their associated Acknowledge bits
this number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of the
I2C bus
Fig 42. Format and States in the Master Transmitter mode
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
187 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
MR
successful
transmission to
a Slave
transmitter
S
08H
SLA
R
A
DATA
40H
A
DATA
50H
A
P
58H
next transfer
started with a
Repeated Start
condition
S
SLA
R
10H
Not Acknowledge
received after the
Slave address
A
P
W
48H
to Master
transmit
mode, entry
= MT
arbitration lost in
Slave address or
Acknowledge bit
other Master
continues
A OR A
A
38H
arbitration lost
and addressed
as Slave
A
other Master
continues
38H
other Master
continues
68H 78H B0H
to corresponding
states in Slave
mode
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
DATA
n
A
any number of data bytes and their associated
Acknowledge bits
this number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of
the I2C bus
Fig 43. Format and States in the Master Receiver mode
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
188 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
reception of the own
Slave address and one
or more Data bytes all
are acknowledged
S
SLA
R
A
DATA
60H
A
DATA
80H
last data byte
received is Not
acknowledged
A
P OR S
80H
A0H
A
P OR S
88H
arbitration lost as
Master and addressed
as Slave
A
68H
reception of the
General Call address
and one or more Data
bytes
GENERAL CALL
A
DATA
70h
A
DATA
90h
last data byte is Not
acknowledged
A
P OR S
90h
A0H
A
P OR S
98h
arbitration lost as
Master and addressed
as Slave by General
Call
A
78h
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
DATA
n
A
any number of data bytes and their associated Acknowledge bits
this number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of the 2IC
bus
Fig 44. Format and States in the Slave Receiver mode
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
189 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
reception of the own
Slave address and
one or more Data
bytes all are
acknowledged
S
SLA
R
A
DATA
A8H
arbitration lost as
Master and
addressed as Slave
A
DATA
B8H
A
P OR S
C0H
A
B0H
last data byte
transmitted. Switched
to Not Addressed
Slave (AA bit in
I2CON = “0”)
A
ALL ONES
P OR S
C8H
from Master to Slave
from Slave to Master
DATA
n
A
any number of data bytes and their associated
Acknowledge bits
this number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of
the I2C bus
Fig 45. Format and States in the Slave Transmitter mode
12.9.4 Slave Transmitter mode
In the slave transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a master receiver
(see Figure 45). Data transfer is initialized as in the slave receiver mode. When I2ADR
and I2CON have been initialized, the I2C block waits until it is addressed by its own slave
address followed by the data direction bit which must be “1” (R) for the I2C block to
operate in the slave transmitter mode. After its own slave address and the R bit have been
received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set and a valid status code can be read from
I2STAT. This status code is used to vector to a state service routine, and the appropriate
action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 189. The slave
transmitter mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the I2C block is in the
master mode (see state 0xB0).
If the AA bit is reset during a transfer, the I2C block will transmit the last byte of the transfer
and enter state 0xC0 or 0xC8. The I2C block is switched to the not addressed slave mode
and will ignore the master receiver if it continues the transfer. Thus the master receiver
receives all 1s as serial data. While AA is reset, the I2C block does not respond to its own
slave address or a general call address. However, the I2C-bus is still monitored, and
address recognition may be resumed at any time by setting AA. This means that the AA
bit may be used to temporarily isolate the I2C block from the I2C-bus.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
190 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Table 186. Master Transmitter mode
Status
Status of the I2C-bus Application software response
Code
and hardware
To/From I2DAT
To I2CON
(I2CSTAT)
STA STO SI
AA
0x08
A START condition
Load SLA+W
has been transmitted. Clear STA
X
0x10
A repeated START
condition has been
transmitted.
Load SLA+W or
X
0
0
X
As above.
Load SLA+R
Clear STA
X
0
0
X
SLA+W will be transmitted; the I2C block
will be switched to MST/REC mode.
SLA+W has been
transmitted; ACK has
been received.
Load data byte or
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will
be received.
No I2DAT action
or
1
0
0
X
Repeated START will be transmitted.
No I2DAT action
or
0
1
0
X
STOP condition will be transmitted; STO
flag will be reset.
No I2DAT action
1
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted; STO flag will
be reset.
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will
be received.
1
0
0
X
Repeated START will be transmitted.
No I2DAT action
or
0
1
0
X
STOP condition will be transmitted; STO
flag will be reset.
No I2DAT action
1
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted; STO flag will
be reset.
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will
be received.
1
0
0
X
Repeated START will be transmitted.
No I2DAT action
or
0
1
0
X
STOP condition will be transmitted; STO
flag will be reset.
No I2DAT action
1
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted; STO flag will
be reset.
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will
be received.
1
0
0
X
Repeated START will be transmitted.
No I2DAT action
or
0
1
0
X
STOP condition will be transmitted; STO
flag will be reset.
No I2DAT action
1
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted; STO flag will
be reset.
No I2DAT action
or
0
0
0
X
I2C-bus will be released; not addressed
slave will be entered.
No I2DAT action
1
0
0
X
A START condition will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free.
0x18
0x20
0x28
0x30
0x38
UM10114
User manual
X
Load data byte or
SLA+W has been
transmitted; NOT ACK
has been received.
No I2DAT action
or
Load data byte or
Data byte in I2DAT
has been transmitted;
ACK has been
No I2DAT action
received.
or
Load data byte or
Data byte in I2DAT
has been transmitted;
NOT ACK has been
No I2DAT action
received.
or
Arbitration lost in
SLA+R/W or Data
bytes.
0
0
Next action taken by I2C hardware
SLA+W will be transmitted; ACK bit will
be received.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
191 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Table 187. Master Receiver mode
Status
Status of the I2C-bus Application software response
Code
and hardware
To/From I2DAT
To I2CON
(I2CSTAT)
STA STO SI
AA
0x08
A START condition
Load SLA+R
has been transmitted.
X
0
0
X
SLA+R will be transmitted; ACK bit will be
received.
0x10
A repeated START
condition has been
transmitted.
Load SLA+R or
X
0
0
X
As above.
Load SLA+W
X
0
0
X
SLA+W will be transmitted; the I2C block
will be switched to MST/TRX mode.
Arbitration lost in NOT No I2DAT action
ACK bit.
or
0
0
0
X
I2C-bus will be released; the I2C block will
enter a slave mode.
No I2DAT action
1
0
0
X
A START condition will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free.
No I2DAT action
or
0
0
0
0
Data byte will be received; NOT ACK bit
will be returned.
No I2DAT action
0
0
0
1
Data byte will be received; ACK bit will be
returned.
SLA+R has been
No I2DAT action
transmitted; NOT ACK or
has been received.
No I2DAT action
or
1
0
0
X
Repeated START condition will be
transmitted.
0
1
0
X
STOP condition will be transmitted; STO
flag will be reset.
No I2DAT action
1
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted; STO flag will
be reset.
Data byte has been
received; ACK has
been returned.
Read data byte or 0
0
0
0
Data byte will be received; NOT ACK bit
will be returned.
Read data byte
0
0
0
1
Data byte will be received; ACK bit will be
returned.
Data byte has been
received; NOT ACK
has been returned.
Read data byte or 1
0
0
X
Repeated START condition will be
transmitted.
Read data byte or 0
1
0
X
STOP condition will be transmitted; STO
flag will be reset.
Read data byte
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted; STO flag will
be reset.
0x38
0x40
0x48
0x50
0x58
UM10114
User manual
SLA+R has been
transmitted; ACK has
been received.
1
Next action taken by I2C hardware
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
192 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Table 188. Slave Receiver mode
Status
Status of the I2C-bus Application software response
Code
and hardware
To/From I2DAT
To I2CON
(I2CSTAT)
STA STO SI
AA
0x60
0x68
0x70
0x78
0x80
0x88
0x90
UM10114
User manual
Next action taken by I2C hardware
Own SLA+W has
been received; ACK
has been returned.
No I2DAT action
or
X
0
0
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK
will be returned.
No I2DAT action
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will
be returned.
Arbitration lost in
SLA+R/W as master;
Own SLA+W has
been received, ACK
returned.
No I2DAT action
or
X
0
0
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK
will be returned.
No I2DAT action
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will
be returned.
General call address
(0x00) has been
received; ACK has
been returned.
No I2DAT action
or
X
0
0
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK
will be returned.
No I2DAT action
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will
be returned.
Arbitration lost in
SLA+R/W as master;
General call address
has been received,
ACK has been
returned.
No I2DAT action
or
X
0
0
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK
will be returned.
No I2DAT action
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will
be returned.
Previously addressed
with own SLV
address; DATA has
been received; ACK
has been returned.
Read data byte or X
0
0
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK
will be returned.
Read data byte
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will
be returned.
Previously addressed
with own SLA; DATA
byte has been
received; NOT ACK
has been returned.
Read data byte or 0
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address.
Read data byte or 0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1.
Read data byte or 1
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address. A START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes free.
Read data byte
1
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition
will be transmitted when the bus becomes
free.
Read data byte or X
0
0
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK
will be returned.
Read data byte
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will
be returned.
Previously addressed
with General Call;
DATA byte has been
received; ACK has
been returned.
X
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
193 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Table 188. Slave Receiver mode
Status
Status of the I2C-bus Application software response
Code
and hardware
To/From I2DAT
To I2CON
(I2CSTAT)
STA STO SI
AA
0x98
0xA0
UM10114
User manual
Previously addressed
with General Call;
DATA byte has been
received; NOT ACK
has been returned.
A STOP condition or
repeated START
condition has been
received while still
addressed as
SLV/REC or
SLV/TRX.
Next action taken by I2C hardware
Read data byte or 0
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address.
Read data byte or 0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1.
Read data byte or 1
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address. A START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes free.
Read data byte
1
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition
will be transmitted when the bus becomes
free.
No STDAT action
or
0
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address.
No STDAT action
or
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1.
No STDAT action
or
1
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address. A START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes free.
No STDAT action
1
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition
will be transmitted when the bus becomes
free.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
194 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Table 189. Slave Transmitter mode
Status
Status of the I2C-bus Application software response
Code
and hardware
To/From I2DAT
To I2CON
(I2CSTAT)
STA STO SI
AA
0xA8
0xB0
0xB8
0xC0
0xC8
UM10114
User manual
Own SLA+R has been Load data byte or
received; ACK has
been returned.
Load data byte
Next action taken by I2C hardware
X
0
0
0
Last data byte will be transmitted and
ACK bit will be received.
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK will be
received.
X
0
0
0
Last data byte will be transmitted and
ACK bit will be received.
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will
be received.
X
0
0
0
Last data byte will be transmitted and
ACK bit will be received.
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will
be received.
No I2DAT action
Data byte in I2DAT
has been transmitted; or
NOT ACK has been
received.
No I2DAT action
or
0
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address.
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1.
No I2DAT action
or
1
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address. A START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes free.
No I2DAT action
1
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition
will be transmitted when the bus becomes
free.
No I2DAT action
or
0
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address.
No I2DAT action
or
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR[0] = logic 1.
No I2DAT action
or
1
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no
recognition of own SLA or General call
address. A START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes free.
No I2DAT action
1
0
0
01
Switched to not addressed SLV mode;
Own SLA will be recognized; General call
address will be recognized if
I2ADR.0 = logic 1. A START condition will
be transmitted when the bus becomes
free.
Arbitration lost in
Load data byte or
SLA+R/W as master;
Own SLA+R has been Load data byte
received, ACK has
been returned.
Data byte in I2DAT
Load data byte or
has been transmitted;
ACK has been
Load data byte
received.
Last data byte in
I2DAT has been
transmitted (AA = 0);
ACK has been
received.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
195 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.9.5 Miscellaneous States
There are two I2STAT codes that do not correspond to a defined I2C hardware state (see
Table 190). These are discussed below.
12.9.6 I2STAT = 0xF8
This status code indicates that no relevant information is available because the serial
interrupt flag, SI, is not yet set. This occurs between other states and when the I2C block
is not involved in a serial transfer.
12.9.7 I2STAT = 0x00
This status code indicates that a bus error has occurred during an I2C serial transfer. A
bus error is caused when a START or STOP condition occurs at an illegal position in the
format frame. Examples of such illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an
address byte, a data byte, or an acknowledge bit. A bus error may also be caused when
external interference disturbs the internal I2C block signals. When a bus error occurs, SI is
set. To recover from a bus error, the STO flag must be set and SI must be cleared. This
causes the I2C block to enter the “not addressed” slave mode (a defined state) and to
clear the STO flag (no other bits in I2CON are affected). The SDA and SCL lines are
released (a STOP condition is not transmitted).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
196 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
Table 190. Miscellaneous States
Status
Status of the I2C-bus Application software response
Code
and hardware
To/From I2DAT
To I2CON
(I2CSTAT)
STA STO SI
0xF8
No relevant state
information available;
SI = 0.
No I2DAT action
0x00
Bus error during MST No I2DAT action
or selected slave
modes, due to an
illegal START or
STOP condition. State
0x00 can also occur
when interference
causes the I2C block
to enter an undefined
state.
Next action taken by I2C hardware
AA
No I2CON action
0
1
0
X
Wait or proceed current transfer.
Only the internal hardware is affected in
the MST or addressed SLV modes. In all
cases, the bus is released and the I2C
block is switched to the not addressed
SLV mode. STO is reset.
12.9.8 Some special cases
The I2C hardware has facilities to handle the following special cases that may occur
during a serial transfer:
12.9.9 Simultaneous repeated START conditions from two masters
A repeated START condition may be generated in the master transmitter or master
receiver modes. A special case occurs if another master simultaneously generates a
repeated START condition (see Figure 46). Until this occurs, arbitration is not lost by
either master since they were both transmitting the same data.
If the I2C hardware detects a repeated START condition on the I2C-bus before generating
a repeated START condition itself, it will release the bus, and no interrupt request is
generated. If another master frees the bus by generating a STOP condition, the I2C block
will transmit a normal START condition (state 0x08), and a retry of the total serial data
transfer can commence.
12.9.10 Data transfer after loss of arbitration
Arbitration may be lost in the master transmitter and master receiver modes (see
Figure 40). Loss of arbitration is indicated by the following states in I2STAT; 0x38, 0x68,
0x78, and 0xB0 (see Figure 42 and Figure 43).
If the STA flag in I2CON is set by the routines which service these states, then, if the bus
is free again, a START condition (state 0x08) is transmitted without intervention by the
CPU, and a retry of the total serial transfer can commence.
12.9.11 Forced access to the I2C-bus
In some applications, it may be possible for an uncontrolled source to cause a bus
hang-up. In such situations, the problem may be caused by interference, temporary
interruption of the bus or a temporary short-circuit between SDA and SCL.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
197 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
If an uncontrolled source generates a superfluous START or masks a STOP condition,
then the I2C-bus stays busy indefinitely. If the STA flag is set and bus access is not
obtained within a reasonable amount of time, then a forced access to the I2C-bus is
possible. This is achieved by setting the STO flag while the STA flag is still set. No STOP
condition is transmitted. The I2C hardware behaves as if a STOP condition was received
and is able to transmit a START condition. The STO flag is cleared by hardware (see
Figure 34).
12.9.12 I2C-bus obstructed by a low level on SCL or SDA
An I2C-bus hang-up occurs if SDA or SCL is pulled LOW by an uncontrolled source. If the
SCL line is obstructed (pulled LOW) by a device on the bus, no further serial transfer is
possible, and the I2C hardware cannot resolve this type of problem. When this occurs, the
problem must be resolved by the device that is pulling the SCL bus line LOW.
If the SDA line is obstructed by another device on the bus (e.g., a slave device out of bit
synchronization), the problem can be solved by transmitting additional clock pulses on the
SCL line (see Figure 48). The I2C hardware transmits additional clock pulses when the
STA flag is set, but no START condition can be generated because the SDA line is pulled
LOW while the I2C-bus is considered free. The I2C hardware attempts to generate a
START condition after every two additional clock pulses on the SCL line. When the SDA
line is eventually released, a normal START condition is transmitted, state 0x08 is
entered, and the serial transfer continues.
If a forced bus access occurs or a repeated START condition is transmitted while SDA is
obstructed (pulled LOW), the I2C hardware performs the same action as described above.
In each case, state 0x08 is entered after a successful START condition is transmitted and
normal serial transfer continues. Note that the CPU is not involved in solving these bus
hang-up problems.
12.9.13 Bus error
A bus error occurs when a START or STOP condition is present at an illegal position in the
format frame. Examples of illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an address
byte, a data bit, or an acknowledge bit.
The I2C hardware only reacts to a bus error when it is involved in a serial transfer either as
a master or an addressed slave. When a bus error is detected, the I2C block immediately
switches to the not addressed slave mode, releases the SDA and SCL lines, sets the
interrupt flag, and loads the status register with 0x00. This status code may be used to
vector to a state service routine which either attempts the aborted serial transfer again or
simply recovers from the error condition as shown in Table 190.
S
08H
SLA
W
A
18H
DATA
A
S
OTHER MASTER
CONTINUES
28H
other Master sends
repeated START earlier
P
S
SLA
08H
retry
Fig 46. Simultaneous repeated START conditions from two masters
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
198 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
time limit
STA flag
STO flag
SDA line
SCL line
start
condition
Fig 47. Forced access to a busy I2C-bus
STA flag
(2)
SDA line
(1)
(3)
(1)
SCL line
start
condition
Fig 48. Recovering from a bus obstruction caused by a low level on SDA
12.9.14 I2C State service routines
This section provides examples of operations that must be performed by various I2C state
service routines. This includes:
• Initialization of the I2C block after a Reset.
• I2C Interrupt Service
• The 26 state service routines providing support for all four I2C operating modes.
12.9.15 Initialization
In the initialization example, the I2C block is enabled for both master and slave modes.
For each mode, a buffer is used for transmission and reception. The initialization routine
performs the following functions:
• I2ADR is loaded with the part’s own slave address and the general call bit (GC)
• The I2C interrupt enable and interrupt priority bits are set
• The slave mode is enabled by simultaneously setting the I2EN and AA bits in I2CON
and the serial clock frequency (for master modes) is defined by loading CR0 and CR1
in I2CON. The master routines must be started in the main program.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
199 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
The I2C hardware now begins checking the I2C-bus for its own slave address and general
call. If the general call or the own slave address is detected, an interrupt is requested and
I2STAT is loaded with the appropriate state information.
12.9.16 I2C interrupt service
When the I2C interrupt is entered, I2STAT contains a status code which identifies one of
the 26 state services to be executed.
12.9.17 The State service routines
Each state routine is part of the I2C interrupt routine and handles one of the 26 states.
12.9.18 Adapting State services to an application
The state service examples show the typical actions that must be performed in response
to the 26 I2C state codes. If one or more of the four I2C operating modes are not used, the
associated state services can be omitted, as long as care is taken that the those states
can never occur.
In an application, it may be desirable to implement some kind of time-out during I2C
operations, in order to trap an inoperative bus or a lost service routine.
12.10 Software example
12.10.1 Initialization routine
Example to initialize I2C Interface as a Slave and/or Master.
1. Load I2ADR with own Slave Address, enable general call recognition if needed.
2. Enable I2C interrupt.
3. Write 0x44 to I2CONSET to set the I2EN and AA bits, enabling Slave functions. For
Master only functions, write 0x40 to I2CONSET.
12.10.2 Start Master Transmit function
Begin a Master Transmit operation by setting up the buffer, pointer, and data count, then
initiating a Start.
1. Initialize Master data counter.
2. Set up the Slave Address to which data will be transmitted, and add the Write bit.
3. Write 0x20 to I2CONSET to set the STA bit.
4. Set up data to be transmitted in Master Transmit buffer.
5. Initialize the Master data counter to match the length of the message being sent.
6. Exit
12.10.3 Start Master Receive function
Begin a Master Receive operation by setting up the buffer, pointer, and data count, then
initiating a Start.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
200 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
1. Initialize Master data counter.
2. Set up the Slave Address to which data will be transmitted, and add the Read bit.
3. Write 0x20 to I2CONSET to set the STA bit.
4. Set up the Master Receive buffer.
5. Initialize the Master data counter to match the length of the message to be received.
6. Exit
12.10.4 I2C interrupt routine
Determine the I2C state and which state routine will be used to handle it.
1. Read the I2C status from I2STA.
2. Use the status value to branch to one of 26 possible state routines.
12.10.5 Non mode specific States
12.10.6 State: 0x00
Bus Error. Enter not addressed Slave mode and release bus.
1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.7 Master States
State 08 and State 10 are for both Master Transmit and Master Receive modes. The R/W
bit decides whether the next state is within Master Transmit mode or Master Receive
mode.
12.10.8 State: 0x08
A Start condition has been transmitted. The Slave Address + R/W bit will be transmitted,
an ACK bit will be received.
1. Write Slave Address with R/W bit to I2DAT.
2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Set up Master Transmit mode data buffer.
5. Set up Master Receive mode data buffer.
6. Initialize Master data counter.
7. Exit
12.10.9 State: 0x10
A repeated Start condition has been transmitted. The Slave Address + R/W bit will be
transmitted, an ACK bit will be received.
1. Write Slave Address with R/W bit to I2DAT.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
201 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Set up Master Transmit mode data buffer.
5. Set up Master Receive mode data buffer.
6. Initialize Master data counter.
7. Exit
12.10.10 Master Transmitter States
12.10.11 State: 0x18
Previous state was State 8 or State 10, Slave Address + Write has been transmitted, ACK
has been received. The first data byte will be transmitted, an ACK bit will be received.
1. Load I2DAT with first data byte from Master Transmit buffer.
2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Increment Master Transmit buffer pointer.
5. Exit
12.10.12 State: 0x20
Slave Address + Write has been transmitted, NOT ACK has been received. A Stop
condition will be transmitted.
1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.13 State: 0x28
Data has been transmitted, ACK has been received. If the transmitted data was the last
data byte then transmit a Stop condition, otherwise transmit the next data byte.
1. Decrement the Master data counter, skip to step 5 if not the last data byte.
2. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Exit
5. Load I2DAT with next data byte from Master Transmit buffer.
6. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
7. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
8. Increment Master Transmit buffer pointer
9. Exit
12.10.14 State: 0x30
Data has been transmitted, NOT ACK received. A Stop condition will be transmitted.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
202 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.15 State: 0x38
Arbitration has been lost during Slave Address + Write or data. The bus has been
released and not addressed Slave mode is entered. A new Start condition will be
transmitted when the bus is free again.
1. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.16 Master Receive States
12.10.17 State: 0x40
Previous state was State 08 or State 10. Slave Address + Read has been transmitted,
ACK has been received. Data will be
received and ACK returned.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.18 State: 0x48
Slave Address + Read has been transmitted, NOT ACK has been received. A Stop
condition will be transmitted.
1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.19 State: 0x50
Data has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be read from I2DAT. Additional
data will be received. If this is the last data byte then NOT ACK will be returned, otherwise
ACK will be returned.
1. Read data byte from I2DAT into Master Receive buffer.
2. Decrement the Master data counter, skip to step 5 if not the last data byte.
3. Write 0x0C to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag and the AA bit.
4. Exit
5. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
6. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
7. Increment Master Receive buffer pointer
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
203 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
8. Exit
12.10.20 State: 0x58
Data has been received, NOT ACK has been returned. Data will be read from I2DAT. A
Stop condition will be transmitted.
1. Read data byte from I2DAT into Master Receive buffer.
2. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Exit
12.10.21 Slave Receiver States
12.10.22 State: 0x60
Own Slave Address + Write has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be
received and ACK returned.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer.
4. Initialize Slave data counter.
5. Exit
12.10.23 State: 0x68
Arbitration has been lost in Slave Address and R/W bit as bus Master. Own Slave Address
+ Write has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be received and ACK will be
returned. STA is set to restart Master mode after the bus is free again.
1. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer.
4. Initialize Slave data counter.
5. Exit.
12.10.24 State: 0x70
General call has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be received and ACK
returned.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer.
4. Initialize Slave data counter.
5. Exit
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
204 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.10.25 State: 0x78
Arbitration has been lost in Slave Address + R/W bit as bus Master. General call has been
received and ACK has been returned. Data will be received and ACK returned. STA is set
to restart Master mode after the bus is free again.
1. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer.
4. Initialize Slave data counter.
5. Exit
12.10.26 State: 0x80
Previously addressed with own Slave Address. Data has been received and ACK has
been returned. Additional data will be read.
1. Read data byte from I2DAT into the Slave Receive buffer.
2. Decrement the Slave data counter, skip to step 5 if not the last data byte.
3. Write 0x0C to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag and the AA bit.
4. Exit.
5. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
6. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
7. Increment Slave Receive buffer pointer.
8. Exit
12.10.27 State: 0x88
Previously addressed with own Slave Address. Data has been received and NOT ACK
has been returned. Received data will not be saved. Not addressed Slave mode is
entered.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.28 State: 0x90
Previously addressed with general call. Data has been received, ACK has been returned.
Received data will be saved. Only the first data byte will be received with ACK. Additional
data will be received with NOT ACK.
1. Read data byte from I2DAT into the Slave Receive buffer.
2. Write 0x0C to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag and the AA bit.
3. Exit
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
205 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.10.29 State: 0x98
Previously addressed with general call. Data has been received, NOT ACK has been
returned. Received data will not be saved. Not addressed Slave mode is entered.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.30 State: 0xA0
A Stop condition or repeated Start has been received, while still addressed as a Slave.
Data will not be saved. Not addressed Slave mode is entered.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
12.10.31 Slave Transmitter States
12.10.32 State: 0xA8
Own Slave Address + Read has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be
transmitted, ACK bit will be received.
1. Load I2DAT from Slave Transmit buffer with first data byte.
2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Set up Slave Transmit mode data buffer.
5. Increment Slave Transmit buffer pointer.
6. Exit
12.10.33 State: 0xB0
Arbitration lost in Slave Address and R/W bit as bus Master. Own Slave Address + Read
has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be transmitted, ACK bit will be
received. STA is set to restart Master mode after the bus is free again.
1. Load I2DAT from Slave Transmit buffer with first data byte.
2. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Set up Slave Transmit mode data buffer.
5. Increment Slave Transmit buffer pointer.
6. Exit
12.10.34 State: 0xB8
Data has been transmitted, ACK has been received. Data will be transmitted, ACK bit will
be received.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
206 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
1. Load I2DAT from Slave Transmit buffer with data byte.
2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
4. Increment Slave Transmit buffer pointer.
5. Exit
12.10.35 State: 0xC0
Data has been transmitted, NOT ACK has been received. Not addressed Slave mode is
entered.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit.
12.10.36 State: 0xC8
The last data byte has been transmitted, ACK has been received. Not addressed Slave
mode is entered.
1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag.
3. Exit
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
207 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
13.1 How to read this chapter
All LPC21xx and all LPC22xx have by default two SPI interfaces SPI0 and SPI1.
Remark: For enhanced parts only, the SPI1 interface can be selected as an SSP interface
using the same pins as SPI1 (see Section 14.1).
Table 191. LPC21xx/22xx SPI configurations
Part
SPI data
transfer width
(see Table 195)
SSEL pin usable as GPIO (see SSP interface selectable
Table 193)
for SPI1
no suffix and /00 parts
LPC2109
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2119
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2129
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2114
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2124
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2194
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2210
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2220
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2212
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2214
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2290
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2292
8 bit, fixed
no
no
LPC2294
8 bit, fixed
no
no
/01 parts
LPC2109
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2119
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2129
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2114
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2124
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2194
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2210
8 bit, fixed
no
yes
LPC2212
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2214
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2290
8 bit, fixed
yes
yes
LPC2292
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
LPC2294
8 to 16 bit
yes
yes
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
208 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
13.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two complete and independent SPI controllers
Compliant with Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) specification
Synchronous, serial, and full duplex communication
Combined SPI master and slave
Maximum data bit rate of one eighth of the input clock rate
8 bit only or 8 to 16 bit per transfer
13.3 Description
13.3.1 SPI overview
SPI 0 and SPI1 are full duplex serial interfaces. They can handle multiple masters and
slaves being connected to a given bus. Only a single master and a single slave can
communicate on the interface during a given data transfer. During a data transfer the
master always sends a byte of data to the slave, and the slave always sends a byte of
data to the master.
13.3.2 SPI data transfers
Figure 49 is a timing diagram that illustrates the four different data transfer formats that
are available with the SPI. This timing diagram illustrates a single 8 bit data transfer. The
first thing you should notice in this timing diagram is that it is divided into three horizontal
parts. The first part describes the SCK and SSEL signals. The second part describes the
MOSI and MISO signals when the CPHA variable is 0. The third part describes the MOSI
and MISO signals when the CPHA variable is 1.
In the first part of the timing diagram, note two points. First, the SPI is illustrated with
CPOL set to both 0 and 1. The second point to note is the activation and de-activation of
the SSEL signal. When CPHA = 0, the SSEL signal will always go inactive between data
transfers. This is not guaranteed when CPHA = 1 (the signal can remain active).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
209 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
SCK (CPOL = 0)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
SSEL
CPHA = 0
Cycle # CPHA = 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MOSI (CPHA = 0)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
MISO (CPHA = 0)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
CPHA = 1
Cycle # CPHA = 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MOSI (CPHA = 1)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
MISO (CPHA = 1)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
Fig 49. SPI data transfer format (CPHA = 0 and CPHA = 1)
The data and clock phase relationships are summarized in Table 192. This table
summarizes the following for each setting of CPOL and CPHA.
• When the first data bit is driven
• When all other data bits are driven
• When data is sampled
Table 192. SPI data to clock phase relationship
CPOL and CPHA settings First data driven
Other data driven Data sampled
CPOL = 0, CPHA = 0
Prior to first SCK rising edge
SCK falling edge
SCK rising edge
CPOL = 0, CPHA = 1
First SCK rising edge
SCK rising edge
SCK falling edge
CPOL = 1, CPHA = 0
Prior to first SCK falling edge SCK rising edge
SCK falling edge
CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1
First SCK falling edge
SCK rising edge
SCK falling edge
The definition of when an 8 bit transfer starts and stops is dependent on whether a device
is a master or a slave, and the setting of the CPHA variable.
When a device is a master, the start of a transfer is indicated by the master having a byte
of data that is ready to be transmitted. At this point, the master can activate the clock, and
begin the transfer. The transfer ends when the last clock cycle of the transfer is complete.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
210 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
When a device is a slave, and CPHA is set to 0, the transfer starts when the SSEL signal
goes active, and ends when SSEL goes inactive. When a device is a slave, and CPHA is
set to 1, the transfer starts on the first clock edge when the slave is selected, and ends on
the last clock edge where data is sampled.
13.3.3 SPI peripheral details
13.3.3.1 General information
There are four registers that control the SPI peripheral. They are described in detail in
Section 13.5 “Register description” on page 213.
The SPI control register contains a number of programmable bits used to control the
function of the SPI block. The settings for this register must be set up prior to a given data
transfer taking place.
The SPI status register contains read only bits that are used to monitor the status of the
SPI interface, including normal functions, and exception conditions. The primary purpose
of this register is to detect completion of a data transfer. This is indicated by the SPIF bit.
The remaining bits in the register are exception condition indicators. These exceptions will
be described later in this section.
The SPI data register is used to provide the transmit and receive data bytes. An internal
shift register in the SPI block logic is used for the actual transmission and reception of the
serial data. Data is written to the SPI data register for the transmit case. There is no buffer
between the data register and the internal shift register. A write to the data register goes
directly into the internal shift register. Therefore, data should only be written to this register
when a transmit is not currently in progress. Read data is buffered. When a transfer is
complete, the receive data is transferred to a single byte data buffer, where it is later read.
A read of the SPI data register returns the value of the read data buffer.
The SPI clock counter register controls the clock rate when the SPI block is in master
mode. This needs to be set prior to a transfer taking place, when the SPI block is a
master. This register has no function when the SPI block is a slave.
The I/Os for this implementation of SPI are standard CMOS I/Os. The open drain SPI
option is not implemented in this design. When a device is set up to be a slave, its I/Os are
only active when it is selected by the SSEL signal being active.
13.3.3.2 Master operation
The following sequence describes how to process a data transfer with the SPI block when
it is set up as the master. This process assumes that any prior data transfer has already
completed.
1. Set the SPI clock counter register to the desired clock rate.
2. Set the SPI control register to the desired settings.
3. Write the data to transmitted to the SPI data register. This write starts the SPI data
transfer.
4. Wait for the SPIF bit in the SPI status register to be set to 1. The SPIF bit will be set
after the last cycle of the SPI data transfer.
5. Read the SPI status register.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
211 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
6. Read the received data from the SPI data register (optional).
7. Go to step 3 if more data is required to transmit.
Note: A read or write of the SPI data register is required in order to clear the SPIF status
bit. Therefore, if the optional read of the SPI data register does not take place, a write to
this register is required in order to clear the SPIF status bit.
13.3.3.3 Slave operation
The following sequence describes how to process a data transfer with the SPI block when
it is set up as slave. This process assumes that any prior data transfer has already
completed. It is required that the system clock driving the SPI logic be at least 8X faster
than the SPI.
1. Set the SPI control register to the desired settings.
2. Write the data to transmitted to the SPI data register (optional). Note that this can only
be done when a slave SPI transfer is not in progress.
3. Wait for the SPIF bit in the SPI status register to be set to 1. The SPIF bit will be set
after the last sampling clock edge of the SPI data transfer.
4. Read the SPI status register.
5. Read the received data from the SPI data register (optional).
6. Go to step 2 if more data is required to transmit.
Note: A read or write of the SPI data register is required in order to clear the SPIF status
bit. Therefore, at least one of the optional reads or writes of the SPI data register must
take place, in order to clear the SPIF status bit.
13.3.3.4 Exception conditions
13.3.3.4.1
Read overrun
A read overrun occurs when the SPI block internal read buffer contains data that has not
been read by the processor, and a new transfer has completed. The read buffer
containing valid data is indicated by the SPIF bit in the status register being active. When
a transfer completes, the SPI block needs to move the received data to the read buffer. If
the SPIF bit is active (the read buffer is full), the new receive data will be lost, and the read
overrun (ROVR) bit in the status register will be activated.
13.3.3.4.2
Write collision
As stated previously, there is no write buffer between the SPI block bus interface, and the
internal shift register. As a result, data must not be written to the SPI data register when a
SPI data transfer is currently in progress. The time frame where data cannot be written to
the SPI data register is from when the transfer starts, until after the status register has
been read when the SPIF status is active. If the SPI data register is written in this time
frame, the write data will be lost, and the write collision (WCOL) bit in the status register
will be activated.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
212 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
13.3.3.4.3
Mode fault
The SSEL signal must always be inactive when the SPI block is a master. If the SSEL
signal goes active, when the SPI block is a master, this indicates another master has
selected the device to be a slave. This condition is known as a mode fault. When a mode
fault is detected, the mode fault (MODF) bit in the status register will be activated, the SPI
signal drivers will be de-activated, and the SPI mode will be changed to be a slave.
13.3.3.4.4
Slave abort
A slave transfer is considered to be aborted, if the SSEL signal goes inactive before the
transfer is complete. In the event of a slave abort, the transmit and receive data for the
transfer that was in progress are lost, and the slave abort (ABRT) bit in the status register
will be activated.
13.4 Pin description
Table 193. SPI pin description
Pin
name
Type
Pin description
SCK0/
SCK1
Input/
Output
Serial Clock. The SPI is a clock signal used to synchronize the transfer of data across the SPI
interface. The SPI is always driven by the master and received by the slave. The clock is
programmable to be active high or active low. The SPI is only active during a data transfer. Any other
time, it is either in its inactive state, or tri-stated.
SSEL0/
SSEL1
Input
Slave Select. The SPI slave select signal is an active low signal that indicates which slave is currently
selected to participate in a data transfer. Each slave has its own unique slave select signal input. The
SSEL must be low before data transactions begin and normally stays low for the duration of the
transaction. If the SSEL signal goes high any time during a data transfer, the transfer is considered to
be aborted. In this event, the slave returns to idle, and any data that was received is thrown away.
There are no other indications of this exception. This signal is not directly driven by the master. It could
be driven by a simple general purpose I/O under software control.
Remark: Flashless LPC22xx and all legacy parts (/00, /01, and no suffix) configured to operate
as a SPI master MUST select SSEL functionality on an appropriate pin and have HIGH level on
this pin in order to act as a master.
For all other LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts, the SSEL pin can be used for a different function when the
SPI interface is only used in Master mode. For example, the pin hosting the SSEL function can be
configured as an output digital GPIO pin and can be used to select one of the SPI slaves.
MISO0/
MISO1
Input/
Output
Master In Slave Out. The MISO signal is a unidirectional signal used to transfer serial data from the
slave to the master. When a device is a slave, serial data is output on this signal. When a device is a
master, serial data is input on this signal. When a slave device is not selected, the slave drives the
signal high impedance.
MOSI0/
MOSI1
Input/
Output
Master Out Slave In. The MOSI signal is a unidirectional signal used to transfer serial data from the
master to the slave. When a device is a master, serial data is output on this signal. When a device is a
slave, serial data is input on this signal.
13.5 Register description
The SPI contains 5 registers as shown in Table 194. All registers are byte, half word and
word accessible.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
213 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
Table 194. SPI register map
Name
Description
Access Reset
SPI0
value[1] Address &
name
SPI1
Address &
name
SPCR
SPI Control Register. This register
controls the operation of the SPI.
R/W
0x0000 0xE002 0000 0xE003 0000
S0SPCR
S1SPCR
SPSR
SPI Status Register. This register
shows the status of the SPI.
RO
0x00
SPDR
SPI Data Register. This bi-directional R/W
register provides the transmit and
receive data for the SPI. Transmit data
is provided to the SPI by writing to this
register. Data received by the SPI can
be read from this register.
0xE002 0004 0xE003 0004
S0SPSR
S1SPSR
0x0000 0xE002 0008 0xE003 0008
S0SPDR
S1SPDR
SPCCR SPI Clock Counter Register. This
register controls the frequency of a
master’s SCK.
R/W
0x00
0xE002 000C 0xE003 000C
S0SPCCR
S1SPCCR
SPINT
R/W
0x00
0xE002 001C 0xE003 001C
S0SPINT
S1SPINT
[1]
SPI Interrupt Flag. This register
contains the interrupt flag for the SPI
interface.
Reset Value refers to the data stored in used bits only. It does not include the content of reserved bits.
13.5.1 SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - 0xE002 0000 and S1SPCR 0xE003 0000)
The SPCR register controls the operation of the SPI as per the configuration bits setting.
Table 195. SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - address 0xE002 0000 and S1SPCR - address
0xE003 0000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
1:0
-
2
BitEnable[1]
3
CPHA
Value Description
Reset
value
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
NA
0
The SPI controller sends and receives 8 bits of data per
transfer.
0
1
The SPI controller sends and receives the number of bits
selected by bits 11:8.
0
Clock phase control determines the relationship between 0
the data and the clock on SPI transfers, and controls
when a slave transfer is defined as starting and ending.
Data is sampled on the first clock edge of SCK. A transfer
starts and ends with activation and deactivation of the
SSEL signal.
4
CPOL
1
Data is sampled on the second clock edge of the SCK. A
transfer starts with the first clock edge, and ends with the
last sampling edge when the SSEL signal is active.
0
Clock polarity control.
0
SCK is active high.
1
UM10114
User manual
SCK is active low.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
214 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
Table 195. SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - address 0xE002 0000 and S1SPCR - address
0xE003 0000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Description
Reset
value
5
MSTR
0
0
Master mode select.
The SPI operates in Slave mode.
6
LSBF
1
The SPI operates in Master mode.
0
LSB First controls which direction each byte is shifted
when transferred.
0
SPI data is transferred MSB (bit 7) first.
7
SPIE
1
SPI data is transferred LSB (bit 0) first.
0
Serial peripheral interrupt enable.
0
SPI interrupts are inhibited.
1
BITS[1]
11:8
15:12
[1]
A hardware interrupt is generated each time the SPIF or
MODF bits are activated.
When bit 2 of this register is 1, this field controls the
number of bits per transfer:
1000
8 bits per transfer
1001
9 bits per transfer
1010
10 bits per transfer
1011
11 bits per transfer
1100
12 bits per transfer
1101
13 bits per transfer
1110
14 bits per transfer
1111
15 bits per transfer
0000
16 bits per transfer
-
0000
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
NA
See Table 191 for data transfer width allowed.
13.5.2 SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - 0xE002 0004 and S1SPSR 0xE003 0004)
The SPSR register controls the operation of the SPI as per the configuration bits setting.
Table 196. SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - address 0xE002 0004 and S1SPSR - address
0xE003 0004) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
2:0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
3
ABRT
Slave abort. When 1, this bit indicates that a slave abort has
occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register.
0
4
MODF
Mode fault. when 1, this bit indicates that a Mode fault error has 0
occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register, then writing
the SPI control register.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
215 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
Table 196. SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - address 0xE002 0004 and S1SPSR - address
0xE003 0004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
5
ROVR
Read overrun. When 1, this bit indicates that a read overrun has 0
occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register.
6
WCOL
Write collision. When 1, this bit indicates that a write collision has 0
occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register, then
accessing the SPI data register.
7
SPIF
SPI transfer complete flag. When 1, this bit indicates when a SPI 0
data transfer is complete. When a master, this bit is set at the
end of the last cycle of the transfer. When a slave, this bit is set
on the last data sampling edge of the SCK. This bit is cleared by
first reading this register, then accessing the SPI data register.
Note: This is not the SPI interrupt flag. This flag is found in the
SPINT register.
13.5.3 SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - 0xE002 0008, S1SPDR - 0xE003 0008)
This bi-directional data register provides the transmit and receive data for the SPI.
Transmit data is provided to the SPI by writing to this register. Data received by the SPI
can be read from this register. When a master, a write to this register will start a SPI data
transfer. Writes to this register will be blocked from when a data transfer starts to when the
SPIF status bit is set, and the status register has not been read.
Table 197. SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - address 0xE002 0008, S1SPDR - address
0xE003 0008) bit description
Bit
Symbol
15:0 Data
Description
Reset value
SPI Bi-directional data port.
0
13.5.4 SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR - 0xE002 000C and S1SPCCR 0xE003 000C)
This register controls the frequency of a master’s SCK. The register indicates the number
of SPI peripheral clock cycles that make up an SPI clock.
In Master mode, this register must be an even number greater than or equal to 8.
Violations of this can result in unpredictable behavior. The SPI SCK rate may be
calculated as: PCLK / SnSPCCR value. The PCLK rate is CCLK /APB divider rate as
determined by the APBDIV register contents (see Table 76).
In Slave mode, the SPI clock rate provided by the master must not exceed 1/8 of the
peripheral clock. The content of the S0SPCCR register is not relevant.
Table 198. SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR - address 0xE002 000C and S1SPCCR address 0xE003 000C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
Counter
SPI Clock counter setting.
0x00
13.5.5 SPI Interrupt Register (S0SPINT - 0xE002 001C and S1SPINT 0xE003 001C)
This register contains the interrupt flag for the SPI interface.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
216 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
Table 199. SPI Interrupt Register (S0SPINT - address 0xE002 001C and S1SPINT - address
0xE003 001C) bit description
Bit Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
SPI interrupt flag. Set by the SPI interface to generate an interrupt.
Cleared by writing a 1 to this bit.
0
SPI Interrupt
Note: This bit will be set once when SPIE = 1 and at least one of
SPIF and MODF bits changes from 0 to 1. However, only when the
SPI Interrupt bit is set and SPI Interrupt is enabled in the VIC, SPI
based interrupt can be processed by interrupt handling software.
7:1 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
13.6 Architecture
The block diagram of the SPI solution implemented in SPI0 and SPI1 interface is shown in
the Figure 50.
MOSI_IN
MOSI_OUT
MISO_IN
MISO_OUT
SPI SHIFT REGISTER
SPI CLOCK
SCK_IN
SCK_OUT
SS_IN
GENERATOR &
DETECTOR
SPI Interrupt
APB Bus
SPI REGISTER
INTERFACE
SPI STATE CONTROL
OUTPUT
ENABLE
LOGIC
SCK_OUT_EN
MOSI_OUT_EN
MISO_OUT_EN
Fig 50. SPI block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
217 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
14.1 How to read this chapter
The SSP interface is available on the following parts:
•
•
•
•
•
•
LPC2109/01, LPC2119/01, LPC2129/01
LPC2114/01, LPC2124/01
LPC2194/01
LPC2210/01, LPC2220
LPC2212/01, LPC2214/01
LPC2292/01, LPC2294/01
The SSP interface shares its pins with the SPI1 interface. To select the SSP peripheral,
select the PCSSP bit in the PCONP register (Section 6.10.3). Note that the default
interface on Reset is the SPI1 interface.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
14.2 Features
• Compatible with Motorola SPI, 4-wire TI SSI, and National Semiconductor Microwire
buses
•
•
•
•
Synchronous serial communication
Master or slave operation
8-frame FIFOs for both transmit and receive
4 to 16 bit frame
14.3 Description
The SSP is a Synchronous Serial Port (SSP) controller capable of operation on an SPI,
4-wire SSI, or Microwire bus. It can interact with multiple masters and slaves on the bus.
Only a single master and a single slave can communicate on the bus during a given data
transfer. Data transfers are in principle full duplex, with frames of 4 to 16 bits of data
flowing from the master to the slave and from the slave to the master. In practice it is often
the case that only one of these data flows carries meaningful data.
While the SSP and SPI1 peripherals share the same physical pins, it is not possible to
have both of these two peripherals active at the same time. Bit 10 (PSPI1) and bit 21
(PSSP) residing in the Section 6.10.3 control the activity of the SPI1 and SSP module
respectively. The corresponding peripheral is enabled when its control bit is 1, and it is
disabled when the control bit is 0. After power-on reset, SPI1 is enabled, maintaining the
backward compatibility with other NXP LPC2000 microcontrollers. Any attempt to write 1
to PSPI1 and PSSP bits at the same time will result in PSPI = 1 and PSSP = 0.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
218 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
To switch on the fly from SPI1 to SSP and back, first disable the active peripheral’s
interrupts, both in the peripheral’s and VIC’s registers. Next, clear all pending interrupt
flags (if any set). Only then, the currently enabled peripheral can be turned off in the
PCONP register. After this, the other serial interface can be enabled.
It is important to disable the currently used peripheral by clearing its bit in the PCONP
register only at the very end of the peripheral’s shut-down procedure. Otherwise, having 0
in a bit in PCONP will disable all clocks from coming into the peripheral controlled by that
bit. Then, reading from the peripheral’s registers will not yield valid data and write and/or
modify access will be banned, i.e. no content can be changed. Consequently, if any of the
interrupt triggering flags are left active in the peripheral’s registers when the peripheral is
disabled via the PCONP, the invoked ISR may not be able to successfully service pending
interrupt, and the same interrupt may keep overloading the microcontroller even though its
peripheral is disabled.
Table 200. SSP pin descriptions
UM10114
User manual
Pin
name
Type
SCK1
I/O
Interface pin name/function
Pin description
SPI
SSI
Microwire
SCK
CLK
SK
Serial Clock. SCK/CLK/SK is a clock signal used
to synchronize the transfer of data. It is driven by
the master and received by the slave. When SPI
interface is used the clock is programmable to be
active high or active low, otherwise it is always
active high. SCK1 only switches during a data
transfer. Any other time, the SSP either holds it in
its inactive state, or does not drive it (leaves it in
high impedance state).
SSEL1 I/O
SSEL
FS
CS
Slave Select/Frame Sync/Chip Select. When the
SSP is a bus master, it drives this signal from
shortly before the start of serial data, to shortly
after the end of serial data, to signify a data
transfer as appropriate for the selected bus and
mode. When the SSP is a bus slave, this signal
qualifies the presence of data from the Master,
according to the protocol in use. When there is just
one bus master and one bus slave, the Frame
Sync or Slave Select signal from the Master can
be connected directly to the slave’s corresponding
input. When there is more than one slave on the
bus, further qualification of their Frame
Select/Slave Select inputs will typically be
necessary to prevent more than one slave from
responding to a transfer.
MISO1 I/O
MISO
DR(M)
DX(S)
SI(M)
SO(S)
Master In Slave Out. The MISO signal transfers
serial data from the slave to the master. When the
SSP is a slave, serial data is output on this signal.
When the SSP is a master, it clocks in serial data
from this signal. When the SSP is a slave and is
not selected by SSEL, it does not drive this signal
(leaves it in high impedance state).
MOSI1 I/O
MOSI
DX(M)
DR(S)
SO(M)
SI(S)
Master Out Slave In. The MOSI signal transfers
serial data from the master to the slave. When the
SSP is a master, it outputs serial data on this
signal. When the SSP is a slave, it clocks in serial
data from this signal.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
219 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
14.4 Bus description
14.4.1 Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format
Figure 51 shows the 4-wire Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format supported
by the SSP module.
CLK
FS
DX/DR
MSB
LSB
4 to 16 bits
a. Single frame transfer
CLK
FS
DX/DR
MSB
LSB
MSB
4 to 16 bits
LSB
4 to 16 bits
b. Continuous/back-to-back frames transfer
Fig 51. Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format: a) single frame transfer and b)
continuous/back-to-back two frames.
For device configured as a master in this mode, CLK and FS are forced LOW, and the
transmit data line DX is tri-stated whenever the SSP is idle. Once the bottom entry of the
transmit FIFO contains data, FS is pulsed HIGH for one CLK period. The value to be
transmitted is also transferred from the transmit FIFO to the serial shift register of the
transmit logic. On the next rising edge of CLK, the MSB of the 4 to 16-bit data frame is
shifted out on the DX pin. Likewise, the MSB of the received data is shifted onto the DR
pin by the off-chip serial slave device.
Both the SSP and the off-chip serial slave device then clock each data bit into their serial
shifter on the falling edge of each CLK. The received data is transferred from the serial
shifter to the receive FIFO on the first rising edge of CLK after the LSB has been latched.
14.4.2 SPI frame format
The SPI interface is a four-wire interface where the SSEL signal behaves as a slave
select. The main feature of the SPI format is that the inactive state and phase of the SCK
signal are programmable through the CPOL and CPHA bits within the SSPCR0 control
register.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
220 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
14.4.2.1 Clock Polarity (CPOL) and Phase (CPHA) Control
When the CPOL clock polarity control bit is LOW, it produces a steady state low value on
the SCK pin. If the CPOL clock polarity control bit is HIGH, a steady state high value is
placed on the CLK pin when data is not being transferred.
The CPHA control bit selects the clock edge that captures data and allows it to change
state. It has the most impact on the first bit transmitted by either allowing or not allowing a
clock transition before the first data capture edge. When the CPHA phase control bit is
LOW, data is captured on the first clock edge transition. If the CPHA clock phase control
bit is HIGH, data is captured on the second clock edge transition.
14.4.2.2 SPI Format with CPOL = 0,CPHA = 0
Single and continuous transmission signal sequences for SPI format with CPOL = 0,
CPHA = 0 are shown in Figure 52.
SCK
SSEL
MSB
MOSI
MISO
LSB
MSB
LSB
Q
4 to 16 bits
a. Single transfer with CPOL=0 and CPHA=0
SCK
SSEL
MOSI
MISO
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
MSB
Q
LSB
MSB
LSB
Q
4 to 16 bits
4 to 16 bits
b. Continuous transfer with CPOL=0 and CPHA=0
Fig 52. Motorola SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and CPHA=0 (a) single transfer and b) continuous transfer)
In this configuration, during idle periods:
• The CLK signal is forced LOW
• SSEL is forced HIGH
• The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of
transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW. This causes slave
data to be enabled onto the MISO input line of the master. Master’s MOSI is enabled.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
221 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
One half SCK period later, valid master data is transferred to the MOSI pin. Now that both
the master and slave data have been set, the SCK master clock pin goes HIGH after one
further half SCK period.
The data is now captured on the rising and propagated on the falling edges of the SCK
signal.
In the case of a single word transmission, after all bits of the data word have been
transferred, the SSEL line is returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last
bit has been captured.
However, in the case of continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSEL signal must be
pulsed HIGH between each data word transfer. This is because the slave select pin
freezes the data in its serial peripheral register and does not allow it to be altered if the
CPHA bit is logic zero. Therefore the master device must raise the SSEL pin of the slave
device between each data transfer to enable the serial peripheral data write. On
completion of the continuous transfer, the SSEL pin is returned to its idle state one SCK
period after the last bit has been captured.
14.4.2.3 SPI format with CPOL = 0,CPHA = 1
The transfer signal sequence for SPI format with CPOL = 0, CPHA = 1 is shown in
Figure 53, which covers both single and continuous transfers.
SCK
SSEL
MOSI
MISO
Q
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
Q
4 to 16 bits
Fig 53. SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and CPHA=1
In this configuration, during idle periods:
• The CLK signal is forced LOW
• SSEL is forced HIGH
• The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of
transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW. Master’s MOSI pin
is enabled. After a further one half SCK period, both master and slave valid data is
enabled onto their respective transmission lines. At the same time, the SCK is enabled
with a rising edge transition.
Data is then captured on the falling edges and propagated on the rising edges of the SCK
signal.
In the case of a single word transfer, after all bits have been transferred, the SSEL line is
returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
222 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
For continuous back-to-back transfers, the SSEL pin is held LOW between successive
data words and termination is the same as that of the single word transfer.
14.4.2.4 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 0
Single and continuous transmission signal sequences for SPI format with CPOL=1,
CPHA=0 are shown in Figure 54.
SCK
SSEL
MSB
MOSI
MISO
LSB
MSB
LSB
Q
4 to 16 bits
a. Single transfer with CPOL=1 and CPHA=0
SCK
SSEL
MOSI
MISO
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
MSB
Q
LSB
MSB
LSB
Q
4 to 16 bits
4 to 16 bits
b. Continuous transfer with CPOL=1 and CPHA=0
Fig 54. SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 0 ( a) single and b) continuous transfer)
In this configuration, during idle periods:
• The CLK signal is forced HIGH
• SSEL is forced HIGH
• The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of
transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW, which causes
slave data to be immediately transferred onto the MISO line of the master. Master’s MOSI
pin is enabled.
One half period later, valid master data is transferred to the MOSI line. Now that both the
master and slave data have been set, the SCK master clock pin becomes LOW after one
further half SCK period. This means that data is captured on the falling edges and be
propagated on the rising edges of the SCK signal.
In the case of a single word transmission, after all bits of the data word are transferred, the
SSEL line is returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last bit has been
captured.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
223 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
However, in the case of continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSEL signal must be
pulsed HIGH between each data word transfer. This is because the slave select pin
freezes the data in its serial peripheral register and does not allow it to be altered if the
CPHA bit is logic zero. Therefore the master device must raise the SSEL pin of the slave
device between each data transfer to enable the serial peripheral data write. On
completion of the continuous transfer, the SSEL pin is returned to its idle state one SCK
period after the last bit has been captured.
14.4.2.5 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 1
The transfer signal sequence for SPI format with CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1 is shown in
Figure 55, which covers both single and continuous transfers.
SCK
SSEL
MOSI
MISO
Q
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
Q
4 to 16 bits
Fig 55. SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 1
In this configuration, during idle periods:
• The CLK signal is forced HIGH
• SSEL is forced HIGH
• The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of
transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW. Master’s MOSI is
enabled. After a further one half SCK period, both master and slave data are enabled onto
their respective transmission lines. At the same time, the SCK is enabled with a falling
edge transition. Data is then captured on the rising edges and propagated on the falling
edges of the SCK signal.
After all bits have been transferred, in the case of a single word transmission, the SSEL
line is returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured.
For continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSEL pins remains in its active LOW
state, until the final bit of the last word has been captured, and then returns to its idle state
as described above. In general, for continuous back-to-back transfers the SSEL pin is
held LOW between successive data words and termination is the same as that of the
single word transfer.
14.4.3 Semiconductor Microwire frame format
Figure 56 shows the Microwire frame format for a single frame. Figure 44 shows the same
format when back-to-back frames are transmitted.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
224 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
SK
CS
SO
SI
MSB
LSB
8 bit control
0 MSB
LSB
4 to 16 bits
output data
Fig 56. Microwire frame format (single transfer)
Microwire format is very similar to SPI format, except that transmission is half-duplex
instead of full-duplex, using a master-slave message passing technique. Each serial
transmission begins with an 8-bit control word that is transmitted from the SSP to the
off-chip slave device. During this transmission, no incoming data is received by the SSP.
After the message has been sent, the off-chip slave decodes it and, after waiting one
serial clock after the last bit of the 8-bit control message has been sent, responds with the
required data. The returned data is 4 to 16 bits in length, making the total frame length
anywhere from 13 to 25 bits.
In this configuration, during idle periods:
• The SK signal is forced LOW
• CS is forced HIGH
• The transmit data line SO is arbitrarily forced LOW
A transmission is triggered by writing a control byte to the transmit FIFO.The falling edge
of CS causes the value contained in the bottom entry of the transmit FIFO to be
transferred to the serial shift register of the transmit logic, and the MSB of the 8-bit control
frame to be shifted out onto the SO pin. CS remains LOW for the duration of the frame
transmission. The SI pin remains tri-stated during this transmission.
The off-chip serial slave device latches each control bit into its serial shifter on the rising
edge of each SK. After the last bit is latched by the slave device, the control byte is
decoded during a one clock wait-state, and the slave responds by transmitting data back
to the SSP. Each bit is driven onto SI line on the falling edge of SK. The SSP in turn
latches each bit on the rising edge of SK. At the end of the frame, for single transfers, the
CS signal is pulled HIGH one clock period after the last bit has been latched in the receive
serial shifter, that causes the data to be transferred to the receive FIFO.
Note: The off-chip slave device can tri-state the receive line either on the falling edge of
SK after the LSB has been latched by the receive shiftier, or when the CS pin goes HIGH.
For continuous transfers, data transmission begins and ends in the same manner as a
single transfer. However, the CS line is continuously asserted (held LOW) and
transmission of data occurs back to back. The control byte of the next frame follows
directly after the LSB of the received data from the current frame. Each of the received
values is transferred from the receive shifter on the falling edge SK, after the LSB of the
frame has been latched into the SSP.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
225 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
SK
CS
SO
LSB
MSB
LSB
8 bit control
SI
0 MSB
LSB
MSB
4 to 16 bits
output data
LSB
4 to 16 bits
output data
Fig 57. Microwire frame format (continuous transfers)
14.4.3.1 Setup and hold time requirements on CS with respect to SK in Microwire
mode
In the Microwire mode, the SSP slave samples the first bit of receive data on the rising
edge of SK after CS has gone LOW. Masters that drive a free-running SK must ensure
that the CS signal has sufficient setup and hold margins with respect to the rising edge of
SK.
Figure 58 illustrates these setup and hold time requirements. With respect to the SK rising
edge on which the first bit of receive data is to be sampled by the SSP slave, CS must
have a setup of at least two times the period of SK on which the SSP operates. With
respect to the SK rising edge previous to this edge, CS must have a hold of at least one
SK period.
t HOLD= tSK
tSETUP=2*tSK
SK
CS
SI
Fig 58. Microwire setup and hold details
14.5 Register description
The SSP contains 9 registers as shown in Table 201. All registers are byte, half word and
word accessible.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
226 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
Table 201. SSP Registers
Name
Description
Access Reset value[1] Address
SSPCR0
Control Register 0. Selects the serial clock
rate, bus type, and data size.
R/W
0x0000
0xE005 C000
SSPCR1
Control Register 1. Selects master/slave
and other modes.
R/W
0x00
0xE005 C004
SSPDR
Data Register. Writes fill the transmit FIFO,
and reads empty the receive FIFO.
R/W
0x0000
0xE005 C008
SSPSR
Status Register
RO
0x03
0xE005 C00C
R/W
0x00
0xE005 C010
SSPCPSR Clock Prescale Register
SSPIMSC Interrupt Mask Set and Clear Register
R/W
0x00
0xE005 C014
SSPRIS
Raw Interrupt Status Register
R/W
0x08
0xE005 C018
SSPMIS
Masked Interrupt Status Register
RO
0x00
0xE005 C01C
SSPICR
SSPICR Interrupt Clear Register
WO
NA
0xE005 C020
[1]
Reset Value refers to the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits’ content.
14.5.1 SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - 0xE005 C000)
This register controls the basic operation of the SSP controller.
Table 202: SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - address 0xE005 C000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
3:0
DSS
5:4
UM10114
User manual
Value
Description
Reset
value
Data Size Select. This field controls the number of bits
transferred in each frame. Values 0000-0010 are not
supported and should not be used.
0000
0011
4 bit transfer
0100
5 bit transfer
0101
6 bit transfer
0110
7 bit transfer
0111
8 bit transfer
1000
9 bit transfer
1001
10 bit transfer
1010
11 bit transfer
1011
12 bit transfer
1100
13 bit transfer
1101
14 bit transfer
1110
15 bit transfer
1111
16 bit transfer
FRF
Frame Format.
00
00
SPI
01
SSI
10
Microwire
11
This combination is not supported and should not be used.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
227 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
Table 202: SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - address 0xE005 C000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value
Description
Reset
value
6
CPOL
0
Clock Out Polarity. This bit is only used in SPI mode.
0
SSP controller maintains the bus clock low between frames.
7
CPHA
1
SSP controller maintains the bus clock high between frames.
0
Clock Out Phase. This bit is only used in SPI mode.
0
SSP controller captures serial data on the first clock transition
of the frame, that is, the transition away from the inter-frame
state of the clock line.
1
15:8
SCR
SSP controller captures serial data on the second clock
transition of the frame, that is, the transition back to the
inter-frame state of the clock line.
Serial Clock Rate. The number of prescaler-output clocks per 0x00
bit on the bus, minus one. Given that CPSDVR is the prescale
divider, and the VPB clock PCLK clocks the prescaler, the bit
frequency is PCLK / (CPSDVSR * [SCR+1]).
14.5.2 SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 - 0xE005 C004)
This register controls certain aspects of the operation of the SSP controller.
Table 203: SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 - address 0xE005 C004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value
Description
Reset
Value
0
LBM
0
Loop Back Mode.
0
During normal operation.
1
SSE
1
Serial input is taken from the serial output (MOSI or MISO)
rather than the serial input pin (MISO or MOSI
respectively).
0
SSP Enable.
1
The SSP controller will interact with other devices on the
serial bus. Software should write the appropriate control
information to the other SSP registers and interrupt
controller registers, before setting this bit.
0
Master/Slave Mode.This bit can only be written when the
SSE bit is 0.
0
The SSP controller is disabled.
2
MS
0
The SSP controller acts as a master on the bus, driving the
SCLK, MOSI, and SSEL lines and receiving the MISO line.
1
UM10114
User manual
The SSP controller acts as a slave on the bus, driving
MISO line and receiving SCLK, MOSI, and SSEL lines.
3
SOD
Slave Output Disable. This bit is relevant only in slave
mode (MS = 1). If it is 1, this blocks this SSP controller
from driving the transmit data line (MISO).
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved NA
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
228 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
14.5.3 SSP Data Register (SSPDR - 0xE005 C008)
Software can write data to be transmitted to this register, and read data that has been
received.
Table 204: SSP Data Register (SSPDR - address 0xE005 C008) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
15:0
DATA
Write: software can write data to be sent in a future frame to this 0
register whenever the TNF bit in the Status register is 1,
indicating that the Tx FIFO is not full. If the Tx FIFO was
previously empty and the SSP controller is not busy on the bus,
transmission of the data will begin immediately. Otherwise the
data written to this register will be sent as soon as all previous
data has been sent (and received). If the data length is less than
16 bits, software must right-justify the data written to this register.
Reset value
Read: software can read data from this register whenever the
RNE bit in the Status register is 1, indicating that the Rx FIFO is
not empty. When software reads this register, the SSP controller
returns data from the least recent frame in the Rx FIFO. If the
data length is less than 16 bits, the data is right-justified in this
field with higher order bits filled with 0s.
14.5.4 SSP Status Register (SSPSR - 0xE005 C00C)
This read-only register reflects the current status of the SSP controller.
Table 205: SSP Status Register (SSPSR - address 0xE005 C00C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
0
TFE
Transmit FIFO Empty. This bit is 1 is the Transmit FIFO is
empty, 0 if not.
1
1
TNF
Transmit FIFO Not Full. This bit is 0 if the Tx FIFO is full, 1 if not. 1
2
RNE
Receive FIFO Not Empty. This bit is 0 if the Receive FIFO is
empty, 1 if not.
0
3
RFF
Receive FIFO Full. This bit is 1 if the Receive FIFO is full, 0 if
not.
0
4
BSY
Busy. This bit is 0 if the SSP controller is idle, or 1 if it is
currently sending/receiving a frame and/or the Tx FIFO is not
empty.
0
7:5
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
14.5.5 SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR - 0xE005 C010)
This register controls the factor by which the Prescaler divides the APB clock PCLK to
yield the prescaler clock that is, in turn, divided by the SCR factor in SSPCR0, to
determine the bit clock.
Table 206: SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR - address 0xE005 C010) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
CPSDVSR This even value between 2 and 254, by which PCLK is divided 0
to yield the prescaler output clock. Bit 0 always reads as 0.
Important: the SSPCPSR value must be properly initialized or the SSP controller will not
be able to transmit data correctly.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
229 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
In Slave mode, the SSP clock rate provided by the master must not exceed 1/12 of the
peripheral clock. The content of the SSPCPSR register is not relevant.
In master mode, CPSDVSRmin = 2 or larger (even numbers only).
14.5.6 SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear Register (SSPIMSC - 0xE005 C014)
This register controls whether each of the four possible interrupt conditions in the SSP
controller are enabled. Note that ARM uses the word “masked” in the opposite sense from
classic computer terminology, in which “masked” meant “disabled”. ARM uses the word
“masked” to mean “enabled”. To avoid confusion we will not use the word “masked”.
Table 207: SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear Register (SSPIMSC - address 0xE005 CF014) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
0
RORIM
Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when a Receive 0
Overrun occurs, that is, when the Rx FIFO is full and another
frame is completely received. The ARM spec implies that the
preceding frame data is overwritten by the new frame data
when this occurs.
1
RTIM
Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when a Receive 0
Timeout condition occurs. A Receive Timeout occurs when the
Rx FIFO is not empty, and no new data has been received, nor
has data been read from the FIFO, for 32 bit times.
2
RXIM
Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when the Rx
FIFO is at least half full.
0
3
TXIM
Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when the Tx
FIFO is at least half empty.
0
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
14.5.7 SSP Raw Interrupt Status Register (SSPRIS - 0xE005 C018)
This read-only register contains a 1 for each interrupt condition that is asserted,
regardless of whether or not the interrupt is enabled in the SSPIMSC.
Table 208: SSP Raw Interrupt Status Register (SSPRIS - address 0xE005 C018) bit
description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
0
RORRIS
This bit is 1 if another frame was completely received while the 0
RxFIFO was full. The ARM spec implies that the preceding
frame data is overwritten by the new frame data when this
occurs.
1
RTRIS
This bit is 1 if when there is a Receive Timeout condition.
Note: A Receive Timeout can be negated if further data is
received.
0
2
RXRIS
This bit is 1 if the Rx FIFO is at least half full.
0
3
TXRIS
This bit is 1 if the Tx FIFO is at least half empty.
1
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Reset value
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
230 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
14.5.8 SSP Masked Interrupt Register (SSPMIS - 0xE005 C01C)
This read-only register contains a 1 for each interrupt condition that is asserted and
enabled in the SSPIMSC. When an SSP interrupt occurs, the interrupt service routine
should read this register to determine the causes of the interrupt.
Table 209: SSP Masked Interrupt Status Register (SSPMIS -address 0xE005 C01C) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
Description
0
RORMIS
This bit is 1 if another frame was completely received while the 0
RxFIFO was full, and this interrupt is enabled.
Reset value
1
RTMIS
This bit is 1 when there is a Receive Timeout condition and
this interrupt is enabled.
Note: A Receive Timeout can be negated if further data is
received.
2
RXMIS
This bit is 1 if the Rx FIFO is at least half full, and this interrupt 0
is enabled.
3
TXMIS
This bit is 1 if the Tx FIFO is at least half empty, and this
interrupt is enabled.
0
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
0
14.5.9 SSP Interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR - 0xE005 C020)
Software can write one or more ones to this write-only register, to clear the corresponding
interrupt conditions in the SSP controller. Note that the other two interrupt conditions can
be cleared by writing or reading the appropriate FIFO, or disabled by clearing the
corresponding bit in SSPIMSC.
Table 210: SSP interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR - address 0xE005 C020) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
0
RORIC
Writing a 1 to this bit clears the “frame was received when
RxFIFO was full” interrupt.
Undefined
1
RTIC
Writing a 1 to this bit clears the Receive Timeout interrupt.
Undefined
7:2
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
231 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
15.1 How to read this chapter
Remark: External event counting on the capture inputs can be selected for LPC21xx/01,
LPC22xx/01, and LPC2220 parts only. External event counting uses the TnCTCTR
registers. All other features of the counter/timer block are identical for all LPC21xx and
LPC22xx parts.
Table 211. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers for external event counting
Part
T0CTCTR/T1CTCR registers
Part
T0CTCTR/T1CTCR registers
no suffix and /00 parts
/01 parts
LPC2109
n/a
LPC2109
Section 15.6.3
LPC2119
n/a
LPC2119
Section 15.6.3
LPC2129
n/a
LPC2129
Section 15.6.3
LPC2114
n/a
LPC2114
Section 15.6.3
LPC2124
n/a
LPC2124
Section 15.6.3
LPC2194
n/a
LPC2194
Section 15.6.3
LPC2210
n/a
LPC2210
Section 15.6.3
LPC2220
Section 15.6.3
LPC2212
Section 15.6.3
LPC2212
n/a
LPC2214
Section 15.6.3
LPC2214
n/a
LPC2290
Section 15.6.3
LPC2290
n/a
LPC2292
Section 15.6.3
LPC2292
n/a
LPC2294
Section 15.6.3
LPC2294
n/a
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
15.2 Features
•
•
•
•
A 32-bit Timer/Counter with a programmable 32-bit Prescaler.
Counter or Timer operation
External Event Counting capabilities.
Up to four 32-bit capture channels per timer, that can take a snapshot of the timer
value when an input signal transitions. A capture event may also optionally generate
an interrupt.
• Four 32-bit match registers that allow:
– Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match.
– Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
– Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
• Up to four external outputs corresponding to match registers, with the following
capabilities:
– Set low on match.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
232 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
– Set high on match.
– Toggle on match.
– Do nothing on match.
15.3 Applications
•
•
•
•
Interval Timer for counting internal events.
Pulse Width Demodulator via Capture inputs.
Free running timer.
External Event/Clock counter.
15.4 Description
The Timer/Counter is designed to count cycles of the peripheral clock (PCLK) or an
externally-supplied clock, and can optionally generate interrupts or perform other actions
at specified timer values, based on four match registers. It also includes four capture
inputs to trap the timer value when an input signal transitions, optionally generating an
interrupt.
15.5 Pin description
Table 212 gives a brief summary of each of the Timer/Counter related pins.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
233 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Table 212. Timer/Counter pin description
Pin
Type
Description
CAP0.3..0
CAP1.3..0
Input
Capture Signals- A transition on a capture pin can be configured to
load one of the Capture Registers with the value in the Timer Counter
and optionally generate an interrupt. Capture functionality can be
selected from a number of pins. When more than one pin is selected
for a Capture input on a single TIMER0/1 channel, the pin with the
lowest Port number is used. If for example pins 30 (P0.6) and 46
(P0.16) are selected for CAP0.2, only pin 30 will be used by TIMER0 to
perform CAP0.2 function.
Here is the list of all CAPTURE signals, together with pins on where
they can be selected:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CAP0.0 (3 pins): P0.2, P0.22 and P0.30
CAP0.1 (2 pins): P0.4 and P0.27
CAP0.2 (3 pin): P0.6, P0.16 and P0.28
CAP0.3 (1 pin): P0.29
CAP1.0 (1 pin): P0.10
CAP1.1 (1 pin): P0.11
CAP1.2 (2 pins): P0.17 and P0.19
CAP1.3 (2 pins): P0.18 and P0.21
Timer/Counter block can select a capture signal as a clock source
instead of the PCLK derived clock. For more details see Section 15.6.3
“Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - 0xE000 4070
and TIMER1: T1CTCR - 0xE000 8070)” on page 237.
MAT0.3..0
MAT1.3..0
Output
External Match Output 0/1- When a match register 0/1 (MR3:0) equals
the timer counter (TC) this output can either toggle, go low, go high, or
do nothing. The External Match Register (EMR) controls the
functionality of this output. Match Output functionality can be selected
on a number of pins in parallel. It is also possible for example, to have
2 pins selected at the same time so that they provide MAT1.3 function
in parallel.
Here is the list of all MATCH signals, together with pins on where they
can be selected:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MAT0.0 (2 pins): P0.3 and P0.22
MAT0.1 (2 pins): P0.5 and P0.27
MAT0.2 (2 pin): P0.16 and P0.28
MAT0.3 (1 pin): P0.29
MAT1.0 (1 pin): P0.12
MAT1.1 (1 pin): P0.13
MAT1.2 (2 pins): P0.17 and P0.19
MAT1.3 (2 pins): P0.18 and P0.20
15.6 Register description
Each Timer/Counter contains the registers shown in Table 213. More detailed descriptions
follow.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
234 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Table 213. TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1 register map
Generic Description
Name
Access
Reset
TIMER/
TIMER/
value[1] COUNTER0
COUNTER1
Address & Name Address & Name
IR
Interrupt Register. The IR can be written to clear
interrupts. The IR can be read to identify which of
eight possible interrupt sources are pending.
R/W
0
0xE000 4000
T0IR
0xE000 8000
T1IR
TCR
Timer Control Register. The TCR is used to control R/W
the Timer Counter functions. The Timer Counter can
be disabled or reset through the TCR.
0
0xE000 4004
T0TCR
0xE000 8004
T1TCR
TC
Timer Counter. The 32-bit TC is incremented every
PR+1 cycles of PCLK. The TC is controlled through
the TCR.
R/W
0
0xE000 4008
T0TC
0xE000 8008
T1TC
PR
Prescale Register. The Prescale Counter (below) is R/W
equal to this value, the next clock increments the TC
and clears the PC.
0
0xE000 400C
T0PR
0xE000 800C
T1PR
PC
Prescale Counter. The 32-bit PC is a counter which
is incremented to the value stored in PR. When the
value in PR is reached, the TC is incremented and
the PC is cleared. The PC is observable and
controllable through the bus interface.
R/W
0
0xE000 4010
T0PC
0xE000 8010
T1PC
MCR
Match Control Register. The MCR is used to control
if an interrupt is generated and if the TC is reset
when a Match occurs.
R/W
0
0xE0004014
T0MCR
0xE000 8014
T1MCR
MR0
Match Register 0. MR0 can be enabled through the
MCR to reset the TC, stop both the TC and PC,
and/or generate an interrupt every time MR0
matches the TC.
R/W
0
0xE000 4018
T0MR0
0xE000 8018
T1MR0
MR1
Match Register 1. See MR0 description.
R/W
0
0xE000 401C
T0MR1
0xE000 801C
T1MR1
MR2
Match Register 2. See MR0 description.
R/W
0
0xE000 4020
T0MR2
0xE000 8020
T1MR2
MR3
Match Register 3. See MR0 description.
R/W
0
0xE000 4024
T0MR3
0xE000 8024
T1MR3
CCR
R/W
Capture Control Register. The CCR controls which
edges of the capture inputs are used to load the
Capture Registers and whether or not an interrupt is
generated when a capture takes place.
0
0xE000 4028
T0CCR
0xE000 8028
T1CCR
CR0
Capture Register 0. CR0 is loaded with the value of RO
TC when there is an event on the CAPn.0(CAP0.0 or
CAP1.0 respectively) input.
0
0xE000 402C
T0CR0
0xE000 802C
T1CR0
CR1
Capture Register 1. See CR0 description.
RO
0
0xE000 4030
T0CR1
0xE000 8030
T1CR1
CR2
Capture Register 2. See CR0 description.
RO
0
0xE000 4034
T0CR2
0xE000 8034
T1CR2
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
235 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Table 213. TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1 register map
Generic Description
Name
Access
Reset
TIMER/
TIMER/
value[1] COUNTER0
COUNTER1
Address & Name Address & Name
CR3
Capture Register 3. See CR0 description.
RO
0
0xE000 4038
T0CR3
0xE000 8038
T1CR3
EMR
External Match Register. The EMR controls the
external match pins MATn.0-3 (MAT0.0-3 and
MAT1.0-3 respectively).
R/W
0
0xE000 403C
T0EMR
0xE000 803C
T1EMR
CTCR
Count Control Register. The CTCR selects between R/W
Timer and Counter mode, and in Counter mode
selects the signal and edge(s) for counting.
0
0xE000 4070
T0CTCR
0xE000 8070
T1CTCR
[1]
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
15.6.1 Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR - 0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR
- 0xE000 8000)
The Interrupt Register consists of four bits for the match interrupts and four bits for the
capture interrupts. If an interrupt is generated then the corresponding bit in the IR will be
high. Otherwise, the bit will be low. Writing a logic one to the corresponding IR bit will reset
the interrupt. Writing a zero has no effect.
Table 214: Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR - address 0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR - address 0xE000 8000) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
0
MR0 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for match channel 0.
0
1
MR1 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for match channel 1.
0
2
MR2 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for match channel 2.
0
3
MR3 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for match channel 3.
0
4
CR0 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for capture channel 0 event.
0
5
CR1 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for capture channel 1 event.
0
6
CR2 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for capture channel 2 event.
0
7
CR3 Interrupt
Interrupt flag for capture channel 3 event.
0
15.6.2 Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR - 0xE000 4004 and
TIMER1: T1TCR - 0xE000 8004)
The Timer Control Register (TCR) is used to control the operation of the Timer/Counter.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
236 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Table 215: Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR - address 0xE000 4004 and TIMER1:
T1TCR - address 0xE000 8004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
0
Counter Enable When one, the Timer Counter and Prescale Counter are 0
enabled for counting. When zero, the counters are
disabled.
Description
Reset value
1
Counter Reset
When one, the Timer Counter and the Prescale Counter 0
are synchronously reset on the next positive edge of
PCLK. The counters remain reset until TCR[1] is
returned to zero.
7:2
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
NA
15.6.3 Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - 0xE000 4070 and
TIMER1: T1CTCR - 0xE000 8070)
Remark: This register is available for LPC21xx/01, LPC22xx/01, and LPC2220 only.
The Count Control Register (CTCR) is used to select between Timer and Counter mode,
and in Counter mode to select the pin and edges for counting.
When Counter Mode is chosen as a mode of operation, the CAP input (selected by the
CTCR bits 3:2) is sampled on every rising edge of the PCLK clock. After comparing two
consecutive samples of this CAP input, one of the following four events is recognized:
rising edge, falling edge, either of edges or no changes in the level of the selected CAP
input. Only if the identified event corresponds to the one selected by bits 1:0 in the CTCR
register, the Timer Counter register will be incremented.
Effective processing of the externally supplied clock to the counter has some limitations.
Since two successive rising edges of the PCLK clock are used to identify only one edge
on the CAP selected input, the frequency of the CAP input can not exceed one half of the
PCLK clock. Consequently, duration of the high/low levels on the same CAP input in this
case can not be shorter than 1/PCLK.
Table 216: Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - address 0xE000 4070 and
TIMER1: T1CTCR - address 0xE000 8070) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
1:0
Counter/
Timer
Mode
Value
Description
Reset
value
This field selects which rising PCLK edges can increment
Timer’s Prescale Counter (PC), or clear PC and increment
Timer Counter (TC).
00
00
Timer Mode: every rising PCLK edge
01
Counter Mode: TC is incremented on rising edges on the
CAP input selected by bits 3:2.
10
Counter Mode: TC is incremented on falling edges on the
CAP input selected by bits 3:2.
11
Counter Mode: TC is incremented on both edges on the CAP
input selected by bits 3:2.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
237 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Table 216: Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - address 0xE000 4070 and
TIMER1: T1CTCR - address 0xE000 8070) bit description
Bit
Symbol
3:2
Count
Input
Select
Value
Description
Reset
value
When bits 1:0 in this register are not 00, these bits select
which CAP pin is sampled for clocking:
00
00
CAPn.0 (CAP0.0 for TIMER0 and CAP1.0 for TIMER1)
01
CAPn.1 (CAP0.1 for TIMER0 and CAP1.1 for TIMER1)
10
CAPn.2 (CAP0.2 for TIMER0 and CAP1.2 for TIMER1)
11
CAPn.3 (CAP0.3 for TIMER0 and CAP1.3 for TIMER1)
Note: If Counter mode is selected for a particular CAPn input
in the TnCTCR, the 3 bits for that input in the Capture
Control Register (TnCCR) must be programmed as 000.
However, capture and/or interrupt can be selected for the
other 3 CAPn inputs in the same timer.
7:4
-
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
15.6.4 Timer Counter (TC, TIMER0: T0TC - 0xE000 4008 and TIMER1:
T1TC - 0xE000 8008)
The 32-bit Timer Counter is incremented when the Prescale Counter reaches its terminal
count. Unless it is reset before reaching its upper limit, the TC will count up through the
value 0xFFFF FFFF and then wrap back to the value 0x0000 0000. This event does not
cause an interrupt, but a Match register can be used to detect an overflow if needed.
15.6.5 Prescale Register (PR, TIMER0: T0PR - 0xE000 400C and TIMER1:
T1PR - 0xE000 800C)
The 32-bit Prescale Register specifies the maximum value for the Prescale Counter.
15.6.6 Prescale Counter Register (PC, TIMER0: T0PC - 0xE000 4010 and
TIMER1: T1PC - 0xE000 8010)
The 32-bit Prescale Counter controls division of PCLK by some constant value before it is
applied to the Timer Counter. This allows control of the relationship of the resolution of the
timer versus the maximum time before the timer overflows. The Prescale Counter is
incremented on every PCLK. When it reaches the value stored in the Prescale Register,
the Timer Counter is incremented and the Prescale Counter is reset on the next PCLK.
This causes the TC to increment on every PCLK when PR = 0, every 2 PCLKs when
PR = 1, etc.
15.6.7 Match Registers (MR0 - MR3)
The Match register values are continuously compared to the Timer Counter value. When
the two values are equal, actions can be triggered automatically. The action possibilities
are to generate an interrupt, reset the Timer Counter, or stop the timer. Actions are
controlled by the settings in the MCR register.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
238 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
15.6.8 Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - 0xE000 4014 and
TIMER1: T1MCR - 0xE000 8014)
The Match Control Register is used to control what operations are performed when one of
the Match Registers matches the Timer Counter. The function of each of the bits is shown
in Table 217.
Table 217: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR - address
0xE000 8014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
0
MR0I
1
2
MR0R
MR0S
3
MR1I
4
MR1R
5
6
7
MR1S
MR2I
MR2R
8
MR2S
9
MR3I
Value Description
Reset
value
0
1
Interrupt on MR0: an interrupt is generated when MR0 matches the value in the TC.
0
This interrupt is disabled
1
Reset on MR0: the TC will be reset if MR0 matches it.
0
Feature disabled.
1
Stop on MR0: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR0 matches 0
the TC.
0
Feature disabled.
1
Interrupt on MR1: an interrupt is generated when MR1 matches the value in the TC.
0
This interrupt is disabled
1
Reset on MR1: the TC will be reset if MR1 matches it.
0
Feature disabled.
1
Stop on MR1: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR1 matches 0
the TC.
0
Feature disabled.
1
Interrupt on MR2: an interrupt is generated when MR2 matches the value in the TC.
0
This interrupt is disabled
0
0
0
0
1
Reset on MR2: the TC will be reset if MR2 matches it.
0
Feature disabled.
0
1
Stop on MR2: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR2 matches 0
the TC.
0
Feature disabled.
1
Interrupt on MR3: an interrupt is generated when MR3 matches the value in the TC.
0
This interrupt is disabled
Reset on MR3: the TC will be reset if MR3 matches it.
0
10
MR3R
1
0
Feature disabled.
11
MR3S
1
Stop on MR3: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR3 matches 0
the TC.
0
Feature disabled.
15:12
-
UM10114
User manual
0
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a
reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
239 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
15.6.9 Capture Registers (CR0 - CR3)
Each Capture register is associated with a device pin and may be loaded with the Timer
Counter value when a specified event occurs on that pin. The settings in the Capture
Control Register register determine whether the capture function is enabled, and whether
a capture event happens on the rising edge of the associated pin, the falling edge, or on
both edges.
15.6.10 Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - 0xE000 4028 and
TIMER1: T1CCR - 0xE000 8028)
The Capture Control Register is used to control whether one of the four Capture Registers
is loaded with the value in the Timer Counter when the capture event occurs, and whether
an interrupt is generated by the capture event. Setting both the rising and falling bits at the
same time is a valid configuration, resulting in a capture event for both edges. In the
description below, n represents the Timer number, 0 or 1.
Table 218: Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - address 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR - address
0xE000 8028) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Description
Reset
value
0
CAP0RE
1
Capture on CAPn.0 rising edge: a sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.0 will cause CR0 to
be loaded with the contents of TC.
0
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Capture on CAPn.0 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.0 will cause CR0 to
be loaded with the contents of TC.
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Interrupt on CAPn.0 event: a CR0 load due to a CAPn.0 event will generate an
interrupt.
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Capture on CAPn.1 rising edge: a sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.1 will cause CR1 to
be loaded with the contents of TC.
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Capture on CAPn.1 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.1 will cause CR1 to
be loaded with the contents of TC.
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Interrupt on CAPn.1 event: a CR1 load due to a CAPn.1 event will generate an
interrupt.
1
CAP0FE
2
CAP0I
3
4
5
6
7
8
CAP1RE
CAP1FE
CAP1I
CAP2RE
CAP2FE
CAP2I
UM10114
User manual
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Capture on CAPn.2 rising edge: A sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.2 will cause CR2 to
be loaded with the contents of TC.
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Capture on CAPn.2 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.2 will cause CR2 to
be loaded with the contents of TC.
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Interrupt on CAPn.2 event: a CR2 load due to a CAPn.2 event will generate an
interrupt.
0
This feature is disabled.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
240 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Table 218: Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - address 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR - address
0xE000 8028) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Description
Reset
value
9
CAP3RE
1
Capture on CAPn.3 rising edge: a sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.3 will cause CR3 to
be loaded with the contents of TC.
0
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Capture on CAPn.3 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.3 will cause CR3 to
be loaded with the contents of TC
0
This feature is disabled.
1
Interrupt on CAPn.3 event: a CR3 load due to a CAPn.3 event will generate an
interrupt.
10
11
CAP3FE
CAP3I
0
15:12 -
0
0
This feature is disabled.
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a
reserved bit is not defined.
NA
15.6.11 External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR - 0xE000 403C; and
TIMER1: T1EMR - 0xE000 803C)
The External Match Register provides both control and status of the external match pins
MAT(0-3). Bits EM3:0 can be written only when Timer is disabled (bit 1 in Timer Control
Register is 0). Only under this condition an initial output level on MAT pins can be set.
Once the Timer is enabled, EM3:0 can be changed only by Timer’s activities specified by
the EMC bits.
Table 219: External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR - address 0xE000 403C and TIMER1: T1EMR address0xE000 803C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
0
EM0
External Match 0. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.0/MAT1.0, whether or not this 0
output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR0, this output
of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[5:4] control the
functionality of this output.
1
EM1
External Match 1. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.1/MAT1.1, whether or not this 0
output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR1, this output
of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[7:6] control the
functionality of this output.
2
EM2
External Match 2. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.2/MAT1.2, whether or not this 0
output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR2, this output
of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[9:8] control the
functionality of this output.
3
EM3
External Match 3. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.3/MAT1.3, whether or not this 0
output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR3, this output
of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[11:10] control the
functionality of this output.
5:4
EMC0
External Match Control 0. Determines the functionality of External Match 0. Table 220
shows the encoding of these bits.
00
7:6
EMC1
External Match Control 1. Determines the functionality of External Match 1. Table 220
shows the encoding of these bits.
00
UM10114
User manual
Reset
value
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
241 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
Table 219: External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR - address 0xE000 403C and TIMER1: T1EMR address0xE000 803C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
9:8
EMC2
External Match Control 2. Determines the functionality of External Match 2. Table 220
shows the encoding of these bits.
00
11:10
EMC3
External Match Control 3. Determines the functionality of External Match 3. Table 220
shows the encoding of these bits.
00
15:12
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a
reserved bit is not defined.
NA
Table 220. External match control
EMR[11:10], EMR[9:8],
EMR[7:6], or EMR[5:4]
Function
00
Do Nothing.
01
Clear the corresponding External Match bit/output to 0 (MATn.m pin is LOW if pinned out).
10
Set the corresponding External Match bit/output to 1 (MATn.m pin is HIGH if pinned out).
11
Toggle the corresponding External Match bit/output.
15.7 Example timer operation
Figure 59 shows a timer configured to reset the count and generate an interrupt on match.
The prescaler is set to 2 and the match register set to 6. At the end of the timer cycle
where the match occurs, the timer count is reset. This gives a full length cycle to the
match value. The interrupt indicating that a match occurred is generated in the next clock
after the timer reached the match value.
Figure 60 shows a timer configured to stop and generate an interrupt on match. The
prescaler is again set to 2 and the match register set to 6. In the next clock after the timer
reaches the match value, the timer enable bit in TCR is cleared, and the interrupt
indicating that a match occurred is generated.
PCLK
prescale
counter
2
timer
counter
4
0
1
5
2
0
1
2
0
6
1
0
2
0
1
1
timer counter
reset
interrupt
Fig 59. A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both interrupt and reset on match are enabled
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
242 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
PCLK
prescale counter
timer counter
TCR[0]
(counter enable)
2
4
0
1
5
1
2
0
6
0
interrupt
Fig 60. A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both interrupt and stop on match are enabled
15.8 Architecture
The block diagram for TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1 is shown in
Figure 61.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
243 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
MATCH REGISTER 0
MATCH REGISTER 1
MATCH REGISTER 2
MATCH REGISTER 3
MATCH CONTROL REGISTER
EXTERNAL MATCH REGISTER
INTERRUPT REGISTER
CONTROL
=
MAT[3:0]
INTERRUPT
=
CAP[3:0]
=
STOP ON MATCH
RESET ON MATCH
LOAD[3:0]
=
CAPTURE CONTROL REGISTER
CSN
CAPTURE REGISTER 0
TIMER COUNTER
CAPTURE REGISTER 1
CE
CAPTURE REGISTER 2
CAPTURE REGISTER 3
TCI
PCLK
PRESCALE COUNTER
reset
enable
TIMER CONTROL REGISTER
MAXVAL
PRESCALE REGISTER
Fig 61. Timer block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
244 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
16.1 How to read this chapter
The PWM controller is identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
16.2 Features
• Seven match registers allow up to 6 single edge controlled or 3 double edge
controlled PWM outputs, or a mix of both types. The match registers also allow:
– Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match.
– Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
– Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
• An external output for each match register with the following capabilities:
– Set low on match.
– Set high on match.
– Toggle on match.
– Do nothing on match.
• Supports single edge controlled and/or double edge controlled PWM outputs. Single
edge controlled PWM outputs all go high at the beginning of each cycle unless the
output is a constant low. Double edge controlled PWM outputs can have either edge
occur at any position within a cycle. This allows for both positive going and negative
going pulses.
• Pulse period and width can be any number of timer counts. This allows complete
flexibility in the trade-off between resolution and repetition rate. All PWM outputs will
occur at the same repetition rate.
• Double edge controlled PWM outputs can be programmed to be either positive going
or negative going pulses.
• Match register updates are synchronized with pulse outputs to prevent generation of
erroneous pulses. Software must release new match values before they can become
effective.
• May be used as a standard timer if the PWM mode is not enabled.
• A 32-bit Timer/Counter with a programmable 32-bit Prescaler.
16.3 Description
The PWM is based on the standard Timer block and inherits all of its features, although
only the PWM function is pinned out on the LPC21xx/LPC22xx. The Timer is designed to
count cycles of the peripheral clock (PCLK) and optionally generate interrupts or perform
other actions when specified timer values occur, based on seven match registers. It also
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
245 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
includes four capture inputs to save the timer value when an input signal transitions, and
optionally generate an interrupt when those events occur. The PWM function is in addition
to these features, and is based on match register events.
The ability to separately control rising and falling edge locations allows the PWM to be
used for more applications. For instance, multi-phase motor control typically requires
three non-overlapping PWM outputs with individual control of all three pulse widths and
positions.
Two match registers can be used to provide a single edge controlled PWM output. One
match register (PWMMR0) controls the PWM cycle rate, by resetting the count upon
match. The other match register controls the PWM edge position. Additional single edge
controlled PWM outputs require only one match register each, since the repetition rate is
the same for all PWM outputs. Multiple single edge controlled PWM outputs will all have a
rising edge at the beginning of each PWM cycle, when an PWMMR0 match occurs.
Three match registers can be used to provide a PWM output with both edges controlled.
Again, the PWMMR0 match register controls the PWM cycle rate. The other match
registers control the two PWM edge positions. Additional double edge controlled PWM
outputs require only two match registers each, since the repetition rate is the same for all
PWM outputs.
With double edge controlled PWM outputs, specific match registers control the rising and
falling edge of the output. This allows both positive going PWM pulses (when the rising
edge occurs prior to the falling edge), and negative going PWM pulses (when the falling
edge occurs prior to the rising edge).
Figure 62 shows the block diagram of the PWM. The portions that have been added to the
standard timer block are on the right hand side and at the top of the diagram.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
246 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
MATCH REGISTER 0
SHADOW REGISTER 0
LOAD ENABLE
MATCH REGISTER 1
SHADOW REGISTER 1
LOAD ENABLE
MATCH REGISTER 2
SHADOW REGISTER 2
LOAD ENABLE
MATCH REGISTER 3
SHADOW REGISTER 3
LOAD ENABLE
MATCH REGISTER 4
SHADOW REGISTER 4
LOAD ENABLE
MATCH REGISTER 5
SHADOW REGISTER 5
LOAD ENABLE
MATCH REGISTER 6
SHADOW REGISTER 6
LOAD ENABLE
Match 0
PWM1
S
Q
R
EN
Match 1
PWMENA1
MATCH 0
PWMSEL2
PWM2
LATCH ENABLE REGISTER CLEAR
MUX
MATCH CONTROL REGISTER
S
Q
R
EN
Match 2
PWMENA2
=
INTERRUPT REGISTER
PWMSEL3
=
PWM3
MUX
CONTROL
=
M[6:0]
S
Q
R
EN
Match 3
PWMENA3
INTERRUPT
=
PWMSEL4
STOP ON MATCH
=
CSN
PWM4
=
RESET ON MATCH
MUX
S
Q
R
EN
Match 4
PWMENA4
=
PWMSEL5
PWM5
MUX
S
Q
R
EN
Match 5
TIMER COUNTER
PWMENA5
PWMSEL6
CE
MUX
PWM6
S
Q
R
EN
TCI
Match 6
PRESCALE COUNTER
PWMENA1..6
ENABLE
PWMENA6
PWMSEL2..6
MAXVAL
RESET
PRESCALE REGISTER
TIMER CONTROL REGISTER
PWM CONTROL REGISTER
Fig 62. PWM block diagram.
A sample of how PWM values relate to waveform outputs is shown in Figure 63. PWM
output logic is shown in Figure 62 that allows selection of either single or double edge
controlled PWM outputs via the multiplexers controlled by the PWMSELn bits. The match
register selections for various PWM outputs is shown in Table 221. This implementation
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
247 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
supports up to N-1 single edge PWM outputs or (N-1)/2 double edge PWM outputs, where
N is the number of match registers that are implemented. PWM types can be mixed if
desired.
PWM2
PWM4
PWM5
1
27
41
53
65
78
100
(counter is reset)
The waveforms below show a single PWM cycle and demonstrate PWM outputs under the
following conditions:
The timer is configured for PWM mode (counter resets to one).
Match 0 is configured to reset the timer/counter when a match event occurs.
All PWM related Match registers are configured for toggle on match.
Control bits PWMSEL2 and PWMSEL4 are set.
The Match register values are as follows:
MR0 = 100 (PWM rate)
MR1 = 41, MR2 = 78 (PWM2 output)
MR3 = 53, MR$ = 27 (PWM4 output)
MR5 = 65 (PWM5 output)
Fig 63. Sample PWM waveforms
Table 221. Set and reset inputs for PWM Flip-Flops
PWM Channel
Single edge PWM (PWMSELn = 0)
Double edge PWM (PWMSELn = 1)
Set by
Set by
Reset by
0[1]
1
Match 0
Match 1
Match
2
Match 0
Match 2
Match 1
2[2]
3
Match 0
Match 3
Match
4
Match 0
Match 4
Match 3
4[2]
5
Match 0
Match 5
Match
6
Match 0
Match 6
Match 5
Reset by
Match 1[1]
Match 2
Match 3[2]
Match 4
Match 5[2]
Match 6
[1]
Identical to single edge mode in this case since Match 0 is the neighboring match register. Essentially,
PWM1 cannot be a double edged output.
[2]
It is generally not advantageous to use PWM channels 3 and 5 for double edge PWM outputs because it
would reduce the number of double edge PWM outputs that are possible. Using PWM 2, PWM4, and
PWM6 for double edge PWM outputs provides the most pairings.
16.3.1 Rules for Single Edge Controlled PWM Outputs
1. All single edge controlled PWM outputs go high at the beginning of a PWM cycle
unless their match value is equal to 0.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
248 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
2. Each PWM output will go low when its match value is reached. If no match occurs (i.e.
the match value is greater than the PWM rate), the PWM output remains continuously
high.
16.3.2 Rules for Double Edge Controlled PWM Outputs
Five rules are used to determine the next value of a PWM output when a new cycle is
about to begin:
1. The match values for the next PWM cycle are used at the end of a PWM cycle (a time
point which is coincident with the beginning of the next PWM cycle), except as noted
in rule 3.
2. A match value equal to 0 or the current PWM rate (the same as the Match channel 0
value) have the same effect, except as noted in rule 3. For example, a request for a
falling edge at the beginning of the PWM cycle has the same effect as a request for a
falling edge at the end of a PWM cycle.
3. When match values are changing, if one of the old match values is equal to the PWM
rate, it is used again once if the neither of the new match values are equal to 0 or the
PWM rate, and there was no old match value equal to 0.
4. If both a set and a clear of a PWM output are requested at the same time, clear takes
precedence. This can occur when the set and clear match values are the same as in,
or when the set or clear value equals 0 and the other value equals the PWM rate.
5. If a match value is out of range (i.e. greater than the PWM rate value), no match event
occurs and that match channel has no effect on the output. This means that the PWM
output will remain always in one state, allowing always low, always high, or no-change
outputs.
16.4 Pin description
Table 222 gives a brief summary of each of PWM related pins.
Table 222. Pin summary
Pin
Type
Description
PWM1
Output
Output from PWM channel 1.
PWM2
Output
Output from PWM channel 2.
PWM3
Output
Output from PWM channel 3.
PWM4
Output
Output from PWM channel 4.
PWM5
Output
Output from PWM channel 5.
PWM6
Output
Output from PWM channel 6.
16.5 Register description
The PWM function adds new registers and registers bits as shown in Table 223 below.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
249 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Table 223. Pulse Width Modulator Register Map
UM10114
User manual
Name
Description
Access Reset Address
value[1]
PWMIR
PWM Interrupt Register. The PWMIR can be
R/W
written to clear interrupts. The PWMIR can be read
to identify which of the possible interrupt sources
are pending.
0
0xE001 4000
PWMTCR PWM Timer Control Register. The PWMTCR is
R/W
used to control the Timer Counter functions. The
Timer Counter can be disabled or reset through the
PWMTCR.
0
0xE001 4004
PWMTC
PWM Timer Counter. The 32-bit TC is incremented R/W
every PWMPR+1 cycles of PCLK. The PWMTC is
controlled through the PWMTCR.
0
0xE001 4008
PWMPR
PWM Prescale Register. The PWMTC is
incremented every PWMPR+1 cycles of PCLK.
R/W
0
0xE001 400C
PWMPC
PWM Prescale Counter. The 32-bit PC is a counter R/W
which is incremented to the value stored in PR.
When the value in PWMPR is reached, the
PWMTC is incremented. The PWMTC is
observable and controllable through the bus
interface.
0
0xE001 4010
PWMMCR PWM Match Control Register. The PWMMCR is
R/W
used to control if an interrupt is generated and if the
PWMTC is reset when a Match occurs.
0
0xE001 4014
PWMMR0 PWM Match Register 0. PWMMR0 can be enabled R/W
through PWMMCR to reset the PWMTC, stop both
the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an
interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition,
a match between PWMMR0 and the PWMTC sets
all PWM outputs that are in single-edge mode, and
sets PWM1 if it is in double-edge mode.
0
0xE001 4018
PWMMR1 PWM Match Register 1. PWMMR1 can be enabled R/W
through PWMMCR to reset the PWMTC, stop both
the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an
interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition,
a match between PWMMR1 and the PWMTC
clears PWM1 in either single-edge mode or
double-edge mode, and sets PWM2 if it is in
double-edge mode.
0
0xE001 401C
PWMMR2 PWM Match Register 2. PWMMR2 can be enabled R/W
through PWMMCR to reset the PWMTC, stop both
the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an
interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition,
a match between PWMMR2 and the PWMTC
clears PWM2 in either single-edge mode or
double-edge mode, and sets PWM3 if it is in
double-edge mode.
0
0xE001 4020
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
250 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Table 223. Pulse Width Modulator Register Map
Name
Description
Access Reset Address
value[1]
PWMMR3 PWM Match Register 3. PWMMR3 can be enabled R/W
through PWMMCR to reset the PWMTC, stop both
the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an
interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition,
a match between PWMMR3 and the PWMTC
clears PWM3 in either single-edge mode or
double-edge mode, and sets PWM4 if it is in
double-edge mode.
0
0xE001 4024
PWMMR4 PWM Match Register 4. PWMMR4 can be enabled R/W
through PWMMCR to reset the PWMTC, stop both
the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an
interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition,
a match between PWMMR4 and the PWMTC
clears PWM4 in either single-edge mode or
double-edge mode, and sets PWM5 if it is in
double-edge mode.
0
0xE001 4040
PWMMR5 PWM Match Register 5. PWMMR5 can be enabled R/W
through PWMMCR to reset the PWMTC, stop both
the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an
interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition,
a match between PWMMR5 and the PWMTC
clears PWM5 in either single-edge mode or
double-edge mode, and sets PWM6 if it is in
double-edge mode.
0
0xE001 4044
PWMMR6 PWM Match Register 6. PWMMR6 can be enabled R/W
through PWMMCR to reset the PWMTC, stop both
the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an
interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition,
a match between PWMMR6 and the PWMTC
clears PWM6 in either single-edge mode or
double-edge mode.
0
0xE001 4048
PWMPCR PWM Control Register. Enables PWM outputs and
selects PWM channel types as either single-edge
or double-edge controlled.
R/W
0
0xE001 404C
PWMLER
R/W
0
0xE001 4050
[1]
PWM Latch Enable Register. Enables use of new
PWM match values.
Reset Value refers to the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
16.5.1 PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - 0xE001 4000)
The PWM Interrupt Register consists bits described in (Table 224). If an interrupt is
generated then the corresponding bit in the PWMIR will be high. Otherwise, the bit will be
low. Writing a logic one to the corresponding IR bit will reset the interrupt. Writing a zero
has no effect.
Table 224: PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - address 0xE001 4000) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
0
PWMMR0 Interrupt Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 0.
0
1
PWMMR1 Interrupt Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 1.
0
2
PWMMR2 Interrupt Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 2.
0
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Reset value
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
251 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Table 224: PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - address 0xE001 4000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
3
PWMMR3 Interrupt Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 3.
0
7:4
-
0000
8
PWMMR4 Interrupt Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 4.
0
9
PWMMR5 Interrupt Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 5.
0
10
PWMMR6 Interrupt Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 6.
0
15:11
-
NA
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is
not defined.
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is
not defined.
16.5.2 PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR - 0xE001 4004)
The PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR) is used to control the operation of the PWM
Timer Counter. The function of each of the bits is shown in Table 225.
Table 225: PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR - address 0xE001 4004 ) bit description
Bit
Symbol
0
Counter Enable 1
1
Counter Reset
2
-
3
PWM Enable
7:4
UM10114
User manual
Value
-
Description
Reset
Value
The PWM Timer Counter and PWM Prescale Counter
are enabled for counting.
0
0
The counters are disabled.
1
The PWM Timer Counter and the PWM Prescale
0
Counter are synchronously reset on the next positive
edge of PCLK. The counters remain reset until this bit is
returned to zero.
0
Clear reset.
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
NA
1
PWM mode is enabled (counter resets to 1). PWM mode 0
causes the shadow registers to operate in connection
with the Match registers. A program write to a Match
register will not have an effect on the Match result until
the corresponding bit in PWMLER has been set,
followed by the occurrence of a PWM Match 0 event.
Note that the PWM Match register that determines the
PWM rate (PWM Match Register 0 - MR0) must be set
up prior to the PWM being enabled. Otherwise a Match
event will not occur to cause shadow register contents to
become effective.
0
Timer mode is enabled (counter resets to 0).
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
252 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
16.5.3 PWM Timer Counter (PWMTC - 0xE001 4008)
The 32-bit PWM Timer Counter is incremented when the Prescale Counter reaches its
terminal count. Unless it is reset before reaching its upper limit, the PWMTC will count up
through the value 0xFFFF FFFF and then wrap back to the value 0x0000 0000. This
event does not cause an interrupt, but a Match register can be used to detect an overflow
if needed.
16.5.4 PWM Prescale Register (PWMPR - 0xE001 400C)
The 32-bit PWM Prescale Register specifies the maximum value for the PWM Prescale
Counter.
16.5.5 PWM Prescale Counter Register (PWMPC - 0xE001 4010)
The 32-bit PWM Prescale Counter controls division of PCLK by some constant value
before it is applied to the PWM Timer Counter. This allows control of the relationship of the
resolution of the timer versus the maximum time before the timer overflows. The PWM
Prescale Counter is incremented on every PCLK. When it reaches the value stored in the
PWM Prescale Register, the PWM Timer Counter is incremented and the PWM Prescale
Counter is reset on the next PCLK. This causes the PWM TC to increment on every PCLK
when PWMPR = 0, every 2 PCLKs when PWMPR = 1, etc.
16.5.6 PWM Match Registers (PWMMR0 - PWMMR6)
The 32-bit PWM Match register values are continuously compared to the PWM Timer
Counter value. When the two values are equal, actions can be triggered automatically.
The action possibilities are to generate an interrupt, reset the PWM Timer Counter, or stop
the timer. Actions are controlled by the settings in the PWMMCR register.
16.5.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)
The PWM Match Control Register is used to control what operations are performed when
one of the PWM Match Registers matches the PWM Timer Counter. The function of each
of the bits is shown in Table 226.
Table 226: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - address 0xE000 4014 and
TIMER1: T1MCR - address 0xE000 8014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Description
Reset
Value
0
PWMMR0I
1
0
1
PWMMR0R 1
0
0
2
PWMMR0S 1
0
UM10114
User manual
Interrupt on PWMMR0: an interrupt is generated when
PWMMR0 matches the value in the PWMTC.
This interrupt is disabled.
Reset on PWMMR0: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR0
matches it.
0
This feature is disabled.
Stop on PWMMR0: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped 0
and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR0 matches the
PWMTC.
This feature is disabled
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
253 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Table 226: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - address 0xE000 4014 and
TIMER1: T1MCR - address 0xE000 8014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value Description
Reset
Value
3
PWMMR1I
1
Interrupt on PWMMR1: an interrupt is generated when
PWMMR1 matches the value in the PWMTC.
0
0
This interrupt is disabled.
4
PWMMR1R 1
0
5
PWMMR1S 1
1
Interrupt on PWMMR2: an interrupt is generated when
PWMMR2 matches the value in the PWMTC.
7
PWMMR2R 1
0
0
9
10
PWMMR2S 1
PWMMR3I
Interrupt on PWMMR3: an interrupt is generated when
PWMMR3 matches the value in the PWMTC.
0
This interrupt is disabled.
Interrupt on PWMMR4: An interrupt is generated when
PWMMR4 matches the value in the PWMTC.
PWMMR4R 1
0
0
UM10114
User manual
PWMMR4S 1
PWMMR5I
Stop on PWMMR3: The PWMTC and PWMPC will be
stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR3
matches the PWMTC.
1
13
0
0
This feature is disabled
This feature is disabled
PWMMR4I
15
Reset on PWMMR3: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR3
matches it.
0
12
14
Stop on PWMMR2: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped 0
and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR2 matches the
PWMTC.
1
PWMMR3S 1
0
This feature is disabled.
This feature is disabled
PWMMR3R 1
0
This interrupt is disabled.
Reset on PWMMR2: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR2
matches it.
0
0
11
Stop on PWMMR1: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped 0
and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR1 matches the
PWMTC.
This feature is disabled.
PWMMR2I
0
This feature is disabled.
0
6
8
Reset on PWMMR1: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR1
matches it.
0
0
This interrupt is disabled.
Reset on PWMMR4: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR4
matches it.
0
This feature is disabled.
Stop on PWMMR4: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped 0
and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR4 matches the
PWMTC.
0
This feature is disabled
1
Interrupt on PWMMR5: An interrupt is generated when
PWMMR5 matches the value in the PWMTC.
0
This interrupt is disabled.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
254 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Table 226: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - address 0xE000 4014 and
TIMER1: T1MCR - address 0xE000 8014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
16
PWMMR5R
17
Value Description
1
Reset on PWMMR5: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR5
matches it.
0
This feature is disabled.
PWMMR5S 1
18
PWMMR6I
Reset
Value
Stop on PWMMR5: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped 0
and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR5 matches the
PWMTC.
0
This feature is disabled
1
Interrupt on PWMMR6: an interrupt is generated when
PWMMR6 matches the value in the PWMTC.
0
This interrupt is disabled.
19
PWMMR6R 1
20
PWMMR6S 1
0
0
31:21 -
0
0
Reset on PWMMR6: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR6
matches it.
0
This feature is disabled.
Stop on PWMMR6: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped 0
and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR6 matches the
PWMTC.
This feature is disabled
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
16.5.8 PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - 0xE001 404C)
The PWM Control Register is used to enable and select the type of each PWM channel.
The function of each of the bits are shown in Table 227.
Table 227: PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - address 0xE001 404C) bit description
Bit Symbol
Valu
e
Description
Reset
Value
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
1
Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM2 output.
0
0
Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM2.
1
Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM3 output.
0
Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM3.
1
Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM4 output.
0
Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM4.
1
Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM5 output.
0
Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM5.
1
Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM6 output.
0
Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM6.
1:0 2
3
4
5
6
UM10114
User manual
PWMSEL2
PWMSEL3
PWMSEL4
PWMSEL5
PWMSEL6
0
0
0
0
8:7 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
9
PWMENA1 1
The PWM1 output enabled.
0
0
The PWM1 output disabled.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
255 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Table 227: PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - address 0xE001 404C) bit description
Bit Symbol
Valu
e
Description
Reset
Value
The PWM2 output enabled.
0
10
PWMENA2 1
0
The PWM2 output disabled.
11
PWMENA3 1
The PWM3 output enabled.
0
The PWM3 output disabled.
12
PWMENA4 1
The PWM4 output enabled.
0
The PWM4 output disabled.
13
PWMENA5 1
The PWM5 output enabled.
0
The PWM5 output disabled.
14
PWMENA6 1
The PWM6 output enabled.
0
The PWM6 output disabled.
15
-
0
0
0
0
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
16.5.9 PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER - 0xE001 4050)
The PWM Latch Enable Register is used to control the update of the PWM Match
registers when they are used for PWM generation. When software writes to the location of
a PWM Match register while the Timer is in PWM mode, the value is held in a shadow
register. When a PWM Match 0 event occurs (normally also resetting the timer in PWM
mode), the contents of shadow registers will be transferred to the actual Match registers if
the corresponding bit in the Latch Enable Register has been set. At that point, the new
values will take effect and determine the course of the next PWM cycle. Once the transfer
of new values has taken place, all bits of the LER are automatically cleared. Until the
corresponding bit in the PWMLER is set and a PWM Match 0 event occurs, any value
written to the PWM Match registers has no effect on PWM operation.
For example, if PWM2 is configured for double edge operation and is currently running, a
typical sequence of events for changing the timing would be:
•
•
•
•
Write a new value to the PWM Match1 register.
Write a new value to the PWM Match2 register.
Write to the PWMLER, setting bits 1 and 2 at the same time.
The altered values will become effective at the next reset of the timer (when a PWM
Match 0 event occurs).
The order of writing the two PWM Match registers is not important, since neither value will
be used until after the write to PWMLER. This insures that both values go into effect at the
same time, if that is required. A single value may be altered in the same way if needed.
The function of each of the bits in the PWMLER is shown in Table 228.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
256 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Table 228: PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER - address 0xE001 4050) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
Enable PWM
Match 0 Latch
Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the
PWM Match 0 register to be become effective when the timer
is next reset by a PWM Match event. Section 16.5.7 “PWM
Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)”.
0
1
Enable PWM
Match 1 Latch
Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the
PWM Match 1 register to be become effective when the timer
is next reset by a PWM Match event. Section 16.5.7 “PWM
Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)”.
0
2
Enable PWM
Match 2 Latch
Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the
PWM Match 2 register to be become effective when the timer
is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 16.5.7
“PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)”.
0
3
Enable PWM
Match 3 Latch
Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the
PWM Match 3 register to be become effective when the timer
is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 16.5.7
“PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)”.
0
4
Enable PWM
Match 4 Latch
Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the
PWM Match 4 register to be become effective when the timer
is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 16.5.7
“PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)”.
0
5
Enable PWM
Match 5 Latch
Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the
PWM Match 5 register to be become effective when the timer
is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 16.5.7
“PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)”.
0
6
Enable PWM
Match 6 Latch
Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the
PWM Match 6 register to be become effective when the timer
is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 16.5.7
“PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)”.
0
7
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
257 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 17: LPC21xx/22xx WatchDog Timer (WDT)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
17.1 How to read this chapter
The WDT is identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
17.2 Features
• Internally resets chip if not periodically reloaded.
• Debug mode.
• Enabled by software but requires a hardware reset or a watchdog reset/interrupt to be
disabled.
•
•
•
•
Incorrect/Incomplete feed sequence causes reset/interrupt if enabled.
Flag to indicate Watchdog reset.
Programmable 32-bit timer with internal pre-scaler.
Selectable time period from (TPCLK x 256 x 4) to (TPCLK x 232 x 4) in multiples of
TPCLK x 4.
17.3 Applications
The purpose of the watchdog is to reset the microcontroller within a reasonable amount of
time if it enters an erroneous state. When enabled, the watchdog will generate a system
reset if the user program fails to feed (or reload) the watchdog within a predetermined
amount of time.
For interaction of the on-chip watchdog and other peripherals, especially the reset and
boot-up procedures, please read Section 6.11 of this document.
17.4 Description
The watchdog consists of a divide by 4 fixed pre-scaler and a 32-bit counter. The clock is
fed to the timer via a pre-scaler. The timer decrements when clocked. The minimum value
from which the counter decrements is 0xFF. Setting a value lower than 0xFF causes 0xFF
to be loaded in the counter. Hence the minimum watchdog interval is (TPCLK x 256 x 4)
and the maximum watchdog interval is (TPCLK x 232 x 4) in multiples of (TPCLK x 4). The
watchdog should be used in the following manner:
•
•
•
•
UM10114
User manual
Set the watchdog timer constant reload value in WDTC register.
Setup mode in WDMOD register.
Start the watchdog by writing 0xAA followed by 0x55 to the WDFEED register.
Watchdog should be fed again before the watchdog counter underflows to prevent
reset/interrupt.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
258 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 17: LPC21xx/22xx WatchDog Timer (WDT)
When the Watchdog counter underflows, the program counter will start from 0x0000 0000
as in the case of external reset. The Watchdog Time-Out Flag (WDTOF) can be examined
to determine if the watchdog has caused the reset condition. The WDTOF flag must be
cleared by software.
17.5 Register description
The watchdog contains 4 registers as shown in Table 229 below.
Table 229. Watchdog register map
Name
Description
Access Reset
Address
value[1]
WDMOD
Watchdog Mode register. This register contains the R/W
basic mode and status of the Watchdog Timer.
0
0xE000 0000
WDTC
Watchdog Timer Constant register. This register
determines the time-out value.
R/W
0xFF
0xE000 0004
WO
NA
0xE000 0008
0xFF
0xE000 000C
WDFEED Watchdog Feed sequence register. Writing 0xAA
followed by 0x55 to this register reloads the
Watchdog timer to its preset value.
WDTV
[1]
Watchdog Timer Value register. This register reads RO
out the current value of the Watchdog timer.
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
17.5.1 Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD - 0xE000 0000)
The WDMOD register controls the operation of the watchdog as per the combination of
WDEN and RESET bits.
Table 230. Watchdog operating modes selection
WDEN
WDRESET
Mode of Operation
0
X (0 or 1)
Debug/Operate without the watchdog running.
1
0
Watchdog Interrupt Mode: debug with the Watchdog interrupt but no
WDRESET enabled.
When this mode is selected, a watchdog counter underflow will set the
WDINT flag and the watchdog interrupt request will be generated.
1
1
Watchdog Reset Mode: operate with the watchdog interrupt and
WDRESET enabled.
When this mode is selected, a watchdog counter underflow will reset
the microcontroller. While the watchdog interrupt is also enabled in
this case (WDEN = 1) it will not be recognized since the watchdog
reset will clear the WDINT flag.
Once the WDEN and/or WDRESET bits are set they can not be cleared by software. Both
flags are cleared by an external reset or a watchdog timer underflow.
WDTOF The Watchdog Time-Out Flag is set when the watchdog times out. This flag is
cleared by software.
WDINT The Watchdog Interrupt Flag is set when the watchdog times out. This flag is
cleared when any reset occurs. Once the watchdog interrupt is serviced, it can be
disabled in the VIC or the watchdog interrupt request will be generated indefinitely.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
259 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 17: LPC21xx/22xx WatchDog Timer (WDT)
Table 231: Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD - address 0xE000 0000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
0
WDEN
WDEN Watchdog interrupt Enable bit (Set Only).
0
1
WDRESET WDRESET Watchdog Reset Enable bit (Set Only).
0
2
WDTOF
WDTOF Watchdog Time-Out Flag.
0 (Only after
external reset)
3
WDINT
WDINT Watchdog interrupt Flag (Read Only).
0
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
17.5.2 Watchdog Timer Constant register (WDTC - 0xE000 0004)
The WDTC register determines the time-out value. Every time a feed sequence occurs
the WDTC content is reloaded in to the watchdog timer. It’s a 32-bit register with 8 LSB set
to 1 on reset. Writing values below 0xFF will cause 0xFF to be loaded to the WDTC. Thus
the minimum time-out interval is TPCLK 256 4.
Table 232: Watchdog Timer Constant register (WDTC - address 0xE000 0004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
Count
Watchdog time-out interval.
0x0000 00FF
17.5.3 Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED - 0xE000 0008)
Writing 0xAA followed by 0x55 to this register will reload the watchdog timer to the WDTC
value. This operation will also start the watchdog if it is enabled via the WDMOD register.
Setting the WDEN bit in the WDMOD register is not sufficient to enable the watchdog. A
valid feed sequence must first be completed before the Watchdog is capable of
generating an interrupt/reset. Until then, the watchdog will ignore feed errors. Once 0xAA
is written to the WDFEED register the next operation in the Watchdog register space must
be a WRITE (0x55) to the WDFFED register otherwise the watchdog is triggered. The
interrupt/reset will be generated during the second PCLK following an incorrect access to
a watchdog timer register during a feed sequence.
Remark: Interrupts must be disabled during the feed sequence. An abort condition will
occur if an interrupt happens during the feed sequence.
Table 233: Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED - address 0xE000 0008) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
7:0
Feed
Feed value should be 0xAA followed by 0x55.
NA
17.5.4 Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV - 0xE000 000C)
The WDTV register is used to read the current value of watchdog timer.
Table 234: Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV - address 0xE000 000C) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset value
31:0
Count
Counter timer value.
0x0000 00FF
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
260 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 17: LPC21xx/22xx WatchDog Timer (WDT)
17.6 Block diagram
The block diagram of the Watchdog is shown below in the Figure 64.
WDTC
feed sequence
feed error
feed ok
WDFEED
underflow
32 BIT DOWN
COUNTER
PCLK
/4
enable
count 1
WDTV
register
CURRENT WD
TIMER COUNT
SHADOW BIT
WDMOD
register
WDEN 2
WDTOF
WDINT
WDRESET 2
reset
interrupt
(1) Counter is enabled only when the WDEN bit is set and a valid feed sequence is done.
(2) WDEN and WDRESET are sticky bits. Once set they can’t be cleared until the watchdog
underflows or an external reset occurs.
Fig 64. Watchdog block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
261 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
18.1 How to read this chapter
The RTC is identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
18.2 Features
• Measures the passage of time to maintain a calendar and clock.
• Ultra low power design to support battery powered systems.
• Provides Seconds, Minutes, Hours, Day of Month, Month, Year, Day of Week, and
Day of Year.
• Programmable reference clock divider allows adjustment of the RTC to match various
crystal frequencies.
18.3 Description
The Real Time Clock (RTC) is designed to provide a set of counters to measure time
during system power on and off operation. The RTC has been designed to use little power
in power down mode, making it suitable for battery powered systems where the CPU is
not running continuously (sleep mode).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
262 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
18.4 Architecture
PCLK
CLK32k
REFERENCE CLOCK DIVIDER
(PRESCALER)
MUX
CLOCK GENERATOR
strobe
CLK1
CCLK
TIME COUNTERS
counter
enables
ALARM
REGISTERS
COMPARATORS
COUNTER INCREMENT
ALARM MASK
INTERRUPT ENABLE
REGISTER
INTERRUPT GENERATOR
Fig 65. RTC block diagram
18.5 Register description
The RTC includes a number of registers. The address space is split into four sections by
functionality. The first eight addresses are the Miscellaneous Register Group
(Section 18.5.2). The second set of eight locations are the Time Counter Group
(Section 18.5.12). The third set of eight locations contain the Alarm Register Group
(Section 18.5.14). The remaining registers control the Reference Clock Divider.
The Real Time Clock includes the register shown in Table 235. Detailed descriptions of
the registers follow.
Table 235. Real Time Clock (RTC) register map
UM10114
User manual
Name
Size Description
Access
Reset
value[1]
Address
ILR
2
Interrupt Location Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4000
CTC
15
Clock Tick Counter
RO
*
0xE002 4004
CCR
4
Clock Control Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4008
CIIR
8
Counter Increment Interrupt Register
R/W
*
0xE002 400C
AMR
8
Alarm Mask Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4010
CTIME0
32
Consolidated Time Register 0
RO
*
0xE002 4014
CTIME1
32
Consolidated Time Register 1
RO
*
0xE002 4018
CTIME2
32
Consolidated Time Register 2
RO
*
0xE002 401C
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
263 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Table 235. Real Time Clock (RTC) register map
Name
Size Description
Access
Reset
value[1]
Address
SEC
6
Seconds Counter
R/W
*
0xE002 4020
MIN
6
Minutes Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4024
HOUR
5
Hours Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4028
DOM
5
Day of Month Register
R/W
*
0xE002 402C
DOW
3
Day of Week Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4030
DOY
9
Day of Year Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4034
MONTH
4
Months Register
R/W
*
0xE002 4038
YEAR
12
Years Register
R/W
*
0xE002 403C
ALSEC
6
Alarm value for Seconds
R/W
*
0xE002 4060
ALMIN
6
Alarm value for Minutes
R/W
*
0xE002 4064
ALHOUR
5
Alarm value for Seconds
R/W
*
0xE002 4068
ALDOM
5
Alarm value for Day of Month
R/W
*
0xE002 406C
ALDOW
3
Alarm value for Day of Week
R/W
*
0xE002 4070
ALDOY
9
Alarm value for Day of Year
R/W
*
0xE002 4074
ALMON
4
Alarm value for Months
R/W
*
0xE002 4078
ALYEAR
12
Alarm value for Year
R/W
*
0xE002 407C
PREINT
13
Prescaler value, integer portion
R/W
0
0xE002 4080
Prescaler value, fractional portion
R/W
0
0xE002 4084
PREFRAC 15
[1]
Registers in the RTC other than those that are part of the Prescaler are not affected by chip Reset. These
registers must be initialized by software if the RTC is enabled. Reset value reflects the data stored in used
bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
18.5.1 RTC interrupts
Interrupt generation is controlled through the Interrupt Location Register (ILR), Counter
Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR), the alarm registers, and the Alarm Mask Register
(AMR). Interrupts are generated only by the transition into the interrupt state. The ILR
separately enables CIIR and AMR interrupts. Each bit in CIIR corresponds to one of the
time counters. If CIIR is enabled for a particular counter, then every time the counter is
incremented an interrupt is generated. The alarm registers allow the user to specify a date
and time for an interrupt to be generated. The AMR provides a mechanism to mask alarm
compares. If all non-masked alarm registers match the value in their corresponding time
counter, then an interrupt is generated.
18.5.2 Miscellaneous register group
Table 236 summarizes the registers located from 0 to 7 of A[6:2]. More detailed
descriptions follow.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
264 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Table 236. Miscellaneous registers
Name
Size Description
Access
ILR
2
Interrupt Location. Reading this location
R/W
indicates the source of an interrupt. Writing a
one to the appropriate bit at this location clears
the associated interrupt.
0xE002 4000
CTC
15
Clock Tick Counter. Value from the clock
divider.
0xE002 4004
CCR
4
Clock Control Register. Controls the function of R/W
the clock divider.
0xE002 4008
CIIR
8
Counter Increment Interrupt. Selects which
counters will generate an interrupt when they
are incremented.
R/W
0xE002 400C
AMR
8
Alarm Mask Register. Controls which of the
alarm registers are masked.
R/W
0xE002 4010
CTIME0
32
Consolidated Time Register 0
RO
0xE002 4014
CTIME1
32
Consolidated Time Register 1
RO
0xE002 4018
CTIME2
32
Consolidated Time Register 2
RO
0xE002 401C
RO
Address
18.5.3 Interrupt Location Register (ILR - 0xE002 4000)
The Interrupt Location Register is a 2-bit register that specifies which blocks are
generating an interrupt (see Table 237). Writing a one to the appropriate bit clears the
corresponding interrupt. Writing a zero has no effect. This allows the programmer to read
this register and write back the same value to clear only the interrupt that is detected by
the read.
Table 237: Interrupt Location Register (ILR - address 0xE002 4000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
RTCCIF
When one, the Counter Increment Interrupt block generated an interrupt. NA
Writing a one to this bit location clears the counter increment interrupt.
1
RTCALF
When one, the alarm registers generated an interrupt. Writing a one to
this bit location clears the alarm interrupt.
NA
7:2
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
18.5.4 Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR - 0xE002 4004)
The Clock Tick Counter is read only. It can be reset to zero through the Clock Control
Register (CCR). The CTC consists of the bits of the clock divider counter.
Table 238: Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR - address 0xE002 4004) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
15:1
NA
Clock Tick Prior to the Seconds counter, the CTC counts 32,768 clocks per
Counter
second. Due to the RTC Prescaler, these 32,768 time increments may
not all be of the same duration. Refer to the Section 18.7 “Reference
clock divider (prescaler)” on page 270 for details.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
265 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
18.5.5 Clock Control Register (CCR - 0xE002 4008)
The clock register is a 5-bit register that controls the operation of the clock divide circuit.
Each bit of the clock register is described in Table 239.
Table 239: Clock Control Register (CCR - address 0xE002 4008) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
CLKEN
Clock Enable. When this bit is a one the time counters are enabled.
When it is a zero, they are disabled so that they may be initialized.
NA
1
CTCRST
CTC Reset. When one, the elements in the Clock Tick Counter are
reset. The elements remain reset until CCR[1] is changed to zero.
NA
3:2
CTTEST
Test Enable. These bits should always be zero during normal
operation.
NA
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
18.5.6 Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR - 0xE002 400C)
The Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR) gives the ability to generate an interrupt
every time a counter is incremented. This interrupt remains valid until cleared by writing a
one to bit zero of the Interrupt Location Register (ILR[0]).
Table 240: Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR - address 0xE002 400C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
IMSEC
When 1, an increment of the Second value generates an interrupt.
NA
1
IMMIN
When 1, an increment of the Minute value generates an interrupt.
NA
2
IMHOUR
When 1, an increment of the Hour value generates an interrupt.
NA
3
IMDOM
When 1, an increment of the Day of Month value generates an
interrupt.
NA
4
IMDOW
When 1, an increment of the Day of Week value generates an interrupt. NA
5
IMDOY
When 1, an increment of the Day of Year value generates an interrupt.
NA
6
IMMON
When 1, an increment of the Month value generates an interrupt.
NA
7
IMYEAR
When 1, an increment of the Year value generates an interrupt.
NA
18.5.7 Alarm Mask Register (AMR - 0xE002 4010)
The Alarm Mask Register (AMR) allows the user to mask any of the alarm registers.
Table 241 shows the relationship between the bits in the AMR and the alarms. For the
alarm function, every non-masked alarm register must match the corresponding time
counter for an interrupt to be generated. The interrupt is generated only when the counter
comparison first changes from no match to match. The interrupt is removed when a one is
written to the appropriate bit of the Interrupt Location Register (ILR). If all mask bits are
set, then the alarm is disabled.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
266 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Table 241: Alarm Mask Register (AMR - address 0xE002 4010) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
0
AMRSEC
When 1, the Second value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
1
AMRMIN
When 1, the Minutes value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
2
AMRHOUR When 1, the Hour value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
3
AMRDOM
When 1, the Day of Month value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
4
AMRDOW
When 1, the Day of Week value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
5
AMRDOY
When 1, the Day of Year value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
6
AMRMON
When 1, the Month value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
7
AMRYEAR
When 1, the Year value is not compared for the alarm.
NA
18.5.8 Consolidated time registers
The values of the Time Counters can optionally be read in a consolidated format which
allows the programmer to read all time counters with only three read operations. The
various registers are packed into 32-bit values as shown in Table 242, Table 243, and
Table 244. The least significant bit of each register is read back at bit 0, 8, 16, or 24.
The Consolidated Time Registers are read only. To write new values to the Time
Counters, the Time Counter addresses should be used.
18.5.9 Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 - 0xE002 4014)
The Consolidated Time Register 0 contains the low order time values: Seconds, Minutes,
Hours, and Day of Week.
Table 242: Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 - address 0xE002 4014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
5:0
7:6
Seconds
Seconds value in the range of 0 to 59
NA
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
13:8
Minutes
Minutes value in the range of 0 to 59
NA
15:14
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
20:16
Hours
Hours value in the range of 0 to 23
NA
23:21
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
26:24
Day Of Week Day of week value in the range of 0 to 6
NA
31:27
-
NA
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
18.5.10 Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 - 0xE002 4018)
The Consolidate Time register 1 contains the Day of Month, Month, and Year values.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
267 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Table 243: Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 - address 0xE002 4018) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
4:0
Day of Month Day of month value in the range of 1 to 28, 29, 30, or 31
(depending on the month and whether it is a leap year).
NA
7:5
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
11:8
Month
Month value in the range of 1 to 12.
NA
15:12
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
27:16
Year
Year value in the range of 0 to 4095.
NA
31:28
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
18.5.11 Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 - 0xE002 401C)
The Consolidate Time register 2 contains just the Day of Year value.
Table 244: Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 - address 0xE002 401C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
11:0
Day of Year
Day of year value in the range of 1 to 365 (366 for leap years).
NA
31:12
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
18.5.12 Time counter group
The time value consists of the eight counters shown in Table 245 and Table 246. These
counters can be read or written at the locations shown in Table 246.
Table 245. Time counter relationships and values
Counter
Size
Enabled by
Minimum value
Maximum value
Second
6
Clk1 (see Figure 65)
0
59
Minute
6
Second
0
59
Hour
5
Minute
0
23
Day of Month
5
Hour
1
28, 29, 30 or 31
Day of Week
3
Hour
0
6
Day of Year
9
Hour
1
365 or 366 (for leap year)
Month
4
Day of Month
1
12
Year
12
Month or day of Year
0
4095
Table 246. Time counter registers
UM10114
User manual
Name
Size Description
Access
Address
SEC
6
Seconds value in the range of 0 to 59
R/W
0xE002 4020
MIN
6
Minutes value in the range of 0 to 59
R/W
0xE002 4024
HOUR
5
Hours value in the range of 0 to 23
R/W
0xE002 4028
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
268 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Table 246. Time counter registers
Name
Size Description
DOM
5
Day of month value in the range of 1 to 28, 29, 30, R/W
or 31 (depending on the month and whether it is a
leap year).[1]
0xE002 402C
DOW
3
Day of week value in the range of 0 to 6[1]
R/W
0xE002 4030
DOY
9
Day of year value in the range of 1 to 365 (366 for R/W
leap years)[1]
0xE002 4034
MONTH
4
Month value in the range of 1 to 12
R/W
0xE002 4038
YEAR
12
Year value in the range of 0 to 4095
R/W
0xE002 403C
[1]
Access
Address
These values are simply incremented at the appropriate intervals and reset at the defined overflow point.
They are not calculated and must be correctly initialized in order to be meaningful.
18.5.13 Leap year calculation
The RTC does a simple bit comparison to see if the two lowest order bits of the year
counter are zero. If true, then the RTC considers that year a leap year. The RTC considers
all years evenly divisible by 4 as leap years. This algorithm is accurate from the year 1901
through the year 2099, but fails for the year 2100, which is not a leap year. The only effect
of leap year on the RTC is to alter the length of the month of February for the month, day
of month, and year counters.
18.5.14 Alarm register group
The alarm registers are shown in Table 247. The values in these registers are compared
with the time counters. If all the unmasked (See Section 18.5.7 “Alarm Mask Register
(AMR - 0xE002 4010)” on page 266) alarm registers match their corresponding time
counters then an interrupt is generated. The interrupt is cleared when a one is written to
bit one of the Interrupt Location Register (ILR[1]).
Table 247. Alarm registers
Name
Size
Description
Access
Address
ALSEC
6
Alarm value for Seconds
R/W
0xE002 4060
ALMIN
6
Alarm value for Minutes
R/W
0xE002 4064
ALHOUR
5
Alarm value for Hours
R/W
0xE002 4068
ALDOM
5
Alarm value for Day of Month
R/W
0xE002 406C
ALDOW
3
Alarm value for Day of Week
R/W
0xE002 4070
ALDOY
9
Alarm value for Day of Year
R/W
0xE002 4074
ALMON
4
Alarm value for Months
R/W
0xE002 4078
ALYEAR
12
Alarm value for Years
R/W
0xE002 407C
18.6 RTC usage notes
Since the RTC operates from the APB clock (PCLK), any interruption of that clock will
cause the time to drift away from the time value it would have provided otherwise. The
variance could be to actual clock time if the RTC was initialized to that, or simply an error
in elapsed time since the RTC was activated.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
269 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
No provision is made in the LPC21xx/LPC22xx to retain RTC status upon power loss, or
to maintain time incrementation if the clock source is lost, interrupted, or altered. Loss of
chip power will result in complete loss of all RTC register contents. Entry to Power Down
mode will cause a lapse in the time update. Altering the RTC time base during system
operation (by reconfiguring the PLL, the APB timer, or the RTC prescaler) will result in
some form of accumulated time error.
18.7 Reference clock divider (prescaler)
The reference clock divider (hereafter referred to as the prescaler) allows generation of a
32.768 kHz reference clock from any peripheral clock frequency greater than or equal to
65.536 kHz (2 32.768 kHz). This permits the RTC to always run at the proper rate
regardless of the peripheral clock rate. Basically, the Prescaler divides the peripheral
clock (PCLK) by a value which contains both an integer portion and a fractional portion.
The result is not a continuous output at a constant frequency, some clock periods will be
one PCLK longer than others. However, the overall result can always be 32,768 counts
per second.
The reference clock divider consists of a 13-bit integer counter and a 15-bit fractional
counter. The reasons for these counter sizes are as follows:
1. For frequencies that are expected to be supported by the LPC21xx/LPC22xx, a 13-bit
integer counter is required. This can be calculated as 160 MHz divided by
32,768 minus 1 = 4881 with a remainder of 26,624. Thirteen bits are needed to hold
the value 4881, but actually supports frequencies up to 268.4 MHz (32,768 8192).
2. The remainder value could be as large as 32,767, which requires 15 bits.
Table 248. Reference clock divider registers
Name
Size
Description
PREINT
13
Prescale Value, integer portion
R/W
0xE002 4080
Prescale Value, fractional portion
R/W
0xE002 4084
PREFRAC 15
Access
Address
18.7.1 Prescaler Integer register (PREINT - 0xE002 4080)
This is the integer portion of the prescale value, calculated as:
PREINT = int (PCLK / 32768) 1. The value of PREINT must be greater than or equal to
1.
Table 249: Prescaler Integer register (PREINT - address 0xE002 4080) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
12:0
Prescaler Integer
Contains the integer portion of the RTC prescaler value.
0
15:13
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
18.7.2 Prescaler Fraction register (PREFRAC - 0xE002 4084)
This is the fractional portion of the prescale value, and may be calculated as:
PREFRAC = PCLK ((PREINT + 1) 32768).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
270 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Table 250: Prescaler Integer register (PREFRAC - address 0xE002 4084) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
value
14:0
Prescaler
Fraction
Contains the integer portion of the RTC prescaler value.
0
15
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
18.7.3 Example of prescaler usage
In a simplistic case, the PCLK frequency is 65.537 kHz. So:
PREINT = int (PCLK / 32768) 1 = 1 and
PREFRAC = PCLK - ([PREINT + 1] 32768) = 1
With this prescaler setting, exactly 32,768 clocks per second will be provided to the RTC
by counting 2 PCLKs 32,767 times, and 3 PCLKs once.
In a more realistic case, the PCLK frequency is 10 MHz. Then,
PREINT = int (PCLK / 32768) 1 = 304 and
PREFRAC = PCLK ([PREINT + 1] 32768) = 5,760.
In this case, 5,760 of the prescaler output clocks will be 306 (305 + 1) PCLKs long, the
rest will be 305 PCLKs long.
In a similar manner, any PCLK rate greater than 65.536 kHz (as long as it is an even
number of cycles per second) may be turned into a 32 kHz reference clock for the RTC.
The only caveat is that if PREFRAC does not contain a zero, then not all of the 32,768 per
second clocks are of the same length. Some of the clocks are one PCLK longer than
others. While the longer pulses are distributed as evenly as possible among the remaining
pulses, this jitter could possibly be of concern in an application that wishes to observe the
contents of the Clock Tick Counter (CTC) directly(Section 18.5.4 “Clock Tick Counter
Register (CTCR - 0xE002 4004)” on page 265).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
271 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
PCLK
(APB clock)
to clock tick counter
CLK
CLK
UNDERFLOW
15 BIT FRACTION COUNTER
13 BIT INTEGER COUNTER
(DOWN COUNTER)
RELOAD
15
COMBINATORIAL LOGIC
13
extend
reload
15
13 BIT RELOAD INTEGER
REGISTER
(PREINT)
15 BIT FRACTION REGISTER
(PREFRAC)
13
15
APB bus
Fig 66. RTC prescaler block diagram
18.7.4 Prescaler operation
The Prescaler block labelled "Combination Logic" in Figure 66 determines when the
decrement of the 13-bit PREINT counter is extended by one PCLK. In order to both insert
the correct number of longer cycles, and to distribute them evenly, the combinatorial Logic
associates each bit in PREFRAC with a combination in the 15-bit Fraction Counter. These
associations are shown in the following Table 251.
For example, if PREFRAC bit 14 is a one (representing the fraction 1/2), then half of the
cycles counted by the 13-bit counter need to be longer. When there is a 1 in the LSB of
the Fraction Counter, the logic causes every alternate count (whenever the LSB of the
Fraction Counter=1) to be extended by one PCLK, evenly distributing the pulse widths.
Similarly, a one in PREFRAC bit 13 (representing the fraction 1/4) will cause every fourth
cycle (whenever the two LSBs of the Fraction Counter=10) counted by the 13-bit counter
to be longer.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
272 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Table 251. Prescaler cases where the Integer Counter reload value is incremented
Fraction Counter
UM10114
User manual
PREFRAC Bit
14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
--- ---- ---- ---1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---- ---- --10
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---- ---- -100
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---- ---- 1000
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---- ---1 0000
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---- --10 0000
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---- -100 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---- 1000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- ---1 0000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
--- --10 0000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
--- -100 0000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
--- 1000 0000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
--1 0000 0000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-10 0000 0000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
100 0000 0000 0000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
273 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance
filter
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
19.1 How to read this chapter
The following chapter only applies to parts with CAN controllers. The register descriptions
are given for the full set of CAN controllers. The LPC21xx and LPC22xx have different
CAN configurations depending on part number and version. Table Table 252 contains a
list of all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts with CAN interfaces, the number of CAN
controllers, their register base addresses, and the pins for each part.
Remark: /01 devices contain an updated CAN controller with improved interrupt behavior
in Full-CAN mode. Care should be taken when using the global CAN filter look-up table
(LUT) because the numbering of CAN interfaces in the LUT is different for /01 devices
(see Section 19.9):
• no suffix and /00: CAN interfaces are numbered 1 to n (n = 2 or 4 CAN interfaces) in
the global CAN filter LUT.
• /01: CAN interfaces are numbered 0 to n-1 in the global CAN filter LUT.
• /01: FulL-CAN mode registers available (FCANIE and FCANIC0/1).
Table 252. CAN interfaces, pins, and register base addresses
Part
CAN
Pins
interfaces
CANn register base addresses used (Section 19.6)
CAN1 registers
CAN2 registers
CAN3 registers
CAN4 registers
no suffix and /01
LPC2109
1
RD1; TD1
0xE004 4000
-
-
-
LPC2119
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2129
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2194
4
RD4:1; TD4:1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
0xE004 C000
0xE005 0000
LPC2290
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2292
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2294
4
RD4:1; TD4:1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
0xE004 C000
0xE005 0000
LPC2109
1
RD1; TD1
0xE004 4000
-
-
-
LPC2119
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2129
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2194
4
RD4:1; TD4:1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
0xE004 C000
0xE005 0000
LPC2290
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2292
2
RD2/1; TD2/1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
-
-
LPC2294
4
RD4:1; TD4:1
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
0xE004 C000
0xE005 0000
/01 parts
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
274 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.2 CAN controllers
The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial communications protocol which efficiently
supports distributed real-time control with a very high level of security. Its domain of
application ranges from high speed networks to low cost multiplex wiring.
The CAN block is intended to support multiple CAN buses simultaneously, allowing the
device to be used as a gateway, switch, or router among a number of CAN buses in
industrial or automotive applications.
Each CAN Controller has a register structure similar to the NXP SJA1000 and the
PeliCAN Library block, but the 8 bit registers of those devices have been combined in
32 bit words to allow simultaneous access in the ARM environment. The main operational
difference is that the recognition of received Identifiers, known in CAN terminology as
Acceptance Filtering, has been removed from the CAN controllers and centralized in a
global Acceptance Filter. This Acceptance Filter is described after the CAN Controllers in
Section 19.10 to Section 19.12.
19.3 Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
One, two, or four CAN controllers and buses.
Data rates to 1 Mbits/second on each bus.
32 bit register and RAM access.
Compatible with CAN specification 2.0B, ISO 11898-1.
Global Acceptance Filter recognizes 11 and 29 bit Rx Identifiers for all CAN buses.
Acceptance Filter can provide FullCAN-style automatic reception for selected
Standard Identifiers.
19.4 Pin description
Table 253. CAN Pin descriptions
Pin Name
Type
Description
RD4/3/2/1
Inputs
Serial Input: from CAN transceivers.
TD4/3/2/1
Outputs
Serial Outputs: to CAN transceivers.
19.5 Memory map of the CAN block
The CAN Controllers and Acceptance Filter occupy a number of APB slots, as follows:
Table 254. Memory map of the CAN block
UM10114
User manual
Address Range
Used for
0xE003 8000 - 0xE003 87FF
Acceptance Filter RAM
0xE003 C000 - 0xE003 C017
Acceptance Filter Registers
0xE004 0000 - 0xE004 000B
Central CAN Registers
0xE004 4000 - 0xE004 405F
CAN Controller 1 Registers
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
275 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 254. Memory map of the CAN block
Address Range
Used for
0xE004 8000 - 0xE004 805F
CAN Controller 2 Registers
0xE004 C000 - 0xE004 C05F
CAN Controller 3 Registers
0xE005 0000 - 0xE005 005F
CAN Controller 4 Registers
19.6 CAN controller registers
The CAN block implements the registers shown in Table 255 and Table 256. More
detailed descriptions follow.
Table 255. CAN acceptance filter and central CAN registers
Name
Description
Access Reset Value Address
AFMR
Acceptance Filter Register
R/W
1
0xE003 C000
SFF_sa
Standard Frame Individual Start Address
Register
R/W
0
0xE003 C004
SFF_GRP_sa Standard Frame Group Start Address
Register
R/W
0
0xE003 C008
EFF_sa
R/W
0
0xE003 C00C
EFF_GRP_sa Extended Frame Group Start Address
Register
R/W
0
0xE003 C010
ENDofTable
End of AF Tables register
R/W
0
0xE003 C014
LUTerrAd
LUT Error Address register
RO
0
0xE003 C018
Extended Frame Start Address Register
LUTerr
LUT Error Register
RO
0
0xE003 C01C
FCANIE
FullCAN interrupt enable register
R/W
0
0xE003 C020
FCANIC0
FullCAN interrupt and capture register 0
R/W
0
0xE003 C024
FCANIC1
FullCAN interrupt and capture register 1
R/W
0
0xE003 C028
CANTxSR
CAN Central Transmit Status Register
RO
0x003F 3F00 0xE004 0000
CANRxSR
CAN Central Receive Status Register
RO
0
0xE004 0004
CANMSR
CAN Central Miscellaneous Register
RO
0
0xE004 0008
Table 256. CAN1, CAN2, CAN3, CAN4 controller register map
Generic
Register
Name
Description
Access CAN1
Address &
Name
CAN2
Address &
Name
CAN3
Address &
Name
CAN4
Address &
Name
CANMOD
Controls the operating mode of
the CAN Controller.
R/W
CANCMR
Command bits that affect the
state of the CAN Controller
WO
CANGSR
Global Controller Status and
Error Counters
RO[1]
Interrupt status, Arbitration Lost
Capture, Error Code Capture
RO
Interrupt Enable
R/W
CANICR
CANIER
UM10114
User manual
0xE004 4000
0xE004 8000
0xE004 C000
0xE005 0000
C1MOD
C2MOD
C3MOD
C4MOD
0xE004 4004
0xE004 8004
0xE004 C004
0xE005 0004
C1CMR
C2CMR
C3CMR
C4CMR
0xE004 4008
0xE004 8008
0xE004 C008
0xE005 0008
C1GSR
C2GSR
C3GSR
C4GSR
0xE004 400C
0xE004 800C
0xE004 C00C
0xE005 000C
C1ICR
C2ICR
C3ICR
C4ICR
0xE004 4010
0xE004 8010
0xE004 C010
0xE005 0010
C1IER
C2IER
C3IER
C4IER
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
276 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 256. CAN1, CAN2, CAN3, CAN4 controller register map
Generic
Register
Name
Description
Access CAN1
Address &
Name
CAN2
Address &
Name
CAN3
Address &
Name
CAN4
Address &
Name
CANBTR
Bus Timing
R/W[2]
0xE004 4014
0xE004 8014
0xE004 C014
0xE005 0014
C1BTR
C2BTR
C3BTR
C4BTR
0xE004 4018
0xE004 8018
0xE004 C018
0xE005 0018
C1EWL
C2EWL
C3EWL
C4EWL
0xE004 401C
0xE004 801C
0xE004 C01C
0xE005 001C
C1SR
C2SR
C3SR
C4SR
0xE004 4020
0xE004 8020
0xE004 C020
0xE005 0020
C1RFS
C2RFS
C3RFS
C4RFS
0xE004 4024
0xE004 8024
0xE004 C024
0xE005 0024
C1RID
C2RID
C3RID
C4RID
0xE004 4028
0xE004 8028
0xE004 C028
0xE005 0028
C1RDA
C2RDA
C3RDA
C4RDA
0xE004 402C
0xE004 802C
0xE004 C02C
0xE005 002C
C1RDB
C2RDB
C3RDB
C4RDB
0xE004 4030
0xE004 8030
0xE004 C030
0xE005 0030
C1TFI1
C2TFI1
C3TFI1
C4TFI1
0xE004 4034
0xE004 8034
0xE004 C034
0xE005 0034
C1TID1
C2TID1
C3TID1
C4TID1
0xE004 4038
0xE004 8038
0xE004 C038
0xE005 0038
C1TDA1
C2TDA1
C3TDA1
C4TDA1
0xE004 803C
0xE004 C03C
0xE005 003C
CANEWL
Error Warning Limit
R/W[2]
CANSR
Status Register
RO
CANRFS
Receive frame status
R/W[2]
Received Identifier
R/W[2]
CANRID
CANRDA
Received data bytes 1-4
R/W[2]
CANRDB
Received data bytes 5-8
R/W[2]
CANTFI1
Transmit frame info (1)
R/W
CANTID1
CANTDA1
Transmit Identifier (1)
Transmit data bytes 1-4 (1)
R/W
R/W
CANTDB1
Transmit data bytes 5-8 (1)
R/W
0xE004 403C
C1TDB1
C2TDB1
C3TDB1
C4TDB1
CANTFI2
Transmit frame info (2)
R/W
0xE004 4040
0xE004 8040
0xE004 C040
0xE005 0040
C1TFI2
C2TFI2
C3TFI2
C4TFI2
0xE004 4044
0xE004 8044
0xE004 C044
0xE005 0044
C1TID2
C2TID2
C3TID2
C4TID2
0xE004 4048
0xE004 8048
0xE004 C048
0xE005 0048
C1TDA2
C2TDA2
C3TDA2
C4TDA2
0xE004 804C
0xE004 C04C
0xE005 004C
CANTID2
CANTDA2
Transmit Identifier (2)
Transmit data bytes 1-4 (2)
R/W
R/W
CANTDB2
Transmit data bytes 5-8 (2)
R/W
0xE004 404C
C1TDB2
C2TDB2
C3TDB2
C4TDB2
CANTFI3
Transmit frame info (3)
R/W
0xE004 4050
0xE004 8050
0xE004 C050
0xE005 0050
C1TFI3
C2TFI3
C3TFI3
C4TFI3
0xE004 4054
0xE004 8054
0xE004 C054
0xE005 0054
C1TID3
C2TID3
C3TID3
C4TID3
0xE004 4058
0xE004 8058
0xE004 C058
0xE005 0058
C1TDA3
C2TDA3
C3TDA3
C4TDA3
0xE004 405C
0xE004 805C
0xE004 C05C
0xE005 005C
C1TDB3
C2TDB3
C3TDB3
C4TDB3
CANTID3
CANTDA3
CANTDB3
UM10114
User manual
Transmit Identifier (3)
Transmit data bytes 1-4 (3)
Transmit data bytes 5-8 (3)
R/W
R/W
R/W
[1]
The error counters can only be written when RM in CANMOD is 1.
[2]
These registers can only be written when RM in CANMOD is 1.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
277 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
In the following register tables, the column “Reset Value” shows how a hardware reset
affects each bit or field, while the column “RM Set” indicates how each bit or field is
affected if software sets the RM bit, or RM is set because of a Bus-Off condition. Note that
while hardware reset sets RM, in this case the setting noted in the “Reset Value” column
prevails over that shown in the “RM Set” column, in the few bits where they differ. In both
columns, X indicates the bit or field is unchanged.
19.6.1 Mode Register (MOD: CAN1MOD - 0xE004 4000, CAN2MOD 0xE004 8000, CAN3MOD - 0x004 C000, CAN4MOD - 0x005 0000)
This register controls the basic operating mode of the CAN Controller. Bits not listed read
as 0 and should be written as 0. See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel
register address.
Table 257. Mode register (MOD: CAN1MOD - address 0xE004 4000, CAN2MOD - address
0xE004 8000, CAN3MOD - address 0x004 C000, CAN4MOD - address 0x005 0000)
bit description
Bit Symbol Value Function
0
1
2
3
4
UM10114
User manual
RM
LOM
STM
TPM
SM
Reset RM
Value Set
0
The CAN Controller operates, and certain registers can not be 1
written.
1
Reset Mode - CAN operation is disabled, and writable
registers can be written.
0
The CAN controller acknowledges a successfully-received
message on its CAN.
1
Listen Only Mode - the controller gives no acknowledgment on
CAN, even if a message is successfully received. Messages
cannot be sent, and the controller operates in “error passive”
mode. This mode is intended for software bit rate detection
and “hot plugging”.
0
A transmitted message must be acknowledged to be
considered successful.
1
Self Test Mode - the controller will consider a Tx message
successful if there is no acknowledgment. Use this state in
conjunction with the SRR bit in CANCMR.
0
The priority of the 3 Transmit Buffers depends on their CAN
IDs.
1
The priority of the 3 Transmit Buffers depends on their Tx
Priority fields.
0
Normal operation
1
Sleep Mode - the CAN controller sleeps if it is not requesting
an interrupt, and there is no bus activity. See the Sleep Mode
description Section 19.7.2 on page 290.
RX and TX pins are LOW for a dominant bit.
0
x
0
x
0
x
0
0
0
0
5
RPM
0
1
Reverse Polarity Mode - RX pins are High for a dominant bit.
6
-
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
7
TM
0
Normal operation
0
1
Test Mode. The state of the RX pin is clocked onto the TX pin.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
1
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
278 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Note 1: The LOM and STM bits can only be written if the RM bit is 1 prior to the write
operation.
19.6.2 Command Register (CMR: CAN1CMR- 0xE004 4004, CAN2CMR 0xE004 8004, CAN3CMR - 0x004 C004, CAN4CMR - 0x005 0004)
Writing to this write-only register initiates an action. Bits not listed should be written as 0.
Reading this register yields zeroes. See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel
register address.
Table 258. Command register (CMR: CAN1CMR- address 0xE004 4004, CAN2CMR - address 0xE004 8004,
CAN3CMR - address 0x004 C004, CAN4CMR - address 0x005 0004) bit description
Bit Symbol Function
Reset RM
Value Set
0
TR
1: Transmission Request -- the message, previously written to the
CANTFI, CANTID, and optionally the CANTDA and CANTDB registers, is
queued for transmission.
0
0
1
AT
1: Abort Transmission -- if not already in progress, a pending Transmission 0
Request is cancelled. If this bit and TR are set in the same write operation,
frame transmission is attempted once, and no retransmission is attempted
if an error is flagged nor if arbitration is lost.
0
2
RRB
1: Release Receive Buffer -- the information in the CANRFS, CANRID, and 0
if applicable the CANRDA and CANRDB registers is released, and
becomes eligible for replacement by the next received frame. If the next
received frame is not available, writing this command clears the RBS bit in
CANSR.3
0
3
CDO
1: Clear Data Overrun -- The Data Overrun bit in CANSR is cleared.
0
0
4
SRR
1: Self Reception Request -- the message, previously written to the
0
CANTFS, CANTID, and optionally the CANTDA and CANTDB registers, is
queued for transmission. This differs from the TR bit above in that the
receiver is not disabled during the transmission, so that it receives the
message if its Identifier is recognized by the Acceptance Filter.
0
5
STB1
1: Select Tx Buffer 1 for transmission
0
0
6
STB2
1: Select Tx Buffer 2 for transmission
0
0
7
STB3
1: Select Tx Buffer 3 for transmission
0
0
19.6.3 Global Status Register (GSR: CAN1GSR - 0xE004 0008, CAN2GSR 0xE004 8008, CAN3GSR - 0xE004 C008, CAN4GSR 0xE005 0008)
This register is read-only, except that the Error Counters can be written when the RM bit in
the CANMOD register is 1. Bits not listed read as 0 and should be written as 0. See
Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
279 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 259. Global Status Register (GSR: CAN1GSR - address 0xE004 0008, CAN2GSR address 0xE004 8008, CAN3GSR - address 0xE004 C008, CAN4GSR address
0xE005 0008) bit description
Bit
Symbol Value
Function
0
RBS
1
Receive Buffer Status -- a received message is available 0
in the CANRFS, CANRID, and if applicable the CANRDA
and CANRDB registers. This bit is cleared by the Release
Receive Buffer command in CANCMR, if no subsequent
received message is available.
0
1
DOS
0
No data overrun has occurred since the last Clear Data
Overrun command was written to CANCMR (or since
Reset).
0
0
1
Data Overrun Status -- a message was lost because the
preceding message to this CAN controller was not read
and released quickly enough.
0
As least one previously-queued message for this CAN
controller has not yet been sent, and therefore software
should not write to the CANTFI, CANTID, CANTDA, nor
CANTDB registers of that (those) Tx buffer(s).
1
X
1
Transmit Buffer Status -- no transmit message is pending
for this CAN controller (in any of the 3 Tx buffers), and
software may write to any of the CANTFI, CANTID,
CANTDA, and CANTDB registers.
0
At least one requested transmission has not been
successfully completed.
1
0
1
Transmit Complete Status -- all requested transmission(s)
has (have) been successfully completed.
2
3
UM10114
User manual
TBS
TCS
Reset RM
Value Set
4
RS
1
Receive Status: the CAN controller is receiving a
message.
0
0
5
TS
1
Transmit Status: The CAN controller is sending a
message
0
0
6
ES
1
Error Status: one or both of the Transmit and Receive
Error Counters has reached the limit set in the Error
Warning Limit register.
0
0
7
BS
1
Bus Status: the CAN controller is currently prohibited from 0
bus activity because the Transmit Error Counter reached
its limiting value of 255.
0
15:8
-
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved NA
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
23:16 RXERR -
The current value of the Rx Error Counter.
0
X
31:24 TXERR -
The current value of the Tx Error Counter.
0
X
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
280 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.6.4 Interrupt and Capture Register (ICR: CAN1ICR- 0xE004 400C,
CAN2ICR - 0xE004 800C, CAN3ICR - 0xE004 C00C, CAN4ICR - 0xE005
000C)
Bits in this register indicate information about events on the CAN bus. This register is
read-only. Bits not listed read as 0 and should be written as 0. Bits 1-9 clear when they are
read. See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address. Bits 16-23 are
captured when a bus error occurs. At the same time, if the BEIE bit in CANIER is 1, the
BEI bit in this register is set, and a CAN interrupt can occur.
Bits 24-31 are captured when CAN arbitration is lost. At the same time, if the ALIE bit in
CANIER is 1, the ALI bit in this register is set, and a CAN interrupt can occur. Once either
of these bytes is captured, its value will remain the same until it is read, at which time it is
released to capture a new value.
The clearing of bits 1-9 and the releasing of bits 16-23 and 24-31 all occur on any read
from CANICR, regardless of whether part or all of the register is read. This means that
software should always read CANICR as a word, and process and deal with all bits of the
register as appropriate for the application.
Table 260. Interrupt and Capture register (ICR: CR: CAN1ICR- address 0xE004 400C,
CAN2ICR - 0xE004 address 800C, CAN3ICR - address 0xE004 C00C, CAN4ICR address 0xE005 000C) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol
Value
Function
0
RI
1
Receive Interrupt -- this bit is set whenever the RBS bit 0
in CANSR and the RIE bit in CANIER are both 1,
indicating that a received message is available.=.
0
1
TI1
1
Transmit Interrupt 1 -- this bit is set when the TBS1 bit
in CANSR goes from 0 to 1, indicating that Transmit
buffer 1 is available, and the TIE1 bit in CANIER is 1.
0
0
2
Ei
1
Error Warning Interrupt -- this bit is set on every change 0
(set or clear) of the Error Status or Bus Status bit in
CANSR, if the EIE bit in CAN is 1 at the time of the
change.
X
3
DOI
1
Data Overrun Interrupt -- this bit is set when the DOS 0
bit in CANSR goes from 0 to 1, if the DOIE bit in CANIE
is 1.
0
4
WUI
1
Wake-Up Interrupt: this bit is set if the CAN controller is 0
sleeping and bus activity is detected, if the WUIE bit in
CANIE is 1.
0
5
EPI
1
Error Passive Interrupt -- this bit is set if the EPIE bit in 0
CANIE is 1, and the CAN controller switches between
Error Passive and Error Active mode in either direction.
0
6
ALI
1
Arbitration Lost Interrupt -- this bit is set if the ALIE bit
in CANIE is 1, and the CAN controller loses arbitration
while attempting to transmit.
0
0
7
BEI
1
0
Bus Error Interrupt -- this bit is set if the BEIE bit in
CANIE is 1, and the CAN controller detects an error on
the bus.
X
8
IDI
1
ID Ready Interrupt -- this bit is set if the IDIE bit in
CANIE is 1, and a CAN Identifier has been received.
0
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Reset RM
Value Set
0
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
281 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 260. Interrupt and Capture register (ICR: CR: CAN1ICR- address 0xE004 400C,
CAN2ICR - 0xE004 address 800C, CAN3ICR - address 0xE004 C00C, CAN4ICR address 0xE005 000C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value
Function
Reset RM
Value Set
9
TI2
1
Transmit Interrupt 2 -- this bit is set when the TBS2 bit
in CANSR goes from 0 to 1, indicating that Transmit
buffer 2 is available, and the TIE2 bit in CANIER is 1.
0
0
10
TI3
1
Transmit Interrupt 3-- this bit is set when the TBS3 bit
in CANSR goes from 0 to 1, indicating that Transmit
buffer 3 is available, and the TIE3 bit in CANIER is 1.
0
0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
NA
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
15:11 -
20:16 ERRBIT
21
UM10114
User manual
Error Code Capture: when the CAN controller detects a 0
bus error, the location of the error within the frame is
captured in this field. The value reflects an internal
state variable, and as a result is not very linear:
00010
ID28:21
00011
Start of Frame
00100
SRTR bit
00101
IDE bit
00110
ID20:18
00111
ID17:13
01000
CRC
01001
Res.Bit 0
01010
Data field
01011
DLC
01100
RTR bit
01101
Res.Bit 1
01110
ID4:0
01111
ID12:5
10001
Active Error flag
10010
Intermission
10011
Dominant OK bits
10110
Passive error flag
10111
Error delimiter
11000
CRC delimiter
11001
Ack slot
11010
End of Frame
11011
Ack delimiter
11100
Overload flag
ERRDIR
When the CAN controller detects a bus error, the
direction of the current bit is captured in this bit.
0
Transmitting
1
Receiving
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
X
X
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
282 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 260. Interrupt and Capture register (ICR: CR: CAN1ICR- address 0xE004 400C,
CAN2ICR - 0xE004 address 800C, CAN3ICR - address 0xE004 C00C, CAN4ICR address 0xE005 000C) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Value
23;22 ERRC
Function
Reset RM
Value Set
When the CAN controller detects a bus error, the type
of error is captured in this field:
0
X
X
00
Bit error
01
Form error
10
Stuff error
11
Other error
28:24 ALCBIT
-
Each time arbitration is lost while trying to send on the 0
CAN, the bit number within the frame is captured into
this field. 0 indicates arbitration loss in the first (MS) bit
of the Identifier … 31 indicates loss in the RTR bit of an
extended frame. After this byte is read, the ALI bit is
cleared and a new Arbitration Lost interrupt can occur.
31:29 -
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
NA
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
19.6.5 Interrupt Enable Register (IER: CAN1IER - 0xE004 4010, CAN2IER
0xE004 8010, CAN3IER - 0xE004 C010, CAN4IER - 0xE005 0010)
This read/write register controls whether various events on the CAN controller will result in
an interrupt. Bits 7:0 in this register correspond 1-to-1 with bits 7:0 in the CANICR register.
See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address.
Table 261. Interrupt Enable register (IER: CAN1IER - address 0xE004 4010, CAN2IER address 0xE004 8010, CAN3IER - address 0xE004 C010, CAN4IER - address
0xE005 0010) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset RM
Value Set
0
RIE
Receiver Interrupt Enable.
0
X
1
TIE1
Transmit Interrupt Enable (1).
0
X
2
EIE
Error Warning Interrupt Enable.
0
X
3
DOIE
Data Overrun Interrupt Enable.
0
X
4
WUIE
Wake-Up Interrupt Enable.
0
X
5
EPIE
Error Passive Interrupt Enable.
0
X
6
ALIE
Arbitration Lost Interrupt Enable.
0
X
7
BEIE
Bus Error Interrupt Enable.
0
X
8
IDIE
ID Ready Interrupt Enable.
0
X
9
TIE2
Transmit Interrupt Enable (2).
0
X
10
TIE3
Transmit Interrupt Enable (3).
0
X
31:11
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
283 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.6.6 Bus Timing Register (BTR: CAN1BTR - 0xE004 4014, CAN2BTR 0xE004 8014, CAN3BTR - 0xE004 C014, CAN4BTR - 0xE005 0014)
This register controls how various CAN timings are derived from the VPB clock. It can be
read at any time, but can only be written if the RM bit in CANmod is 1. See Table 256 for
details on specific CAN channel register address.
Table 262. Bus Timing Register (BTR: CAN1BTR - address 0xE004 4014, CAN2BTR address 0xE004 8014, CAN3BTR - address 0xE004 C014, CAN4BTR - address
0xE005 0014) bit description
Bit
Symbol Value Function
Reset RM
Value Set
9:0
BRP
Baud Rate Prescaler. The VPB clock is divided by (this
value plus one) to produce the CAN clock.
0
13:10 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
15:14 SJW
The Synchronization Jump Width is (this value plus one)
CAN clocks.
0
X
19:16 TESG1
The delay from the nominal Sync point to the sample point
is (this value plus one) CAN clocks.
1100
X
22:20 TESG2
001
The delay from the sample point to the next nominal sync
point is (this value plus one) CAN clocks. The nominal CAN
bit time is (this value plus the value in TSEG1 plus 3) CAN
clocks.
X
0
The bus is sampled once (recommended for high speed
buses)
X
1
The bus is sampled 3 times (recommended for low to
medium speed buses)
23
SAM
31:24 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved
bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
X
0
NA
19.6.7 Error Warning Limit Register (EWL: CAN1EWL - 0xE004 4018,
CAN2EWL - 0xE004 8018, CAN3EWL - 0xE004 C018, CAN4EWL 0xE005 0018)
This register sets a limit on Tx or Rx errors at which an interrupt can occur. It can be read
at any time, but can only be written if the RM bit in CANmod is 1. See Table 256 for details
on specific CAN channel register address.
Table 263. Error Warning Limit register (EWL: CAN1EWL - address 0xE004 4018, CAN2EWL address 0xE004 8018, CAN3EWL - address 0xE004 C018, CAN4EWL - address
0xE005 0018) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit Symbol Function
Reset
Value
7:0 EWL
9610 = 0x60 X
During CAN operation, this value is compared to both the Tx
and Rx Error Counters. If either of these counter matches this
value, the Error Status (ES) bit in CANSR is set.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
RM
Set
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
284 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.6.8 Status Register (SR - CAN1SR 0xE004 401C, CAN2SR - 0xE004 801C,
CAN3SR - 0xE004 C01C, CAN4SR - 0xE005 001C)
This register contains three status bytes, in which the bits not related to transmission are
identical to the corresponding bits in the Global Status Register, while those relating to
transmission reflect the status of each of the 3 Tx Buffers. See Table 256 for details on
specific CAN channel register address.
Table 264. Status Register (SR - CAN1SR 0xE004 401C, CAN2SR - 0xE004 801C, CAN3SR 0xE004 C01C, CAN4SR - 0xE005 001C) bit description
Bit
Symbol Value
Function
Reset RM
Value Set
0, 8, 16
RBS
These bits are identical to the RSB bit in the GSR.
0
0
1, 9, 17
DOS
These bits are identical to the DOS bit in the GSR.
0
0
0
Software should not write to any of the CANTFI,
1
CANTID, CANTDA, and CANTDB registers for this Tx
Buffer.
X
1
Software may write a message into the CANTFI,
CANTID, CANTDA, and CANTDB registers for this Tx
Buffer.
0
The previously requested transmission for this Tx
Buffer is not complete.
1
The previously requested transmission for this Tx
Buffer has been successfully completed.
2, 10, 18 TBS1,
TBS2,
TBS3
3, 11, 19 TCS1,
TCS2,
TCS3
4, 12, 20 RS
1
0
These bits are identical to the RS bit in the GSR.
0
0
The CAN Controller is transmitting a message from
this Tx Buffer.
0
0
6, 14, 22 ES
These bits are identical to the ES bit in the GSR.
0
0
7, 15, 23 BS
These bits are identical to the BS bit in the GSR.
0
0
31:24
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is
not defined.
NA
5, 13, 21 TS1,
TS2,
TS3
-
1
19.6.9 Receive Frame Status register (RFS - CAN1RFS - 0xE004 4020,
CAN2RFS - 0xE004 8020, CAN3RFS - 0xE004 C020, CAN4RFS 0xE005 0020)
This register defines the characteristics of the current received message. It is read-only in
normal operation, but can be written for testing purposes if the RM bit in CANMOD is 1.
See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
285 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 265. Receive Frame Status register (RFS - CAN1RFS - address 0xE004 4020, CAN2RFS
- address 0xE004 8020, CAN3RFS - address 0xE004 C020, CAN4RFS - address
0xE005 0020) bit description
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset RM
Value Set
9:0
ID Index If the BP bit (below) is 0, this value is the zero-based number of the 0
Lookup Table RAM entry at which the Acceptance Filter matched
the received Identifier. Disabled entries in the Standard tables are
included in this numbering, but will not be matched. See
Section 19.11 “Examples of acceptance filter tables and ID index
values” on page 298 for examples of ID Index values.
X
10
BP
X
If this bit is 1, the current message was received in AF Bypass
mode, and the ID Index field (above) is meaningless.
0
15:11 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
19:16 DLC
The field contains the Data Length Code (DLC) field of the current
received message. When RTR = 0, this is related to the number of
data bytes available in the CANRDA and CANRDB registers as
follows:
0
X
0000-0111 = 0 to 7 bytes1000-1111 = 8 bytes
With RTR = 1, this value indicates the number of data bytes
requested to be sent back, with the same encoding.
29:20 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
30
RTR
This bit contains the Remote Transmission Request bit of the
0
current received message. 0 indicates a Data Frame, in which (if
DLC is non-zero) data can be read from the CANRDA and possibly
the CANRDB registers. 1 indicates a Remote frame, in which case
the DLC value identifies the number of data bytes requested to be
sent using the same Identifier.
X
31
FF
A 0 in this bit indicates that the current received message included 0
an 11 bit Identifier, while a 1 indicates a 29 bit Identifier. This affects
the contents of the CANid register described below.
X
19.6.10 Receive Identifier register (RID - CAN1RID - 0xE004 4024, CAN2RID 0xE004 8024, CAN3RID - 0xE004 C024, CAN4RID - 0xE005 0024)
This register contains the Identifier field of the current received message. It is read-only in
normal operation, but can be written for testing purposes if the RM bit in CANmod is 1. It
has two different formats depending on the FF bit in CANRFS. See Table 256 for details
on specific CAN channel register address.
Table 266. Receive Identifier register when FF = 0 (RID: CAN1RID - address 0xE004 4024,
CAN2RID - address 0xE004 8024, CAN3RID - address 0xE004 C024, CAN4RID address 0xE005 0024) bit description
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset Value RM Set
10:0
ID
The 11 bit Identifier field of the current received
message. In CAN 2.0A, these bits are called ID10-0,
while in CAN 2.0B they’re called ID29-18.
0
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
NA
31:11 -
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
X
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
286 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 267. Receive Identifier register when FF = 1
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset Value RM Set
28:0
ID
The 29 bit Identifier field of the current received
message. In CAN 2.0B these bits are called ID29-0.
0
Reserved, user software should not write ones to
reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not
defined.
NA
31:29 -
X
19.6.11 Receive Data register A (RDA: CAN1RDA - 0xE004 4028, CAN2RDA 0xE004 8028, CAN3RDA - 0xE004 C028, CAN4RDA - 0xE005 0028)
This register contains the first 1-4 Data bytes of the current received message. It is
read-only in normal operation, but can be written for testing purposes if the RM bit in
CANMOD is 1. See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address.
Table 268. Receive Data register A (RDA: CAN1RDA - address 0xE004 4028, CAN2RDA address 0xE004 8028, CAN3RDA - address 0xE004 C028, CAN4RDA - address
0xE005 0028) bit description
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset RM
Value Set
7:0
Data 1
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 0001, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
15:8
Data 2
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 0010, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
23:16 Data 3
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 0011, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
31:24 Data 4
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 0100, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
19.6.12 Receive Data register B (RDB: CAN1RDB - 0xE004 402C, CAN2RDB 0xE004 802C, CAN3RDB - 0xE004 C02C, CAN4RDB - 0xE005 002C)
This register contains the 5th through 8th Data bytes of the current received message. It is
read-only in normal operation, but can be written for testing purposes if the RM bit in
CANMOD is 1. See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address.
Table 269. Receive Data register B (RDB: CAN1RDB - address 0xE004 402C, CAN2RDB address 0xE004 802C, CAN3RDB - address 0xE004 C02C, CAN4RDB - address
0xE005 002C) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset RM
Value Set
7:0
Data 5
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 0101, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
15:8
Data 6
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 0110, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
23:16 Data 7
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 0111, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
31:24 Data 8
If the DLC field in CANRFS >= 1000, this contains the first Data
byte of the current received message.
0
X
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
287 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.6.13 Transmit Frame Information register (TFI1, 2, 3 - CAN1TF1n 0xE004 4030, 40, 50; CAN2TFIn - 0xE004 8030, 40, 50; CAN3TFIn 0xE004 C030, 40, 50; CAN4TFIn - 0xE005 0030, 40, 50)
When the corresponding TBS bit in CANSR is 1, software can write to one of these
registers to define the format of the next transmit message for that Tx buffer. Bits not listed
read as 0 and should be written as 0. See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel
register address.
Table 270. Transmit Frame Information register (TFI1, 2, 3 - CAN1TF1n - addresses
0xE004 4030, 40, 50; CAN2TFIn - addresses 0xE004 8030, 40, 50; CAN3TFIn addresses 0xE004 C030, 40, 50; CAN4TFIn - addresses 0xE005 0030, 40, 50) bit
description
Bit
Symbol Function
7:0
PRIO
If the TPM bit in the CANMOD register is 1, enabled Tx Buffers
contend for the right to send their messages based on this
field. The lowest binary value has priority.
15:8
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
19:16 DLC
Reset RM
Value Set
This value is sent in the DLC field of the next transmit
message. In addition, if RTR = 0, this value controls the
number of Data bytes sent in the next transmit message, from
the CANTDA and CANTDB registers:
0
X
0000-0111 = 0-7 bytes
1xxx = 8 bytes
29:20 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
30
RTR
This value is sent in the RTR bit of the next transmit message. 0
If this bit is 0, the number of data bytes called out by the DLC
field are sent from the CANTDA and CANTDB registers. If it’s
1, a Remote Frame is sent, containing a request for that
number of bytes.
X
31
FF
If this bit is 0, the next transmit message will be sent with an
11 bit Identifier, while if it’s 1, the message will be sent with a
29 bit Identifier.
X
0
19.6.14 Transmit Identifier register (TID1, 2, 3 - CAN1TIDn - 0xE004 4034, 44,
54; CAN2TIDn - 0xE004 8034, 44, 54; CAN3TIDn - 0xE004 C034, 44, 54;
CAN4TIDn - 0xE005 0034, 44, 54)
When the corresponding TBS bit in CANSR is 1, software can write to one of these
registers to define the Identifier field of the next transmit message. Bits not listed read as 0
and should be written as 0. The register assumes two different formats depending on the
FF bit in CANTFI. See Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
288 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 271. Transfer Identifier register when FF=0 (TID1, 2, 3: CAN1TIDn - addresses
0xE004 4034, 44, 54; CAN2TIDn - addresses 0xE004 8034, 44, 54; CAN3TIDn addresses 0xE004 C034, 44, 54; CAN4TIDn - addresses 0xE005 0034, 44, 54) bit
description
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset RM
Value Set
10:0
ID
0
31:11 -
The 11 bit Identifier to be sent in the next transmit message.
X
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
Table 272. Transfer Identifier register when FF = 1
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset RM
Value Set
28:0
ID
0
31:29 -
The 29 bit Identifier to be sent in the next transmit message.
X
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
19.6.15 Transmit Data register A (TDA1, 2, 3: CAN1TDAn - 0xE004 4038, 48,
58; CAN2TDAn - 0xE004 8038, 48, 58; CAN3TDAn - 0xE004 C038, 48,
58; CAN4TDAn - 0xE005 0038, 48, 58)
When the corresponding TBS bit in CANSR is 1, software can write to one of these
registers to define the first 1-4 data bytes of the next transmit message. See Table 256 for
details on specific CAN channel register address.
Table 273. Transmit Data register A (TDA1, 2, 3: CAN1TDAn - addresses 0xE004 4038, 48, 58;
CAN2TDAn - addresses 0xE004 8038, 48, 58; CAN3TDAn - addresses 0xE004
C038, 48, 58; CAN4TDAn - addresses 0xE005 0038, 48, 58) bit description
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset
Value
RM
Set
7:0
Data 1
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 0001 in the corresponding CANTFI, this
byte is sent as the first Data byte of the next transmit message.
0
X
15;8
Data 2
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 0010 in the corresponding CANTFI, this
byte is sent as the 2nd Data byte of the next transmit message.
0
X
23:16 Data 3
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 0011 in the corresponding CANTFI, this
byte is sent as the 3rd Data byte of the next transmit message.
0
X
31:24 Data 4
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 0100 in the corresponding CANTFI, this
byte is sent as the 4th Data byte of the next transmit message.
0
X
19.6.16 Transmit Data Register B (TDB1, 2, 3: CAN1TDBn - 0xE004 403C, 4C,
5C; CAN2TDBn - 0xE004 803C, 4C, 5C; CAN3TDBn - 0xE004 C03C,
4C, 5C; CAN4TDBn - 0xE005 003C, 4C, 5C)
When the corresponding TBS bit in CANSR is 1, software can write to one of these
registers to define the 5th through 8th data bytes of the next transmit message. See
Table 256 for details on specific CAN channel register address.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
289 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
Table 274. Transmit Data register B (TDB1, 2, 3: CAN1TDBn - addresses 0xE004 403C, 4C,
5C; CAN2TDBn - addresses 0xE004 803C, 4C, 5C; CAN3TDBn - addresses 0xE004
C03C, 4C, 5C; CAN4TDBn - addresses 0xE005 003C, 4C, 5C) bit description
Bit
Symbol Function
Reset
Value
RM
Set
7:0
Data 5
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 0101 in the corresponding CANTFI, this 0
byte is sent as the 5th Data byte of the next transmit message.
X
15;8
Data 6
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 0110 in the corresponding CANTFI, this 0
byte is sent as the 6th Data byte of the next transmit message.
X
23:16 Data 7
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 0111 in the corresponding CANTFI, this 0
byte is sent as the 7th Data byte of the next transmit message.
X
31:24 Data 8
If RTR = 0 and DLC >= 1000 in the corresponding CANTFI, this 0
byte is sent as the 8th Data byte of the next transmit message.
X
19.7 CAN controller operation
19.7.1 Error handling
The CAN Controllers count and handle transmit and receive errors as specified in CAN
Spec 2.0B. The Transmit and Receive Error Counters are incremented for each detected
error and are decremented when operation is error-free. If the Transmit Error counter
contains 255 and another error occurs, the CAN Controller is forced into a state called
Bus-Off. In this state, the following register bits are set: BS in CANSR, BEI and EI in
CANIR if these are enabled, and RM in CANMOD. RM resets and disables much of the
CAN Controller. Also at this time the Transmit Error Counter is set to 127 and the Receive
Error Counter is cleared. Software must next clear the RM bit. Thereafter the Transmit
Error Counter will count down 128 occurrences of the Bus Free condition (11 consecutive
recessive bits). Software can monitor this countdown by reading the Tx Error Counter.
When this countdown is complete, the CAN Controller clears BS and ES in CANSR, and
sets EI in CANSR if EIE in IER is 1.
The Tx and Rx error counters can be written if RM in CANMOD is 1. Writing 255 to the Tx
Error Counter forces the CAN Controller to Bus-Off state. If Bus-Off (BS in CANSR) is 1,
writing any value 0 through 254 to the Tx Error Counter clears Bus-Off. When software
clears RM in CANMOD thereafter, only one Bus Free condition (11 consecutive recessive
bits) is needed before operation resumes.
19.7.2 Sleep mode
The CAN Controller will enter Sleep mode if the SM bit in the CAN Mode register is 1, no
CAN interrupt is pending, and there is no activity on the CAN bus. Software can only set
SM when RM in the CAN Mode register is 0; it can also set the WUIE bit in the CAN
Interrupt Enable register to enable an interrupt on any wake-up condition.
The CAN Controller wakes up (and sets WUI in the CAN Interrupt register if WUIE in the
CAN Interrupt Enable register is 1) in response to a) a dominant bit on the CAN bus, or b)
software clearing SM in the CAN Mode register. A sleeping CAN Controller, that wakes up
in response to bus activity, is not able to receive an initial message, until after it detects
Bus_Free (11 consecutive recessive bits). If an interrupt is pending or the CAN bus is
active when software sets SM, the wake-up is immediate.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
290 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.7.3 Interrupts
Each CAN Controller produces 3 interrupt requests, Receive, Transmit, and “other status”.
The Transmit interrupt is the OR of the Transmit interrupts from the three Tx Buffers. Each
Receive and Transmit interrupt request from each controller is assigned its own channel in
the Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC), and can have its own interrupt service routine. The
“other status” interrupts from all of the CAN controllers, and the Acceptance Filter LUTerr
condition, are ORed into one VIC channel.
19.7.4 Transmit priority
If the TPM bit in the CANMOD register is 0, multiple enabled Tx Buffers contend for the
right to send their messages based on the value of their CAN Identifier (TID). If TPM is 1,
they contend based on the PRIO fields in bits 7:0 of their CANTFS registers. In both cases
the smallest binary value has priority. If two (or three) transmit-enabled buffers have the
same smallest value, the lowest-numbered buffer sends first.
The CAN controller selects among multiple enabled Tx Buffers dynamically, just before it
sends each message.
19.8 Centralized CAN registers
Three read-only registers group the bits in the Status registers of the CAN controllers for
common accessibility. If devices with more or fewer CAN controllers are defined, the
number of bits used in the active bytes will change correspondingly. Each defined byte of
the following registers contains one particular status bit from each of the CAN controllers
in its LS bits.
19.8.1 Central Transmit Status Register (CANTxSR - 0xE004 0000)
Table 275. Central Transit Status Register (CANTxSR - address 0xE004 0000) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
Value
3:0
TS4:1
1: the CAN controller CAN4:1 is sending a message (same as TS in the 0
CANGSR).
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
11:8
TBS4:1
1: For CAN controllers CAN4:1 all 3 Tx Buffers are available to the CPU All 1
(same as TBS in CANGSR).
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
15:12 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
19:16 TCS4:1
1: For CAN controllers CAN4:1, all requested transmissions have been
completed successfully (same as TCS in CANGSR).
All 1
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
31:20 -
UM10114
User manual
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
291 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.8.2 Central Receive Status Register (CANRxSR - 0xE004 0004)
Table 276. Central Receive Status register (CANRxSR - address 0xE004 0004) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
Value
3:0
RS4:1
1: the CAN controller CAN4:1 is receiving a message (same as RS in
CANGSR).
0
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
11:8
RBS4:1
1: a received message is available in the CAN controller CAN4:1 (same 0
as RBS in CANGSR).
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
15:12 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
19:16 DOS4:1
0
1: a message was lost because the preceding message to this CAN
controller was not read out quickly enough (same as DOS in CANGSR).
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller CAN4:1 is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
31:20 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
19.8.3 Central Miscellaneous Status Register (CANMSR - 0xE004 0008)
Table 277. Central Miscellaneous Status Register (CANMSR - address 0xE004 0008) bit
description
Bit
Symbol Description
Reset
Value
3:0
ES4:1
0
1: For CAN controller CAN4:1, one or both of the Tx and Rx Error
Counters has reached the limit set in the EWL register (same as ES in
CANGSR).
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller CAN4:1 is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
7:4
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
11:8
BS4:1
1: the CAN controller CAN4:1is currently involved in bus activities (same 0
as BS in CANGSR).
Remark: Bits are available if the respective CAN controller CAN4:1 is
implemented and reserved otherwise (see Table 252).
31:12 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
19.9 Global acceptance filter
This block provides lookup for received Identifiers (called Acceptance Filtering in CAN
terminology) for all the CAN Controllers. It includes a 512 x 32 (2 kbyte) RAM in which
software maintains one to five tables of Identifiers. This RAM can contain up to 1024
Standard Identifiers or 512 Extended Identifiers, or a mixture of both types.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
292 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
If Standard (11 bit) Identifiers are used in the application, at least one of 3 tables in
Acceptance Filter RAM must not be empty. If the optional “fullCAN mode” is enabled, the
first table contains Standard identifiers for which reception is to be handled in this mode.
The next table contains individual Standard Identifiers and the third contains ranges of
Standard Identifiers, for which messages are to be received via the CAN Controllers. The
tables of fullCAN and individual Standard Identifiers must be arranged in ascending
numerical order, one per halfword, two per word. Since each CAN bus has its own
address map, each entry also contains the number of the CAN Controller to which it
applies. The numbering of CAN controllers depends on the CAN peripheral implemented:
On no-suffix and /00 devices, the CAN controllers are numbered 1 to n (n = 2 or 4) in
the LUT tables . However, on /01 devices, the CAN controllers are numbered 0 to n-1
in the LUT tables (see Figure 67 to Figure 69).
31
15
CONTROLLER #
16
0
26
10
29
13
DIS
NOT
ABLE USED
IDENTIFIER
Fig 67. Entry in FullCAN and individual standard identifier tables
The table of Standard Identifier Ranges contains paired upper and lower (inclusive)
bounds, one pair per word. These must also be arranged in ascending numerical order.
16
LOWER IDENTIFIER
BOUND
10
CONTROLLER
#
DISABLE
NOT USED
CONTROLLER
#
26
NOT USED
29
DISABLE
31
0
UPPER IDENTIFIER
BOUND
Fig 68. Entry in standard identifier range table
The disable bits in Standard entries provide a means to turn response, to particular CAN
Identifiers or ranges of Identifiers, on and off dynamically. When the Acceptance Filter
function is enabled, only the disable bits in Acceptance Filter RAM can be changed by
software. Response to a range of Standard addresses can be enabled by writing 32 zero
bits to its word in RAM, and turned off by writing 32 one bits (0xFFFF FFFF) to its word in
RAM. Only the disable bits are actually changed. Disabled entries must maintain the
ascending sequence of Identifiers.
If Extended (29 bit) Identifiers are used in the application, at least one of the other two
tables in Acceptance Filter RAM must not be empty, one for individual Extended Identifiers
and one for ranges of Extended Identifiers. The table of individual Extended Identifiers
must be arranged in ascending numerical order.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
293 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
31
29 28
0
CONTROLLER #
IDENTIFIER
Fig 69. Entry in either extended identifier table
The table of ranges of Extended Identifiers must contain an even number of entries, of the
same form as in the individual Extended Identifier table. Like the Individual Extended
table, the Extended Range must be arranged in ascending numerical order. The first and
second (3rd and 4th …) entries in the table are implicitly paired as an inclusive range of
Extended addresses, such that any received address that falls in the inclusive range is
received (accepted). Software must maintain the table to consist of such word pairs.
There is no facility to receive messages to Extended identifiers using the fullCAN method.
Five address registers point to the boundaries between the tables in Acceptance Filter
RAM: fullCAN Standard addresses, Standard Individual addresses, Standard address
ranges, Extended Individual addresses, and Extended address ranges. These tables
must be consecutive in memory. The start of each of the latter four tables is implicitly the
end of the preceding table. The end of the Extended range table is given in an End of
Tables register. If the start address of a table equals the start of the next table or the End
Of Tables register, that table is empty.
When the Receive side of a CAN controller has received a complete Identifier, it signals
the Acceptance Filter of this fact. The Acceptance Filter responds to this signal, and reads
the Controller number, the size of the Identifier, and the Identifier itself from the Controller.
It then proceeds to search its RAM to determine whether the message should be received
or ignored.
If fullCAN mode is enabled and the CAN controller signals that the current message
contains a Standard identifier, the Acceptance Filter first searches the table of identifiers
for which reception is to be done in fullCAN mode. Otherwise, or if the AF doesn’t find a
match in the fullCAN table, it searches its individual Identifier table for the size of Identifier
signalled by the CAN controller. If it finds an equal match, the AF signals the CAN
controller to retain the message, and provides it with an ID Index value to store in its
Receive Frame Status register.
If the Acceptance Filter does not find a match in the appropriate individual Identifier table,
it then searches the Identifier Range table for the size of Identifier signalled by the CAN
controller. If the AF finds a match to a range in the table, it similarly signals the CAN
controller to retain the message, and provides it with an ID Index value to store in its
Receive Frame Status register. If the Acceptance Filter does not find a match in either the
individual or Range table for the size of Identifier received, it signals the CAN controller to
discard/ignore the received message.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
294 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.10 Acceptance filter registers
19.10.1 Acceptance Filter Mode Register (AFMR - 0xE003 C000)
Table 278. Acceptance Filter Mode Register (AFMR - address 0xE003 C000) bit description
Bit
Symbol Value
Description
0
AccOff
1
if AccBP is 0, the Acceptance Filter is not operational. All Rx
1
messages on all CAN buses are ignored. Software must set this
bit before modifying the contents of any of the registers described
below, and before modifying the contents of Lookup Table RAM in
any way other than setting or clearing Disable bits in Standard
Identifier entries.
1
AccBP
1
All Rx messages are accepted on enabled CAN controllers. When 0
both this bit and AccOff are 0, the Acceptance filter operates to
screen received CAN Identifiers.
2
eFCAN
0
Software must read all messages for all enabled IDs on all
enabled CAN buses, from the receiving CAN controllers.
1
The Acceptance Filter itself will take care of receiving and storing
messages for selected Standard ID values on selected CAN
buses. See Section 19.12 “Fullcan mode” on page 300.
31:3 -
Reset
Value
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits.
The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
0
NA
If Bits 1:0 in this register are x1 (reset), the registers can be written. If bits1:0 are 00, the
acceptance filter is operational and will allow Rx interrupts if enabled. If bits1:0 are 10, all
Rx messages accepted and will allow Rx interrupts if enabled.
19.10.2 Standard Frame Individual Start Address register (SFF_sa 0xE003 C004)
Table 279. Standard Frame Individual Start Address register (SFF_sa - address
0xE003 C004) bit description
Bit
Symbol Description
Reset
Value
1:0
-
NA
10:2
SFF_sa The start address of the table of individual Standard Identifiers in AF
Lookup RAM. If the table is empty, write the same value in this register
and the SFF_GRP_sa register described below. For compatibility with
possible future devices, please write zeroes in bits 31:11 and 1:0 of this
register. If the eFCAN bit in the AFMR is 1, this value also indicates the
size of the table of Standard IDs which the Acceptance Filter will search
and (if found) automatically store received messages in Acceptance
Filter RAM.
31:11 -
UM10114
User manual
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
295 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.10.3 Standard Frame Group Start Address Register (SFF_GRP_sa 0xE003 C008)
Table 280. Standard Frame Group Start Address register (SFF_GRP_sa - address
0xE003 C008) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
1:0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
11:2
SFF_GRP_sa The start address of the table of grouped Standard Identifiers in AF 0
Lookup RAM. If the table is empty, write the same value in this
register and the EFF_sa register described below. The largest
value that should be written to this register is 0x800, when only the
Standard Individual table is used, and the last word (address
0x7FC) in AF Lookup Table RAM is used.
31:12 -
Reset
Value
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
19.10.4 Extended Frame Start Address Register (EFF_sa - 0xE003 C00C)
Table 281. Extended Frame Start Address register (EFF_sa - address 0xE003 C00C) bit
description
Bit
Symbol Description
Reset
Value
1:0
-
NA
10:2
EFF_sa The start address of the table of individual Extended Identifiers in AF
0
Lookup RAM. If the table is empty, write the same value in this register
and the EFF_GRP_sa register described below. The largest value that
should be written to this register is 0x800, when both Extended Tables
are empty and the last word (address 0x7FC) in AF Lookup Table RAM is
used.
31:11 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
19.10.5 Extended Frame Group Start Address Register (EFF_GRP_sa 0xE003 C010)
Table 282. Extended Frame Group Start Address register (EFF_GRP_sa - address
0xE003 C010) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
Value
1:0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
11:2
Eff_GRP_sa The start address of the table of grouped Extended Identifiers in AF
Lookup RAM. If the table is empty, write the same value in this
register and the ENDofTable register described below. The largest
value that should be written to this register is 0x800, when this table
is empty and the last word (address 0x7FC) in AF Lookup Table
RAM is used.
31:12 -
UM10114
User manual
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
0
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
296 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.10.6 End of AF Tables register (ENDofTable - 0xE003 C014)
Table 283. End of AF Tables register (ENDofTable - address 0xE003 C014) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
Value
1:0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
11:2
EndofTable The address above the last active address in the last active AF table. 0
If the eFCAN bit in the AFMR is 0, the largest value that should be
written to this register is 0x800, which allows the last word (address
0x7FC) in AF Lookup Table RAM to be used.
If the eFCAN bit in the AFMR is 1, this value marks the start of the
area of Acceptance Filter RAM, into which the Acceptance Filter will
automatically receive messages for selected IDs on selected CAN
buses. In this case, the maximum value that should be written to this
register is 0x800 minus 6 times the value in SFF_sa. This allows 12
bytes of message storage between this address and the end of
Acceptance Filter RAM, for each Standard ID that is specified
between the start of Acceptance Filter RAM, and the next active AF
table.
31:12 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
19.10.7 LUT Error Address register (LUTerrAd - 0xE003 C018)
Table 284. LUT Error Address register (LUTerrAd - address 0xE003 C018) bit description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
Value
1:0
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
10:2
LUTerrAd It the LUT Error bit (below) is 1, this read-only field contains the address 0
in AF Lookup Table RAM, at which the Acceptance Filter encountered
an error in the content of the tables.
31:11 -
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
19.10.8 LUT Error register (LUTerr - 0xE003 C01C)
Table 285. LUT Error register (LUTerr - address 0xE003 C01C) bit description
UM10114
User manual
Bit
Symbol Description
0
LUTerr
This read-only bit is set to 1 if the Acceptance Filter encounters an error 0
in the content of the tables in AF RAM. It is cleared when software reads
the LUTerrAd register. This condition is ORed with the “other CAN”
interrupts from the CAN controllers, to produce the request for a VIC
interrupt channel.
31:1
-
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
Reset
Value
NA
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
297 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.10.9 Global FullCANInterrupt Enable register (FCANIE - 0xE003 C020)
A write access to the Global FullCAN Interrupt Enable register is only possible when the
Acceptance Filter is in the off mode.
Table 286. Global FullCAN Enable register (FCANIE - address 0xE003 C020) bit description
Bit
Symbol Description
Reset
Value
0
FCANIE Global FullCAN Interrupt Enable. When 1, this interrupt is enabled.
0
31:1
-
NA
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The
value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
19.10.10 FullCAN Interrupt and Capture registers (FCANIC0 - 0xE003 C024 and
FCANIC1 - 0xE003 C028)
For detailed description on these two registers, see Section 19.12 “Fullcan mode”.
Table 287. FullCAN Interrupt and Capture register 0 (FCANIC0 - address 0xE003 C024) bit
description
Bit
Symbol
Description
Reset
Value
0
IntPnd0
FullCan Interrupt Pending bit 0.
0
...
IntPndx (0") to the Host. In response to this host
should send the same string ("Synchronized"). The auto-baud routine looks at
the received characters to verify synchronization. If synchronization is verified then
"OK" string is sent to the host. Host should respond by sending the crystal
frequency (in kHz) at which the part is running. For example, if the part is running at 10
MHz, the response from the host should be "10000". "OK" string is
sent to the host after receiving the crystal frequency. If synchronization is not verified then
the auto-baud routine waits again for a synchronization character. For auto-baud to work
correctly, the crystal frequency should be greater than or equal to 10 MHz. The on-chip
PLL is not used by the boot code.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
312 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
Once the crystal frequency is received the part is initialized and the ISP command handler
is invoked. For safety reasons an "Unlock" command is required before executing the
commands resulting in flash erase/write operations and the "Go" command. The rest of
the commands can be executed without the unlock command. The Unlock command is
required to be executed once per ISP session. The Unlock command is explained in
Section 21.9 “ISP commands” on page 320.
21.5.3 Communication protocol
All ISP commands should be sent as single ASCII strings. Strings should be terminated
with Carriage Return (CR) and/or Line Feed (LF) control characters. Extra and
characters are ignored. All ISP responses are sent as terminated ASCII
strings. Data is sent and received in UU-encoded format.
21.5.4 ISP command format
"Command Parameter_0 Parameter_1 ... Parameter_n" "Data" (Data only for
Write commands)
21.5.5 ISP response format
"Return_CodeResponse_0Response_1 ...
Response_n" "Data" (Data only for Read commands)
21.5.6 ISP data format
The data stream is in UU-encode format. The UU-encode algorithm converts 3 bytes of
binary data in to 4 bytes of printable ASCII character set. It is more efficient than Hex
format which converts 1 byte of binary data in to 2 bytes of ASCII hex. The sender should
send the check-sum after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The length of any
UU-encoded line should not exceed 61 characters(bytes) i.e. it can hold 45 data bytes.
The receiver should compare it with the check-sum of the received bytes. If the
check-sum matches then the receiver should respond with "OK" to continue
further transmission. If the check-sum does not match the receiver should respond with
"RESEND". In response the sender should retransmit the bytes.
21.5.7 ISP flow control
A software XON/XOFF flow control scheme is used to prevent data loss due to buffer
overrun. When the data arrives rapidly, the ASCII control character DC3 (stop) is sent to
stop the flow of data. Data flow is resumed by sending the ASCII control character DC1
(start). The host should also support the same flow control scheme.
21.5.8 ISP command abort
Commands can be aborted by sending the ASCII control character "ESC". This feature is
not documented as a command under "ISP Commands" section. Once the escape code is
received the ISP command handler waits for a new command.
21.5.9 Interrupts during ISP
The boot block interrupt vectors located in the boot block of the flash are active after any
reset.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
313 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.5.10 Interrupts during IAP
The on-chip flash memory is not accessible during erase/write operations. When the user
application code starts executing the interrupt vectors from the user flash area are active.
The user should either disable interrupts, or ensure that user interrupt vectors are active in
RAM and that the interrupt handlers reside in RAM, before making a flash erase/write IAP
call. The IAP code does not use or disable interrupts.
21.5.11 RAM used by ISP command handler
ISP commands use on-chip RAM from 0x4000 0120 to 0x4000 01FF. The user could use
this area, but the contents may be lost upon reset. Flash programming commands use the
top 32 bytes of on-chip RAM. The stack is located at RAM top 32. The maximum stack
usage is 256 bytes and it grows downwards.
21.5.12 RAM used by IAP command handler
Flash programming commands use the top 32 bytes of on-chip RAM. The maximum stack
usage in the user allocated stack space is 128 bytes and it grows downwards.
21.5.13 RAM used by RealMonitor
The RealMonitor uses on-chip RAM from 0x4000 0040 to 0x4000 011F. he user could use
this area if RealMonitor based debug is not required. The Flash boot loader does not
initialize the stack for RealMonitor.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
314 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.5.14 Boot process flowchart
RESET
INITIALIZE
CRP
ENABLED?
no
ENABLE DEBUG
yes
WATCHDOG
FLAG SET?
B
yes
no
BOOT
EXTERNAL?
yes
CRP3 ENABLED?
yes
no
no
CRP
ENABLED?
Enter ISP
MODE?
(PO.14
LOW?)
yes
CRP3
ENABLED?
no
with external
memory
USER CODE
VALID?
yes
no
no
EXECUTE EXTERNAL
USER CODE
yes
EXECUTE INTERNAL
USER CODE
B
yes
no
RUN AUTO-BAUD
no
AUTO-BAUD
SUCCESSFUL?
yes
RECEIVE CRYSTAL
FREQUENCY
RUN ISP COMMAND
HANDLER
The grey-shaded area is specific to the boot process for LPC22xx parts with external memory. CRP3 is available starting with
boot loader versions 1.68 (see Table 304).
Fig 73. Boot process flowchart
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
315 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.6 Sector numbers
Some IAP and ISP commands operate on "sectors" and specify sector numbers. The
following table indicates the correspondence between sector numbers and memory
addresses for LPC21xx/LPC22xx devices containing 64 kB, 128 kB, or 256 kB of flash
respectively. IAP, ISP, and RealMonitor routines are located in the boot block. The boot
block is present at the top of each flash memory. Because of the boot block, only 120 kB
of the 128 kB, and 248 kB of the 256 kB flash devices are available for user code. ISP and
IAP commands do not allow write/erase/go operation on the boot block.
Table 300. Flash sectors
Sector
Sector
Address
Number Size [kB] Range
64 kB
flash
Sector
Address Range
Size [kB]
128 kB
flash
Sector
Address Range
Size [kB]
256 kB
flash
0
8
0x0000 0000 0x0000 1FFF
8
0x0000 0000 - 0x0000 1FFF
8
0x0000 0000 - 0x0000 1FFF
1
8
0x0000 2000 0x0000 3FFF
8
0x0000 2000 - 0x0000 3FFF
8
0x0000 2000 - 0x0000 3FFF
2
8
0x0000 4000 0x0000 5FFF
8
0x0000 4000 - 0x0000 5FFF
8
0x0000 4000 - 0x0000 5FFF
3
8
0x0000 6000 0x0000 7FFF
8
0x0000 6000 - 0x0000 7FFF
8
0x0000 6000 - 0x0000 7FFF
4
8
0x0000 8000 0x0000 9FFF
8
0x0000 8000 - 0x0000 9FFF
8
0x0000 8000 - 0x0000 9FFF
5
8
0x0000 A000 0x0000 BFFF
8
0x0000 A000 - 0x0000 BFFF 8
0x0000 A000 - 0x0000 BFFF
6
8
0x0000 C000 0x0000 DFFF
8
0x0000 C000 - 0x0000 DFFF 8
0x0000 C000 - 0x0000 DFFF
7
8
0x0000 E000 0x0000 FFFF
8
0x0000 E000 - 0x0000 FFFF
8
0x0000 E000 - 0x0000 FFFF
8
8
0x0001 0000 0x0001 1FFF
8
0x0001 0000 - 0x0001 1FFF
64
0x0001 0000 - 0x0001 FFFF
9
8
0x0001 2000 - 0x0001 3FFF
64
0x0002 0000 - 0x0002 FFFF
10
(0x0A)
8
0x0001 4000 - 0x0001 5FFF
8
0x0003 0000 - 0x0003 1FFF
11
(0x0B)
8
0x0001 6000 - 0x0001 7FFF
8
0x0003 2000 - 0x0003 3FFF
12
(0x0C)
8
0x0001 8000 - 0x0001 9FFF
8
0x0003 4000 - 0x0003 5FFF
13
(0x0D)
8
0x0001 A000 - 0x0001 BFFF 8
0x0003 6000 - 0x0003 7FFF
14
(0x0E)
8
0x0001 C000 - 0x0001 DFFF 8
0x0003 8000 - 0x0003 9FFF
15
(0x0F)
8
0x0001 E000 - 0x0001 FFFF
8
0x0003 A000 - 0x0003 BFFF
16
(0x10)
-
-
8
0x0003 C000 - 0x0003 DFFF
17
(0x11)
-
-
8
0x0003 E000 - 0x0003 FFFF
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
316 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.7 Flash content protection mechanism
The LPC21xx/LPC22xx is equipped with the Error Correction Code (ECC) capable flash
memory. The purpose of an error correction module is twofold. Firstly, it decodes data
words read from the memory into output data words. Secondly, it encodes data words to
be written to the memory. The error correction capability consists of single bit error
correction with Hamming code.
The operation of ECC is transparent to the running application. The ECC content itself is
stored in a flash memory not accessible by user’s code to either read from it or write into it
on its own. A byte of ECC corresponds to every consecutive 128 bits of the user
accessible Flash. Consequently, Flash bytes from 0x0000 0000 to 0x0000 000F are
protected by the first ECC byte, Flash bytes from 0x0000 0010 to 0x0000 001F are
protected by the second ECC byte, etc.
Whenever the CPU requests a read from Flash, both 128 bits of raw data containing the
specified memory location and the matching ECC byte are evaluated. If the ECC
mechanism detects a single error in the fetched data, a correction will be applied before
data are provided to the CPU. When a write request into the user’s Flash is made, write of
user specified content is accompanied by a matching ECC value calculated and stored in
the ECC memory.
When a sector of user’s Flash memory is erased, corresponding ECC bytes are also
erased. Once an ECC byte is written, it can not be updated unless it is erased first.
Therefore, for the implemented ECC mechanism to perform properly, data must be written
into the flash memory in groups of 16 bytes (or multiples of 16), aligned as described
above.
21.8 Code Read Protection (CRP)
Code Read Protection is a mechanism that allows user to enable different levels of
security in the system so that access to the on-chip Flash and use of the ISP can be
restricted. When needed, CRP is invoked by programming a specific pattern in Flash
location at 0x0000 01FC. IAP commands are not affected by the code read protection.
Important: any CRP change becomes effective only after reset.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
317 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
Table 301. Code Read Protection levels
Name Pattern
Description
programmed
in 0x000001FC
CRP1 0x12345678
Access to chip via the JTAG pins is disabled. This mode allows partial
Flash update using the following ISP commands and restrictions:
•
•
•
Write to RAM command can not access RAM below 0x40000200
•
Compare command is disabled
Copy RAM to Flash command can not write to Sector 0
Erase command can erase Sector 0 only when all sectors are
selected for erase
This mode is useful when CRP is required and Flash field updates are
needed but all sectors can not be erased. Since compare command is
disabled in case of partial updates the secondary loader should
implement checksum mechanism to verify the integrity of the Flash.
CRP2 0x87654321
Access to chip via the JTAG pins is disabled. The following ISP
commands are disabled:
•
•
•
•
•
Read Memory
Write to RAM
Go
Copy RAM to Flash
Compare
When CRP2 is enabled the ISP erase command only allows erasure of
all user sectors.
CRP3 0x43218765
Access to chip via the JTAG pins is disabled. ISP entry by pulling P0.14
LOW is disabled if a valid user code is present in Flash sector 0.
This mode effectively disables ISP override using P0.14 pin. It is up to
the user’s application to provide Flash update mechanism using IAP
calls if necessary.
Caution: If CRP3 is selected, no future factory testing can be
performed on the device.
Table 302. Code Read Protection hardware/software interaction
UM10114
User manual
CRP option
User Code
Valid
P0.14 pin at
reset
JTAG enabled enter ISP
mode
partial Flash
update in ISP
mode
No
No
X
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
High
Yes
No
NA
No
Yes
Low
Yes
Yes
Yes
CRP1
Yes
High
No
No
NA
CRP1
Yes
Low
No
Yes
Yes
CRP2
Yes
High
No
No
NA
CRP2
Yes
Low
No
Yes
No
CRP3
Yes
x
No
No
NA
CRP1
No
x
No
Yes
Yes
CRP2
No
x
No
Yes
No
CRP3
No
x
No
Yes
No
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
318 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
In case a CRP mode is enabled and access to the chip is allowed via the ISP, an
unsupported or restricted ISP command will be terminated with return code
CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED.
21.8.1 Boot loader options
The levels of code read protection implemented depend on the boot loader code
version.The following options can be selected by the user in various revisions of the boot
loader code (see Table 303).
Table 303. Code read protection options for different boot loader revisions
Option 1 (CRP1)
Option 2 (CRP2)
Option 3 (CRP 3)
Option 4 (boot loader code
rev. 1.65 only)
JTAG access is blocked.
Supports partial flash
updates.
JTAG access is blocked.
JTAG access is blocked.
JTAG access is blocked.
•
•
•
ISP commands
allowed: Echo; Set
Baud; Erase (except
sector 0, must erase all
to erase sector 0); Blank
Check (fail returns value
0 at location 0); Prepare
Sector; Unlock; Read
Part ID; Read Boot code
version; Write to RAM
(addresses above
0x4000 0200); Copy
RAM to Flash (except
sector 0)
•
ISP commands
allowed: Echo; Set
Baud; Erase (all sectors
only); Blank Check (fail
returns value 0 at
location 0); Prepare
Sector; Unlock; Read
Part ID; Read Boot code
version.
No ISP commands are
allowed when P0.14 is pulled
LOW and a valid user
program is present in flash
sector 0.
ISP commands not
allowed: Write to RAM;
Read Memory; Copy
RAM to Flash; Go;
Compare.
•
ISP commands
allowed: Erase (all
sectors only); Prepare
Sector; Unlock.
•
ISP commands not
allowed: Echo; Set
Baud; Blank Check (fail
returns value 0 at
location 0); Write to
RAM; Read Memory;
Copy RAM to Flash; Go;
Compare; Read Part ID;
Read Boot code version.
ISP commands not
allowed: Write to RAM
below address 0x4000
0200; Read Memory;
Copy RAM to Flash
(write to sector 0); Erase
sector 0; Go; Compare.
Table 304 shows which code read protection options can be selected for any implemented
boot loader revision. Note that parts with boot loader revisions 1.60 do not allow code
read protection.
Table 304. Boot loader revisions
UM10114
User manual
Revision
Applicable to
parts
Pattern programmed @ location 0x1FC:
0x1234 5678
0x8765 4321
0x4321 8765
1.7
/01
option 1
option 2
option 3
1.69
/00; no suffix
option 1
option 2
option 3
1.68
/01
option 1
option 2
option 3
1.65
/00; no suffix
-
option 2
option 4
1.64 to 1.61
/00; no suffix
-
option 2
-
1.6 and lower
/00; no suffix
-
-
-
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
319 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.9 ISP commands
The following commands are accepted by the ISP command handler. Detailed status
codes are supported for each command. The command handler sends the return code
INVALID_COMMAND when an undefined command is received. Commands and return
codes are in ASCII format.
CMD_SUCCESS is sent by ISP command handler only when received ISP command has
been completely executed and the new ISP command can be given by the host.
Exceptions from this rule are "Set Baud Rate", "Write to RAM", "Read Memory", and "Go"
commands.
Table 305. ISP command summary
ISP Command
Usage
Described in
Unlock
U
Table 306
Set Baud Rate
B
Table 307
Echo
A
Table 309
Write to RAM
W
Table 310
Read Memory
R
Table 311
Prepare sector(s) for
write operation
P
Table 312
Copy RAM to Flash
C Table 313
Go
G
Table 314
Erase sector(s)
E
Table 315
Blank check sector(s)
I
Table 316
Read Part ID
J
Table 317
Read Boot code version
K
Table 319
Compare
M
Table 320
21.9.1 Unlock
Table 306. ISP Unlock command
Command
U
Input
Unlock code: 2313010
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
INVALID_CODE |
PARAM_ERROR
UM10114
User manual
Description
This command is used to unlock flash Write, Erase, and Go commands.
Example
"U 23130" unlocks the flash Write/Erase & Go commands.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
320 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.9.2 Set Baud Rate
Table 307. ISP Set Baud Rate command
Command
B
Input
Baud Rate: 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 | 230400
Stop bit: 1 | 2
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
INVALID_BAUD_RATE |
INVALID_STOP_BIT |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
This command is used to change the baud rate. The new baud rate is effective
after the command handler sends the CMD_SUCCESS return code.
Example
"B 57600 1" sets the serial port to baud rate 57600 bps and 1 stop bit.
Table 308. Correlation between possible ISP baudrates and external crystal frequency (in
MHz)
ISP Baudrate .vs.
External Crystal Frequency
9600
19200
38400
+
10.0000
+
+
11.0592
+
+
12.2880
+
+
+
14.7456
+
+
+
15.3600
+
18.4320
+
+
19.6608
+
+
+
24.5760
+
+
+
25.0000
+
+
+
57600
115200
230400
+
+
+
+
+
21.9.3 Echo
Table 309. ISP Echo command
Command
A
Input
Setting: ON = 1 | OFF = 0
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
The default setting for echo command is ON. When ON the ISP command handler
sends the received serial data back to the host.
Example
"A 0" turns echo off.
21.9.4 Write to RAM
The host should send the data only after receiving the CMD_SUCCESS return code. The
host should send the check-sum after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The checksum is
generated by adding raw data (before UU-encoding) bytes and is reset after transmitting
20 UU-encoded lines. The length of any UU-encoded line should not exceed 61
characters(bytes) i.e. it can hold 45 data bytes. When the data fits in less then 20
UU-encoded lines then the check-sum should be of the actual number of bytes sent. The
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
321 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
ISP command handler compares it with the check-sum of the received bytes. If the
check-sum matches, the ISP command handler responds with "OK" to
continue further transmission. If the check-sum does not match, the ISP command
handler responds with "RESEND". In response the host should retransmit the
bytes.
Table 310. ISP Write to RAM command
Command
W
Input
Start Address: RAM address where data bytes are to be written. This address
should be a word boundary.
Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be written. Count should be a multiple of 4
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
ADDR_ERROR (Address not on word boundary) |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not multiple of 4) |
PARAM_ERROR |
CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED
Description
This command is used to download data to RAM. Data should be in UU-encoded
format. This command is blocked when code read protection is enabled.
Example
"W 1073742336 4" writes 4 bytes of data to address 0x4000 0200.
21.9.5 Read memory
The data stream is followed by the command success return code. The check-sum is sent
after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The checksum is generated by adding raw data
(before UU-encoding) bytes and is reset after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The
length of any UU-encoded line should not exceed 61 characters(bytes) i.e. it can hold 45
data bytes. When the data fits in less then 20 UU-encoded lines then the check-sum is of
actual number of bytes sent. The host should compare it with the checksum of the
received bytes. If the check-sum matches then the host should respond with
"OK" to continue further transmission. If the check-sum does not match then
the host should respond with "RESEND". In response the ISP command
handler sends the data again.
Table 311. ISP Read memory command
Command
R
Input
Start Address: Address from where data bytes are to be read. This address
should be a word boundary.
Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be read. Count should be a multiple of 4.
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS followed by |
ADDR_ERROR (Address not on word boundary) |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not a multiple of 4) |
PARAM_ERROR |
CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED
UM10114
User manual
Description
This command is used to read data from RAM or Flash memory. This command is
blocked when code read protection is enabled.
Example
"R 1073741824 4" reads 4 bytes of data from address 0x4000 0000.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
322 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.9.6 Prepare sector(s) for write operation
This command makes flash write/erase operation a two step process.
Table 312. ISP Prepare sector(s) for write operation command
Command
P
Input
Start Sector Number
End Sector Number: Should be greater than or equal to start sector number.
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
BUSY |
INVALID_SECTOR |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
This command must be executed before executing "Copy RAM to Flash" or
"Erase Sector(s)" command. Successful execution of the "Copy RAM to Flash" or
"Erase Sector(s)" command causes relevant sectors to be protected again. The
boot block can not be prepared by this command. To prepare a single sector use
the same "Start" and "End" sector numbers.
Example
"P 0 0" prepares the flash sector 0.
21.9.7 Copy RAM to Flash
Table 313. ISP Copy command
Command
C
Input
Flash Address(DST): Destination Flash address where data bytes are to be
written. The destination address should be a 256 byte boundary.
RAM Address(SRC): Source RAM address from where data bytes are to be read.
Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be written. Should be 256 | 512 | 1024 |
4096.
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS |
SRC_ADDR_ERROR (Address not on word boundary) |
DST_ADDR_ERROR (Address not on correct boundary) |
SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096) |
SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR WRITE_OPERATION |
BUSY |
CMD_LOCKED |
PARAM_ERROR |
CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED
UM10114
User manual
Description
This command is used to program the flash memory. The "Prepare Sector(s) for
Write Operation" command should precede this command. The affected sectors are
automatically protected again once the copy command is successfully executed.
The boot block cannot be written by this command. This command is blocked when
code read protection is enabled.
Example
"C 0 1073774592 512" copies 512 bytes from the RAM address
0x4000 8000 to the flash address 0.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
323 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.9.8 Go
Table 314. ISP Go command
Command
G
Input
Address: Flash or RAM address from which the code execution is to be started.
This address should be on a word boundary.
Mode: T (Execute program in Thumb Mode) | A (Execute program in ARM mode).
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS |
ADDR_ERROR |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
CMD_LOCKED |
PARAM_ERROR |
CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED
Description
This command is used to execute a program residing in RAM or Flash memory. It
may not be possible to return to the ISP command handler once this command is
successfully executed. This command is blocked when code read protection is
enabled.
Example
"G 0 A" branches to address 0x0000 0000 in ARM mode.
21.9.9 Erase sector(s)
Table 315. ISP Erase sector command
Command
E
Input
Start Sector Number
End Sector Number: Should be greater than or equal to start sector number.
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS |
BUSY |
INVALID_SECTOR |
SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_WRITE_OPERATION |
CMD_LOCKED |
PARAM_ERROR |
CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED
UM10114
User manual
Description
This command is used to erase one or more sector(s) of on-chip Flash memory.
The boot block can not be erased using this command. This command only allows
erasure of all user sectors when the code read protection is enabled.
Example
"E 2 3" erases the flash sectors 2 and 3.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
324 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.9.10 Blank check sector(s)
Table 316. ISP Blank check sector command
Command
I
Input
Start Sector Number:
End Sector Number: Should be greater than or equal to start sector number.
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS |
SECTOR_NOT_BLANK (followed by
) |
INVALID_SECTOR |
PARAM_ERROR |
Description
This command is used to blank check one or more sectors of on-chip Flash
memory.
Blank check on sector 0 always fails as first 64 bytes are re-mapped to flash
boot block.
Example
"I 2 3" blank checks the flash sectors 2 and 3.
21.9.11 Read Part Identification number
Table 317. ISP Read Part Identification number command
Command
J
Input
None.
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS followed by part identification number in ASCII (see Table 318).
Description
This command is used to read the part identification number.
Table 318. LPC21xx/22xx Part identification numbers
Device
ASCII/dec coding
Hex coding
LPC2109
33685249
0x0201 FF01
LPC2119
33685266
0x0201 FF12
LPC2129
33685267
0x0201 FF13
LPC2114
16908050
0x0101 FF12
LPC2124
16908051
0x0101 FF13
LPC2194
50462483
0x0301 FF13
LPC2292
67239699
0x0401 FF13
LPC2294
84016915
0x0501 FF13
LPC2214/01
100794131
0x0601 FF13
LPC2212/01
67239698
0x0401 FF12
In addition to the part identification numbers, the user can determine the device revision
by reading the register contents at address 0x0003E070. The register value is encoded as
follows: 0x0 corresponds to revision '-', 0x01 corresponds to revision A, 0x02 corresponds
to revision B,..., 0x1A corresponds to revision Z. This feature Is implemented starting with
device revision C, so the register read will yield a value of 0x03 (for revision C) or larger.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
325 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.9.12 Read Boot code version number
Table 319. ISP Read Boot code version number command
Command
K
Input
None
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS followed by 2 bytes of boot code version number in ASCII format.
It is to be interpreted as ..
Description
This command is used to read the boot code version number.
21.9.13 Compare
Table 320. ISP Compare command
Command
M
Input
Address1 (DST): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared.
This address should be a word boundary.
Address2 (SRC): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared.
This address should be a word boundary.
Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be compared; should be a multiple of 4.
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | (Source and destination data are equal)
COMPARE_ERROR | (Followed by the offset of first mismatch)
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not a multiple of 4) |
ADDR_ERROR |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
PARAM_ERROR |
Description
This command is used to compare the memory contents at two locations.
Compare result may not be correct when source or destination address
contains any of the first 64 bytes starting from address zero. First 64 bytes
are re-mapped to flash boot sector
Example
"M 8192 1073741824 4" compares 4 bytes from the RAM address
0x4000 0000 to the 4 bytes from the flash address 0x2000.
21.9.14 ISP Return codes
Table 321. ISP Return codes Summary
UM10114
User manual
Return Mnemonic
Code
Description
0
CMD_SUCCESS
Command is executed successfully. Sent by ISP
handler only when command given by the host has
been completely and successfully executed.
1
INVALID_COMMAND
Invalid command.
2
SRC_ADDR_ERROR
Source address is not on word boundary.
3
DST_ADDR_ERROR
Destination address is not on a correct boundary.
4
SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Source address is not mapped in the memory map.
Count value is taken in to consideration where
applicable.
5
DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Destination address is not mapped in the memory
map. Count value is taken in to consideration
where applicable.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
326 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
Table 321. ISP Return codes Summary
Return Mnemonic
Code
Description
6
COUNT_ERROR
Byte count is not multiple of 4 or is not a permitted
value.
7
INVALID_SECTOR
Sector number is invalid or end sector number is
greater than start sector number.
8
SECTOR_NOT_BLANK
Sector is not blank.
9
SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_ Command to prepare sector for write operation
WRITE_OPERATION
was not executed.
10
COMPARE_ERROR
Source and destination data not equal.
11
BUSY
Flash programming hardware interface is busy.
12
PARAM_ERROR
Insufficient number of parameters or invalid
parameter.
13
ADDR_ERROR
Address is not on word boundary.
14
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Address is not mapped in the memory map. Count
value is taken in to consideration where applicable.
15
CMD_LOCKED
Command is locked.
16
INVALID_CODE
Unlock code is invalid.
17
INVALID_BAUD_RATE
Invalid baud rate setting.
18
INVALID_STOP_BIT
Invalid stop bit setting.
19
CODE_READ_PROTECTION_
ENABLED
Code read protection enabled.
21.10 IAP commands
For in application programming the IAP routine should be called with a word pointer in
register r0 pointing to memory (RAM) containing command code and parameters. Result
of the IAP command is returned in the result table pointed to by register r1. The user can
reuse the command table for result by passing the same pointer in registers r0 and r1. The
parameter table should be big enough to hold all the results in case if number of results
are more than number of parameters. Parameter passing is illustrated in the Figure 74.
The number of parameters and results vary according to the IAP command. The
maximum number of parameters is 5, passed to the "Copy RAM to FLASH" command.
The maximum number of results is 2, returned by the "Blankcheck sector(s)" command.
The command handler sends the status code INVALID_COMMAND when an undefined
command is received. The IAP routine resides at 0x7FFF FFF0 location and it is thumb
code.
The IAP function could be called in the following way using C.
Define the IAP location entry point. Since the 0th bit of the IAP location is set there will be
a change to Thumb instruction set when the program counter branches to this address.
#define IAP_LOCATION 0x7ffffff1
Define data structure or pointers to pass IAP command table and result table to the IAP
function:
unsigned long command[5];
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
327 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
unsigned long result[3];
or
unsigned long * command;
unsigned long * result;
command=(unsigned long *) 0x……
result= (unsigned long *) 0x……
Define pointer to function type, which takes two parameters and returns void. Note the IAP
returns the result with the base address of the table residing in R1.
typedef void (*IAP)(unsigned int [],unsigned int[]);
IAP iap_entry;
Setting function pointer:
iap_entry=(IAP) IAP_LOCATION;
Whenever you wish to call IAP you could use the following statement.
iap_entry (command, result);
The IAP call could be simplified further by using the symbol definition file feature
supported by ARM Linker in ADS (ARM Developer Suite). You could also call the IAP
routine using assembly code.
The following symbol definitions can be used to link IAP routine and user application:
## ARM Linker, ADS1.2 [Build 826]: Last Updated: Wed May 08 16:12:23 2002
0x7fffff90 T rm_init_entry
0x7fffffa0 A rm_undef_handler
0x7fffffb0 A rm_prefetchabort_handler
0x7fffffc0 A rm_dataabort_handler
0x7fffffd0 A rm_irqhandler
0x7fffffe0 A rm_irqhandler2
0x7ffffff0 T iap_entry
As per the ARM specification (The ARM Thumb Procedure Call Standard SWS ESPC
0002 A-05) up to 4 parameters can be passed in the r0, r1, r2 and r3 registers
respectively. Additional parameters are passed on the stack. Up to 4 parameters can be
returned in the r0, r1, r2 and r3 registers respectively. Additional parameters are returned
indirectly via memory. Some of the IAP calls require more than 4 parameters. If the ARM
suggested scheme is used for the parameter passing/returning then it might create
problems due to difference in the C compiler implementation from different vendors. The
suggested parameter passing scheme reduces such risk.
The flash memory is not accessible during a write or erase operation. IAP commands,
which results in a flash write/erase operation, use 32 bytes of space in the top portion of
the on-chip RAM for execution. The user program should not use this space if IAP flash
programming is permitted in the application.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
328 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
Table 322. IAP command summary
IAP Command
Command Code
Described in
Prepare sector(s) for write operation
5010
Table 323
Copy RAM to Flash
5110
Table 324
Erase sector(s)
5210
Table 325
Blank check sector(s)
5310
Table 326
Read Part ID
5410
Table 327
Read Boot code version
5510
Table 328
Compare
5610
Table 329
COMMAND CODE
PARAMETER 1
command
parameter table
PARAMETER 2
ARM REGISTER r0
PARAMETER n
ARM REGISTER r1
STATUS CODE
RESULT 1
command
result table
RESULT 2
RESULT n
Fig 74. IAP parameter passing
21.10.1 Prepare sector(s) for write operation
This command makes flash write/erase operation a two step process.
Table 323. IAP Prepare sector(s) for write operation command
Command
Prepare sector(s) for write operation
Input
Command code: 50
Param0: Start Sector Number
Param1: End Sector Number (should be greater than or equal to start sector
number).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
329 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
Table 323. IAP Prepare sector(s) for write operation command
Command
Prepare sector(s) for write operation
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
BUSY |
INVALID_SECTOR
Result
None
Description
This command must be executed before executing "Copy RAM to Flash" or
"Erase Sector(s)" command. Successful execution of the "Copy RAM to Flash" or
"Erase Sector(s)" command causes relevant sectors to be protected again. The
boot sector can not be prepared by this command. To prepare a single sector use
the same "Start" and "End" sector numbers.
21.10.2 Copy RAM to Flash
Table 324. IAP Copy RAM to Flash command
Command
Copy RAM to Flash
Input
Command code: 51
Param0(DST): Destination Flash address where data bytes are to be written. This
address should be a 256 byte boundary.
Param1(SRC): Source RAM address from which data bytes are to be read. This
address should be a word boundary.
Param2: Number of bytes to be written. Should be 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096.
Param3: System Clock Frequency (CCLK) in kHz.
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
SRC_ADDR_ERROR (Address not a word boundary) |
DST_ADDR_ERROR (Address not on correct boundary) |
SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096) |
SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_WRITE_OPERATION |
BUSY |
UM10114
User manual
Result
None
Description
This command is used to program the flash memory. The affected sectors should
be prepared first by calling "Prepare Sector for Write Operation" command. The
affected sectors are automatically protected again once the copy command is
successfully executed. The boot sector can not be written by this command.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
330 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.10.3 Erase sector(s)
Table 325. IAP Erase sector(s) command
Command
Erase Sector(s)
Input
Command code: 52
Param0: Start Sector Number
Param1: End Sector Number (should be greater than or equal to start sector
number).
Param2: System Clock Frequency (CCLK) in kHz.
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
BUSY |
SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_WRITE_OPERATION |
INVALID_SECTOR
Result
None
Description
This command is used to erase a sector or multiple sectors of on-chip Flash
memory. The boot sector can not be erased by this command. To erase a single
sector use the same "Start" and "End" sector numbers.
21.10.4 Blank check sector(s)
Table 326. IAP Blank check sector(s) command
Command
Blank check sector(s)
Input
Command code: 53
Param0: Start Sector Number
Param1: End Sector Number (should be greater than or equal to start sector
number).
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
BUSY |
SECTOR_NOT_BLANK |
INVALID_SECTOR
Result
Result0: Offset of the first non blank word location if the Status Code is
SECTOR_NOT_BLANK.
Result1: Contents of non blank word location.
Description
This command is used to blank check a sector or multiple sectors of on-chip Flash
memory. To blank check a single sector use the same "Start" and "End" sector
numbers.
21.10.5 Read Part Identification number
Table 327. IAP Read Part Identification command
Command
Read part identification number
Input
Command code: 54
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
Result
Result0: Part Identification Number (see Table 318 “LPC21xx/22xx Part
identification numbers” on page 325 for details)
Description
This command is used to read the part identification number.
Parameters: None
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
331 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.10.6 Read Boot code version number
Table 328. IAP Read Boot code version number command
Command
Read boot code version number
Input
Command code: 55
Parameters: None
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
Result
Result0: 2 bytes of boot code version number in ASCII format. It is to be
interpreted as .
Description
This command is used to read the boot code version number.
21.10.7 Compare
Table 329. IAP Compare command
Command
Compare
Input
Command code: 56
Param0(DST): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared. This
address should be a word boundary.
Param1(SRC): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared. This
address should be a word boundary.
Param2: Number of bytes to be compared; should be a multiple of 4.
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
COMPARE_ERROR |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not a multiple of 4) |
ADDR_ERROR |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Result
Result0: Offset of the first mismatch if the Status Code is COMPARE_ERROR.
Description
This command is used to compare the memory contents at two locations.
The result may not be correct when the source or destination includes any
of the first 64 bytes starting from address zero. The first 64 bytes can be
re-mapped to RAM.
21.10.8 IAP Status codes
Table 330. IAP Status codes Summary
UM10114
User manual
Status Mnemonic
Code
Description
0
Command is executed successfully.
CMD_SUCCESS
1
INVALID_COMMAND
Invalid command.
2
SRC_ADDR_ERROR
Source address is not on a word boundary.
3
DST_ADDR_ERROR
Destination address is not on a correct boundary.
4
SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Source address is not mapped in the memory map.
Count value is taken in to consideration where
applicable.
5
DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Destination address is not mapped in the memory
map. Count value is taken in to consideration where
applicable.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
332 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
Table 330. IAP Status codes Summary
Status Mnemonic
Code
Description
6
COUNT_ERROR
Byte count is not multiple of 4 or is not a permitted
value.
7
INVALID_SECTOR
Sector number is invalid.
8
SECTOR_NOT_BLANK
Sector is not blank.
9
SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_
FOR_WRITE_OPERATION
Command to prepare sector for write operation was
not executed.
10
COMPARE_ERROR
Source and destination data is not same.
11
BUSY
Flash programming hardware interface is busy.
21.11 JTAG Flash programming interface
Debug tools can write parts of the flash image to the RAM and then execute the IAP call
"Copy RAM to Flash" repeatedly with proper offset.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
333 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
LPC2210/20/90
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
22.1 How to read this chapter
The on-chip serial boot loader controls the boot process for flashless LPC21xx/LPC22xx
parts. Read this chapter for flashless parts
• LPC2210, LPC2210/01, LPC2220
• LPC2290, LPC2290/01
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
22.2 Description
The boot loader is designed as a tool that enables the user to load system specific
application for further programming of in system available off-chip Flash and/or RAM
resources. The boot loader itself does not contain any external memory programming
algorithms. The boot loader implemented in flashless LPC21xx/LPC22xx supports a
limited set of commands dedicated to code download and its execution from on-chip RAM
only. UART0 is the sole serial channel the boot loader can use for data download.
Although a fractional divider is available in the UART0, it is not used by the on-chip serial
boot loader.
The serial boot loader code is executed every time the part is powered on or reset occurs.
The loader executes the initial portion of the ISP command handler and pin P0.14 is
sampled in software. Assuming that a proper signal is present on XTAL1 pin when the
rising edge on RESET pin is generated, it may take up to 3 ms before P0.14 is sampled
and the decision on whether to continue with user code or ISP handler is made.
If there is no request for the ISP command handler execution (P0.14 was HIGH after a
reset), the external memory bank 0 configuration register will be programmed with the
requested boot memory data width (8, 16 or 32 bit wide, based on BOOT pins at reset,
see Section 8.6.5). The interrupt vectors will be mapped from the external memory bank
0, and code residing in the external boot memory bank 0 will be executed.
A LOW level after reset at the P0.14 pin is considered as the external hardware request to
start the ISP command handler.
If P0.14 is sampled LOW and the watchdog overflow flag is not set, the part will continue
with executing ISP handler code, which starts with the auto-bauding procedure.
If P0.14 is sampled LOW and the watchdog overflow flag is set, the external hardware
request to start the ISP command handler is ignored, and external code is executed as in
case when P0.14 is HIGH after reset.
Pin P0.14 that is used as hardware request for ISP requires special attention. Since P0.14
is in high impedance mode after reset, it is important that the user provides external
hardware (a pull-up resistor or other device) to put the pin in a defined state. Otherwise
unintended entry into ISP mode may occur.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
334 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
The boot loader flow-chart is shown in Figure 76.
22.3 Memory map after reset
The boot loader resides in an on-chip ROM sector of 8 kB in size. After any reset this
entire boot sector is mapped and is also visible in the memory region starting from the
address 0x7FFF E000. The serial boot loader is designed to run from this memory area
and it uses parts of the on-chip RAM. The RAM usage is described later in this chapter. In
addition to the above mentioned remapping, the bottom 64 bytes of the ROM boot sector
are also visible in the memory region starting from the address 0x0000 0000, i.e. the
interrupt vectors of the part are mapped to those from the ROM boot sector.
Consequently, the reset vector contains a jump instruction to the entry point of the serial
boot loader software.
However, if the ISP handler was not invoked by P0.14, the interrupt vectors residing in the
boot sector of the off-chip memory (bank 0) will become active and the bottom 64 bytes of
the external boot sector will become visible in the memory region starting from the
address 0x0000 0000.
0x7FFF FFFF
2.0 GB
8 kB BOOT BLOCK
2.0 GB - 8 kB
(BOOT BLOCK INTERRUPT VECTORS)
0x7FFF E000
0x0001 FFFF
ACTIVE INTERRUPT VECTORS
FROM BOOT BLOCK
0.0 GB
0x0000 0000
Fig 75. Map of the microcontroller’s memory after reset
If ISP handler was requested via P0.14, the auto-baud routine synchronizes with the host
via serial port 0. The host should send a synchronization character(’?’) and wait for a
response. The host side serial port settings should be 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity.
The auto-baud routine measures the bit time of the received synchronization character in
terms of its own frequency and programs the baud rate generator of the serial port. It also
sends an ASCII string ("Synchronized") to the host. In response to this the host
should send the received string ("Synchronized"). The auto-baud routine looks
at the received characters to verify synchronization. If synchronization is verified then
"OK" string is sent to the host. The host should respond by sending the crystal
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
335 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
frequency (in kHz) at which the part is running. For example if the part is running at
10 MHz a valid response from the host should be "10000". "OK"
string is sent to the host after receiving the crystal frequency. If synchronization is not
verified then the auto-baud routine waits again for a synchronization character. For
auto-baud to work correctly, the crystal frequency should be greater than or equal to
10 MHz. The on-chip PLL is not used by the boot code.
Once the crystal frequency is received the part is initialized and the ISP command handler
is invoked. For safety reasons an "Unlock" command is required before executing the
"Go" command. The rest of the commands can be executed without the unlock command.
The "Unlock" command is required to be executed once per ISP session. Unlock
command is explained in the "ISP Commands" section.
22.4 Communication protocol
All ISP commands should be sent as single ASCII strings. Strings should be terminated
with Carriage Return (CR) and/or Line Feed (LF) control characters. Extra and
characters are ignored. All ISP responses are sent as terminated ASCII
strings. Data is sent and received in UU-encoded format.
22.5 ISP command format
"Command Parameter_0 Parameter_1 ... Parameter_n" "Data" (Data only for
Write commands).
22.6 ISP response format
"Return_CodeResponse_0Response_1 ...
Response_n" "Data" (Data only for Read commands).
22.7 ISP data format
The data stream is in UU-encode format. The UU-encode algorithm converts 3 bytes of
binary data in to 4 bytes of printable ASCII character set. It is more efficient than Hex
format, which converts 1 byte of binary data in to 2 bytes of ASCII hex. The sender should
send the check-sum after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The length of any
UU-encoded line should not exceed 61 characters (bytes)) i.e. it can hold 45 data bytes.
The receiver should compare it with the check-sum of the received bytes. If the
check-sum matches then the receiver should respond with "OK" to continue
further transmission. If the check-sum does not match the receiver should respond with
"RESEND". In response the sender should retransmit the bytes.
A description of UU-encode is available at wotsit.org.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
336 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
22.8 ISP flow control
A software XON/XOFF flow control scheme is used to prevent data loss due to buffer
overrun. When the data arrives rapidly, the ASCII control character DC3 (stop) is sent to
stop the flow of data. Data flow is resumed by sending the ASCII control character DC1
(start). The host should also support the same flow control scheme.
22.9 ISP command abort
Commands can be aborted by sending the ASCII control character "ESC". This feature is
not documented as a command under "ISP Commands" section. Once the escape code is
received the ISP command handler waits for a new command.
22.10 Interrupts during ISP
The boot block interrupt vectors located in the ROM boot sector are active after any reset.
For details on mapping interrupt vectors see Table 20.
22.11 Interrupts during IAP
IAP calls can be interrupted and an adequate interrupt service routine can be executed if
interrupts are enabled. For details on how the address for interrupt service routine will be
determined see Table 20. The IAP code itself does not use or disable interrupts.
22.12 RAM used by ISP command handler
ISP commands use on-chip RAM from 0x4000 0120 to 0x4000 01FF. The user could use
this area, but the contents may be lost upon reset. The ROM boot loader also uses the top
32 bytes of on-chip RAM. The stack is located at RAM top - 32. The maximum stack
usage is 256 bytes and it grows downwards.
22.13 RAM used by IAP command handler
IAP commands use top 32 bytes of on-chip RAM. The maximum stack usage in the user
allocated stack space is 128 bytes and it grows downwards.
22.14 RAM used by RealMonitor
The RealMonitor uses on-chip RAM from 0x4000 0040 to 0x4000 011F. The user could
use this area if RealMonitor based debug is not required. The serial boot loader does not
initialize the stack for the RealMonitor.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
337 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
22.15 Boot process flowchart
RESET
INITIALIZE
WATCHDOG
FLAG SET?
Yes
No
EXECUTE EXTERNAL
USER CODE
ENTER ISP
MODE?
No
(PO.14 LOW?)
Yes
RUN AUTO-BAUD
No
AUTO-BAUD
SUCCESSFUL?
Yes
RECEIVE CRYSTAL
FREQUENCY
Fig 76. Boot process flowchart
22.16 ISP commands
The following commands are accepted by the ISP command handler. Detailed return
codes are supported for each command. The command handler sends the return code
INVALID_COMMAND when an undefined command is received. Commands and return
codes are in ASCII format.
CMD_SUCCESS is sent by ISP command handler only when received ISP command has
been completely executed and the new ISP command can be given by the host.
Exceptions from this rule are "Set Baud Rate", "Write to RAM", "Read Memory", and "Go"
commands.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
338 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
Table 331. ISP Command Summary
ISP Command
Usage
Described in
Unlock
U
Table 332
Set Baud Rate
B
Table 333
Echo
A
Table 335
Write to RAM
W
Table 336
Read Memory
R
Table 337
Go
G
Table 338
Read Part ID
J
Table 339
Read Boot code version
K
Table 341
Compare
M Table 342
22.16.1 Unlock
Table 332. ISP Unlock command description
Command
U
Input
Unlock code: 23130
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
INVALID_CODE |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
This command is used to unlock Go command.
Example
"U 23130" unlocks the Go command.
22.16.2 Set Baud Rate
Table 333. ISP Set Baud Rate command description
Command
B
Input
Baud Rate: 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 | 230400
Stop bit: 1 | 2
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
INVALID_BAUD_RATE |
INVALID_STOP_BIT |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
This command is used to change the baud rate. The new baud rate is effective
after the command handler sends the CMD_SUCCESS return code.
Example
"B 57600 1" sets the serial port to baud rate 57600 bps and 1 stop bit.
Table 334. Correlation between possible ISP baudrates and external crystal frequency (in
MHz)
UM10114
User manual
ISP Baudrate
.vs.
external crystal frequency
9600
19200
38400
10.0000
+
+
+
11.0592
+
+
12.2880
+
+
+
14.7456
+
+
+
15.3600
+
115200
230400
+
+
+
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
57600
+
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
339 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
Table 334. Correlation between possible ISP baudrates and external crystal frequency (in
MHz)
ISP Baudrate
.vs.
external crystal frequency
9600
19200
38400
18.4320
+
+
19.6608
+
+
+
24.5760
+
+
+
25.0000
+
+
+
57600
115200
230400
+
22.16.3 Echo
Table 335. ISP Echo command description
Command
A
Input
Setting: ON = 1 | OFF = 0
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
The default setting for echo command is ON. When ON the ISP command
handler sends the received serial data back to the host.
Example
"A 0" turns echo off.
22.16.4 Write to RAM
The host should send the data only after receiving the CMD_SUCCESS return code. The
host should send the check-sum after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The checksum is
generated by adding raw data (before UU-encoding) bytes and is reset after transmitting
20 UU-encoded lines. The length of any UU-encoded line should not exceed 61
characters (bytes)) i.e. it can hold 45 data bytes. When the data fits in less then 20
UU-encoded lines then the check-sum should be of actual number of bytes sent. The ISP
command handler compares it with the check-sum of the received bytes. If the check-sum
matches then the ISP command handler responds with "OK" to continue
further transmission. If the check-sum does not match then the ISP command handler
responds with "RESEND". In response the host should retransmit the bytes.
Table 336. ISP Write to RAM command description
UM10114
User manual
Command
W
Input
Start Address: RAM address (on-chip only) where data bytes are to be written.
This address should be a word boundary.
Number of bytes: Number of bytes to be written. Count should be a multiple of 4.
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
ADDR_ERROR (Address not a word boundary) |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not multiple of 4) |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
This command is used to download data to RAM. The data should be in
UU-encoded format.
Example
"W 10737442336 4" writes 4 bytes of data to address 0x4000 0200.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
340 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
22.16.5 Read Memory
The data stream is followed by the command success return code. The check-sum is sent
after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The checksum is generated by adding raw data
(before UU-encoding) bytes and is reset after transmitting 20 UUencoded lines. The
length of any UU-encoded line should not exceed 61 characters (bytes) i.e. it can hold 45
data bytes. When the data fits in less then 20 UU-encoded lines then the check-sum is of
actual number of bytes sent. The host should compare it with the check-sum of the
received bytes. If the check-sum matches then the host should respond with
"OK" to continue further transmission. If the check-sum does not match then
the host should respond with "RESEND". In response the ISP command
handler sends the data again.
Table 337. ISP Read Memory command description
Command
R
Input
Start Address: Address (on or off-chip) where data bytes are to be read. This
address should be a word boundary.
Number of bytes: Number of bytes to be read. Count should be a multiple of 4.
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS (followed by |
ADDR_ERROR (Address not on word boundary) |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not multiple of 4) |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
This command is used to read data from on or off-chip memory.
Example
"R 1073741824 4" reads 4 bytes of data from address 0x4000 0000.
22.16.6 Go
Table 338. ISP Go command description
Command
G
Input
Address: RAM address (on-chip only) from which the code execution is to be
started. This address should be on a word boundary.
Mode: T (Execute program in Thumb Mode) | A (Execute program in ARM Mode)
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
ADDR_ERROR |
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED |
CMD_LOCKED |
PARAM_ERROR
Description
This command is used to execute (call) a program residing in RAM (on-chip only).
It may not be possible to return to ISP command handler once this command is
successfully executed. If executed code has ended with return instruction, ISP
handler will resume with execution.
Example
"G 1073742336 A" branches to address 0x4000 0200 in ARM Mode.
22.16.7 Read Part ID
Table 339. ISP Read Part ID command description
UM10114
User manual
Command
J
Input
None
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
341 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
Table 339. ISP Read Part ID command description
Command
J
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS followed by part identification number in ASCII format.
Description
This command is used to read the part identification number.
Example
"J"
Table 340. LPC22xx Part identification numbers
Device
ASCII/dec coding
Hex coding
LPC2210
50462482
0x0301 FF12
LPC2210/01
50462482
0x0301 FF12
LPC2220 Rev -
50462482
0x0301 FF12
LPC2220 Rev B
50462482
0x0301 FF12
LPC2220 Rev C
50262514
0x0301 FF32
LPC2290
50462482
0x0301 FF12
LPC2290/01 Rev B
50462482
0x0301 FF12
LPC2290/01 Rev C
50262514
0x0301 FF32
22.16.8 Read Boot code version
Table 341. ISP Read Boot Code version command description
Command
K
Input
None
Return Code
CMD_SUCCESS followed by 2 bytes of boot code version number in ASCII
format. It is to be interpreted as .
Description
This command is used to read the boot code version number.
Example
"K"
22.16.9 Compare
Table 342. ISP Compare command description
Command
M
Input
Address1(DST): Starting Address (on or off-chip) from where data bytes are to be
compared. This address should be word boundary.
Address2(SRC): Starting Address (on or off-chip) from where data bytes are to be
compared. This address should be word boundary.
Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be compared. Count should be a multiple of
4.
Return Code
UM10114
User manual
CMD_SUCCESS | (Source and destination data is same)
COMPARE_ERROR | (Followed by the offset of first mismatch)
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not multiple of 4)
ADDR_ERROR
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
PARAM_ERROR
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
342 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
Table 342. ISP Compare command description
Command
M
Description
This command is used to compare the memory contents (on or off-chip) at two
locations.
Example
"M 1073742336 1073741824 4" compares 4 bytes from the on-chip
RAM address 0x4000 0000 to the 4 bytes from the on-chip RAM address
0x4000 0200.
Compare result may not be correct when source or destination address contains
any of the first 64 bytes starting from address zero. After any reset the first
64 bytes are re-mapped to on-chip ROM boot sector.
22.16.10 ISP Return Codes Summary
Table 343. ISP Return Codes Summary
Return Mnemonic
Code
Description
0
CMD_SUCCESS
Command is executed successfully. Sent by ISP
handler only when command given by the host has
been completely and successfully executed.
1
INVALID_COMMAND
Invalid command.
2
SRC_ADDR_ERROR
Source address is not on word boundary.
3
DST_ADDR_ERROR
Destination address is not on a correct boundary.
4
SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Source address is not mapped in the memory map.
Count value is taken in to consideration where
applicable.
5
DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Destination address is not mapped in the memory
map. Count value is taken in to consideration
where applicable.
6
COUNT_ERROR
Byte count is not multiple of 4 or is not a permitted
value.
10
COMPARE_ERROR
Source and destination data not equal.
11
BUSY
Flash programming hardware interface is busy.
12
PARAM_ERROR
Insufficient number of parameters or invalid
parameter.
13
ADDR_ERROR
Address is not on word boundary.
14
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Address is not mapped in the memory map. Count
value is taken in to consideration where applicable.
15
CMD_LOCKED
Command is locked.
16
INVALID_CODE
Unlock code is invalid.
17
INVALID_BAUD_RATE
Invalid baud rate setting.
18
INVALID_STOP_BIT
Invalid stop bit setting.
22.17 IAP Commands
For in application programming the IAP routine should be called with a word pointer in
register r0 pointing to memory (RAM) containing command code and parameters. Result
of the IAP command is returned in the result table pointed to by register r1. The user can
reuse the command table for result by passing the same pointer in registers r0 and r1. The
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
343 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
parameter table should be big enough to hold all the results in case if number of results
are more than number of parameters. Parameter passing is illustrated in Figure 77. The
number of parameters and results vary according to the IAP command. The maximum
number of parameters is 3, passed to the "Compare" command. The maximum number of
results is 1, returned in case of every of three available IAP commands. The command
handler sends the status code INVALID_COMMAND when an undefined command is
received. The IAP routine resides at 0x7FFF FFF0 location and it is thumb code.
The IAP function could be called in the following way using C.
Define the IAP location entry point. Since the 0th bit of the IAP location is set there will be
a change to Thumb instruction set when the program counter branches to this address.
#define IAP_LOCATION 0x7ffffff1
Define data or pointers to pass IAP command table and result table to the IAP function
unsigned long command[5];
unsigned long result[2];
or
unsigned long * command;
unsigned long * result;
command=(unsigned long *) 0x……
result= (unsigned long *) 0x……
Define pointer to function type, which takes two parameters and returns void. Note the IAP
returns the result with the base address of the table residing in R1.
typedef void (*IAP)(unsigned int [],unsigned int[]);
IAP iap_entry;
Setting function pointer
iap_entry=(IAP) IAP_LOCATION;
Whenever you wish to call IAP you could use the following statement.
iap_entry (command, result);
The IAP call could be simplified further by using the symbol definition file feature
supported by ARM Linker in ADS (ARM Developer Suite). You could also call the IAP
routine using assembly code.
The following symbol definitions can be used to link IAP routine and user application.
## ARM Linker, ADS1.2 [Build 826]: Last Updated: Wed May 08 16:12:23 2002
0x7fffff90 T rm_init_entry
0x7fffffa0 A rm_undef_handler
0x7fffffb0 A rm_prefetchabort_handler
0x7fffffc0 A rm_dataabort_handler
0x7fffffd0 A rm_irqhandler
0x7fffffe0 A rm_irqhandler2
0x7ffffff0 T iap_entry
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
344 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
As per the ARM specification (The ARM Thumb Procedure Call Standard SWS ESPC
0002 A-05) up to 4 parameters can be passed in the r0, r1, r2 and r3 registers
respectively. Additional parameters are passed on the stack. Up to 4 parameters can be
returned in the r0, r1, r2 and r3 registers respectively. Additional parameters are returned
indirectly via memory. If the ARM suggested scheme is used for the parameter
passing/returning then it might create problems due to difference in the C compiler
implementation from different vendors. The suggested parameter passing scheme
reduces such risk.
Table 344. IAP Command Summary
ISP Command
Command code
Described in
Read Part ID
54
Table 345
Read Boot code version
55
Table 346
Compare
56
Table 347
COMMAND CODE
PARAMETER 1
command
parameter table
PARAMETER 2
ARM REGISTER r0
PARAMETER n
ARM REGISTER r1
STATUS CODE
RESULT 1
command
result table
RESULT 2
RESULT n
Fig 77. IAP parameter passing
22.17.1 Read Part ID
Table 345. IAP Read Part ID command description
UM10114
User manual
Command
Read part ID
Input
Command Code 54
Parameters: None
Status Code
CMD_SUCCESS
Result
Result0: Part Identification Number
Description
This command is used to read the part identification number.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
345 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
22.17.2 Read Boot code version
Table 346. IAP Read Boot Code version command description
Command
Read boot code version
Input
Command Code 55
Parameters: None
Status Code
CMD_SUCCESS
Result
Result0: 2 bytes of boot code version number. It is to be interpreted as
.
Description
This command is used to read the boot code version number.
22.17.3 Compare
Table 347. IAP Compare command description
Command
Compare
Input
Command Code 56
Param0(DST): Starting address (on or off-chip) from where data bytes are to be
compared. This address should be a word boundary.
Param1(SRC): Starting address (on or off-chip) from where data bytes are to be
compared. This address should be a word boundary.
Param2: Number of bytes to be compared. Count should be in multiple of 4.
Status Code
CMD_SUCCESS |
COMPARE_ERROR |
COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not multiple of 4)
ADDR_ERROR
ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Result
Result0: Offset of the first mismatch if the Status Code is COMPARE_ERROR.
Description
This command is used to compare the memory contents at two locations.
Compare result may not be correct when source or destination address contains
any of the first 64 bytes starting from address zero. After any reset the first 64 bytes
are remapped to on-chip ROM boot sector.
22.17.4 IAP Status Codes Summary
Table 348. IAP Status Codes Summary
UM10114
User manual
Status Mnemonic
Code
Description
0
CMD_SUCCESS
Command is executed successfully.
1
INVALID_COMMAND
Invalid command.
2
SRC_ADDR_ERROR
Source address is not on a word boundary.
3
DST_ADDR_ERROR
Destination address is not on a correct boundary.
4
SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Source address is not mapped in the memory map.
Count value is taken in to consideration where
applicable.
5
DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
Destination address is not mapped in the memory
map. Count value is taken in to consideration where
applicable.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
346 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for
Table 348. IAP Status Codes Summary
Status Mnemonic
Code
Description
6
COUNT_ERROR
Byte count is not multiple of 4 or is not a permitted
value.
10
COMPARE_ERROR
Source and destination data is not same.
11
BUSY
Flash programming hardware interface is busy.
22.18 JTAG external memory programming interface
Debug tools can write parts of the flash image to the on-chip RAM and then execute
pre-loaded application dedicated to external flash programming repeatedly with proper
offset.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
347 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 23: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded ICE controller
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
23.1 How to read this chapter
The Embedded ICE controller is identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
23.2 Features
• No target resources are required by the software debugger in order to start the
debugging session.
• Allows the software debugger to talk via a JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) port directly
to the core.
• Inserts instructions directly in to the ARM7TDMI-S core.
• The ARM7TDMI-S core or the System state can be examined, saved or changed
depending on the type of instruction inserted.
• Allows instructions to execute at a slow debug speed or at a fast system speed.
23.3 Applications
The EmbeddedICE logic provides on-chip debug support. The debugging of the target
system requires a host computer running the debugger software and an EmbeddedICE
protocol convertor. EmbeddedICE protocol convertor converts the Remote Debug
Protocol commands to the JTAG data needed to access the ARM7TDMI-S core present
on the target system.
23.4 Description
The ARM7TDMI-S Debug Architecture uses the existing JTAG1 port as a method of
accessing the core. The scan chains that are around the core for production test are
reused in the debug state to capture information from the databus and to insert new
information into the core or the memory. There are two JTAG-style scan chains within the
ARM7TDMI-S. A JTAG-style Test Access Port Controller controls the scan chains. In
addition to the scan chains, the debug architecture uses EmbeddedICE logic which
resides on chip with the ARM7TDMI-S core. The EmbeddedICE has its own scan chain
that is used to insert watchpoints and breakpoints for the ARM7TDMI-S core. The
EmbeddedICE logic consists of two real time watchpoint registers, together with a control
and status register. One or both of the watchpoint registers can be programmed to halt the
ARM7TDMI-S core. Execution is halted when a match occurs between the values
programmed into the EmbeddedICE logic and the values currently appearing on the
address bus, databus and some control signals. Any bit can be masked so that its value
1.For more details refer to IEEE Standard 1149.1 - 1990 Standard Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
348 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 23: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded ICE controller
does not affect the comparison. Either watchpoint register can be configured as a
watchpoint (i.e. on a data access) or a break point (i.e. on an instruction fetch). The
watchpoints and breakpoints can be combined such that:
• The conditions on both watchpoints must be satisfied before the ARM7TDMI core is
stopped. The CHAIN functionality requires two consecutive conditions to be satisfied
before the core is halted. An example of this would be to set the first breakpoint to
trigger on an access to a peripheral and the second to trigger on the code segment
that performs the task switching. Therefore when the breakpoints trigger the
information regarding which task has switched out will be ready for examination.
• The watchpoints can be configured such that a range of addresses are enabled for
the watchpoints to be active. The RANGE function allows the breakpoints to be
combined such that a breakpoint is to occur if an access occurs in the bottom 256
bytes of memory but not in the bottom 32 bytes.
The ARM7TDMI-S core has a Debug Communication Channel function in-built. The
debug communication channel allows a program running on the target to communicate
with the host debugger or another separate host without stopping the program flow or
even entering the debug state. The debug communication channel is accessed as a
co-processor 14 by the program running on the ARM7TDMI-S core. The debug
communication channel allows the JTAG port to be used for sending and receiving data
without affecting the normal program flow. The debug communication channel data and
control registers are mapped in to addresses in the EmbeddedICE logic.
23.5 Pin description
Table 349. EmbeddedICE Pin Description
Pin name
Type
Description
TMS
Input
Test Mode Select. The TMS pin selects the next state in the TAP state
machine.
TCK
Input
Test Clock. This allows shifting of the data in, on the TMS and TDI pins. It
is a positive edge triggered clock with the TMS and TCK signals that
define the internal state of the device.
Remark: This clock must be slower than 16 of the CPU clock (CCLK) for
the JTAG interface to operate.
UM10114
User manual
TDI
Input
Test Data In. This is the serial data input for the shift register.
TDO
Output
Test Data Output. This is the serial data output from the shift register.
Data is shifted out of the device on the negative edge of the TCK signal.
nTRST
Input
Test Reset. The nTRST pin can be used to reset the test logic within the
EmbeddedICE logic.
RTCK
Output
Returned Test Clock. Extra signal added to the JTAG port. Required for
designs based on ARM7TDMI-S processor core. Multi-ICE (Development
system from ARM) uses this signal to maintain synchronization with
targets having slow or widely varying clock frequency. For details refer to
"Multi-ICE System Design considerations Application Note 72 (ARM DAI
0072A)".
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
349 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 23: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded ICE controller
23.6 Reset state of multiplexed pins
The pins above are multiplexed with P1.31-26. To have them come up as a Debug port,
connect a weak bias resistor (4.7-10 k depending on the external JTAG circuitry)
between VSS and the P1.26/RTCK pin. To have them come up as GPIO pins, do not
connect a bias resistor and ensure that any external driver connected to P1.26/RTCK is
either driving high, or is in high-impedance state, during Reset.
23.7 Register description
The EmbeddedICE logic contains 16 registers as shown in Table 350. below. The
ARM7TDMI-S debug architecture is described in detail in "ARM7TDMI-S (rev 4) Technical
Reference Manual" (ARM DDI 0234A) published by ARM Limited and is available via
Internet.
Table 350. EmbeddedICE Logic registers
Name
Width
Description
Address
Debug Control
6
Force debug state, disable interrupts
00000
Debug Status
5
Status of debug
00001
Debug Comms Control Register
32
Debug communication control register
00100
Debug Comms Data Register
32
Debug communication data register
00101
Watchpoint 0 Address Value
32
Holds watchpoint 0 address value
01000
Watchpoint 0 Address Mask
32
Holds watchpoint 0 address mask
01001
Watchpoint 0 Data Value
32
Holds watchpoint 0 data value
01010
Watchpoint 0 Data Mask
32
Holds watchpoint 0 data mask
01011
Watchpoint 0 Control Value
9
Holds watchpoint 0 control value
01100
Watchpoint 0 Control Mask
8
Holds watchpoint 0 control mask
01101
Watchpoint 1 Address Value
32
Holds watchpoint 1 address value
10000
Watchpoint 1 Address Mask
32
Holds watchpoint 1 address mask
10001
Watchpoint 1 Data Value
32
Holds watchpoint 1 data value
10010
Watchpoint 1 Data Mask
32
Holds watchpoint 1 data mask
10011
Watchpoint 1 Control Value
9
Holds watchpoint 1 control value
10100
Watchpoint 1 Control Mask
8
Holds watchpoint 1 control mask
10101
23.8 Block diagram
The block diagram of the debug environment is shown below in Figure 78.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
350 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 23: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded ICE controller
JTAG PORT
serial
parallel
interface
EMBEDDED ICE
INTERFACE
PROTOCOL
CONVERTER
5
EMBEDDED ICE
host running debugger
ARM7TDMI-S
TARGET BOARD
Fig 78. EmbeddedICE debug environment block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
351 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 24: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded Trace Module (ETM)
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
24.1 How to read this chapter
The ETM is identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
24.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Closely track the instructions that the ARM core is executing.
One external trigger input
10 pin interface
All registers are programmed through JTAG interface.
Does not consume power when trace is not being used.
THUMB instruction set support
24.3 Applications
As the microcontroller has significant amounts of on-chip memories, it is not possible to
determine how the processor core is operating simply by observing the external pins. The
ETM provides real-time trace capability for deeply embedded processor cores. It outputs
information about processor execution to a trace port. A software debugger allows
configuration of the ETM using a JTAG interface and displays the trace information that
has been captured, in a format that a user can easily understand.
24.4 Description
The ETM is connected directly to the ARM core and not to the main AMBA system bus. It
compresses the trace information and exports it through a narrow trace port. An external
Trace Port Analyzer captures the trace information under software debugger control.
Trace port can broadcast the Instruction trace information. Instruction trace (or PC trace)
shows the flow of execution of the processor and provides a list of all the instructions that
were executed. Instruction trace is significantly compressed by only broadcasting branch
addresses as well as a set of status signals that indicate the pipeline status on a cycle by
cycle basis. Trace information generation can be controlled by selecting the trigger
resource. Trigger resources include address comparators, counters and sequencers.
Since trace information is compressed the software debugger requires a static image of
the code being executed. Self-modifying code can not be traced because of this
restriction.
24.4.1 ETM configuration
The following standard configuration is selected for the ETM macrocell.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
352 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 24: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded Trace Module (ETM)
Table 351. ETM configuration
Small[1]
Resource number/type
Pairs of address comparators
1
Data Comparators
0 (Data tracing is not supported)
Memory Map Decoders
4
Counters
1
Sequencer Present
No
External Inputs
2
External Outputs
0
FIFOFULL Present
Yes (Not wired)
FIFO depth
10 bytes
Trace Packet Width
4/8
[1]
For details refer to ARM documentation "Embedded Trace Macrocell Specification (ARM IHI 0014E)".
24.5 Pin description
Table 352. ETM Pin Description
Pin Name
Type
Description
TRACECLK
Output Trace Clock. The trace clock signal provides the clock for the trace
port. PIPESTAT[2:0], TRACESYNC, and TRACEPKT[3:0] signals are
referenced to the rising edge of the trace clock. This clock is not
generated by the ETM block. It is to be derived from the system clock.
The clock should be balanced to provide sufficient hold time for the
trace data signals. Half rate clocking mode is supported. Trace data
signals should be shifted by a clock phase from TRACECLK. Refer to
Figure 3.14 page 3.26 and figure 3.15 page 3.27 in "ETM7 Technical
Reference Manual" (ARM DDI 0158B), for example circuits that
implements both half-rateclocking and shifting of the trace data with
respect to the clock. For TRACECLK timings refer to section 5.2 on
page 5-13 in "Embedded Trace Macrocell Specification" (ARM IHI
0014E).
PIPESTAT[2:0]
Output Pipe Line status. The pipeline status signals provide a cycle-by-cycle
indication of what is happening in the execution stage of the processor
pipeline.
TRACESYNC
Output Trace synchronization. The trace sync signal is used to indicate the
first packet of a group of trace packets and is asserted HIGH only for
the first packet of any branch address.
TRACEPKT[3:0] Output Trace Packet. The trace packet signals are used to output packaged
address and data information related to the pipeline status. All packets
are eight bits in length. A packet is output over two cycles. In the first
cycle, Packet[3:0] is output and in the second cycle, Packet[7:4] is
output.
EXTIN[0]
UM10114
User manual
Input
External Trigger Input
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
353 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 24: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded Trace Module (ETM)
24.6 Reset state of multiplexed pins
On the LPC21xx/LPC22xx, the ETM pin functions are multiplexed with P1.25-16. To have
these pins come as a Trace port, connect a weak bias resistor (4.7 k) between the
P1.20/TRACESYNC pin and VSS. To have them come up as port pins, do not connect a
bias resistor to P1.20/TRACESYNC, and ensure that any external driver connected to
P1.20/TRACESYNC is either driving high, or is in high-impedance state, during Reset.
24.7 Register description
The ETM contains 29 registers as shown in Table 353 below. They are described in detail
in the ARM IHI 0014E document published by ARM Limited, which is available via the
Internet.
Table 353. ETM Registers
UM10114
User manual
Name
Description
Access Register
encoding
ETM Control
Controls the general operation of the ETM.
R/W
000 0000
ETM Configuration Code
Allows a debugger to read the number of
each type of resource.
RO
000 0001
Trigger Event
Holds the controlling event.
WO
000 0010
Memory Map Decode Control Eight-bit register, used to statically configure
the memory map decoder.
WO
000 0011
ETM Status
Holds the pending overflow status bit.
RO
000 0100
System Configuration
Holds the configuration information using the
SYSOPT bus.
RO
000 0101
Trace Enable Control 3
Holds the trace on/off addresses.
WO
000 0110
Trace Enable Control 2
Holds the address of the comparison.
WO
000 0111
Trace Enable Event
Holds the enabling event.
WO
000 1000
Trace Enable Control 1
Holds the include and exclude regions.
WO
000 1001
FIFOFULL Region
Holds the include and exclude regions.
WO
000 1010
FIFOFULL Level
Holds the level below which the FIFO is
considered full.
WO
000 1011
ViewData event
Holds the enabling event.
WO
000 1100
ViewData Control 1
Holds the include/exclude regions.
WO
000 1101
ViewData Control 2
Holds the include/exclude regions.
WO
000 1110
ViewData Control 3
Holds the include/exclude regions.
WO
000 1111
Address Comparator 1 to 16
Holds the address of the comparison.
WO
001 xxxx
Address Access Type 1 to 16 Holds the type of access and the size.
WO
010 xxxx
Reserved
-
000 xxxx
-
Reserved
-
-
100 xxxx
Initial Counter Value 1 to 4
Holds the initial value of the counter.
WO
101 00xx
Counter Enable 1 to 4
Holds the counter clock enable control and
event.
WO
101 01xx
Counter reload 1 to 4
Holds the counter reload event.
WO
101 10xx
Counter Value 1 to 4
Holds the current counter value.
RO
101 11xx
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
354 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 24: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded Trace Module (ETM)
Table 353. ETM Registers
Name
Description
Access Register
encoding
Sequencer State and Control Holds the next state triggering events.
-
110 00xx
External Output 1 to 4
Holds the controlling events for each output.
WO
110 10xx
Reserved
-
-
110 11xx
Reserved
-
-
111 0xxx
Reserved
-
-
111 1xxx
24.8 Block diagram
The block diagram of the ETM debug environment is shown below in Figure 79.
APPLICATION PCB
CONNECTOR
TRACE
PORT
ANALYZER
TRACE
10
ETM
TRIGGER
PERIPHERAL
PERIPHERAL
CONNECTOR
Host
running
debugger
RAM
JTAG
INTERFACE
UNIT
ARM
5
ROM
EMBEDDED ICE
LAN
Fig 79. ETM debug environment block diagram
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
355 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
25.1 How to read this chapter
The RealMonitor is identical for all LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts.
For an overview of how LPC21xx and LPC22xx parts and versions are described in this
manual, see Section 1.2 “How to read this manual”.
25.2 Features
• Allows user to establish a debug session to a currently running system without halting
or resetting the system.
• Allows user time-critical interrupt code to continue executing while other user
application code is being debugged.
25.3 Applications
Real time debugging.
25.4 Description
RealMonitor is a lightweight debug monitor that allows interrupts to be serviced while user
debug their foreground application. It communicates with the host using the DCC (Debug
Communications Channel), which is present in the EmbeddedICE logic. RealMonitor
provides advantages over the traditional methods for debugging applications in ARM
systems. The traditional methods include:
• Angel (a target-based debug monitor)
• Multi-ICE or other JTAG unit and EmbeddedICE logic (a hardware-based debug
solution).
Although both of these methods provide robust debugging environments, neither is
suitable as a lightweight real-time monitor.
Angel is designed to load and debug independent applications that can run in a variety of
modes, and communicate with the debug host using a variety of connections (such as a
serial port or ethernet). Angel is required to save and restore full processor context, and
the occurrence of interrupts can be delayed as a result. Angel, as a fully functional
target-based debugger, is therefore too heavyweight to perform as a real-time monitor.
Multi-ICE is a hardware debug solution that operates using the EmbeddedICE unit that is
built into most ARM processors. To perform debug tasks such as accessing memory or
the processor registers, Multi-ICE must place the core into a debug state. While the
processor is in this state, which can be millions of cycles, normal program execution is
suspended, and interrupts cannot be serviced.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
356 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
RealMonitor combines features and mechanisms from both Angel and Multi-ICE to
provide the services and functions that are required. In particular, it contains both the
Multi-ICE communication mechanisms (the DCC using JTAG), and Angel-like support for
processor context saving and restoring. RealMonitor is pre-programmed in the on-chip
ROM memory (boot sector). When enabled It allows user to observe and debug while
parts of application continue to run. Refer to Section 25.5 “How To Enable RealMonitor”
on page 359 for details.
25.4.1 RealMonitor Components
As shown in Figure 80, RealMonitor is split in to two functional components:
DEBUGGER
RDI 1.5.1
host
REALMONITOR.DLL
RMHOST
RDI 1.5.1 RT
JTAG UNIT
RealMonitor
protocol
DCC transmissions
over the JTAG link
target
TARGET BOARD AND
PROCESSOR
RMTARGET
APPLICATION
Fig 80. RealMonitor components
25.4.2 RMHost
This is located between a debugger and a JTAG unit. The RMHost controller,
RealMonitor.dll, converts generic Remote Debug Interface (RDI) requests from the
debugger into DCC-only RDI messages for the JTAG unit. For complete details on
debugging a RealMonitor-integrated application from the host, see the ARM RMHost User
Guide (ARM DUI 0137A).
25.4.3 RMTarget
This is pre-programmed in the on-chip ROM memory (boot sector), and runs on the target
hardware. It uses the EmbeddedICE logic, and communicates with the host using the
DCC. For more details on RMTarget functionality, see the RealMonitor Target Integration
Guide (ARM DUI 0142A).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
357 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
25.4.4 How RealMonitor works
In general terms, the RealMonitor operates as a state machine, as shown in Figure 81.
RealMonitor switches between running and stopped states, in response to packets
received by the host, or due to asynchronous events on the target. RMTarget supports the
triggering of only one breakpoint, watchpoint, stop, or semihosting SWI at a time. There is
no provision to allow nested events to be saved and restored. So, for example, if user
application has stopped at one breakpoint, and another breakpoint occurs in an IRQ
handler, RealMonitor enters a panic state. No debugging can be performed after
RealMonitor enters this state.
SWI abort
undef
stop
SWI abort
undef
RUNNING
STOPPED
PANIC
go
Fig 81. RealMonitor as a state machine
A debugger such as the ARM eXtended Debugger (AXD) or other RealMonitor aware
debugger, that runs on a host computer, can connect to the target to send commands and
receive data. This communication between host and target is illustrated in Figure 80.
The target component of RealMonitor, RMTarget, communicates with the host component,
RMHost, using the Debug Communications Channel (DCC), which is a reliable link whose
data is carried over the JTAG connection.
While user application is running, RMTarget typically uses IRQs generated by the DCC.
This means that if user application also wants to use IRQs, it must pass any
DCC-generated interrupts to RealMonitor.
To allow nonstop debugging, the EmbeddedICE-RT logic in the processor generates a
Prefetch Abort exception when a breakpoint is reached, or a Data Abort exception when a
watchpoint is hit. These exceptions are handled by the RealMonitor exception handlers
that inform the user, by way of the debugger, of the event. This allows user application to
continue running without stopping the processor. RealMonitor considers user application
to consist of two parts:
• A foreground application running continuously, typically in User, System, or SVC
mode
• A background application containing interrupt and exception handlers that are
triggered by certain events in user system, including:
– IRQs or FIQs
– Data and Prefetch aborts caused by user foreground application. This indicates an
error in the application being debugged. In both cases the host is notified and the
user application is stopped.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
358 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
– Undef exception caused by the undefined instructions in user foreground
application. This indicates an error in the application being debugged. RealMonitor
stops the user application until a "Go" packet is received from the host.
When one of these exceptions occur that is not handled by user application, the following
happens:
• RealMonitor enters a loop, polling the DCC. If the DCC read buffer is full, control is
passed to rm_ReceiveData() (RealMonitor internal function). If the DCC write buffer is
free, control is passed to rm_TransmitData() (RealMonitor internal function). If there is
nothing else to do, the function returns to the caller. The ordering of the above
comparisons gives reads from the DCC a higher priority than writes to the
communications link.
• RealMonitor stops the foreground application. Both IRQs and FIQs continue to be
serviced if they were enabled by the application at the time the foreground application
was stopped.
25.5 How To Enable RealMonitor
The following steps must be performed to enable RealMonitor. A code example which
implements all the steps can be found at the end of this section.
25.5.1 Adding stacks
User must ensure that stacks are set up within application for each of the processor
modes used by RealMonitor. For each mode, RealMonitor requires a fixed number of
words of stack space. User must therefore allow sufficient stack space for both
RealMonitor and application.
RealMonitor has the following stack requirements:
Table 354. RealMonitor stack requirement
Processor mode
RealMonitor stack usage (bytes)
Undef
48
Prefetch Abort
16
Data Abort
16
IRQ
8
25.5.2 IRQ mode
A stack for this mode is always required. RealMonitor uses two words on entry to its
interrupt handler. These are freed before nested interrupts are enabled.
25.5.3 Undef mode
A stack for this mode is always required. RealMonitor uses 12 words while processing an
undefined instruction exception.
25.5.4 SVC mode
RealMonitor makes no use of this stack.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
359 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
25.5.5 Prefetch Abort mode
RealMonitor uses four words on entry to its Prefetch abort interrupt handler.
25.5.6 Data Abort mode
RealMonitor uses four words on entry to its data abort interrupt handler.
25.5.7 User/System mode
RealMonitor makes no use of this stack.
25.5.8 FIQ mode
RealMonitor makes no use of this stack.
25.5.9 Handling exceptions
This section describes the importance of sharing exception handlers between
RealMonitor and user application.
25.5.10 RealMonitor exception handling
To function properly, RealMonitor must be able to intercept certain interrupts and
exceptions. Figure 82 illustrates how exceptions can be claimed by RealMonitor itself, or
shared between RealMonitor and application. If user application requires the exception
sharing, they must provide function (such as app_IRQDispatch ()). Depending on the
nature of the exception, this handler can either:
• Pass control to the RealMonitor processing routine, such as rm_irqhandler2().
• Claim the exception for the application itself, such as app_IRQHandler ().
In a simple case where an application has no exception handlers of its own, the
application can install the RealMonitor low-level exception handlers directly into the vector
table of the processor. Although the IRQ handler must get the address of the Vectored
Interrupt Controller. The easiest way to do this is to write a branch instruction ()
into the vector table, where the target of the branch is the start address of the relevant
RealMonitor exception handler.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
360 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
RealMonitor supplied exception vector handlers
RM_UNDEF_HANDLER()
RM_PREFETCHABORT_HANDLER()
RM_DATAABORT_HANDLER()
RM_IRQHANDLER()
RESET
UNDEF
SWI
sharing IRQs between RealMonitor and user IRQ handler
PREFETCH
ABORT
RM_IRQHANDLER2()
DATA ABORT
APP_IRQDISPATCH
RESERVED
APP_IRQHANDLER2()
OR
IRQ
FIQ
Fig 82. Exception handlers
25.5.11 RMTarget initialization
While the processor is in a privileged mode, and IRQs are disabled, user must include a
line of code within the start-up sequence of application to call rm_init_entry().
25.5.12 Code Example
The following example shows how to setup stack, VIC, initialize RealMonitor and share
non vectored interrupts:
IMPORT rm_init_entry
IMPORT rm_prefetchabort_handler
IMPORT rm_dataabort_handler
IMPORT rm_irqhandler2
IMPORT rm_undef_handler
IMPORT User_Entry ;Entry point of user application.
CODE32
ENTRY
;Define exception table. Instruct linker to place code at address 0x0000 0000
AREA exception_table, CODE
LDR
LDR
LDR
LDR
LDR
UM10114
User manual
pc,
pc,
pc,
pc,
pc,
Reset_Address
Undefined_Address
SWI_Address
Prefetch_Address
Abort_Address
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
361 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
NOP ; Insert User code valid signature here.
LDR pc, [pc, #-0xFF0] ;Load IRQ vector from VIC
LDR PC, FIQ_Address
Reset_Address
Undefined_Address
SWI_Address
Prefetch_Address
Abort_Address
FIQ_Address
DCD
DCD
DCD
DCD
DCD
DCD
__init
;Reset Entry point
rm_undef_handler ;Provided by RealMonitor
0
;User can put address of SWI handler here
rm_prefetchabort_handler
;Provided by RealMonitor
rm_dataabort_handler
;Provided by RealMonitor
0
;User can put address of FIQ handler here
AREA init_code, CODE
ram_end EQU 0x4000xxxx ; Top of on-chip RAM.
__init
; /*********************************************************************
; * Set up the stack pointers for various processor modes. Stack grows
; * downwards.
; *********************************************************************/
LDR r2, =ram_end ;Get top of RAM
MRS r0, CPSR ;Save current processor mode
; Initialize the Undef mode stack for RealMonitor use
BIC r1, r0, #0x1f
ORR r1, r1, #0x1b
MSR CPSR_c, r1
;Keep top 32 bytes for programming routines.
;Refer to On-chip Serial Bootloader chapter
SUB sp,r2,#0x1F
; Initialize the Abort mode stack for RealMonitor
BIC r1, r0, #0x1f
ORR r1, r1, #0x17
MSR CPSR_c, r1
;Keep 64 bytes for Undef mode stack
SUB sp,r2,#0x5F
; Initialize the IRQ mode stack for RealMonitor and User
BIC r1, r0, #0x1f
ORR r1, r1, #0x12
MSR CPSR_c, r1
;Keep 32 bytes for Abort mode stack
SUB sp,r2,#0x7F
; Return to the original mode.
MSR CPSR_c, r0
; Initialize the stack for user application
; Keep 256 bytes for IRQ mode stack
SUB sp,r2,#0x17F
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
362 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
/*********************************************************************
* Setup Vectored Interrupt controller. DCC Rx and Tx interrupts
* generate Non Vectored IRQ request. rm_init_entry is aware
* of the VIC and it enables the DBGCommRX and DBGCommTx interrupts.
* Default vector address register is programmed with the address of
* Non vectored app_irqDispatch mentioned in this example. User can setup
* Vectored IRQs or FIQs here.
*********************************************************************/
VICBaseAddr
EQU 0xFFFFF000 ; VIC Base address
VICDefVectAddrOffset EQU 0x34
LDR
LDR
STR
;
;
;
;
;
;
r0, =VICBaseAddr
r1, =app_irqDispatch
r1, [r0,#VICDefVectAddrOffset]
BL
rm_init_entry
;Initialize RealMonitor
;enable FIQ and IRQ in ARM Processor
MRS r1, CPSR
; get the CPSR
BIC r1, r1, #0xC0
; enable IRQs and FIQs
MSR CPSR_c, r1
; update the CPSR
/*********************************************************************
* Get the address of the User entry point.
*********************************************************************/
LDR lr, =User_Entry
MOV pc, lr
/*********************************************************************
* Non vectored irq handler (app_irqDispatch)
*********************************************************************/
AREA app_irqDispatch, CODE
VICVectAddrOffset EQU 0x30
app_irqDispatch
;enable interrupt nesting
STMFD sp!, {r12,r14}
MRS r12, spsr
MSR cpsr_c,0x1F
;Save SPSR in to r12
;Re-enable IRQ, go to system mode
;User should insert code here if non vectored Interrupt sharing is
;required. Each non vectored shared irq handler must return to
;the interrupted instruction by using the following code.
;
MSR cpsr_c, #0x52
;Disable irq, move to IRQ mode
;
MSR spsr, r12
;Restore SPSR from r12
;
STMFD sp!, {r0}
;
LDR r0, =VICBaseAddr
;
STR r1, [r0,#VICVectAddrOffset]
;Acknowledge Non Vectored irq has finished
;
LDMFD sp!, {r12,r14,r0}
;Restore registers
;
SUBS pc, r14, #4
;Return to the interrupted instruction
;user interrupt did not happen so call rm_irqhandler2. This handler
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
363 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
;is not aware of the VIC interrupt priority hardware so trick
;rm_irqhandler2 to return here
STMFD sp!, {ip,pc}
LDR pc, rm_irqhandler2
;rm_irqhandler2 returns here
MSR cpsr_c, #0x52
MSR spsr, r12
STMFD sp!, {r0}
LDR r0, =VICBaseAddr
STR r1, [r0,#VICVectAddrOffset]
LDMFD sp!, {r12,r14,r0}
SUBS pc, r14, #4
;Disable irq, move to IRQ mode
;Restore SPSR from r12
;Acknowledge Non Vectored irq has finished
;Restore registers
;Return to the interrupted instruction
END
25.6 RealMonitor Build Options
RealMonitor was built with the following options:
RM_OPT_DATALOGGING=FALSE
This option enables or disables support for any target-to-host packets sent on a non
RealMonitor (third-party) channel.
RM_OPT_STOPSTART=TRUE
This option enables or disables support for all stop and start debugging features.
RM_OPT_SOFTBREAKPOINT=TRUE
This option enables or disables support for software breakpoints.
RM_OPT_HARDBREAKPOINT=TRUE
Enabled for cores with EmbeddedICE-RT. This device uses ARM-7TDMI-S Rev 4 with
EmbeddedICE-RT.
RM_OPT_HARDWATCHPOINT=TRUE
Enabled for cores with EmbeddedICE-RT. This device uses ARM-7TDMI-S Rev 4 with
EmbeddedICE-RT.
RM_OPT_SEMIHOSTING=FALSE
This option enables or disables support for SWI semi-hosting. Semi-hosting provides
code running on an ARM target use of facilities on a host computer that is running an
ARM debugger. Examples of such facilities include the keyboard input, screen output,
and disk I/O.
RM_OPT_SAVE_FIQ_REGISTERS=TRUE
This option determines whether the FIQ-mode registers are saved into the registers
block when RealMonitor stops.
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
364 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
RM_OPT_READBYTES=TRUE
RM_OPT_WRITEBYTES=TRUE
RM_OPT_READHALFWORDS=TRUE
RM_OPT_WRITEHALFWORDS=TRUE
RM_OPT_READWORDS=TRUE
RM_OPT_WRITEWORDS=TRUE
Enables/Disables support for 8/16/32 bit read/write.
RM_OPT_EXECUTECODE=FALSE
Enables/Disables support for executing code from "execute code" buffer. The code
must be downloaded first.
RM_OPT_GETPC=TRUE
This option enables or disables support for the RealMonitor GetPC packet. Useful in
code profiling when real monitor is used in interrupt mode.
RM_EXECUTECODE_SIZE=NA
"execute code" buffer size. Also refer to RM_OPT_EXECUTECODE option.
RM_OPT_GATHER_STATISTICS=FALSE
This option enables or disables the code for gathering statistics about the internal
operation of RealMonitor.
RM_DEBUG=FALSE
This option enables or disables additional debugging and error-checking code in
RealMonitor.
RM_OPT_BUILDIDENTIFIER=FALSE
This option determines whether a build identifier is built into the capabilities table of
RMTarget. Capabilities table is stored in ROM.
RM_OPT_SDM_INFO=FALSE
SDM gives additional information about application board and processor to debug tools.
RM_OPT_MEMORYMAP=FALSE
This option determines whether a memory map of the board is built into the target and
made available through the capabilities table
RM_OPT_USE_INTERRUPTS=TRUE
This option specifies whether RMTarget is built for interrupt-driven mode or polled
mode.
RM_FIFOSIZE=NA
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
365 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
This option specifies the size, in words, of the data logging FIFO buffer.
CHAIN_VECTORS=FALSE
This option allows RMTarget to support vector chaining through µHAL (ARM HW
abstraction API).
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
366 of 385
UM10114
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
User manual
26.1 Abbreviations
Table 355. Acronym list
UM10114
User manual
Acronym
Description
ADC
Analog-to-Digital Converter
AMBA
Advanced Microcontroller Bus Architecture
APB
Advanced Peripheral Bus
CAN
Controller Area Network
CISC
Complex Instruction Set Computer
FIFO
First In, First Out
GPIO
General Purpose Input/Output
I/O
Input/Output
JTAG
Joint Test Action Group
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop
PWM
Pulse Width Modulator
RISC
Reduced Instruction Set Computer
SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
SSI
Synchronous Serial Interface
SSP
Synchronous Serial Port
TTL
Transistor-Transistor Logic
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
367 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
26.2 Legal information
26.2.1 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
26.2.2 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no
responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
UM10114
User manual
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for
inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own
risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
26.2.3 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
— is a trademark of NXP B.V.
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
368 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
26.3 Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.
Table 14.
Table 15.
Table 16.
Table 17.
Table 18.
Table 19.
Table 20.
Table 21.
Table 22.
Table 23.
Table 24.
Table 25.
Table 26.
Table 27.
Table 28.
Table 29.
Table 30.
Table 31.
Table 32.
Table 33.
Table 34.
Table 35.
Table 36.
Table 37.
Table 38.
Table 39.
Table 40.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx legacy/enhanced parts
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
LPC2109/2119/2129 Ordering information . . . .6
LPC2109/2119/2129 Ordering options . . . . . . .7
LPC 2114/2124 Ordering information . . . . . . . .7
LPC2114/2124 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . .8
LPC2194 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
LPC2194 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
LPC2210/2220 Ordering information . . . . . . . . .8
LPC2210/2220 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . .9
LPC2212/2214 Ordering information . . . . . . . . .9
LPC2212/2214 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . .10
LPC2290 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . .10
LPC2290 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
LPC2292/2294 Ordering information . . . . . . . .10
LPC2292/2294 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . 11
LPC21xx/22xx part-specific configuration. . . . .13
LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory and peripheral
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
APB peripheries and base addresses . . . . . . .22
ARM exception vector locations . . . . . . . . . . . .23
LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory mapping
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
MAM responses to program accesses of various
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
MAM responses to data accesses of various
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Summary of MAM registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
MAM Control Register (MAMCR - address
0xE01F C000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - address
0xE01F C004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Suggestions for MAM timing selection . . . . . . .31
Address ranges of the external memory banks 33
External Memory Controller pin description . . .33
External Memory Controller register map . . . . .33
Bank Configuration Registers 0-3 (BCFG0-3 0xFFE0 0000 to 0xFFE0 000C) address
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Default memory widths at reset . . . . . . . . . . . .35
External memory and system requirements . . .40
LPC21xx/22xx part-specific interrupts . . . . . . .42
VIC register map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Software Interrupt Register (VICSoftInt - address
0xFFFF F018) bit allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Software Interrupt Register (VICSoftInt - address
0xFFFF F018) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Software Interrupt Clear Register
(VICSoftIntClear - 0xFFFF F01C). . . . . . . . . . .46
Software Interrupt Clear Register
(VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit
allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Software Interrupt Clear Register
(VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Raw Interrupt Status Register (VICRawIntr -
UM10114
User manual
address 0xFFFF F008) bit description . . . . . . . 47
Table 41. Interrupt Enable Register (VICINtEnable address 0xFFFF F010) bit description . . . . . . . 48
Table 42. Software Interrupt Clear Register (VICIntEnClear
- address 0xFFFF F014) bit description. . . . . . 48
Table 43. Interrupt Select Register (VICIntSelect - address
0xFFFF F00C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 44. IRQ Status Register (VICIRQStatus - address
0xFFFF F000) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 45. FIQ Status Register (VICFIQStatus - address
0xFFFF F004) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 46. Vector Control registers (VICVectCntl0-15 addresses 0xFFFF F200-23C) bit description . 49
Table 47. Vector Address registers (VICVectAddr0-15 addresses 0xFFFF F100-13C) bit description . 49
Table 48. Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr
- address 0xFFFF F034) bit description. . . . . . 50
Table 49. Vector Address register (VICVectAddr - address
0xFFFF F030) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 50. Protection Enable register (VICProtection address 0xFFFF F020) bit description . . . . . . . 50
Table 51. Connection of interrupt sources to the Vectored
Interrupt Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 52. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific register bits . . . . . 58
Table 53. Pin summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 54. Summary of system control registers. . . . . . . . 60
Table 55. Recommended values for CX1/X2 in oscillation
mode (crystal and external components
parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 56. External interrupt registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 57. External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT - address
0xE01F C140) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 58. Interrupt Wakeup register (INTWAKE - address
0xE01F C144) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 59. External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE address 0xE01F C148) bit description. . . . . . . 65
Table 60. External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR address 0xE01F C14C) bit description . . . . . . 66
Table 61. System Control and Status flags register (SCS address 0xE01F C1A0) bit description . . . . . . 68
Table 62. Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP address 0xE01F C040) bit description. . . . . . . 69
Table 63. PLL registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 64. PLL Control register (PLLCON - address
0xE01F C080) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 65. PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - address
0xE01F C084) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 66. PLL Status register (PLLSTAT - address
0xE01F C088) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 67. PLL Control bit combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 68. PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - address
0xE01F C08C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 69. Elements determining PLL’s frequency . . . . . . 74
Table 70. PLL Divider values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 71. PLL Multiplier values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 72. Power control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
369 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
Table 73. Power Control register (PCON - address
0xE01F COCO) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Table 74. Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP address 0xE01F C0C4) bit description . . . . . . .78
Table 75. APB divider register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Table 76. APB Divider register (APBDIV - address
0xE01F C100) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Table 77. LPC21xx part-specific pin configurations 64-pin
packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Table 78. LPC22xx part-specific pin configurations 144-pin
packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Table 79. LPC21xx Pin description (64-pin packages) . .87
Table 80. LPC22xx Ball allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Table 81. LPC22xx Pin description (144 pin packages) .93
Table 82. CAN configuration in the LPC21xx/22xx pin
connect registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Table 83. Pin select registers for 64-pin (LPC21xx) and
144-pin (LPC22xx) configurations . . . . . . . . .100
Table 84. Pin function Select register bits . . . . . . . . . . .101
Table 85. Pin connect block register map . . . . . . . . . . .102
Table 86. Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 - address
0xE002 C000) bit description ) . . . . . . . . . . .102
Table 87. Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - address
0xE002 C004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Table 88. Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 0xE002 C014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Table 89. Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 0xE002 C014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Table 90. Boot control on BOOT1:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Table 91. GPIO features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 92. GPIO pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 93. GPIO register map (legacy APB accessible
registers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Table 94. GPIO register map (local bus accessible registers
- enhanced GPIO features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Table 95. GPIO port 0 Direction register (IO0DIR - address
0xE002 8008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 96. GPIO port 1 Direction register (IO1DIR - address
0xE002 8018) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 97. GPIO port 2 Direction register (IO2DIR - address
0xE002 8028) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Table 98. GPIO port 3 Direction register (IO3DIR - address
0xE002 8038) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Table 99. Fast GPIO port 0 Direction register (FIO0DIR address 0x3FFF C000) bit description . . . . . . 116
Table 100. Fast GPIO port 1 Direction register (FIO1DIR address 0x3FFF C020) bit description . . . . . . 116
Table 101. Fast GPIO port 0 Direction control byte and
half-word accessible register description . . . . 116
Table 102. Fast GPIO port 1 Direction control byte and
half-word accessible register description . . . . 117
Table 103. GPIO port 0 output Set register (IO0SET address 0xE002 8004 bit description . . . . . . . 117
Table 104. GPIO port 1 output Set register (IO1SET address 0xE002 8014) bit description . . . . . . 118
Table 105. GPIO port 2 output Set register (IO2SET address 0xE002 8024) bit description . . . . . . 118
Table 106. GPIO port 3 output Set register (IO3SET UM10114
User manual
address 0xE002 8034) bit description . . . . . . 118
Table 107. Fast GPIO port 0 output Set register (FIO0SET address 0x3FFF C018) bit description. . . . . . 118
Table 108. Fast GPIO port 1 output Set register (FIO1SET address 0x3FFF C038) bit description. . . . . . 118
Table 109. Fast GPIO port 0 output Set byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 110. Fast GPIO port 1 output Set byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 111. GPIO port 0 output Clear register 0 (IO0CLR address 0xE002 800C) bit description . . . . . . 119
Table 112. GPIO port 1 output Clear register 1 (IO1CLR address 0xE002 801C) bit description . . . . . . 119
Table 113. GPIO port 2 output Clear register 2 (IO2CLR address 0xE002 802C) bit description . . . . . . 119
Table 114. GPIO port 3 output Clear register 3 (IO3CLR address 0xE002 803C) bit description . . . . . . 120
Table 115. Fast GPIO port 0 output Clear register 0
(FIO0CLR - address 0x3FFF C01C) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 116. Fast GPIO port 1 output Clear register 1
(FIO1CLR - address 0x3FFF C03C) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 117. Fast GPIO port 0 output Clear byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 118. Fast GPIO port 1 output Clear byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 119. GPIO port 0 Pin value register (IO0PIN - address
0xE002 8000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 120. GPIO port 1 Pin value register (IO1PIN - address
0xE002 8010) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 121. GPIO port 2 Pin value register (IO2PIN - address
0xE002 8020) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table 122. GPIO port 3 Pin value register (IO3PIN - address
0xE002 8030) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table 123. Fast GPIO port 0 Pin value register (FIO0PIN address 0x3FFF C014) bit description. . . . . . 122
Table 124. Fast GPIO port 1 Pin value register (FIO1PIN address 0x3FFF C034) bit description. . . . . . 122
Table 125. Fast GPIO port 0 Pin value byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table 126. Fast GPIO port 1 Pin value byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 127. Fast GPIO port 0 Mask register (FIO0MASK address 0x3FFF C010) bit description. . . . . . 123
Table 128. Fast GPIO port 1 Mask register (FIO1MASK address 0x3FFF C030) bit description. . . . . . 123
Table 129. Fast GPIO port 0 Mask byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 130. Fast GPIO port 1 Mask byte and half-word
accessible register description. . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 131. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers . . . . . . 128
Table 132: UART0 pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 133. UART0 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table 134: UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (U0RBR address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Read
Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Table 135: UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR -
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
370 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Write
Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Table 136: UART0 Divisor Latch LSB register (U0DLL address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 1) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Table 137: UART0 Divisor Latch MSB register (U0DLM address 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 1) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Table 138: UARTn Fractional Divider Register (U0FDR address 0xE000 C028, U2FDR - 0xE007 8028,
U3FDR - 0xE007 C028) bit description . . . . .132
Table 139. Fractional Divider setting look-up table . . . . .135
Table 140. UART0 Interrupt Enable Register (U0IER address 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 0) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Table 141: UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (U0IIR address 0xE000 C008, read only) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Table 142: UART0 interrupt handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Table 143: UART0 FIFO Control Register (U0FCR - address
0xE000 C008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Table 144: UART0 Line Control Register (U0LCR - address
0xE000 C00C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Table 145: UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR - address
0xE000 C014, read only) bit description. . . . .140
Table 146: UART0 Scratch Pad Register (U0SCR - address
0xE000 C01C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Table 147: Auto-baud Control Register (U0ACR 0xE000 C020) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Table 148: UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER address 0xE000 C030) bit description . . . . . .145
Table 149. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers. . . . . . .147
Table 150. UART1 pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Table 151. UART1 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Table 152. UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Read
Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Table 153. UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Write
Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Table 154: UART1 Divisor Latch LSB register (U1DLL address 0xE001 C000, when DLAB = 1) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Table 155: UART0 Divisor Latch MSB register (U1DLM address 0xE001 C004, when DLAB = 1) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Table 156. UART1 Fractional Divider Register (U1FDR address 0xE001 0028) bit description . . . . . .152
Table 157. Fractional Divider setting look-up table . . . . .155
Table 158. UART1 Interrupt Enable Register (U1IER address 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 0) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Table 159. UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR address 0xE001 0008, read only) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Table 160. UART1 interrupt handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Table 161. UART1 FIFO Control Register (U1FCR - address
0xE001 0008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
UM10114
User manual
Table 162. UART1 Line Control Register (U1LCR - address
0xE001 000C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 163. UART1 Modem Control Register (U1MCR address 0xE001 0010) bit description . . . . . . 160
Table 164. Modem status interrupt generation . . . . . . . . 162
Table 165. UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR - address
0xE001 0014, read only) bit description. . . . . 163
Table 166. UART1 Modem Status Register (U1MSR address 0xE001 0018) bit description . . . . . . 164
Table 167. UART1 Scratch Pad Register (U1SCR - address
0xE001 0014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table 168. Auto-baud Control Register (U1ACR 0xE001 0020) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Table 169. UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER address 0xE001 0030) bit description . . . . . . 168
Table 170. I2C Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Table 171. I2CCONSET used to configure Master mode 172
Table 172. I2CONSET used to configure Slave mode . . 173
Table 173. I2C register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Table 174. I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET - address
0xE001 C000) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Table 175. I2C Control Set register (I2CONCLR - address
0xE001 C018) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Table 176. I2C Status register (I2STAT - address 0xE001) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Table 177. I2C Data register (I2DAT - address 0xE001 C008)
bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Table 178. I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR - address
0xE001 C00C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Table 179. I2C SCL High Duty Cycle register (I2SCLH address 0xE001 C010) bit description . . . . . . 182
Table 180. I2C SCL Low Duty Cycle register (I2SCLL address 0xE001 C014) bit description . . . . . . 183
Table 181. Example I2C clock rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Table 182. Abbreviations used to describe an I2C
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table 183. I2CONSET used to initialize Master Transmitter
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table 184. I2CADR usage in Slave Receiver mode . . . . 185
Table 185. I2CONSET used to initialize Slave Receiver
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Table 186. Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Table 187. Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Table 188. Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Table 189. Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Table 190. Miscellaneous States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Table 191. LPC21xx/22xx SPI configurations. . . . . . . . . 208
Table 192. SPI data to clock phase relationship . . . . . . . 210
Table 193. SPI pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Table 194. SPI register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Table 195. SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - address
0xE002 0000 and S1SPCR - address
0xE003 0000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Table 196. SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - address
0xE002 0004 and S1SPSR - address
0xE003 0004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Table 197. SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - address
0xE002 0008, S1SPDR - address 0xE003 0008)
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
371 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Table 198. SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR - address
0xE002 000C and S1SPCCR - address
0xE003 000C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Table 199. SPI Interrupt Register (S0SPINT - address
0xE002 001C and S1SPINT - address
0xE003 001C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Table 200. SSP pin descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Table 201. SSP Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Table 202: SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - address
0xE005 C000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Table 203: SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 - address
0xE005 C004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Table 204: SSP Data Register (SSPDR - address
0xE005 C008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Table 205: SSP Status Register (SSPSR - address
0xE005 C00C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Table 206: SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR address 0xE005 C010) bit description . . . . . .229
Table 207: SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear Register
(SSPIMSC - address 0xE005 CF014) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Table 208: SSP Raw Interrupt Status Register (SSPRIS address 0xE005 C018) bit description . . . . . .230
Table 209: SSP Masked Interrupt Status Register (SSPMIS
-address 0xE005 C01C) bit description . . . . .231
Table 210: SSP interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR - address
0xE005 C020) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Table 211. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers for external
event counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Table 212. Timer/Counter pin description . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Table 213. TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1
register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Table 214: Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR - address
0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR - address
0xE000 8000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Table 215: Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR address 0xE000 4004 and TIMER1: T1TCR address 0xE000 8004) bit description . . . . . .237
Table 216: Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0:
T0CTCR - address 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1:
T1CTCR - address 0xE000 8070) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Table 217: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR address 0xE000 8014) bit description . . . . . .239
Table 218: Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR
- address 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR address 0xE000 8028) bit description . . . . . .240
Table 219: External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR
- address 0xE000 403C and TIMER1: T1EMR address0xE000 803C) bit description. . . . . . .241
Table 220. External match control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Table 221. Set and reset inputs for PWM Flip-Flops . . . .248
Table 222. Pin summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Table 223. Pulse Width Modulator Register Map . . . . . .250
Table 224: PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - address
0xE001 4000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
UM10114
User manual
Table 225: PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR address 0xE001 4004 ) bit description. . . . . . 252
Table 226: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR address 0xE000 8014) bit description . . . . . . 253
Table 227: PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - address
0xE001 404C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Table 228: PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER - address
0xE001 4050) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Table 229. Watchdog register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Table 230. Watchdog operating modes selection . . . . . . 259
Table 231: Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD - address
0xE000 0000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table 232: Watchdog Timer Constant register (WDTC address 0xE000 0004) bit description . . . . . . 260
Table 233: Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED - address
0xE000 0008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table 234: Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV - address
0xE000 000C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table 235. Real Time Clock (RTC) register map . . . . . . 263
Table 236. Miscellaneous registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Table 237: Interrupt Location Register (ILR - address
0xE002 4000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Table 238: Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR - address
0xE002 4004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Table 239: Clock Control Register (CCR - address
0xE002 4008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Table 240: Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR address 0xE002 400C) bit description . . . . . . 266
Table 241: Alarm Mask Register (AMR - address
0xE002 4010) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Table 242: Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 - address
0xE002 4014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Table 243: Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 - address
0xE002 4018) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Table 244: Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 - address
0xE002 401C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Table 245. Time counter relationships and values . . . . . 268
Table 246. Time counter registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Table 247. Alarm registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Table 248. Reference clock divider registers . . . . . . . . . 270
Table 249: Prescaler Integer register (PREINT - address
0xE002 4080) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Table 250: Prescaler Integer register (PREFRAC - address
0xE002 4084) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Table 251. Prescaler cases where the Integer Counter
reload value is incremented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Table 252. CAN interfaces, pins, and register base
addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Table 253. CAN Pin descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 254. Memory map of the CAN block . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 255. CAN acceptance filter and central CAN
registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Table 256. CAN1, CAN2, CAN3, CAN4 controller register
map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Table 257. Mode register (MOD: CAN1MOD - address
0xE004 4000, CAN2MOD - address
0xE004 8000, CAN3MOD - address 0x004 C000,
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
372 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
CAN4MOD - address 0x005 0000) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Table 258. Command register (CMR: CAN1CMR- address
0xE004 4004, CAN2CMR - address
0xE004 8004, CAN3CMR - address 0x004 C004,
CAN4CMR - address 0x005 0004) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Table 259. Global Status Register (GSR: CAN1GSR address 0xE004 0008, CAN2GSR - address
0xE004 8008, CAN3GSR - address 0xE004
C008, CAN4GSR address 0xE005 0008) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Table 260. Interrupt and Capture register (ICR: CR:
CAN1ICR- address 0xE004 400C, CAN2ICR 0xE004 address 800C, CAN3ICR - address
0xE004 C00C, CAN4ICR - address 0xE005
000C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Table 261. Interrupt Enable register (IER: CAN1IER address 0xE004 4010, CAN2IER - address
0xE004 8010, CAN3IER - address 0xE004 C010,
CAN4IER - address 0xE005 0010) bit description
283
Table 262. Bus Timing Register (BTR: CAN1BTR - address
0xE004 4014, CAN2BTR - address 0xE004 8014,
CAN3BTR - address 0xE004 C014, CAN4BTR address 0xE005 0014) bit description . . . . . .284
Table 263. Error Warning Limit register (EWL: CAN1EWL address 0xE004 4018, CAN2EWL - address
0xE004 8018, CAN3EWL - address 0xE004
C018, CAN4EWL - address 0xE005 0018) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Table 264. Status Register (SR - CAN1SR 0xE004 401C,
CAN2SR - 0xE004 801C, CAN3SR - 0xE004
C01C, CAN4SR - 0xE005 001C) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Table 265. Receive Frame Status register (RFS - CAN1RFS
- address 0xE004 4020, CAN2RFS - address
0xE004 8020, CAN3RFS - address 0xE004 C020,
CAN4RFS - address 0xE005 0020) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Table 266. Receive Identifier register when FF = 0 (RID:
CAN1RID - address 0xE004 4024, CAN2RID address 0xE004 8024, CAN3RID - address
0xE004 C024, CAN4RID - address 0xE005 0024)
bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Table 267. Receive Identifier register when FF = 1 . . . . .287
Table 268. Receive Data register A (RDA: CAN1RDA address 0xE004 4028, CAN2RDA - address
0xE004 8028, CAN3RDA - address 0xE004
C028, CAN4RDA - address 0xE005 0028) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Table 269. Receive Data register B (RDB: CAN1RDB address 0xE004 402C, CAN2RDB - address
0xE004 802C, CAN3RDB - address 0xE004
C02C, CAN4RDB - address 0xE005 002C) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Table 270. Transmit Frame Information register (TFI1, 2, 3 CAN1TF1n - addresses 0xE004 4030, 40, 50;
UM10114
User manual
CAN2TFIn - addresses 0xE004 8030, 40, 50;
CAN3TFIn - addresses 0xE004 C030, 40, 50;
CAN4TFIn - addresses 0xE005 0030, 40, 50) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Table 271. Transfer Identifier register when FF=0 (TID1, 2, 3:
CAN1TIDn - addresses 0xE004 4034, 44, 54;
CAN2TIDn - addresses 0xE004 8034, 44, 54;
CAN3TIDn - addresses 0xE004 C034, 44, 54;
CAN4TIDn - addresses 0xE005 0034, 44, 54) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Table 272. Transfer Identifier register when FF = 1 . . . . 289
Table 273. Transmit Data register A (TDA1, 2, 3: CAN1TDAn
- addresses 0xE004 4038, 48, 58; CAN2TDAn addresses 0xE004 8038, 48, 58; CAN3TDAn addresses 0xE004 C038, 48, 58; CAN4TDAn addresses 0xE005 0038, 48, 58) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Table 274. Transmit Data register B (TDB1, 2, 3: CAN1TDBn
- addresses 0xE004 403C, 4C, 5C; CAN2TDBn addresses 0xE004 803C, 4C, 5C; CAN3TDBn addresses 0xE004 C03C, 4C, 5C; CAN4TDBn addresses 0xE005 003C, 4C, 5C) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Table 275. Central Transit Status Register (CANTxSR address 0xE004 0000) bit description . . . . . . 291
Table 276. Central Receive Status register (CANRxSR address 0xE004 0004) bit description . . . . . . 292
Table 277. Central Miscellaneous Status Register (CANMSR
- address 0xE004 0008) bit description . . . . . 292
Table 278. Acceptance Filter Mode Register (AFMR address 0xE003 C000) bit description . . . . . . 295
Table 279. Standard Frame Individual Start Address register
(SFF_sa - address 0xE003 C004) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Table 280. Standard Frame Group Start Address register
(SFF_GRP_sa - address 0xE003 C008) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Table 281. Extended Frame Start Address register (EFF_sa
- address 0xE003 C00C) bit description . . . . 296
Table 282. Extended Frame Group Start Address register
(EFF_GRP_sa - address 0xE003 C010) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Table 283. End of AF Tables register (ENDofTable - address
0xE003 C014) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Table 284. LUT Error Address register (LUTerrAd - address
0xE003 C018) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Table 285. LUT Error register (LUTerr - address
0xE003 C01C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Table 286. Global FullCAN Enable register (FCANIE address 0xE003 C020) bit description . . . . . . 298
Table 287. FullCAN Interrupt and Capture register 0
(FCANIC0 - address 0xE003 C024) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Table 288. FullCAN Interrupt and Capture register 1
(FCANIC1 - address 0xE003 C028) bit
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Table 289. Example of acceptance filter tables and ID index
values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
373 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
Table 290. Format of automatically stored Rx message .300
Table 291. LPC21xx/22xx part-specific registers. . . . . . .302
Table 292. ADC pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Table 293. ADC registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Table 294. ADC Control Register (ADCR - address
0xE003 4000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Table 295. ADC Global Data Register (ADGDR - address
0xE003 4004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Table 296. ADC Status Register (ADSTAT - address
0xE003 4030) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Table 297. ADC Interrupt Enable Register (ADINTEN address 0xE003 400C) bit description . . . . . .307
Table 298. ADC Data Registers (ADDR0 to ADDR7 - 0xE003
4010 to 0xE003 402C) bit description . . . . . .308
Table 299. LPC21xx and LPC22xx flash memory
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Table 300. Flash sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Table 301. Code Read Protection levels . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Table 302. Code Read Protection hardware/software
interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Table 303. Code read protection options for different boot
loader revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Table 304. Boot loader revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Table 305. ISP command summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Table 306. ISP Unlock command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Table 307. ISP Set Baud Rate command . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Table 308. Correlation between possible ISP baudrates and
external crystal frequency (in MHz) . . . . . . . .321
Table 309. ISP Echo command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Table 310. ISP Write to RAM command . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Table 311. ISP Read memory command . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Table 312. ISP Prepare sector(s) for write operation
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Table 313. ISP Copy command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Table 314. ISP Go command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Table 315. ISP Erase sector command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Table 316. ISP Blank check sector command . . . . . . . . .325
Table 317. ISP Read Part Identification number
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Table 318. LPC21xx/22xx Part identification numbers . .325
Table 319. ISP Read Boot code version number
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Table 320. ISP Compare command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Table 321. ISP Return codes Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Table 322. IAP command summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Table 323. IAP Prepare sector(s) for write operation
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Table 324. IAP Copy RAM to Flash command . . . . . . . .330
Table 325. IAP Erase sector(s) command . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Table 326. IAP Blank check sector(s) command . . . . . . .331
Table 327. IAP Read Part Identification command . . . . .331
Table 328. IAP Read Boot code version number
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Table 329. IAP Compare command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Table 330. IAP Status codes Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Table 331. ISP Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Table 332. ISP Unlock command description . . . . . . . . .339
Table 333. ISP Set Baud Rate command description . . .339
UM10114
User manual
Table 334. Correlation between possible ISP baudrates and
external crystal frequency (in MHz) . . . . . . . . 339
Table 335. ISP Echo command description . . . . . . . . . . 340
Table 336. ISP Write to RAM command description . . . . 340
Table 337. ISP Read Memory command description . . . 341
Table 338. ISP Go command description . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Table 339. ISP Read Part ID command description . . . . 341
Table 340. LPC22xx Part identification numbers . . . . . . 342
Table 341. ISP Read Boot Code version command
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Table 342. ISP Compare command description . . . . . . . 342
Table 343. ISP Return Codes Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Table 344. IAP Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Table 345. IAP Read Part ID command description . . . . 345
Table 346. IAP Read Boot Code version command
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Table 347. IAP Compare command description . . . . . . . 346
Table 348. IAP Status Codes Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Table 349. EmbeddedICE Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Table 350. EmbeddedICE Logic registers . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Table 351. ETM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Table 352. ETM Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Table 353. ETM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Table 354. RealMonitor stack requirement . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Table 355. Acronym list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
374 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
26.4 Figures
Fig 1.
Fig 2.
Fig 3.
Fig 4.
Fig 5.
Fig 6.
Fig 7.
Fig 8.
Fig 9.
Fig 10.
Fig 11.
Fig 12.
Fig 13.
Fig 14.
Fig 15.
Fig 16.
Fig 17.
Fig 18.
Fig 19.
Fig 20.
Fig 21.
Fig 22.
Fig 23.
Fig 24.
Fig 25.
Fig 26.
Fig 27.
Fig 28.
Fig 29.
Fig 30.
Fig 31.
Fig 32.
Fig 33.
Fig 34.
Fig 35.
Fig 36.
Fig 37.
Fig 38.
LPC21xx and LPC22xx block diagram . . . . . . . .12
LPC21xx and LPC22xx system memory map . . .19
Peripheral memory map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
AHB peripheral map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Map of lower memory is showing re-mapped and
re-mappable areas for a part with on-chip flash
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Simplified block diagram of the Memory Accelerator
Module (MAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
32 bit bank external memory interfaces (BGFGx Bits
MW = 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
16 bit bank external memory interfaces (BCFGx bits
MW = 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
8 bit bank external memory interface (BCFGx bits
MW = 00 and RBLE = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
External memory read access (WST1 = 0 and
WST1 = 1 examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
External memory write access (WST2 = 0 and
WST2 = 1 examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
External burst memory read access (WST1 = 0 and
WST1 = 1 examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Block diagram of the Vectored Interrupt
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Oscillator modes and models: a) slave mode of
operation, b) oscillation mode of operation, c)
external crystal model used for CX1/X2
evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
FOSC selection algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
External interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
PLL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Startup sequence diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Reset block diagram including the wakeup timer.81
APB divider connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
LPC21xx pin configuration (LQFP64 pin
package) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
LQFP144 pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
TFBGA144 pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Illustration of the fast and slow GPIO access and
output showing 3.5 x increase of the pin output
frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Algorithm for setting UART dividers. . . . . . . . . .134
Autobaud a) mode 0 and b) mode 1 waveform..144
UART0 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Algorithm for setting UART dividers. . . . . . . . . .154
Auto-RTS functional timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Auto-CTS functional timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Autobaud a) mode 0 and b) mode 1 waveform .167
UART1 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
I2C-bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Format in the Master Transmitter mode. . . . . . .172
Format of Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . .173
A Master Receiver switches to Master Transmitter
after sending Repeated START . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Format of Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Format of Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . .174
UM10114
User manual
Fig 39.
Fig 40.
Fig 41.
Fig 42.
Fig 43.
Fig 44.
Fig 45.
Fig 46.
Fig 47.
Fig 48.
Fig 49.
Fig 50.
Fig 51.
Fig 52.
Fig 53.
Fig 54.
Fig 55.
Fig 56.
Fig 57.
Fig 58.
Fig 59.
Fig 60.
Fig 61.
Fig 62.
Fig 63.
Fig 64.
Fig 65.
Fig 66.
Fig 67.
Fig 68.
Fig 69.
Fig 70.
Fig 71.
Fig 72.
Fig 73.
Fig 74.
Fig 75.
Fig 76.
Fig 77.
I2C serial interface block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Arbitration procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Serial clock synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Format and States in the Master Transmitter
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Format and States in the Master Receiver
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Format and States in the Slave Receiver mode 189
Format and States in the Slave Transmitter
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Simultaneous repeated START conditions from two
masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Forced access to a busy I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Recovering from a bus obstruction caused by a low
level on SDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
SPI data transfer format (CPHA = 0 and
CPHA = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
SPI block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format:
a) single frame transfer and b)
continuous/back-to-back two frames. . . . . . . . . 220
Motorola SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and
CPHA=0 (a) single transfer and b) continuous
transfer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and CPHA=1. . 222
SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 0 ( a)
single and b) continuous transfer). . . . . . . . . . . 223
SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 1224
Microwire frame format (single transfer) . . . . . . 225
Microwire frame format (continuous transfers) . 226
Microwire setup and hold details. . . . . . . . . . . . 226
A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both
interrupt and reset on match are enabled . . . . . 242
A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both
interrupt and stop on match are enabled . . . . . 243
Timer block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
PWM block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Sample PWM waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Watchdog block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
RTC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
RTC prescaler block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Entry in FullCAN and individual standard identifier
tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Entry in standard identifier range table . . . . . . . 293
Entry in either extended identifier table . . . . . . . 294
Detailed example of acceptance filter tables and ID
index values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Semaphore procedure for reading an auto-stored
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Map of lower memory after reset for 256 kB flash
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Boot process flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
IAP parameter passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Map of the microcontroller’s memory after reset335
Boot process flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
IAP parameter passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
375 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
Fig 78. EmbeddedICE debug environment block
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Fig 79. ETM debug environment block diagram . . . . . .355
Fig 80. RealMonitor components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Fig 81. RealMonitor as a state machine . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Fig 82. Exception handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
UM10114
User manual
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
376 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
26.5 Contents
Chapter 1: Introductory information
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to read this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legacy features common to all LPC21xx and
LPC22xx parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPC2109/2119/2129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPC2114/2124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPC2194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
7
8
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
LPC2210/2220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LPC2212/2214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LPC2290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LPC2292/2294 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Architectural overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ARM7TDMI-S processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
On-chip flash memory system. . . . . . . . . . . . 14
On-chip Static RAM (SRAM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
Memory map concepts and operating modes 22
Memory re-mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Prefetch Abort and Data Abort Exceptions . 24
Chapter 2: LPC21xx/22xx Memory map
2.1
2.2
2.3
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Memory maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LPC21xx and LPC22xx memory re-mapping and
boot block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Chapter 3: LPC21xx/22xx Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.5
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAM blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash memory bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction latches and data latches . . . . . . . .
Flash programming Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAM operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
MAM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAM Control Register (MAMCR 0xE01F C000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAM Timing register (MAMTIM 0xE01F C004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAM usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
30
31
Chapter 4: LPC21xx/22xx External Memory Controller (EMC)
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bank Configuration Registers 0-3 (BCFG0-3 0xFFE0 0000 to 0xFFE0 000C) . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Byte Lane Control (RBLE) . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
32
33
33
34
35
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.6
4.7
4.8
Accesses to memory banks constructed from 8-bit
or non byte-partitioned memory devices . . . . 35
Accesses to memory banks constructed from 16
or 32 bit memory devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
External memory interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Typical bus sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
External memory selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Chapter 5: LPC21xx/22xx Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIC registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt 0xFFFF F018). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Interrupt Clear Register
(VICSoftIntClear - 0xFFFF F01C). . . . . . . . . .
UM10114
User manual
42
43
43
44
46
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
46
5.5.7
46
Raw Interrupt Status Register (VICRawIntr 0xFFFF F008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Interrupt Enable Register (VICIntEnable 0xFFFF F010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Interrupt Enable Clear Register (VICIntEnClear 0xFFFF F014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Interrupt Select Register (VICIntSelect 0xFFFF F00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IRQ Status Register (VICIRQStatus 0xFFFF F000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
377 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
5.5.8
5.5.9
5.5.10
5.5.11
5.5.12
5.5.13
FIQ Status Register (VICFIQStatus 0xFFFF F004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Vector Control registers 0-15 (VICvectCntl0-15 0xFFFF F200-23C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Vector Address registers 0-15 (VICVectAddr0-15 0xFFFF F100-13C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr
- 0xFFFF F034) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Vector Address register (VICVectAddr 0xFFFF F030). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Protection Enable register (VICProtection 0xFFFF F020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.6
5.7
5.7.1
Interrupt sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Spurious interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Details and case studies on spurious
interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.7.1.1
Workaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.7.1.1.1 Solution 1: Test for an IRQ received during a write
to disable IRQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.7.1.1.2 Solution 2: Disable IRQs and FIQs using separate
writes to the CPSR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.7.1.1.3 Solution 3: Re-enable FIQs at the beginning of the
IRQ handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.8
VIC usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 6: LPC21xx/22xx System control
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
6.7
6.7.1
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.9
6.9.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Summary of system control block functions 59
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Crystal oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
External interrupt inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT 0xE01F C140) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
External interrupt Wake-up register (EXTWAKE 0xE01F C144) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE 0xE01F C148) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR 0xE01F C14C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Multiple external interrupt pins . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Other system controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
System Control and Status flags register (SCS 0xE01F C1A0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Memory mapping control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP 0xE01F C040) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Memory mapping control usage notes . . . . . . 70
Phase Locked Loop (PLL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.9.2
PLL Control register (PLLCON 0xE01F C080) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.9.3
PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG 0xE01F C084) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.9.4
PLL Status register (PLLSTAT 0xE01F C088) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.9.5
PLL Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.9.6
PLL Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.9.7
PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - 0xE01F C08C) 74
6.9.8
PLL and Power-down mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.9.9
PLL frequency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.9.10
Procedure for determining PLL settings. . . . . 75
6.9.11
PLL configuring examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.10
Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.10.1
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.10.2
Power Control register (PCON 0xE01F COCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.10.3
Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP 0xE01F COC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.10.4
Power control usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.11
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.12
APB divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.12.1
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.12.2
APB divider register (APBDIV - 0xE01F C100) 82
6.13
Wakeup timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.14
Code security vs. debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chapter 7: LPC21xx/22xx Pin configuration
7.1
7.2
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Pin configuration for 64-pin packages. . . . . . 86
7.3
Pin configuration for 144-pin packages . . . . 90
Chapter 8: LPC21xx/22xx Pin connect block
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.6.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin function Select register values . . . . . . .
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 0xE002 C000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UM10114
User manual
100
100
100
101
101
101
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 0xE002 C004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
LPC21xx Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2
- 0xE002 C014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
LPC22xx Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2
- 0xE002 C014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Boot control for LPC22xx parts . . . . . . . . . . 109
102
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
378 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
Chapter 9: LPC21xx/22xx General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
GPIO port Direction register IODIR (IO0DIR 0xE002 8008, IO1DIR - 0xE002 8018, IO2DIR 0xE002 8028, IO3DIR - 0xE002 8038, FIO0DIR 0x3FFF C000, FIO1DIR - 0x3FFF C020) . . . 115
GPIO port output Set register IOSET (IO0SET 0xE002 8004, IO1SET - 0xE002 8014, IO2SET 0xE002 8024, IO3SET - 0xE002 8034, FIO0SET 0x3FFF C018, FIO1SET - 0x3FFF C038) . . 117
GPIO port output Clear register IOCLR (IO0CLR 0xE002 800C, IO1CLR - 0xE002 801C, IO2CLR 0xE002 802C, IO3CLR - 0xE002 803C, FIO0CLR
- 0x3FFF C01C, FIO1CLR - 0x3FFF C03C). 119
9.5.4
9.5.5
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
GPIO port Pin value register IOPIN (IO0PIN 0xE002 8000, IO1PIN - 0xE002 8010, IO2PIN 0xE002 8020, IO3PIN - 0xE002 8030, FIO0PIN 0x3FFF C014, FIO1PIN - 0x3FFF C034). . . 121
Fast GPIO port Mask register
FIOMASK(FIO0MASK - 0x3FFF C010,
FIO1MASK - 0x3FFF C030) . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
GPIO usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Example 1: sequential accesses to IOSET and
IOCLR affecting the same GPIO pin/bit . . . . 124
Example 2: an immediate output of 0s and 1s on
a GPIO port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Writing to IOSET/IOCLR .vs. IOPIN. . . . . . . 125
Output signal frequency considerations when
using the legacy and enhanced GPIO
registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Chapter 10: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 0 (UART0)
10.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10.2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.3
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.4
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.4.1
UART0 Receiver Buffer register (U0RBR 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Read Only). 131
10.4.2
UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Write Only) . 131
10.4.3
UART0 Divisor Latch registers (U0DLL 0xE000 C000 and U0DLM - 0xE000 C004, when
DLAB = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.4.4
UART0 Fractional Divider Register (U0FDR 0xE000 C028). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.4.4.1 Baudrate calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.4.4.1.1 Example 1: PCLK = 14.7456 MHz,
BR = 9600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.4.4.1.2 Example 2: PCLK = 12 MHz, BR = 115200 . 135
10.4.5
UART0 Interrupt Enable Register (U0IER 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 0) . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.4.6
UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (U0IIR 0xE000 C008, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.4.7
UART0 FIFO Control Register (U0FCR 0xE000 C008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.4.8
UART0 Line Control Register (U0LCR 0xE000 C00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.4.9
UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR 0xE000 C014, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.4.10 UART0 Scratch Pad Register (U0SCR 0xE000 C01C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
10.4.11 UART0 Auto-baud Control Register (U0ACR 0xE000 C020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
10.4.11.1 Auto-baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10.4.11.2 Auto-baud modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.4.12 UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER 0xE000 C030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.5
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Chapter 11: LPC21xx/22xx Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 1 (UART1)
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.4.3
11.4.4
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Read Only) . 151
UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Write Only) . 151
UART1 Divisor Latch registers 0 and 1 (U1DLL 0xE001 0000 and U1DLM - 0xE001 0004, when
DLAB = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
UART1 Fractional Divider Register (U1FDR 0xE001 0028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
UM10114
User manual
11.4.4.1 Baudrate calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
11.4.4.1.1 Example 1: PCLK = 14.7456 MHz,
BR = 9600 Bd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
11.4.4.1.2 Example 2: PCLK = 12 MHz,
BR = 115200 Bd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
11.4.5
UART1 Interrupt Enable Register (U1IER 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 0) . . . . . . . . . . 155
11.4.6
UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR 0xE001 0008, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
11.4.7
UART1 FIFO Control Register (U1FCR 0xE001 0008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
11.4.8
UART1 Line Control Register (U1LCR 0xE001 000C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
379 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
11.4.9
UART1 Modem Control Register (U1MCR 0xE001 0010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.9.1 Auto-flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.9.1.1 Auto-RTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.9.1.2 Auto-CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.10 UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR 0xE001 0014, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.11 UART1 Modem Status Register (U1MSR 0xE001 0018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.12
160
161
161
161
11.4.13
162
11.4.14
11.4.15
11.4.16
164
11.5
UART1 Scratch Pad Register (U1SCR 0xE001 001C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
UART1 Auto-baud Control Register (U1ACR 0xE001 0020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Auto-baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Auto-baud modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER 0xE001 0030). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Chapter 12: LPC21xx/22xx I2C interface
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.6.1
12.6.2
12.6.3
12.6.4
12.7
12.7.1
12.7.2
12.7.3
12.7.4
12.7.5
12.7.6
12.7.7
12.7.8
12.7.9
12.8
12.8.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
I2C operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
I2C Implementation and operation . . . . . . . . 175
Input filters and output stages. . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Address Register, I2ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Comparator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Shift register, I2DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Arbitration and synchronization logic . . . . . . 177
Serial clock generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Timing and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Control register, I2CONSET and I2CONCLR 178
Status decoder and Status register. . . . . . . . 178
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET 0xE001 C000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
12.8.2
I2C Control Clear register (I2CONCLR 0xE001 C018). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
12.8.3
I2C Status register (I2STAT - 0xE001 C004). 182
12.8.4
I2C Data register (I2DAT - 0xE001 C008). . . 182
12.8.5
I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR 0xE001 C00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
12.8.6
I2C SCL High duty cycle register (I2SCLH 0xE001 C010). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
12.8.7
I2C SCL Low duty cycle register (I2SCLL 0xE001 C014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.8.8
Selecting the appropriate I2C data rate and duty
cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.9
Details of I2C operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.9.1
Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
12.9.2
Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12.9.3
Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12.9.4
Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12.9.5
Miscellaneous States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.9.6
I2STAT = 0xF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.9.7
I2STAT = 0x00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.9.8
Some special cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
UM10114
User manual
12.9.9
Simultaneous repeated START conditions from
two masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12.9.10 Data transfer after loss of arbitration . . . . . . 197
12.9.11 Forced access to the I2C-bus. . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12.9.12 I2C-bus obstructed by a low level on SCL or
SDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.9.13 Bus error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.9.14 I2C State service routines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12.9.15 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12.9.16 I2C interrupt service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.9.17 The State service routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.9.18 Adapting State services to an application . . 200
12.10 Software example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.10.1 Initialization routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.10.2 Start Master Transmit function . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.10.3 Start Master Receive function . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.10.4 I2C interrupt routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.10.5 Non mode specific States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.10.6 State: 0x00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.10.7 Master States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.10.8 State: 0x08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.10.9 State: 0x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.10.10 Master Transmitter States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.10.11 State: 0x18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.10.12 State: 0x20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.10.13 State: 0x28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.10.14 State: 0x30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.10.15 State: 0x38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.10.16 Master Receive States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.10.17 State: 0x40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.10.18 State: 0x48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.10.19 State: 0x50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.10.20 State: 0x58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.10.21 Slave Receiver States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.10.22 State: 0x60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.10.23 State: 0x68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.10.24 State: 0x70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.10.25 State: 0x78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.10.26 State: 0x80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.10.27 State: 0x88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.10.28 State: 0x90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.10.29 State: 0x98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.10.30 State: 0xA0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.10.31 Slave Transmitter States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.10.32 State: 0xA8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.10.33 State: 0xB0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
380 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
12.10.34 State: 0xB8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.10.35 State: 0xC0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
12.10.36 State: 0xC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Chapter 13: LPC21xx/22xx SPI
13.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.1
SPI overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.2
SPI data transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3
SPI peripheral details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.2 Master operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.3 Slave operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.4 Exception conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.4.1 Read overrun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.4.2 Write collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.4.3 Mode fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3.4.4 Slave abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
209
209
209
209
211
211
211
212
212
212
212
213
213
13.4
13.5
13.5.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Bus description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14.4.2
SPI frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14.4.2.1 Clock Polarity (CPOL) and Phase (CPHA)
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14.4.2.2 SPI Format with CPOL = 0,CPHA = 0 . . . . . 221
14.4.2.3 SPI format with CPOL = 0,CPHA = 1 . . . . . . 222
14.4.2.4 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 0 . . . . . . 223
14.4.2.5 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 1 . . . . . . 224
14.4.3
Semiconductor Microwire frame format . . . . 224
14.4.3.1 Setup and hold time requirements on CS with
respect to SK in Microwire mode . . . . . . . . . 226
14.5
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
14.5.1
13.5.2
13.5.3
13.5.4
13.5.5
13.6
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - 0xE002 0000
and S1SPCR - 0xE003 0000) . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - 0xE002 0004 and
S1SPSR - 0xE003 0004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - 0xE002 0008,
S1SPDR - 0xE003 0008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR 0xE002 000C and S1SPCCR 0xE003 000C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
SPI Interrupt Register (S0SPINT - 0xE002 001C
and S1SPINT - 0xE003 001C). . . . . . . . . . . 216
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Chapter 14: LPC21xx/22xx SSP interface
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.4.1
14.5.2
14.5.3
14.5.4
14.5.5
14.5.6
14.5.7
14.5.8
14.5.9
SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 0xE005 C000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 0xE005 C004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
SSP Data Register (SSPDR - 0xE005 C008) 229
SSP Status Register (SSPSR 0xE005 C00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR 0xE005 C010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear Register
(SSPIMSC - 0xE005 C014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
SSP Raw Interrupt Status Register (SSPRIS 0xE005 C018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
SSP Masked Interrupt Register (SSPMIS 0xE005 C01C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
SSP Interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR 0xE005 C020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Chapter 15: LPC21xx/22xx Timer 0/1
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.6.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR 0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR 0xE000 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
15.6.2
Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR 0xE000 4004 and TIMER1: T1TCR 0xE000 8004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
15.6.3
Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0:
T0CTCR - 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1: T1CTCR 0xE000 8070) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
UM10114
User manual
15.6.4
15.6.5
15.6.6
15.6.7
15.6.8
15.6.9
Timer Counter (TC, TIMER0: T0TC 0xE000 4008 and TIMER1: T1TC 0xE000 8008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Prescale Register (PR, TIMER0: T0PR 0xE000 400C and TIMER1:
T1PR - 0xE000 800C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Prescale Counter Register (PC, TIMER0: T0PC 0xE000 4010 and TIMER1: T1PC 0xE000 8010). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Match Registers (MR0 - MR3) . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR 0xE000 8014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Capture Registers (CR0 - CR3) . . . . . . . . . . 240
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
381 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
15.6.10
Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR
- 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR 0xE000 8028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
15.6.11
15.7
15.8
External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR
- 0xE000 403C; and TIMER1: T1EMR 0xE000 803C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Example timer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 16: LPC21xx/22xx Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
16.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.1
Rules for Single Edge Controlled PWM
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.2
Rules for Double Edge Controlled PWM
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.4
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5.1
PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR 0xE001 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5.2
PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR 0xE001 4004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
245
245
248
249
249
249
16.5.3
16.5.4
16.5.5
16.5.6
16.5.7
16.5.8
251
16.5.9
252
PWM Timer Counter (PWMTC 0xE001 4008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWM Prescale Register (PWMPR 0xE001 400C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWM Prescale Counter Register (PWMPC 0xE001 4010). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWM Match Registers (PWMMR0 PWMMR6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR 0xE001 4014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWM Control Register (PWMPCR 0xE001 404C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER 0xE001 4050). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
253
253
253
253
255
256
Chapter 17: LPC21xx/22xx WatchDog Timer (WDT)
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.5.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD 0xE000 0000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
258
258
258
259
259
17.5.2
17.5.3
17.5.4
17.6
Watchdog Timer Constant register (WDTC 0xE000 0004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED 0xE000 0008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV 0xE000 000C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
260
260
261
Chapter 18: LPC21xx/22xx Real-Time Clock (RTC)
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.5.1
18.5.2
18.5.3
18.5.4
18.5.5
18.5.6
18.5.7
18.5.8
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
RTC interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Miscellaneous register group . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Interrupt Location Register (ILR 0xE002 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR 0xE002 4004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Clock Control Register (CCR - 0xE002 4008) 266
Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR 0xE002 400C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Alarm Mask Register (AMR - 0xE002 4010). 266
Consolidated time registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
18.5.9
18.5.10
18.5.11
18.5.12
18.5.13
18.5.14
18.6
18.7
18.7.1
18.7.2
18.7.3
18.7.4
Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 0xE002 4014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 0xE002 4018). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 0xE002 401C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time counter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leap year calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm register group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTC usage notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference clock divider (prescaler) . . . . . .
Prescaler Integer register (PREINT 0xE002 4080). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prescaler Fraction register (PREFRAC 0xE002 4084). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of prescaler usage . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prescaler operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
267
268
268
269
269
269
270
270
270
271
272
Chapter 19: LPC21xx/22xx CAN controller and acceptance filter
19.1
19.2
19.3
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
CAN controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
UM10114
User manual
19.4
19.5
19.6
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Memory map of the CAN block . . . . . . . . . . 275
CAN controller registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
382 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
19.6.1
19.6.2
19.6.3
19.6.4
19.6.5
19.6.6
19.6.7
19.6.8
19.6.9
19.6.10
19.6.11
19.6.12
19.6.13
Mode Register (MOD: CAN1MOD - 0xE004 4000,
CAN2MOD - 0xE004 8000, CAN3MOD - 0x004
C000, CAN4MOD - 0x005 0000) . . . . . . . . . 278
Command Register (CMR: CAN1CMR0xE004 4004, CAN2CMR - 0xE004 8004,
CAN3CMR - 0x004 C004, CAN4CMR - 0x005
0004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Global Status Register (GSR: CAN1GSR 0xE004 0008, CAN2GSR - 0xE004 8008,
CAN3GSR - 0xE004 C008, CAN4GSR 0xE005
0008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Interrupt and Capture Register (ICR: CAN1ICR0xE004 400C, CAN2ICR - 0xE004 800C,
CAN3ICR - 0xE004 C00C, CAN4ICR - 0xE005
000C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Interrupt Enable Register (IER: CAN1IER 0xE004 4010, CAN2IER 0xE004 8010, CAN3IER
- 0xE004 C010, CAN4IER - 0xE005 0010). . 283
Bus Timing Register (BTR: CAN1BTR 0xE004 4014, CAN2BTR - 0xE004 8014,
CAN3BTR - 0xE004 C014, CAN4BTR - 0xE005
0014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Error Warning Limit Register (EWL: CAN1EWL 0xE004 4018, CAN2EWL - 0xE004 8018,
CAN3EWL - 0xE004 C018, CAN4EWL - 0xE005
0018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Status Register (SR - CAN1SR 0xE004 401C,
CAN2SR - 0xE004 801C, CAN3SR - 0xE004
C01C, CAN4SR - 0xE005 001C) . . . . . . . . . 285
Receive Frame Status register (RFS - CAN1RFS
- 0xE004 4020, CAN2RFS - 0xE004 8020,
CAN3RFS - 0xE004 C020, CAN4RFS - 0xE005
0020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Receive Identifier register (RID - CAN1RID 0xE004 4024, CAN2RID - 0xE004 8024,
CAN3RID - 0xE004 C024, CAN4RID - 0xE005
0024) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Receive Data register A (RDA: CAN1RDA 0xE004 4028, CAN2RDA - 0xE004 8028,
CAN3RDA - 0xE004 C028, CAN4RDA - 0xE005
0028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Receive Data register B (RDB: CAN1RDB 0xE004 402C, CAN2RDB - 0xE004 802C,
CAN3RDB - 0xE004 C02C, CAN4RDB - 0xE005
002C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Transmit Frame Information register (TFI1, 2, 3 CAN1TF1n - 0xE004 4030, 40, 50; CAN2TFIn 0xE004 8030, 40, 50; CAN3TFIn - 0xE004 C030,
40, 50; CAN4TFIn - 0xE005 0030, 40, 50) . . 288
19.6.14
Transmit Identifier register (TID1, 2, 3 - CAN1TIDn
- 0xE004 4034, 44, 54; CAN2TIDn 0xE004 8034, 44, 54; CAN3TIDn - 0xE004 C034,
44, 54; CAN4TIDn - 0xE005 0034, 44, 54) . 288
19.6.15 Transmit Data register A (TDA1, 2, 3: CAN1TDAn
- 0xE004 4038, 48, 58; CAN2TDAn 0xE004 8038, 48, 58; CAN3TDAn - 0xE004 C038,
48, 58; CAN4TDAn - 0xE005 0038, 48, 58). 289
19.6.16 Transmit Data Register B (TDB1, 2, 3: CAN1TDBn
- 0xE004 403C, 4C, 5C; CAN2TDBn 0xE004 803C, 4C, 5C; CAN3TDBn - 0xE004
C03C, 4C, 5C; CAN4TDBn - 0xE005 003C, 4C,
5C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
19.7
CAN controller operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
19.7.1
Error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
19.7.2
Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
19.7.3
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
19.7.4
Transmit priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
19.8
Centralized CAN registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
19.8.1
Central Transmit Status Register (CANTxSR 0xE004 0000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
19.8.2
Central Receive Status Register (CANRxSR 0xE004 0004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
19.8.3
Central Miscellaneous Status Register (CANMSR
- 0xE004 0008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
19.9
Global acceptance filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
19.10 Acceptance filter registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
19.10.1 Acceptance Filter Mode Register (AFMR 0xE003 C000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
19.10.2 Standard Frame Individual Start Address register
(SFF_sa - 0xE003 C004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
19.10.3 Standard Frame Group Start Address Register
(SFF_GRP_sa - 0xE003 C008) . . . . . . . . . . 296
19.10.4 Extended Frame Start Address Register (EFF_sa
- 0xE003 C00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
19.10.5 Extended Frame Group Start Address Register
(EFF_GRP_sa - 0xE003 C010) . . . . . . . . . . 296
19.10.6 End of AF Tables register (ENDofTable 0xE003 C014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
19.10.7 LUT Error Address register (LUTerrAd 0xE003 C018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
19.10.8 LUT Error register (LUTerr - 0xE003 C01C) 297
19.10.9 Global FullCANInterrupt Enable register (FCANIE
- 0xE003 C020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
19.10.10 FullCAN Interrupt and Capture registers
(FCANIC0 - 0xE003 C024 and FCANIC1 0xE003 C028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
19.11 Examples of acceptance filter tables and ID
index values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
19.12 Fullcan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Chapter 20: LPC21xx/22xx Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UM10114
User manual
302
303
303
303
20.5
20.5.1
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
ADC Control Register (ADCR - 0xE003 4000) . .
305
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
383 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
20.5.2
20.5.3
20.5.4
ADC Global Data Register (ADGDR 0xE003 4004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
ADC Status Register (ADSTAT 0xE003 4030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
ADC Interrupt Enable Register (ADINTEN 0xE003 400C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
20.5.5
20.6
20.6.1
20.6.2
20.6.3
ADC Data Registers (ADDR0 to ADDR70xE003 4010 to 0xE003 402C) . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware-triggered conversion . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accuracy vs. digital receiver . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
308
308
309
309
Chapter 21: LPC21xx/22xx Flash memory controller
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
21.5.1
21.5.2
21.5.3
21.5.4
21.5.5
21.5.6
21.5.7
21.5.8
21.5.9
21.5.10
21.5.11
21.5.12
21.5.13
21.5.14
21.6
21.7
21.8
21.8.1
21.9
21.9.1
21.9.2
21.9.3
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash boot loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory map after any reset. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Criterion for valid user code . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP command format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP response format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP data format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP command abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupts during ISP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupts during IAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM used by ISP command handler . . . . . .
RAM used by IAP command handler . . . . . .
RAM used by RealMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot process flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sector numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash content protection mechanism . . . . .
Code Read Protection (CRP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot loader options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Baud Rate . . . . .
Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310
310
310
311
311
311
312
313
313
313
313
313
313
313
314
314
314
314
315
316
317
317
319
320
320
321
321
21.9.4
21.9.5
21.9.6
21.9.7
21.9.8
21.9.9
21.9.10
21.9.11
21.9.12
21.9.13
21.9.14
21.10
21.10.1
21.10.2
21.10.3
21.10.4
21.10.5
21.10.6
21.10.7
21.10.8
21.11
Write to RAM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Read memory . . . 322
Prepare sector(s) for write operation . . . . . . . . . . 323
Copy RAM to Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Erase sector(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Blank check sector(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Read Part Identification number . . . . . . . . . 325
Read Boot code version number . . . . . . . . . 326
Compare
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
ISP Return codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
IAP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Prepare sector(s) for write operation . . . . . . 329
Copy RAM to Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Erase sector(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Blank check sector(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Read Part Identification number . . . . . . . . . 331
Read Boot code version number . . . . . . . . . 332
Compare
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
IAP Status codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
JTAG Flash programming interface . . . . . . 333
Chapter 22: LPC21xx/22xx On-chip serial boot loader for LPC2210/20/90
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
22.7
22.8
22.9
22.10
22.11
22.12
22.13
22.14
22.15
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory map after reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP command format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP response format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP data format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISP command abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupts during ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupts during IAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM used by ISP command handler . . . . . .
RAM used by IAP command handler . . . . . .
RAM used by RealMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot process flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UM10114
User manual
334
334
335
336
336
336
336
337
337
337
337
337
337
337
338
22.16 ISP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
22.16.1 Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
22.16.2 Set Baud Rate . . . . 339
22.16.3 Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
22.16.4 Write to RAM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
22.16.5 Read Memory 341
22.16.6 Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
22.16.7 Read Part ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
22.16.8 Read Boot code version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
22.16.9 Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
22.16.10 ISP Return Codes Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
22.17 IAP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
22.17.1 Read Part ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
22.17.2 Read Boot code version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
22.17.3 Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
22.17.4 IAP Status Codes Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers.
Rev. 4 — 2 May 2012
© NXP B.V. 2012. All rights reserved.
384 of 385
UM10114
NXP Semiconductors
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
22.18
JTAG external memory programming
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Chapter 23: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded ICE controller
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
348
348
348
348
23.5
23.6
23.7
23.8
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset state of multiplexed pins . . . . . . . . . .
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
349
350
350
350
Chapter 24: LPC21xx/22xx Embedded Trace Module (ETM)
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.4.1
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
352
352
352
352
352
24.5
24.6
24.7
24.8
Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset state of multiplexed pins . . . . . . . . . .
Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
353
354
354
355
356
356
356
356
357
357
357
358
359
359
359
25.5.3
Undef mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.4
SVC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.5
Prefetch Abort mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.6
Data Abort mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.7
User/System mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.8
FIQ mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.9
Handling exceptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.10 RealMonitor exception handling. . . . . . . . . .
25.5.11 RMTarget initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.12 Code Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.6
RealMonitor Build Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
359
360
360
360
360
360
360
361
361
364
367
368
368
368
368
26.3
26.4
26.5
Chapter 25: LPC21xx/22xx RealMonitor
25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4
25.4.1
25.4.2
25.4.3
25.4.4
25.5
25.5.1
25.5.2
How to read this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RealMonitor Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMHost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMTarget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How RealMonitor works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How To Enable RealMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IRQ mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 26: Supplementary information
26.1
26.2
26.2.1
26.2.2
26.2.3
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legal information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
© NXP B.V. 2012.
All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 2 May 2012
Document identifier: UM10114
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Author : NXP Semiconductors Create Date : 2012:05:02 06:46:40Z Modify Date : 2012:05:24 15:40:32+02:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 9.0 Metadata Date : 2012:05:24 15:40:32+02:00 Format : application/pdf Title : UM10114 LPC21xx and LPC22xx User manual Creator : NXP Semiconductors Subject : Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.6 (Windows) Keywords : .. Document ID : uuid:bfd18ead-7211-42c3-b0f7-fa6f6c373739 Instance ID : uuid:0fecebe6-2824-459c-a13f-a4d1f032b5a6 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 385EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools